Technical PDF

9600LSY/LHR REL.1.0/2.
0 TECHNICAL HDBK
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
HANDBOOK GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
PRELIMINARY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
QUICK GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
SAFETY–EMC–ESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
1 DOCUMENT GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
1.2 Handbook applicability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
1.3 Purpose of the handbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
1.4 Handbook Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
1.5 Handbook history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
1.5.1 List of the editions and modified parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
1.5.2 Notes on Ed.01A–DRAFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
1.5.3 Notes on Ed.01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
1.5.4 Notes on Ed.02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
1.5.5 Notes on Ed.03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
1.6 List Of Symbols And Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
2.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
2.2 Introduction to the 9600LSY Radio System Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
2.2.1 Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
2.2.2 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
2.2.3 9600LSY basic configurations and Network Element types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
2.2.4 Main features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
2.2.5 Network applications of the 9600LSY equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
2.3 Introduction to system configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
2.3.1 Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
2.3.2 Station types and configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
03 020927 S402092301 G.CONSONNI ITAVE E.CORRADINI ITAVE

G.MAISTO
02 020418 S402040402 G.CONSONNI ITACO E.CORRADINI ITACO
01 011115 validated G.CONSONNI ITACO E.CORRADINI ITACO

F.BUTORI, G.MAISTO
ED DATE CHANGE NOTE APPRAISAL AUTHORITY ORIGINATOR
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
9600LSY REL.1.0/2.0
LHR
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 1 / 514
514
2.3.3 Channel configurations and protection schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
2.4 Hardware components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
2.4.1 Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
2.4.2 OPTINEX Rack and Top Rack Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
2.4.3 Transceiver subrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

2.4.4 Baseband subrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

2.4.5 ADM 1650SM–C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
2.4.6 FAN Subrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
2.4.7 System wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
2.4.8 Installation materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
2.5 Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
2.5.1 Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
2.5.2 Station configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
2.5.3 Radio channel configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
2.5.4 System configuration for network solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
2.5.5 Branching configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
2.6 Radio Transmission features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
2.6.1 Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
2.6.2 Frequency reuse technique (CCDP) and XPIC Cross Polarization Canceller . . . . . . . . 82
2.6.3 Transmitted power control: static and ATPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
2.6.4 Loopbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
2.7 Signal Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
2.7.1 Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
2.7.2 STM–0 & STM–1 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
2.7.3 SDH mapping adopted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
2.7.4 SDH interface usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
2.7.5 SOH bytes and service channel access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
2.8 Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
2.8.1 Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
2.8.2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
2.8.3 Synchronization in Regenerator station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
2.8.4 Synchronization in WMSN station by means of 1650SM–C ADM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
2.9 Equipment Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
2.9.1 Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
2.9.2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
2.9.3 The NE architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
2.9.4 The F interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
2.9.5 The Qecc/QB3 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
2.9.6 ECT and RECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
3 PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

3.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
3.2 Part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
3.3 Rack and shelves summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
3.4 Top Rack Unit (TRU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
3.5 Board provisioning and expansion guideline in BB & TR shelves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
3.5.1 General equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
3.5.2 Channel provisioning/expansion guideline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
3.6 Base Band shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
3.6.1 Base Band shelf unit layout and equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
3.6.2 SYSTEM CONTROLLER and FLASH CARD unit operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3.6.3 SERVICE and ADDITIONAL VOICE unit operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

3.6.4 RRA–CHANNEL unit operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
3.6.5 RRA–STANDBY unit operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 2 / 514
514
3.6.6 MODEM unit operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
3.6.7 PSU and PSF units operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
3.6.8 Additional Housekeeping unit operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
3.6.9 Kit Loudspeaker operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
3.7 Transceiver shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

3.7.1 Transceiver shelf unit layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

3.7.2 Equipping rules of Transceiver units or substitutive Dummy Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
3.7.3 Composition of transceiver units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
3.7.4 TRANSCEIVER unit operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
3.8 Branching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
3.8.1 Branching drawings and Branching–Transceivers connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
3.8.2 Branching Front Plate Kit (Rx branching area) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
3.9 FANS shelf and FANS assembled units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
3.9.1 FANS shelf equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
3.9.2 FANS assembled unit equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
3.9.3 FANS assembled unit operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
4 SYSTEM CABLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

4.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
4.2 Shelves’ connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
4.2.1 T.R.U. connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
4.2.2 Base Band shelf access panel: SUB–D connectors layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
4.2.3 Base Band shelf access panel: 2Mb/s WST connector layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
4.2.4 Transceiver shelf connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
4.3 Cable kits and cable types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
4.4 Power supply distribution connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
4.5 Signal connections between shelves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
4.6 Modem–Transceiver–Branching connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
4.7 External interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
4.7.1 Power Line Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
4.7.2 SDH interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
4.7.3 Input / Output Unprotected WST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
4.7.4 Input / Output Protected WST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
4.7.5 Auxiliary Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
4.7.6 Management interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
4.7.7 Station Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
4.7.8 Summarizing / Housekeeping alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
5 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

5.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
5.2 Equipment Control Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
5.2.1 Control Subsystem Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
5.2.2 Control Subsystem Hardware Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
5.2.3 Control Subsystem Software Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
5.2.4 Signal Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
5.2.5 Remote Inventory subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
5.2.6 System Controller unit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
5.2.7 Flash Card description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
5.2.8 Additional Housekeeping unit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
5.3 Power supply subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
5.4 Baseband subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
5.4.1 Interconnection general block diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

5.4.2 RRA–CHANNEL “STM1+1WST” and “STM0+0WST” description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
5.4.3 RRA–STANDBY “STM1+1WST” and “STM0+0WST” description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 3 / 514
514
5.4.4 STM–1 optical module description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
5.4.5 128QAM MODEM “STM1– 1WST” and “STM0– 0WST” description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
5.4.6 SERVICE and ADDITIONAL VOICE unit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
5.5 Transceiver subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
5.5.1 Interconnection general block diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

5.5.2 DC/DC converter module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

5.5.3 Transmit and Service module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
5.5.4 Receive & IF Rx module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
5.5.5 Local Oscillator module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
5.6 Fans subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
6 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

6.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
6.2 System Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
6.2.1 General characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
6.2.2 Power supply characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
6.2.3 Mechanical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
6.3 Transceiver characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
6.4 Regenerator and Modem characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
6.4.1 Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
6.4.2 XPIC & Combiner (XPIC STM–1 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
6.4.3 Regenerator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
6.4.4 Power consumption (Regenerator only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
6.5 Branching interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
6.6 Protections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
6.7 Environmental characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
6.7.1 General characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
6.7.2 Mechanically active substances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
6.7.3 ETS 300019 Class 3.2: partly Temperature controlled locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
6.7.4 ETS 300019 Class 3.1: Temperature–controlled locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
6.7.5 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
6.7.6 Transportation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
6.8 Optical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
6.8.1 Related Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
6.8.2 Hazard Level classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
6.8.3 Incorporated laser sources characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
6.8.4 Labelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
6.8.5 Aperture and fiber connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
6.8.6 Engineering design features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
6.8.7 Safety instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
7 MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
7.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
7.2 Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
7.2.1 EMC norms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
7.2.2 Safety rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
7.2.3 Maintenance Personnel skill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
7.3 Instruments and accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
7.3.1 Software tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
7.3.2 System and Maintenance Tool Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

7.4 Alarm Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
7.4.1 Centralized Equipment Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 4 / 514
514
7.4.2 Station Alarms (TRU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
7.4.3 Unit alarms managed by System Controller (SYSCO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
7.4.4 Alarm visual indications on units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
7.4.5 Summarizing / Housekeeping Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
7.5 Set of spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370

7.5.1 Suggested Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370

7.5.2 General rules on spare parts management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
7.5.3 Spare Flash Card management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
7.6 Routine Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
7.6.1 Routine Maintenance every year . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
7.6.2 Routine Maintenance for Fans Assembled Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
7.7 Corrective Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
7.7.1 General flow–chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
7.7.2 Alarm acknowledgment and attending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
7.7.3 Trouble–Shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
7.7.4 Unit replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
7.8 Faulty unit repair and Repair Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
7.8.1 Faulty unit sending back to repair center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
7.8.2 Repair Form filling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
FREQUENCY PLANS & PART NUMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411

8 INTRODUCTION TO SECTION ’FREQUENCY PLANS & PART NUMBERS’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
9 9640LSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
9.1 9640LSY part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
9.2 9640LSY frequency plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
10 9647LSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
10.1 9647LSY part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
10.2 9647LSY frequency plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
11 9662LSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
11.1 9662LSY part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
11.2 9662LSY frequency plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
12 9667LSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
12.1 9667LSY part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
13 9674LSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
13.1 9674LSY part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
14 9681LSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
14.1 9681LSY part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
15 9610LSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
15.1 9610LSY part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
16 9611LSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
16.1 9611LSY part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
16.2 9611LSY frequency plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 5 / 514
514
17 9613LSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
17.1 9613LSY part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
APPENDICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
18 DOCUMENTATION GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465

18.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
18.2 Product–release–version handbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
18.2.1 9600LSY specific equipment handbooks and CD–ROMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
18.2.2 Related equipment handbooks and CD–ROMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
18.3 General on Alcatel Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
18.3.1 Customer–Independent Standard Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
18.3.2 Product levels and associated Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
18.3.3 Typical contents of Technical & Craft Terminal Operator’s Handbooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
18.3.4 Documentation on paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
18.3.5 Documentation on CD–ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
18.3.6 Handbook and CD–ROM supply to Customers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
19 SAFETY–EMC–ESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483

19.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
19.2 Compliance with European Norms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
19.3 Safety Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
19.3.1 General Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
19.3.2 Labels Indicating Danger, Forbiddance, Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
19.3.3 Dangerous Electrical Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
19.3.4 Harmful Optical Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
19.3.5 Risks of Explosions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
19.3.6 Moving Mechanical Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
19.3.7 Heat–radiating Mechanical Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
19.3.8 Microwave radiations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
19.3.9 Specific safety rules in this handbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
19.4 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC norms) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
19.4.1 EMC General Norms – Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
19.4.2 EMC General Norms – Turn–on, Tests & Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
19.4.3 EMC General Norms – Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
19.5 Equipment protection against electrostatic discharges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
19.6 Suggestions, notes and cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
19.7 Labels affixed to the Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
19.7.1 Label specific for 9600LSY Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
19.7.2 General use labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION & ANNEXES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505

20 HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION & ANNEXES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
20.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
20.2 Hardware setting documents explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
20.3 List of enclosed documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
20.3.1 Documentation for hardware settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
20.3.2 Other documents (Annexes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 6 / 514
514
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES
FIGURES
Fig. 1. Backbone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Fig. 2. Ring clousure and radio spurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Fig. 3. Ring clousure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Fig. 4. Regenerator and WMSN station rack configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Fig. 5. Transceiver subrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Fig. 6. Single channel transceiver block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Fig. 7. Baseband subrack equipped for 7+1/8+0 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Fig. 8. Single channel regenerator block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Fig. 9. Baseband functional protection scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Fig. 10. Baseband board positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Fig. 11. WMSN terminal rack equipped with 1650SM–C ADM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Fig. 12. 1650SM–C add– drop multiplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Fig. 13. MST– single channel functional block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Fig. 14. Fan Subrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Fig. 15. 9600LSY 7+1/8+0 regenerator configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Fig. 16. 9600LSY 7+1/8+0 WMSN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Fig. 17. 9600LSY 7+1 Regenerator configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Fig. 18. 9600LSY – WMSN–OS 7x STM–1 configuration with radio protection for 7+1 STM–1
transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Fig. 19. 9600LSY WMSN Two Sides configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Fig. 20. Channel arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Fig. 21. 3+1 terminal basic station layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Fig. 22. Terminal station layout: extension starting from A) basic layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Fig. 23. Terminal station layout: extension starting from B) basic layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Fig. 24. Terminal station layout: extension starting from C) basic layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Fig. 25. Terminal station layout: extension starting from D) basic layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Fig. 26. Terminal station layout: extension starting from E) basic layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Fig. 27. 4+0/4+1 EAST/WEST terminal basic station layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Fig. 28. Schematic diagram of transceiver to branching connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Fig. 29. 1 polar per rack branching version for 8 RF channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Fig. 30. Branching version for 8 RF channels, arranged in 2 polar per rack configuration . . . . . . . . 80
Fig. 31. Branching version for 3+1 configuration with Space Diversity, arranged in 2 polar per rack
version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Fig. 32. XPIC operating principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Fig. 33. Frequency reuse system architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Fig. 34. 7+1 reused terminal with single protection (ch. 1H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Fig. 35. 2 x (7+1) reused terminal with double protection (on ch. 1H and 1V) in 1PPR solution . . 86
Fig. 36. Expansion from 7+1 single protection to 2 x (7+1) reused terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Fig. 37. Main / slave LO mutual protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Fig. 38. Branching interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Fig. 39. ATPC Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Fig. 40. Loopback A: RRA line loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Fig. 41. Loopback B: RRA internal loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Fig. 42. Loopback C: RFCOH Internal loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Fig. 43. EC position with respect to loopback points and consequent unavailability by RECT
(CH–x/y) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Fig. 44. Allowed and not allowed loopbacks by RECT (CH–x/y) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 45. General Multiplexing Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Fig. 46. General European Multiplexing Structure with addition of 45 Mbit/s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Fig. 47. 1650SM–C and unit SERGI front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 7 / 514
514
Fig. 48. G.703 64 Kbit/s co–directional interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Fig. 49. RS422 A V11/V24 64 Kbit/s contra–directional interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Fig. 50. RS232C V24/V28 asynchronous interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Fig. 51. Synchronization Reference Source Priority Algorithm Flow Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Fig. 52. SSM Algorithm Flow Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Fig. 53. DCC management: Regenerator case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Fig. 54. DCC management: WMSN case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Fig. 55. Rack and shelves layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Fig. 56. Top Rack Unit front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Fig. 57. Layout of max 8 channels in single polarization configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Fig. 58. Layout of max 8 channels in double polarization configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Fig. 59. Single polarization per rack expansion procedure in the transceiver subrack . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Fig. 60. Two polarization per rack expansion procedure in the transceiver subrack with the H
channels on the left side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Fig. 61. 2 polarization per rack expansion procedure in the transceiver subrack with V channel on
the left side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Fig. 62. Expansion procedure with reused channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Fig. 63. Unequipped Base Band shelf layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Fig. 64. Base Band shelf board equipment (slot numbering and board type and numbering) . . . . . 135
Fig. 65. System Controller assembly, front connector numbering and and internal view . . . . . . . . . 140
Fig. 66. FLASH CARD profile and insertion direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Fig. 67. System Controller front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Fig. 68. Service unit assembly, front connector numbering and and internal view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Fig. 69. Service unit front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Fig. 70. RRA–CHANNEL assembly view and front connector numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Fig. 71. RRA–CHANNEL unit front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Fig. 72. RRA–STAND–BY unit front view (particular) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Fig. 73. Modem unit assembly view and front connector numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Fig. 74. Modem unit assembly internal view and CANC–COMB equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Fig. 75. Modem unit front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Fig. 76. PSU and PSF units front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Fig. 77. Additional Housekeeping unit assembly view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Fig. 78. Kit Loudspeaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Fig. 79. Transceiver shelf equipment (slot numbering and board types and numbering) . . . . . . . . . 156
Fig. 80. Transceiver assembly physical views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Fig. 81. Transceiver internal view: standard components and Main Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Fig. 82. Transceiver internal view: without “Diversity Receiver” and with “TR.Frequency Reuse
Kit” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Fig. 83. Transceiver internal view: with “Diversity Receiver” and without “TR.Frequency Reuse
Kit” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Fig. 84. Transceiver internal view: with “Diversity Receiver” and with “TR.Frequency Reuse Kit” . 161
Fig. 85. Position of Hardware setting dip switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Fig. 86. Transceiver internal connection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Fig. 87. Transceiver front connector numbering (TR without Rx diversity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Fig. 88. Transceiver front connector numbering (TR with Rx diversity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Fig. 89. Transceiver front view – meaning of access points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Fig. 90. Branching Front Plate Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Fig. 91. Fan shelf (slot numbering and board types) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Fig. 92. FANS SHELF, FANS ASSEMBLED and substitutive COVER assembly views . . . . . . . . . . 171
Fig. 93. Front view of FANS SHELF equipped with both FANS ASSEMBLED units . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 94. Top Rack Unit connector numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Fig. 95. Base Band shelf access panel: SUB–D connectors layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Fig. 96. Base Band shelf access panel: 2Mb/s WST front connector layout and numbering . . . . . . 180
Fig. 97. Transceiver shelf connector numbering at rear–top side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 8 / 514
514
Fig. 98. System cabling: types of used cables (A, B, C, D, E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Fig. 99. System cabling: types of used cables (F, G, H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Fig. 100. System cabling: types of used cables (K, N, P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Fig. 101. System cabling: types of used cables (KK, NN, PP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Fig. 102. System cabling: types of used cables (Q, R) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Fig. 103. System cabling: types of used cables (S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Fig. 104. System cabling: types of used cables (T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Fig. 105. Modem–Transceiver–Branching connections: without Reuse and without Diversity . . . . 195
Fig. 106. Modem–Transceiver–Branching connections: without Reuse and with Diversity . . . . . . . 197
Fig. 107. Modem–Transceiver–Branching connections: with Reuse and without Diversity . . . . . . . 199
Fig. 108. Modem–Transceiver–Branching connections: with Reuse and with Diversity . . . . . . . . . . 201
Fig. 109. LHR system (N+1 / N+0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Fig. 110. WMSN system (N+1 / N+0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Fig. 111. Functional decomposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Fig. 112. Supervision process decomposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Fig. 113. Supervision process within atomic functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Fig. 114. RSPI functional decomposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Fig. 115. Regenerator section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Fig. 116. Radio sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Fig. 117. PM inside atomic functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Fig. 118. Equipment management function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Fig. 119. Fault management inside management function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Fig. 120. Performance events generation process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Fig. 121. PM inside management functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Fig. 122. DCC routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Fig. 123. 1+1 Protection Switch Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Fig. 124. M:N Protection Switch Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Fig. 125. LHR control subsystem architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Fig. 126. LHR communication interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Fig. 127. WMSN control subsystem architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Fig. 128. VMM module decomposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Fig. 129. SOH management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Fig. 130. Service channels functional block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Fig. 131. DCCR management (ADM towards RADIO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Fig. 132. DCCR management (RADIO towards ADM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Fig. 133. DCCR management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Fig. 134. ATPC management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Fig. 135. MC management on RX terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Fig. 136. VC–4 generation from 3 TUG–3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Fig. 137. Sub STM–1 terminal functional block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Fig. 138. TIM algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Fig. 139. The 16_BYTE machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Fig. 140. The 1_BYTE machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Fig. 141. Remote inventory subsystem architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Fig. 142. System Controller block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Fig. 143. DCCR and summarizing/housekeeping alarms management block diagram . . . . . . . . . . 279
Fig. 144. Additional Housekeeping block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Fig. 145. Power Supply distribution from Top Rack Unit and Transceiver shelf Power Supply
distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Fig. 146. Power Supply distribution in Baseband shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 147. Block diagram of “Up to 7+1 Terminal configuration Tx side” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Fig. 148. Block diagram of “Up to 7+1 Terminal configuration Rx side” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Fig. 149. RRA–CHANNEL block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Fig. 150. RRA STANDBY block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 9 / 514
514
Fig. 151. STM–1 optical module – block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Fig. 152. MODEM block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Fig. 153. SERVICE block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Fig. 154. Switch logic N+1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Fig. 155. Input/output command signals of the Switch logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Fig. 156. Functional block diagram of Transceiver without Rx Diversity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

Fig. 157. Functional block diagram of Transceiver with Rx Diversity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Fig. 158. Signals exchanged among Transceiver internal modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Fig. 159. Transmit and Service module block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Fig. 160. Block diagram of up–conversion and amplification unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Fig. 161. Block diagram of Receive & IF Rx module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Fig. 162. Block diagram of Local Oscillator module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Fig. 163. Fan subsystem block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Fig. 164. FANS ASSEMBLED unit block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Fig. 165. ETSI Reference points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Fig. 166. Climatogram for Class 3.2 : Partly temperature controlled locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Fig. 167. Climatogram for Class 3.1: Temperature–controlled locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Fig. 168. Climatogram for Class 1.2: not temperature controlled storage location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Fig. 169. 9600 LSY BER curves (STM–1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Fig. 170. 9600 LSY BER curves (STM–0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Fig. 171. STM–1 128 QAM typical RF spectrum (measured at point C’) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Fig. 172. STM–1/STM–0 128 QAM IF RX Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Fig. 173. Post demodulation filter STM–1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Fig. 174. Post demodulation filter STM–0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Fig. 175. STM–1 /STM–0 BER 1*10–3 and 1*10–6 threshold degradation for co–channel
interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Fig. 176. STM–1 BER 1*10–3 and1*10–6 threshold degradation for adjacent channel 40 MHz
digital interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Fig. 177. STM–1 BER 1*10–3 and 1*10–6 threshold degradation for adjacent channel 30 MHz
Fig. 178. STM–0 BER 1*10–3 and 1*10–6 threshold degradation for adjacent channel 14 MHz
Fig. 179. Typical signature for STM–1 capacity @ BER=1 X 10 E–4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Fig. 180. Typical signature for STM–1 capacity @ BER=1 X 10 E–6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Fig. 181. Typical signature for STM–0 capacity @ BER=1x10e–4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Fig. 182. Typical signature for STM–0 capacity @ BER=1x10e–6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Fig. 183. Special cord for PRx measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Fig. 184. Special extractors and holder bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Fig. 185. System Controller front view (particular) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Fig. 186. Station Alarms on TRU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Fig. 187. Corrective Maintenance general flow–chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Fig. 188. Trouble–Shooting starting with visual indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Fig. 189. PSU to be switched off/on for MODEM replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Fig. 190. General flow chart of Transceiver repair procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Fig. 191. Spare Local Oscillator subassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Fig. 192. Spare Receiver subassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Fig. 193. Spare Frequency Reuse kit module subassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Fig. 194. Spare “Transceiver + Main Receiver” subassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Fig. 195. Spare Frequency Reuse kit 3–connector flat cable subassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Fig. 196. Transceiver internal connectors for repair 1/6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 10 / 514
514
Fig. 202. Repair form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Fig. 203. 9640 LSY Channel plan A: ITU–R Recommendation F.635. fig.3/Annex 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Fig. 204. 9640 LSY Channel plan B: – ITU–R F.635 recommends 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Fig. 205. 9640 LSY Channel plan C: ITU–R Recommendation F.382 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Fig. 206. 9640 LSY Channel plan D: ITU–R F. 382 (Extended ) Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Fig. 207. 9640 LSY Channel plan E: DTI channel plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Fig. 208. 9640 LSY Channel plan F: ITU–R Recommendation F.635, Annex 1, fig.6 . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Fig. 209. 9640 LSY Channel plan G: O.I.R.T. (Russia) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Fig. 210. 9647 LSY Channel plan A: ITU–R Recommendation F.1099, Annex 1, fig. 2 . . . . . . . . . 426
Fig. 211. 9647 LSY Channel plan B: Spain Defence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Fig. 212. 9662 LSY Channel plan A: ITU–R F 383 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Fig. 213. 9662 LSY Channel plan B: O.I.R.T. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Fig. 214. 9667 LSY Channel plan A: ITU–R F.384, CEPT T/R 14–02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Fig. 215. 9674 LSY Channel plan A: ITU–R F.385 Annex 3 L&H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Fig. 216. 9674 LSY Channel plan B: ITU–R F.385 Annex 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Fig. 217. 9674 LSY Channel plan C: ITU–R F.385 Annex 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Fig. 218. 9674 LSY Channel plan D: ITU–R F.385 Rec. 1L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Fig. 219. 9674 LSY Channel plan E: ITU–R F.385 Rec. 1M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Fig. 220. 9674 LSY Channel plan F: ITU–R F.385 Rec. 1H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Fig. 221. 9681 LSY Channel plan A: ITU–R F.386 ANNEX 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Fig. 222. 9681 LSY Channel plan B: ITU–R F.386 ANNEX 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Fig. 223. 9681 LSY Channel plan C: ITU–R F.386 ANNEX 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Fig. 224. 9610 LSY Channel plan A: MEDIASET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Fig. 225. 9611 LSY Channel plan A: ITU–R F.387 rec. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Fig. 226. 9611 LSY Channel plan B: ITU–R F.387 ANNEX 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Fig. 227. 9613 LSY Channel plan A: ITU–R F.497 Rec.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Fig. 228. Example of SWP Release and Version numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Fig. 229. Example of Product levels and associated Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Fig. 230. Antistatic protection device kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Fig. 231. LSY equipment identification label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
Fig. 232. Large–subrack labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
Fig. 233. Small–subrack labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
Fig. 234. Labels on units with standard cover plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Fig. 235. Modules label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
Fig. 236. Internal label for Printed Board Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Fig. 237. Back panels internal label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Fig. 238. Label specifying item not on catalogue (P/N. and serial number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Fig. 239. Label specifying item on catalogue (P/N. and serial number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
TABLES
Tab. 1. Quick guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Tab. 2. Handbook history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Tab. 3. List Of Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Tab. 4. List Of Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Tab. 5. 9600LSY radio family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Tab. 6. 9600LSY user interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Tab. 7. LHR Terminal Regenerator System Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Tab. 8. Couples of Radio Channels that can be used for protected service channels and WST . . 50
Tab. 9. OH bytes suitable for handling on MST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Tab. 10. OH bytes suitable for handling on RST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Tab. 11. RFCOH byte structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Tab. 12. Reg. AUX/EOW user interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Tab. 13. 9600LSY Part list – Common parts (frequency independent) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 11 / 514
514
Tab. 14. Rack and shelves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Tab. 15. TRU breaker utilization in 9600 LSY/LHR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Tab. 16. System Controller card equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Tab. 17. Additional Housekeeping unit equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Tab. 18. Service card equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Tab. 19. RRA–CHANNEL and RRA–STANDBY cards equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Tab. 20. Modem cards equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Tab. 21. PSU cards equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Tab. 22. Dummy plates for RRA–Modem and PSU equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Tab. 23. PSF cards equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Tab. 24. Kit Loudspeaker equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Tab. 25. ESC Dip–Switch Bank I4 setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Tab. 26. ESC Dip–Switch Bank I1 setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Tab. 27. Transceiver units and substitutive dummy plates equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Tab. 28. Branching Front Plate Kit equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Tab. 29. Fans unit & cover equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Tab. 30. Equipping rules for FANS assembled unit in Baseband–shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Tab. 31. Base Band shelf access panel: SUB–D connectors usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Tab. 32. Cable kits and cable types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Tab. 33. Power supply distribution: Cables belonging to CABLE KIT COMMON PARTS . . . . . . . . . 190
Tab. 34. Power supply distribution: Cables belonging to FANS UNIT CABLE KIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Tab. 35. Power supply distribution: Cables belonging to FANS UNIT EXTENSION CABLE KIT . . 190
Tab. 36. Power supply distribution: Cables belonging to CABLE KIT FOR 1 EXTEN. CHANNEL
FOR WMSN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Tab. 37. Signal connections: Cables belonging to CABLE KIT COMMON PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Tab. 38. Signal connections: Cables belonging to FANS UNIT CABLE KIT and FANS UNIT
EXTENSION CABLE KIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Tab. 39. Signal connections: Cables belonging to CABLE KIT FOR 1 EXTEN. CHANNEL FOR
WMSN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Tab. 40. Signal connections: Cables belonging to ADDITIONAL HOUSEKEEPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Tab. 41. Summary of auxiliary channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Tab. 42. Aux channel G703 and RS232 – BB shelf’s M182 connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Tab. 43. Out party line OW, TPH and loudspeaker – BB shelf’s M190 connector pinout . . . . . . . . . 205
Tab. 44. Aux channel V11 – BB shelf’s M191 connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Tab. 45. RJ45 Connector for 10baseT interface on System Controller unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Tab. 46. RS–232 for F interface connection table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Tab. 47. LHR Station Alarms connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Tab. 48. Out Remote alarms (GA1–GA20) – BB shelf’s M193 connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Tab. 49. Out Remote alarms (GA21–GA40) – BB shelf’s M183 connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Tab. 50. Out Housekeeping and Remote alarms (GA41–GA48) – BB shelf’s M192 connector
pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Tab. 51. Input Housekeeping – BB shelf’s M185 connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Tab. 52. Input Housekeeping – Additional Housekeeping unit’s M1 connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Tab. 53. Fault management process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Tab. 54. Entities monitored by the performance monitoring primitives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Tab. 55. Switching Initiation Criteria Priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Tab. 56. DCC Mapping & Interleaving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Tab. 57. Channels protectable for RFCOH bytes and 2 x 2Mbit/s WST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Tab. 58. Hazard level classification of different optical interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Tab. 59. LSY System Tool Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Tab. 60. LSY Maintenance Tool Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

Tab. 61. Relationship between Alarm severity terminology displayed on C.T./O.S. and alarm
severity terminology used for the System Controller unit remote alarm connector pins. . . . . . . . . 361
Tab. 62. Relationship among remote alarms, housekeeping outputs and alarm primitives . . . . . . . 364
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 12 / 514
514
Tab. 63. Relationship between Remote and Station Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Tab. 64. Spare parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Tab. 65. Normal condition (no alarms) of LEDs on equipment’s units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Tab. 66. Transceiver internal cabling diagram according to configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Tab. 67. Implemented radio–frequency channel arrangements and list of Chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Tab. 68. 9640LSY Transceiver Part List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415

Tab. 77. Handbooks usage according to System configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Tab. 78. Technical Handbooks related to the specific configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Tab. 79. Handbooks related to the specific product SWP management and local product control . 468
Tab. 80. Installation and Line–Up Handbooks related to the specific configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Tab. 81. Handbooks common to all Alcatel Radio Transmission products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Tab. 82. Handbooks common to Alcatel Network Elements using 1320CT platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Tab. 83. Documentation on CD–ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Tab. 84. Handbooks related to the product’s hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Tab. 85. Documentation on CD–ROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Tab. 86. IEC 950 –Table 16: Overtemperature limits, Part 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Tab. 87. Label references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Tab. 88. Example of correspondence between CS and ’suffix + ICS’ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Tab. 89. Hardware setting documentation cross references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
Tab. 90. List of enclosed hardware setting documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Tab. 91. List of enclosed Annexes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 13 / 514
514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
14 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
QUICK GUIDE
955.203.292 Q
Chapter 1 – Document Guide
PRELIMINARY INFORMATION
SECTION CONTENT
SAFETY–EMC–ESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
21
20
17
16
PAGE
HANDBOOK GUIDE
15 / 514
PRELIMINARY INFORMATION
a) Warranty

Any warranty must be referred exclusively to the terms of the contact of sale of the equipment this

handbook refers to.
ALCATEL makes no warranty of any kind with regards to this manual, and specifically disclaims the
implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. ALCATEL will not be liable
for errors contained herein or for damages, whether direct, indirect, consequential, incidental, or
special, in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this material.
b) Information
The product specification and/or performance levels contained in this document are for information
purposes only and are subject to change without notice. They do not represent any obligation on the
part of ALCATEL.
c) Copyright Notification
The technical information of this manual is the property of ALCATEL and must not be copied,
reproduced or disclosed to a third party without written consent.
d) Safety recommendations
The safety recommendations here below must be considered to avoid injuries on persons and/or
damage to the equipment:
1) Service Personnel
Installation and service must be carried out by authorized people having appropriate technical
training and experience necessary to be aware of hazardous operations during installation and
service and of measures to avoid any danger to them, to any other people and to the equipment.
2) Access to the Equipment

Access to the Equipment in use must be restricted to Service Personnel only.
3) Safety norms
Recommended safety norms are indicated in this manual as described in para.19.3 on pages
484 on.
Local safety regulations must be used if mandatory. Safety instructions in this handbook should
be used in addition to the local safety regulations. In the case of conflict between safety
instructions stated in this manual and those indicated in local regulations, mandatory local
norms will prevail. Should not local regulations be mandatory, then safety norms in this manual
will prevail.
e) Service Personnel skill

Service Personnel must have been an adequate technical training on telecommunications and in
particular on the equipment this handbook refers to.
Without an adequate training, reading this handbook and the associated handbooks indicated in
para.18.2 on page 466 is usually not enough to properly install, operate and maintain equipment.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 16 / 514
514
QUICK GUIDE
N.B. In the documentation on CD–ROM, this table represent hyperlinks to the referenced parts.
Tab. 1. Quick guide

If you need immediate operative information on how to:
GENERAL TOPICS
get information on system
read chapter 18 on page 465 of this handbook
documentation
have a very short description of the
read para.2.4 on pages 51 thru’ 62 of this handbook
system
in this handbook, for:
– BaseBand and Transceiver shelves as a whole, read

para.3.5 on page 129
logically configure a station (or – units in BaseBand shelf, read para.3.6.1 on page 135
change its configuration) and
– units in Transceiver shelf, read para.3.7.2 on page 156
logically provision equipment boards
– units in FANS shelf, read para.3.9.1 & 3.9.2 on page 169
– units in OPTINEX rack and ADM shelf, refer to

handbooks cited in para.18.2.2 on page 471
have details on system cabling read chapter 4 starting on page 175 of this handbook
– common parts (frequency independent), read para.3.2

on page 122
get item P/Ns (LHR)
– frequency dependent items, refer to the specific chapter
listed in Tab. 67. on page 414
Tab. 1. continues ..
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 17 / 514
514
.. continues Tab. 1.

GENERAL TOPICS FOR INSTALLATION, COMMISSIONING AND MAINTENANCE
get information on safety, EMC,
read chapter 19 on page 483 of this handbook
ESD norms and equipment labelling
– TRU: read para.3.4 on page 128
– SYSTEM CONTROLLER and FLASH CARD unit: read

para.3.6.2 on page 140
– SERVICE and ADDITIONAL VOICE unit: read

para.3.6.3 on page 144
– RRA–CHANNEL: read para.3.6.4 on page 147
– RRA–STANDBY: read para.3.6.5 on page 149

get operative information regarding
the units (connectors, leds, buttons, – MODEM: read para.3.6.6 on page 150
hardware setting)
– PSU and PSF: read para.3.6.7 on page 153
– Additional Housekeeping unit: read para.3.6.8 on page

154
– Transceiver units: read para.3.7.4 on page 158
– Branching: read para.3.8 on page 168
– FANS: read para.3.9.3 on page 171
– Kit Loudspeaker: read para.3.6.9 on page 155
carry out unit hardware setting read para.20.2 on page 507 of this handbook
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 18 / 514
514
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING
physically install and cable the get Installation Handbook (Ref.[E] on page 469) and
equipment hardware proceed as specified by it
for:
– SWP R.1.0, get relevant CT Operator’s Handbook

(Ref.[C] on page 468
install or update Craft Terminal’s
and/or equipment’s software – SWP R.2.0, get relevant CT Operator’s Handbook
(Ref.[D] on page 468
and read read its QUICK GUIDE (same topics)
get Line–up Guide (Ref.[F] on page 469) and proceed as

commission equipment
specified by it
MAINTENANCE
provision and manage spare parts read para.7.5 on page 370 of this handbook
carry out routine maintenance read para.7.6 on page 373 of this handbook
carry out corrective maintenance read para.7.7 on page 375 of this handbook
To find any other kind of information not listed in the above table, please start reading para.1.4 on page
23, and then search the information according to the handbook structure described.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 19 / 514
514
SAFETY–EMC–ESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING
a) Please refer to Chapter 19 on page 483 to obtain details regarding following information:

• Compliance with European norms

• Safety rules:
TOPIC WARNING LABEL ON EQUIPMENT

General rules
Dangerous Electrical Voltages
Harmful optical signals
Risk of explosion
Moving mechanical parts
Heat–radiating mechanical parts
Microwave radiations
• Equipment protection against electrostatic discharges:
TOPIC WARNING LABEL ON EQUIPMENT
Device sensitive to electrostatic discharges
• Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC norms)
• Other Labels affixed to the Equipment
b) Identical or similar information on Personal Computer, Work–Station etc., other than ALCATEL’s,
loaded with software applications described in this or other Handbooks, is supplied in the
Constructor’s technical documentation.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 20 / 514
514
1 DOCUMENT GUIDE
1.1 Introduction
This chapter contains all information regarding this handbook and is organized as follows:
– Handbook applicability herebelow
– Purpose of the handbook on page 22
– Handbook structure on page 23
– Handbook history on page 25
– List of symbols and abbreviations on page 29
1.2 Handbook applicability
This handbook applies to the following product-releases:
PRODUCT RELEASE ANV P/N FACTORY P/N
9640LSY 1.00.00 3DB 00581 AAAA 522.171.110

(3.6 – 4.2 GHz) 2.00.00 3DB 04272 AAAA 522.171.120
9647LSY 1.00.00 3DB 00584 AAAA 522.171.210

(4.4 – 5.0 GHz) 2.00.00 3DB 04274 AAAA 522.171.220
9662LSY 1.00.00 3DB 00587 AAAA 522.171.310

(5.9 – 6.4 GHz) 2.00.00 3DB 04276 AAAA 522.171.320
9667LSY 1.00.00 3DB 00590 AAAA 522.171.410

(6.4 – 7.1 GHz) 2.00.00 3DB 04278 AAAA 522.171.420
9674LSY 1.00.00 3DB 00593 AAAA 522.171.510

(7.1 – 7.7 GHz) 2.00.00 3DB 04280 AAAA 522.171.520
9681LSY 1.00.00 3DB 00596 AAAA 522.171.610

(7.7 – 8.7 GHz) 2.00.00 3DB 04282 AAAA 522.171.620
9610LSY 1.00.00 –– ––
(10 – 10.7 GHz) 2.00.00 3DB 04288 AAAA 522.171.920
9611LSY 1.00.00 3DB 00599 AAAA 522.171.710

(10.7 – 11.7 GHz) 2.00.00 3DB 04284 AAAA 522.171.720
9613LSY 1.00.00 3DB 02270 AAAA 522.171.810

(12.75 – 13.25 GHz) 2.00.00 3DB 04286 AAAA 522.171.820
in the following configurations:
– LHR Regenerator
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
– related WMSN (LHR + 1650SM–C)
Please refer to para.18.2 on page 466 for further information.
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 21 / 514
514
1.3 Purpose of the handbook
This handbook belongs to the Customer Documentation set envisaged for the equipment specified in para.
1.2 on page 21.

Please refer to chapter 18 on page 465 to have the list and description of such Customer Documentation

set.
With reference to equipment configuration stated in para.1.2 on page 21, this handbook provides the
following pieces of information:
– system description on two levels: first level and detailed level, both from system, hardware and
software points of view
– system Technical Specifications
– system hardware structure: item Part Numbers and equipping rules (provisioning)
– unit operative hardware description: access point description (usage of led, pushbuttons, switches
and connectors for Customer use), connection rules, hardware setting options
– system cabling
– spare parts provisioning
– preventive maintenance procedures
– corrective maintenance and unit replacement procedures (N.B.)
N.B. In any case, the C.T. Operator’s Handbook must be always available to the Operator in
charge of the equipment troubleshooting and repair, as it contains the information
necessary to carry out troubleshooting through the Craft Terminal.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 22 / 514
514
1.4 Handbook Structure
This handbook is composed by a ’main handbook’ and ’enclosed documents’. Information is divided into
the following main sections and levels as detailed in the table of contents:
MAIN HANDBOOK
N.B. A summary description of the contents is given at the beginning of each chapter.
INFORMATIVE LEVEL OPERATIVE LEVEL
SECTION HANDBOOK GUIDE
– Quick Guide
It allows to access immediately the most
– Chapter 1 – Document Guide frequently needed operative pieces of
It contains all information regarding this information contained in this handbook, in its
handbook. enclosed documents and in other related
handbooks.
SECTION DESCRIPTIONS
It describes all the equipment general and detailed system features including its application in the
telecommunication network. Furthermore, it supplies the equipment description and specifications. The
description is organized in the following levels:
– Chapter 2 – System Description
It gives the first–level description of 9600LSY – Chapter 3 – Physical Configuration
equipment in both LHR Regenerator and It gives detailed operative information
WMSN (LHR+1650SM–C) configurations. regarding LHR Regenerator configuration
The information given should be enough to only:
understand the equipment composition and • the equipment’s items (P/Ns, equipping
operation and to read the operative level rules, labels for remote inventory)
chapters as well as the description second • their physical and logical position in the
level system
• the unit assembly/subassembly and
front panel drawings, with the usage
description of the access points
(connectors, visual indicators, buttons)
• hardware setting description
• summary and operative information on
characteristics of external interfaces
– Chapter 4 – System Cabling

It gives in detail information regarding the
– Chapter 5 – Functional Description system cabling of the LHR Regenerator as
It gives the second–level description of well as that for the connections between LHR
9600LSY equipment in the LHR Regenerator and 1650SM–C; moreover it gives the pinout
configuration. Reading this chapter is not description of connectors for Customer usage
necessary to carry out standard installation
commissioning and maintenance activities.
– Chapter 6 – Technical Specifications

It supplies in detail the technical
characteristics of the 9600LSY in LHR
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Regenerator configuration
table continues
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 23 / 514
514
table continues
.. continues MAIN HANDBOOK

SECTION MAINTENANCE
– Chapter 7 – Maintenance
It describes the routine and corrective
maintenance of 9600USY equipment in the
LHR Regenerator configuration.
SECTION FREQUENCY PLANS AND PART NUMBERS

It is the frequency–dependent part of the handbook. It includes the following chapters:
– Chapter 8 – Introduction to section ’Frequency plans & part numbers’

It gives general information regarding the use of the subsequent chapters.
– Each one of the subsequent chapters ’x’ is devoted to a specific 96xxLSY product and includes
two main paragraphs:
• x.1 – 96xxLSY part list: the Part Numbers and the Remote Inventory Labels of the
frequency–dependent items (Transceivers) are given;
• x.2 – 96xxLSY frequency plans: the various frequency plans envisaged are described.
SECTION APPENDICES
– Chapter 18 – Documentation Guide

It contains all information regarding the – Chapter 19 – Safety–EMC–ESD norms and
Customer Documentation set this handbook equipment labelling
belongs to. It describes the equipment labelling and the
norms mandatory or suggested that must be
considered to avoid injuries on persons
and/or damage to the equipment.
SECTION HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION & ANNEXES
– Chapter 20 – Hardware Setting

Documentation & Annexes
It lists the enclosed documents having P/N
different from that of this handbook (they can
be used also as annexes to other handbooks)
and describes how to use the Hardware
Setting Documents enclosed.
ENCLOSED DOCUMENTS
a) documents related to hardware setting
options of the units for which they are
envisaged
b) documents describing branching configurations (branching drawings and
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
branching–tranceivers connections)
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 24 / 514
514
1.5 Handbook history
1.5.1 List of the editions and modified parts

The following Tab. 2. indicates the handbook parts new and modified with respect to the previous edition.
Legend: n = new part m = modified part blank= part unchanged
The revision bars on the table’s rows indicate changes in the structure (e.g. new sections, or information
shifted within the handbook) with respect to the previous edition.
Tab. 2. Handbook history

HANDBOOK EDITION ⇒ 01 02 03 04 05
HANDBOOK GUIDE n
1. DOCUMENT GUIDE n m m
DESCRIPTIONS n
2. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
n
ÉÉÉ
2.1. Introduction n
2.2. Introduction to the 9600 LSY Radio System Family n m m
2.3. Introduction to system configurations n m m
2.4. Hardware components n m m
2.5. Configurations n m m
2.6. Radio Transmission features n m
2.7. Signal Transmission n m m
2.8. Synchronization n
2.9. Equipment Control n m
3. PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION n
3.1. Introduction n m m
3.2. Part list n m m
3.3. Rack and shelves summary n m
3.4. Top Rack Unit (TRU)
ÉÉÉ n m
3.5. Board provisioning and expansion guideline in BB & TR
shelves ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
n m
3.6. Base Band shelf n m m

3.7. Transceiver shelf n m m
3.8. Branching n
3.9. FANS shelf and FANS assembled units n m m
table continues
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 25 / 514
514
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
4. SYSTEM CABLING n

4.1. Introduction n m
4.2. Shelves’ connectors n
4.3. Cable kits and cable types n
4.4. Power supply distribution connections n
4.5. Signal connections between shelves n
4.6. Modem–Transceiver–Branching connections n m
4.7. External interfaces n m
5. FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION n
5.1. Introduction n m m
5.2. Equipment Control Subsystem n m m
5.3. Power supply subsystem n
5.4. Baseband subsystem n m
5.5. Transceiver subsystem n m
5.6. Fans subsystem n
6. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
ÉÉ
n
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
6.1. Introduction n
6.2. System Characteristics n m
6.3. Transceiver Characteristics n m
6.4. Regenerator and Modem Characteristics
6.5. Branching interfaces
ÉÉ
n
ÉÉ n
6.6. Protections n
6.7. Environmental characteristics n m m
6.8. Optical Safety n m
MAINTENANCE n
7. MAINTENANCE
ÉÉ
n
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
7.1. Introduction n
7.2. Warnings n m
7.3. Instruments and accessories n m
7.4. Alarm Description n m
7.5. Set of spare parts n m m
7.6. Routine Maintenance n m
7.7. Corrective Maintenance n m m
7.8. Faulty unit repair and Repair Form n m
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
table continues
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 26 / 514
514
FREQUENCY PLANS & PART NUMBERS n m
8. INTRODUCTION TO SECTION n m m
9. 9640 LSY n m
10. 9647 LSY n m
11. 9662 LSY n m
12. 9667 LSY n m
13. 9674 LSY n m
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
14. 9681 LSY n m
15. 9610 LSY
16. 9611 LSY
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
n
n
m
17. 9613 LSY
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
n m
ÉÉÉ
APPENDICES n
ÉÉÉ
18. DOCUMENTATION GUIDE n
18.1. Introduction
18.2. Product–release–version handbook ÉÉÉ n
n
m m
18.3. General on Alcatel Customer Documentation
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
n m
ÉÉÉ
19. SAFETY–EMC–ESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING n
ÉÉÉ
19.1. Introduction n
19.2. Compliance with European Norms n
19.3. Safety Rules n m m
19.4. Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC norms) n m
19.5. Equipment protection against electrostatic discharges n m
19.6. Suggestions, notes and cautions n
19.7. Labels affixed to the Equipment n m
HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION & ANNEXES n
20. HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION & ANNEXES n
20.1. Introduction n
20.2. Hardware setting documents explanation n
20.3. List of enclosed documents (N.B.) n m m
N.B. the list of the enclosed documents is not stated in this table. The enclosed documents are listed
in Tab. 90. on page 511 and Tab. 91. on page 513.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 27 / 514
514
1.5.2 Notes on Ed.01A–DRAFT
Ed.01A created on October 23, 2001 is the first NEITHER validated NOR officially released issue.

1.5.3 Notes on Ed.01

Ed.01 created on November 15, 2001 is the first validated and officially released issue.
Ed.02 created on April 18, 2002.

The following main changes have been done:
– the handbook structure has been modified: please read para.1.4 (Handbook Structure) on page 23;
– in Chapter 3 – Physical Configuration : Part List has been updated; descriptions regarding
equipment provisioning and unit operative information have been updated and improved
– in Chapter 6 – Technical Specifications : Branching Interface description has been added, and
Environmental characteristics description has been improved
– Chapter 7 – Maintenance has been improved with revised and fully new parts, in particular with
regard to information relevant to Spare Part Set, Preventive Maintenance and Corrective
Maintenance (troubleshooting and unit replacement procedures)
– the new Chapter 8 – Documentation Guide has been updated to list and describe new handbooks
– in the new Chapter 9 – Safety–EMC–ESD norms and equipment labelling : information regarding
equipment labelling has been updated
– in Chapter 19 – Hardware Setting Documentation & Annexes : the list of enclosed documents
has been updated
Ed.03 created on September 27, 2002.

The following main changes have been done:
– the handbook structure has been modified: please read para.1.4 (Handbook Structure) on page 23
– throughout the handbook:
• new items added: Frequency Reuse kit, Kit Loudspeaker (P/N and operative information)
• elimination of High Power Transceivers
• important changes and improvements regarding Transceivers:
– operative information in chapters 3 – Physical Configuration and 4 – System Cabling
– description in chapter 5 – Functional Description
– spare part list and fully new repair procedure in chapter 7 – Maintenance
– in chapter 3 – Physical Configuration circuit breaker values updated
– Chapter 6 – Technical Specifications updated
– in section Frequency Plans & Part Numbers: new chapter for 9610LSY, new Transceiver for
9681LSY
– in Chapter 19 – Hardware Setting Documentation & Annexes : the list of enclosed documents
has been updated.
Errors found in previous edition have been corrected.
Revision bars point out major (listed above) and minor (not listed above) modifications with respect to
Ed.02.
Revision bars in correspondence of empty lines or empty table rows, point out parts eliminated or shifted
in other places of the handbook.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 28 / 514
514
1.6 List Of Symbols And Abbreviations
Tab. 3. List Of Symbols

N.B. This Table Lists Some Symbols Whose Interpretation Could Be Doubtful.
SYMBOL MEANING AND COMMENTS

In this handbook it is not the division symbol. It means ’from .. to ..’.
E.g.:
<value1> <value2>
means:
from <value1> (included) to <value2> (included)
A polarization symbol like this:
H V
POLARIZATION can be assumed as either horizontal or vertical
SYMBOLS H
Once you have decided a polarization (e.g. )
the opposite direction symbol will be opposite polarization (e.g. )
V
Tab. 4. List Of Abbreviations
ABBREVIATION MEANING
A
AC Alternate Current
ACSE Association Control Service Element
ADC Analog to Digital Converter
ADM Add Drop Multiplexer
AE Access Enable
AF Atomic Function
AGC Automatic Gain Control
AIS Alarm Indication Signal
ALS Automatic Laser Shutdown
AMI Alternate Mark Inversion
ANSI American National Standard Institute
AOW Additional Order Wire
API Access Point Identifier
APS Automatic Protection Switching
ASE Application Service Element
ASIC Application Specific Integrated Circuit
AT Attend alarm
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ATL Far Terminal Alarm

ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode
ATPC Automatic Transmitter Power Control
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 29 / 514
514
ATTD ATTendeD
AUG Administration Unit Group

AU–n Administrative Unit – n (Order)
AUX AUXiliary
B
BB Base Band
BBE Background Block Error
BCA Common Battery Dial Pulsing (Telephone Set)
BER Bit Error Rate
BIP–x Bit Interleaved Parity – x
C
CAN Controller Area Network (communication protocol patented by Robert
Bosch GmbH)
CCDP Co–Channel Dual Polarized (Frequency re–use)
CFRD Component Failure Rate Date
C/I Carrier to Interference ratio
CK Clock
CMI Code Mark Inversion
CMISE Common Management Information Service Element
CPU Central Processor Unit
CRC–n Cyclic Redundancy Check – n
CRU Clock Reference Unit
CSW Common SoftWare
CTP Connection Termination Point
D
DA Distant Alarm
DC Direct Current
DCC Data Communication Channels (D1–D12)
DCC/M Multiplex Section DCC (D4–D12)
DCC/R Regenerator Section DCC (D1–D3)
DCN Data Communication Network
DEFEC FEC Decoder
DEM Demodulator
DF Dialog Failure
DIV Diversity
DM Degraded Minute
DS Defect Second
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
DTI Department of Trade and Industry

DTMF Dual Tone Multi–Frequency
E
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 30 / 514
514
EB Error Block
EBC Errored Block Count
EC Equipment Controller
ECC Embedded Control Channel
ECS External Communication Service
ECT Equipment Craft Terminal
EE Equipment Engineering
EF Equipment Failure
EIA Electronic Industries Association
EMC ElectroMagnetic Compatibility
EMF Equipment Management Function
EOW Engineering Order Wire
EPS Equipment Protection Switching
ES Error Second
ETR European Telecommunication Report
ETS European Telecommunication Standard
ETSI European Telecommunication Standard Institute
EW Early Warning
EWH Early Warning High
EWL Early Warning Low
EXC–BER Excessive BER
F
FE Front End
FEBE Far End Block Error
FEC Forward Error Correction (Code)
FERF Far End Receiver Failure
FIT Failure Unit
FR Failure rate
FSRC Failed Switch Request Count
FSRD Failed Switch Request Duration
G
GB Ground Benign
GF Ground Fixed
GM Ground Mobile
H
HBER High Bit Error Rate
HDLC High level Data Link Control
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
HET Heterofrequency (Radio system configuration)

HEW High Early Warning
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 31 / 514
514
HK HouseKeeping
HPT High order Path Termination

HPC High order Path Connection
HS High Speed
HST Hot Stand–By
I
ID IDentifier
IDU InDoor Unit
IEC International Electro technical Commission
IF Intermediate Frequency
IRC International Radiotechnical Commission
ISO International Standard Organization
ISPB Intra Shelf Parallel Bus
ISSB Intra Shelf Serial Bus
ITU–R International Telecommunication Union – Radiocommunication
ITU–T International Telecommunication Union – Telecommunication
L
LAN Local Area Network
LBER Low Bit Error Rate
LC Loss of Configuration
LED Light Emitting Diode
LEW Low Early Warning
LHR Long Haul indoor terminal Regenerator
LHRC Long Haul indoor terminal Regenerator Compact
LO Local Oscillator
LOF Loss Of Frame
LOP Loss Of Pointers
LOS Loss Of Signal
LPA Lower order Path Adaptation
LPT Lower order Path Termination
LS Low Speed
LSY Long haul SYstem
M
MC Monitoring Channel
MCF Message Communication Function
MDT Mean Dawn Time
MIR Loss of incoming pulses
MLC Multi Level Coding
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
MMIC Monolithic Microwave Integrated Circuit

MOD Modulator
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 32 / 514
514
MS Multiplex Section
MSA Multiplex Section Adaptation
MS–AIS Multiplex Section – Alarm Indication Signal

MSOH Multiplex Section OverHead
MSP Multiplex Section Protection
MS–RDI Multiplex Section – Remote Defect Indication
MS–REI Multiplex Section – Remote Error Indication
MST Multiplex Section Termination
MTBF Mean Time Between Failures
MTTR Mean Time To Repair
N
NA Not Applicable
NDS Near–end Defect Second
NE Network Element
NEBC Near–end Errored Block Count
NEFA Network Element Function Application
NF Noise Figure
NFD Net Filter Discrimination
NG Not Urgent
NRZ Non Return to Zero
NURG Not Urgent
O
OCT Office Craft Terminal
ODU OutDoor Unit
OFS Out of Frame Second
OH OverHead
O&M Operation and Maintenance
OIRT Russian Regulatory Body
OOF Out Of Frame
OS Operation System
OVF Overflow
OW Order Wire
P
PC Personal Computer
PDH Plesiocronus Digital Hierarchy
PI Physical Interface
PLL Phase Locked Loop
PM Performance Monitoring
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
POH Path Overhead

PSA Protection Switch Actual
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 33 / 514
514
PSAC Protection Switch Count
PSAD Protection Switch Actual Duration

PSR Protection Switch Request
PSU Power Supply Unit
Q
QAM Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
QOS Quality Of Service
R
RAPS Radio Automatic Protection Switch
RC Radio Controller
RCIM Radio Channel Identifier Mismatch
RCT Remote Craft Terminal
RECT Remote Equipment Craft Terminal
RES Radio Equipment and Systems
RF Radio Frequency
RFCOH Radio Frame Complementary Overhead
RL Received Level
RLTS Received Level Threshold Second
ROSE Remote Operation Service Element
RPI Radio Physical Interface
RPS Radio Protection Switching
RRA Radio Regenerator Adaptation
RRR Radio Relay Repeaters
RRT Radio Relay Terminals
RS Regenerator Section
RSOH Regenerator Section Overhead
RSPI Radio Synchronous Physical Interface
RST Regeneration Section Termination
RTF Remote Terminal Failure
RX Receiver/Received
S
SA Service Alarm
SBL Security Block
SC System Controller
SD Space Diversity
SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SEMF Synchronous Equipment Management Function
SERS Synchronous E1 Regeneration Section
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
SES Severly Errored Seconds

SETS Synchronous Equipment Timing Source
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 34 / 514
514
SF Signal Failure
SNCP Sub Network Connection Protection
SOH Section Overhead

SOHF SOH Failure
SPI Synchronous Physical Interface
SPS Synchronous Path Sink
SR Synchronous Radio
SRMR Synchronous Radio Modem (Assembly) for Repeater
SRMT Synchronous Radio Modem (Assembly) for Terminal
SRST Synchronous Radio baseband (Assembly) for Terminal
SRSR Synchronous Radio baseband (Assembly) for Repeater
SSM Synchronisation Status Message
STBY Standby
STM–N Synchronous Transport Module – N (Hierarchic level)
STM–0 51 Mbit transmission bit rate
SU Supervisory Unit
SW Switch
T
TA TeleAlarms
TAT Turn Around Time
TC Terminal Connector / Tandem Connection
TEM Transversal Electric Mode
TIM Trace Identifier Mismatch
TL Transmitted Level
TLTS Transmitted Level Threshold Second
TM Transmission and Multiplexing
TMN Telecommunication Management Network
TP Termination Point
TPH Telephone
TR TRansceiver
TRU Top Rack Unit
TTP Trail Termination Point
TU–n Tributary Unit – n (Order)
TUG–n Tributary Unit Group – n (Order)
TX Transmitter/Transmitted
U
U Unavailability
UDR Unpressurized Rectangular Waveguide Type
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
UG Urgent Alarm
UHM Urban Haul split mount terminal Multiplexer
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 35 / 514
514
UHR Urban Haul split mount terminal Regenerator
USK Stackable Unit

UT Unavailability Time
V
VC–n Virtual Container – n (Order)
VCO Voltage Controlled Oscillator
VF Voice Frequency
VHM Virtual Hardware Machine
W
WADM Wireless Add and Drop Multiplexer
WLT Wireless Line Terminal
WST Way Side Traffic
X
XPD Cross Polar Discrimination
XPIC Cross Polar Interference Cancelled
XPI Cross Polar Interference
XPIF Cross Polar Improvement Factor
XPOL Cross Polar/Polarization
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 36 / 514
514
DESCRIPTIONS
SECTION CONTENT PAGE
Chapter 2 – System Description 39
Chapter 3 – Physical Configuration 121
Chapter 4 – System Cabling 175
Chapter 5 – Functional Description 215
Chapter 6 – Technical Specifications 315

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 37 / 514
514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
38 / 514
2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
2.1 Introduction
This chapter gives the first–level description of 9600LSY equipment in the LHR configuration, and
comprehends the following main paragraphs:
– para.2.2 on page 40 Introduction to the 9600LSY Radio System Family

This paragraph explains briefly the characteristics of 9600LSY equipment
family.
– para.2.3 on page 47 Introduction to system configurations

This paragraph introduces the system composition of the 9600LSY Radio
System Family, LHR configuration.
– para.2.4 on page 51 Hardware components

This paragraph describes the different assemblies and shelves that can
be used to compose the available configurations of 9600LSY family, LHR
configuration.
– para.2.5 on page 63 Configurations

This paragraph describes in detail the different configurations of 9600LSY
family, LHR configuration, taking into account the various peculiar
aspects.
– para.2.6 on page 82 Radio Transmission features

This paragraph describes in detail the Radio Transmission features of
9600LSY family.
– para.2.7 on page 97 Signal Transmission

This paragraph describes in detail the Signal Transmission features of
9600LSY family.
– para.2.8 on page 109 Synchronization

This paragraph describes in detail the Synchronization features of
9600LSY family.
– para.2.9 on page 114 Equipment Control

This paragraph introduces the Equipment control features of 9600LSY
family.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 39 / 514
514
2.2 Introduction to the 9600LSY Radio System Family
2.2.1 Foreword

This paragraph explains briefly the characteristics and applications of the 9600LSY Radio System Family,
and comprehends the following main paragraphs:
– para.2.2.2 herebelow General

– para.2.2.3 on page 41 9600LSY basic configurations and Network Element types
– para.2.2.4 on page 42 Main Features
– para.2.2.5 on page 45 Network applications
2.2.2 General
The 9600LSY digital radio relay system belongs to the second generation of the Alcatel SDH
(Synchronous Digital Hierarchy ) radio family that has been developed aiming to match the demand of
high quality microwave transmission links and following the SDH standards defined by International
Organizations as ITU–T, ITU–R and ETSI. Special attention concerning the network management
standards and its integration into a SDH based network has been paid.
Big efforts have been done to expand as much as possible the versatility of the new radio family and the
full compatibility with the optical systems to ensure the utilization of the radio media as natural complement
to the optical fibre transmission.
A 9600LSY radio system can be in fact utilized either with multiplex section termination (MST) or
regenerator section termination (RST) functionality, can be used for optical loop closures or for fibre optic
back–up, for spurs or for backbone links and, in general, in all the network interconnections where the
advantages due to an easy installation, a fast commissioning operations and time and cost saving solution
are requested.
The family supports radio transmission of STM–0 (51 Mbps) and STM–1 (155 Mbps) signals as well
STM–4 (622 Mbps) or STM–16 (2.4 Gbps) connections, using a proper number of radio frequency
channels in various configurations.
A full set of synchronous and plesiochronous interfaces is available.
By means of the new 9600LSY family, Alcatel intends to answer the growing demand of transmission
capacity either for traditional telephone services or for the new data–oriented services (including ATM +
IP networks, LAN/WAN networks) or for the evolution of the cellular market.
The Alcatel 9600LSY system architecture, based on a full indoor structure, covers all the frequency bands
from 4 to 13 GHz in a complete set of equipment configurations from 2 to 8 channels in protected (N+1)
or unprotected (N+0) radio configurations.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 40 / 514
514
2.2.3 9600LSY basic configurations and Network Element types
The 9600LSY Long Haul system is based on the following configurations:

a) Regenerator (Network Element type LHR)

This radio system is basically composed by a rack containing up to eight transceivers, eight
modemodulators and eight RRA, and can be configured as follows:
CONFIGURATION MIN MAX
N+1
1+1 7+1
with/without occasional traffic
N+0 2+0 8+0
b) Regenerator Compact (Network Element type LHRC)

This radio system is basically composed by one subrack containing up to two transceivers, two
modemodulators and two RRA, and can be configured as follows:
• 1+0 Terminal Regenerator
• 1+1/2+0 Terminal Regenerator
• 1:1 (with occasional traffic) Terminal Regenerator
• 1+1 HST (Hot Stand By) Terminal Regenerator
c) Wireless Multi Service Node (WMSN)

This radio system consists of a “Regenerator” and operates together with the MUX of ALCATEL ADM
family, named 1650SM–C. The assembly is called WMSN (Wireless Multi Service Node).
This handbook deals with the LHR and related WMSN configurations only. For LHRC please make
reference to the specific handbook (that has a different P/N, see Tab. 77. on page 467).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 41 / 514
514
2.2.4 Main features
Th Alcatel 9600LSY family exploits the experience gained with the previous SDH generations of radio
equipment and provides an innovative answer to the most recent market requirements:

– Total interworking with other kinds of network elements present in the network aiming to make the
network independent from transmission medium.
– Full integration in the Alcatel network management platform able to manage different types of
network elements belonging to different technologies: OMSN, LT, OMSG, microwave radios, optical
systems and submarine systems. 9600LSY is included in Alcatel network release plan, guaranteeing
consistent feature support and allowing, in case of existing SDH NEs, not to change TMN platform,
thus saving investments already done.
– Double identity of the equipment that can be inserted in the SDH network as:
• Radio regenerator to be easily introduced in transparent mode without affecting any

modifications to the network.
• Wireless Multi Service Node (WMSN) One Side or Two Sides that can be considered as full
performance OMSN or LT with different synchronous physical interface: radio instead of fibre.
– Transmission capacity easily selectable between STM0 and STM1 according to the bandwidth
availability and, if necessary, following an incremental approach.
– Bit rate capacity: the 9600LSY family allows the transmission of STM–1 signals for all frequency
bands from 4 to 13 GHz and STM–0 for 7, 8 and 13 GHz bands, according to the customer needs.
The system allows an easy migration from STM–0 to STM–1 (only hardware and software
pre–settings are necessary) when the traffic and the band requirements are going to change.
Auxiliary traffic can be added by means of RFCOH bytes corresponding to one 2 Mbit/s Way Side
Traffic in STM–1 case. Way Side Traffic in STM–0 case is not available.
– Usage of 128 QAM as standard modulation. The high number of levels utilised allows to obtain a high
spectrum efficiency that permits the utilisation of the following channel spacing :
• 28 MHz, 29 MHz, 29.65 MHz, 30 MHz and 40 MHz for STM–1 capacity
• 14 MHz for STM–0 capacity.
– Adoption of frequency reuse technique as option for all the supported frequency bands, allowing
the transmission of 2x STM–1 per channel: the way utilised to improve the spectrum efficiency is
based on the Co–Channel Dual Polarisation (CCDP) technique.
This technique, consisting in transmitting two different STM–1 channels on each radio channel
utilising two different antenna polarisation, has been consolidated in the recent past by means of field
proven results.
In order to meet ITU–R transmission quality objectives also in unfavourable propagation condition
causing XPD degradation, Cross–polar Interface Canceller (XPIC) device is adopted to minimise the
negative effects of the cross–polar interference signal, assuring an improvement factor of approx.
18 dB to the cross polar antenna discrimination.
The function is implemented in an optional additional card to be plugged on each couple of
demodulator boards of reused channel.
Particular attention has been paid to the scalability of the system, allowing the extension of a
deployed alternate polar (AP) system to a CCDP reused system only when necessary and
consequently to a progressive investment.
Two possible ways of extension and configurations are available:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
• CCDP configurations using 2 protection channels up to 2 x (8+1)

• CCDP configurations using only 1 protection channel up to 7 working channels plus 1 stand–by.
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 42 / 514
514
The frequency reuse is applicable to STM–1 streams in all the frequency bands and with all the
channel spacing foreseen in the ITU–R recommendations, while it is not available in case of STM–0
transmission.
– Space Diversity reception as countermeasure against fading exploiting the new baseband
combiner.
– Further powerful multipath countermeasures: multichannel hitless switch, transversal equaliser,

configurable ATPC functionality, multileved coded modulation.
– High reliability in order to minimise field intervention.
– Fully software configurable terminals with software download capabilities.
– Protections:
Different protection types are available for the 9600LSY systems: Radio Protection and Network
Protection:
• Radio Protection (RPS).

The high capacity long haul radio systems utilises, to perform the automatic protection of the
radio channels, a multichannel switching device moving the channel to be protected on a spare
bearer (standby channel). The function, implemented on the RX side is N+1 hitless type; it is
transparent to other types of protection and in particular to network protection.
The switch supplies the protection of the link either in case of failure of the equipment or for
improving the quality performances of the link. In this last case the Early Warning criteria are
utilised to achieve an error free changeover.
• Network Protection.
For network protection the radio system in regenerator section configuration (RRA) will be fully
transparent to APS channel and criteria allowing the OMSNs present in the network to perform
the network protection activity. On the other hand the radio system in multiplex section
configuration (WMSN) implements, as embedded function, network protection features like
Trail protection and sub–network protection (APS, SNC–P etc.).
– High integration of the full indoor structure with very compact size: configurations up to 8+0/7+1
terminal are housed inside a single N3 ETSI rack.
The characteristics Alcatel 9600LSY are compliant with current SDH standards defined within the
International Organisations ITU–T, ITU–R and ETSI, with special attention to those standards concerning
the network management and its integration into SDH based network.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 43 / 514
514
The 9600LSY series features the 128 QAM modulation offering excellent spectrum efficiency and covering
the following frequency bands:
Tab. 5. 9600LSY radio family

SYSTEM FREQUENCY (GHz)
9640 LSY
3.6–4.2
(L4)
9647 LSY
4.4–5.0
(U4)
9662 LSY
5.9–6.4
(L6)
9667 LSY
6.4–7.1
(U6)
9674 LSY 7.1–7.7
9681 LSY 7.7–8.7
9610 LSY 10–10.7
9611 LSY 10.7–11.7
9613 LSY 12.75 – 13.25
In general, the equipment of this family may work, in case of for STM–1 stream, in co–channel frequency
re–use operation (CCDP), utilizing the XPIC optional kit, allowing the transmission of 2 x STM–1 signals
on a single RF channel.
Reused configurations are not foreseen for STM–0 capacity.
In the following Tab. 6. the available users interfaces are listed depending on the 9600LSY station types
(Regenerator or WMSN).
Tab. 6. 9600LSY user interfaces

REGENERATOR WMSN
INTERFACES
STM–1 STM–0 STM–1 STM–0
X X
STM–1 ELECTRICAL G.708 X (STM–1 X (STM–1
sub–equipped) sub–equipped)
X X
STM–1 OPTICAL S1.1 G.957 X (STM–1 X (STM–1
sub–equipped) sub–equipped)
STM–1 OPTICAL L1.1 G.957 ––– ––– X –––
STM–1 OPTICAL L1.2 G.957 ––– ––– X –––
140 Mbit/s G.703 ––– ––– X –––
X
3 x 45 Mbit/s G.703 ––– ––– X
(1 x 45 Mbit/s)
X
3 x 34 Mbit/s G.703 ––– ––– X
(1 x 34 Mbit/s)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
X
63 x 2 Mbit/s G.703 ––– ––– X
(21 x 2 Mbit/s)
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 44 / 514
514
2.2.5 Network applications of the 9600LSY equipment
The new generation of radio transmission system Alcatel 9600LSY family is specifically designed to
provide a radio solution suitable for a large number of applications, including:
– New full radio infrastructures

– Closure of STM1, STM4 and STM16 fiber optic rings
– Back–up to fiber optic trunk links
– Radio spurs of fiber/radio at STM–n level
– Utilization as backbone link in national trunk networks.
– Interconnection of cellular networks with public switched networks.
In the following figures, some typical network applications are depicted.
RADIO RADIO RADIO

REG. REPEAT. REG.
LT LT
Backbone, fiber back–up NxSTM1 (RRA, repeater)
WLT WLT
RADIO RADIO RADIO

REG. REPEAT. REG.
LT LT
Backbone, fiber back–up NxSTM1 (WLT, repeater)
Fig. 1. Backbone
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 45 / 514
514
Ring closure STM16
2x(8+0 / 8+1)

RADIO RADIO
REG. REG.
ADM ADM
ADM
RADIO RADIO
REG. REG.
Radio spurs 1+1/3+1
Fig. 2. Ring clousure and radio spurs
RADIO
REG.
RADIO RADIO
REG. REG.
ADM
ADM ADM
ADM
Ring closure STM4 (4+0 / 4+1east – west)
Fig. 3. Ring clousure

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 46 / 514
514
2.3 Introduction to system configurations
2.3.1 Foreword
This paragraph introduces the system composition of the 9600LSY Radio System Family, and
comprehends the following main paragraphs:
– para.2.3.2 herebelow Station types and configurations
– para.2.3.3 on page 50 Channel configurations and protection schemes
The handbook part that should be read before starting this paragraph is:
– para.2.2 on page 40 Introduction to the 9600LSY Radio System Family
2.3.2 Station types and configurations
Station types
A complete terminal station utilizing a maximum of 8 radio channels is housed inside a single ETSI rack
that, depending on the customer request, can be 2200 or 2000 mm high. The 1800 mm rack cannot be
utilized.
The structure of the equipment has been developed aiming to obtain a very simple structure, with an
integration as high as possible and reducing at the minimum the number of different functional blocks
and, inside each of them, reducing the number of different units and cards.
These concepts have led to obtain an equipment structure only composed by the following functional
blocks (see Fig. 4. on page 48):
– a radio assembly containing all the radio frequency and medium frequency circuits (transceiver shelf)
– a baseband subrack containing all the unit devoted to the modulation and demodulation functions,
RRA functions, services management, radio protection switching and system controlling.
– a branching unit deployed at the top and bottom sides of the transceiver subrack.
– a Top Rack Unit (T.R.U.) for D.C.. primary power distribution and battery protection.
– a fan subrack, foreseen for all the configurations.
– a compact ADM 1650SMC with its additional fan subrack, that , when required, can be installed into
the rack to perform all the functionalities managed by a multiplex section.
The configurations are easily expansible, passing from a lower one to a higher one simply adding, inside
each functional block, the units needed to support the new radio channels utilized.
In particular, the branching unit is equipped in advance with the channel circulators needed for the
expansion up to 7+1, to consent to expand the radio terminal just connecting the RF filters to the branching,
without the necessity to disassemble the branching itself.
Thanks to a new design of narrow RF filters , the frequency reuse, available in all the frequency bands,
can be obtained avoiding the utilization of the –3 dB hybrids for all the bands and all the frequency
spacings, including 28 MHz.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Despite to the new high integration of the LSY systems and thanks to volume decrease obtained on the
branching, the space diversity optional functionality is supplied in all the configuration up to 7+1/8+0.
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 47 / 514
514
TRU TRU
ADDITIONAL
HOUSEKEEPING
1650
(optional)
SM–C
SHELF
FANS FOR
1650SM–C
RRA/MODEM RRA/MODEM
AND ACCESS AND ACCESS
AREA AREA
(BASEBAND (BASEBAND
SHELF) FANS FOR SHELF)
RRA/MODEM
Rx Rx
BRANCHING BRANCHING
TRANSCEIVER TRANSCEIVER
SHELF SHELF
Tx Tx
BRANCHING BRANCHING
REGENERATOR WMSN
Fig. 4. Regenerator and WMSN station rack configuration
The Alcatel 9600LSY systems offer a full set of system configuration and protection schemes to meet any
specific need in a network with a high degree of flexibility.
Two are the envisaged station types, each supplying different functionality:
– Regenerator station (RST):
is needed when the RSOH termination and MSOH transparency are requested. I/O network
interface is STM–1 electrical or optical.
– Multiplex station (MST):
is necessary when a Wireless Multiservice Node (WMSN) (one side or two sides) has to be
implemented. In this case the MST station is used at the terminal ends of the radio link and it gives
the possibility to provide synchronous STM–1 electrical and optical interfaces and plesiochronous
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
140 Mbit/s, 3x45 Mbit/s, 3x34 Mbit/s, 63x2 Mbit/s interfaces.

It is possible to implement a full multiplex section features like synchronization, SOH termination,
network protection (SNCP/I, SNCP/N and linear MSP), VCs cross connection, tributary add–drops.
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 48 / 514
514
The maximum number of plesiochronous interfaces that are alternatively allowed by 1650SMC are
as follows:
• up to 3 cards 4x140 Mb/s. In this case the limitation is introduced by the LSY radio system that
can transmit up to 8 x STM–1 channels.

• up to 3 cards 3x34 Mb/s , utilizing 3x STM–1 (or 3+1 STM–1 in case of protection) channels radio
side.
• up to 3 cards 3x34 Mb/s, utilizing 3x STM–1 (or 3+1 STM–1 in case of protection) channels radio
side.
• up to 3 cards 21x2 Mb/s , utilizing 1x STM–1 (or 1+1 STM–1 in case of protection) channels radio
side.
In the last three cases, if a single stream 34 Mb/s or 45 Mb/s or 21x2 Mb/s is required, an
underequipped STM–1 is utilized toward the radio baseband and a STM–0 can be adopted for
transmission on air.
Station configurations
The 9600LSY family allows the radio transmission of both STM–1 and STM–0 utilising protected and
unprotected heterofrequency configurations N+0, N+1 type or 2x (N+1)– CCDP.
The basic configurations are named as follows:
– Long Haul extendible version N+1/N+2/N+0 terminal regenerator configuration (LHR)
– Long Haul extendible version N+1/N+2/N+0 terminal WMSN configuration (LHR + 1650SMC)
The high integration level allows to provide several types of configurations allowing to address different
network applications :
7+1 Terminal regenerator in 1 ETSI rack
8+0 Terminal regenerator in 1 ETSI rack
7+1 Terminal WMSN in 1 ETSI rack
8+0 Terminal WMSN in 1 ETSI rack
An already operating terminal regenerator can be reconfigured as a terminal WMSN simply adding a
1650SMC device to the radio regenerator equipment.
Each configuration is easily expansible to a higher capacity just adding the foreseen expansion kits.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 49 / 514
514
2.3.3 Channel configurations and protection schemes
The LHR system can interface from two up to eight channels (STM–0/STM1 Electrical or Optical signals
and the corresponding Radio parts) and up to eight WST channels. The system configurations allowed

are with Radio Protection Switching (N+1 without/with Occasional Traffic) or without Radio Protection

Switching (N+0), according to the following table:
Tab. 7. LHR Terminal Regenerator System Configurations
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
N+1 &
NR. of N+0 N+1 Occasional ALL
channels (1:N)
CH CH CH max WST
1+1 2 unpr.
2 2+0 1+1
& Occ. or 1 prot.
2+1 3 unpr. or
3 3+0 2+1
& Occ. 1 prot.+1 unpr.
3+1 4 unpr. or
4 4+0 3+1
4+1 5 unpr. or
5 5+0 4+1
5+1 6 unpr. or
6 6+0 5+1
6+1 7 unpr. or
7 7+0 6+1
7+1 8 unpr. or
8 8+0 7+1
unpr.= unprotected prot.= protected Occ.= occasional

In N+0 configurations, channels are without protection.
In N+1 configurations, channel 0 is always the stand–by channel.
In N+1 & Occasional configurations (also known as 1:N protection architecture), channel 0 carries the
occasional traffic, that is cut off whenever it becomes the recovery channel for any (faulty) of the protected
channels.
As indicated in Tab. 7. above, the WST configuration is independent from N+0 / N + 1 / 1:N system
configuration. The couple of radio channels which carry both the protected service channels and WST
ones (if any) is defined via software. These channels can be chosen among the following five couples:
Tab. 8. Couples of Radio Channels that can be used for protected service channels and WST
CH–x CH–y
0 1
0 9
1 2
1 9
8 9
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
N.B. Further information regarding protection schemes is given in para.5.2.1.5 on page 233.
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 50 / 514
514
2.4 Hardware components
2.4.1 Foreword
This paragraph describes the different assemblies and shelves that can be used to compose the available
configurations of 9600LSY family, and comprehends the following main paragraphs:
– para.2.4.2 herebelow OPTINEX Rack and Top Rack Unit

– para.2.4.3 on page 52 Transceiver subrack
– para.2.4.4 on page 54 Baseband subrack
– para.2.4.5 on page 58 ADM 1650SM–C
– para.2.4.6 on page 61 FAN Subrack
– para.2.4.7 on page 62 System wiring
– para.2.4.8 on page 62 Installation materials
As far as Branching configurations are concerned, refer to para.2.5.5 on page 77.
The handbook part that should be read before starting this paragraph is:
2.4.2 OPTINEX Rack and Top Rack Unit
The OPTINEX rack has been designed to be used in all the new applications of optical and radio solutions
thanks to the high room availability needed for the continuously increasing number of cable connections.
The rack is available in two different heights: 2200 and 2000 mm. They both can be used either for
regenerator or WMSN terminals. In fact, also the 2000mm version can host the terminals including the
1650SM–C ADM and its fan unit.
In general, OPTINEX rack can house 19” and 21” subracks. They must be compliant with ETSI 300 119–3
standard. Using 19” subracks they must be installed utilizing mechanical adaptors.
However, in the case of 9600LSY radios, the two main subracks (transceiver and baseband) are 21” wide,
so they do not need any adapter to be installed in the rack.
In the 9600LSY application, OPTINEX rack is usually supplied with the TRU unit (see para.3.4 on page
128).
For special Customer needs, OPTINEX rack can be also supplied without the TRU unit.
This handbook gives no detailed information on OPTINEX rack. For this purpose, please refer
to OPTINEX rack specific documentation (see para.18.2.2.1 on page 471).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 51 / 514
514
2.4.3 Transceiver subrack
2.4.3.1 Mechanical assembly

The transceiver mechanical assembly has the following dimensions:

530 mm (w) x 470 mm (h) x 240 mm (d)
A complete view of the structure, fully equipped with 8 transceivers, is shown in Fig. 5.
Fig. 5. Transceiver subrack
Each transceiver module is inserted in a vertical dedicated slot. The coaxial connections with Rx and Tx
branching units are located at the top and bottom positions of each transceiver.
Each module is equipped with the following units:
– Transmitter
– Receiver
– Tx Local Oscillator
– Rx Local Oscillator
– DC/DC converter
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 52 / 514
514
2.4.3.2 Transceiver block diagram
A simple block diagram, illustrating the main functions performed by transceiver module, is shown in the
following Fig. 6.
Fig. 6. Single channel transceiver block diagram
The transmitter includes an IF amplifier, a SSB up converter, a local oscillator and a RF power amplifier.
The utilization of a high rejection SSB up–converter permits to avoid the use of a RF filter at the output,
allowing a wide–band utilization of the unit.
The Automatic Transmitted Power Control (ATPC) function is included in the transceiver in order to
decrease the Tx power output and dissipation in case of normal propagation and to push the maximum
power up in deep fading conditions. This function may be disabled and the level of the transmitted RF
power can be manually set by Craft Terminal configuration.
The receiver includes a low noise RF preamplifier, an automatic imagine rejection down converter, an IF
filter, a main amplifier with AGC and a local oscillator.
A space diversity receiver, to be used in junction with a baseband signal combiner, is also available as
countermeasure to the selective fading due to the multipath propagation of the signal.
The advantages obtained by the baseband combiner utilization are mainly due to a higher reliability,
thanks to the adopted digital technology, to the possibility of recovering very high delays between the two
received signals and to the very reduced signature of the combined signal.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 53 / 514
514
2.4.4 Baseband subrack
The baseband subrack is used both in regenerator terminal stations and in WMSN stations. In the first case
it is the sole baseband equipment installed in the rack; in the second it has to be associated with

1650SM–C device that has to be installed in the upper right area of the rack just above the baseband

subrack.
It is mainly subdivided in three different areas:

– the upper area (access area) is devoted to host the interface connectors of WST , Service channels
and remote alarms.
– in the centre of the subrack the channel–depending units (RRA and Modems, up to ten) are
accommodated, together with the two common units : System Controller (SC) and the Service unit.
– in the bottom part, the DC/DC converters for supplying the d.c. voltages to the RRA–Modem units
are allocated just under the relevant powered units. Two battery filters (including the DC/DC
converters supplying the DC power for the common units ) are also installed in this area.
2.4.4.1 Mechanical assembly
The physical dimensions of the subrack are: 490 mm (w) x 500 mm (h) x 250 mm (d).
In the following Fig. 7. , the baseband subrack is shown.
Fig. 7. Baseband subrack equipped for 7+1/8+0 configuration

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 54 / 514
514
2.4.4.2 Regenerator Terminal Block Diagram
Hereafter, the block diagram relevant to a single channel is pointed out.

REGENERATOR
RRA BOARD MODEM BOARD
TX
STM1 ELET./OPT. HTL MODEM
MODEM RT
RRA RFCOH
INTERFACE SW RX
AUX. ATPC
SERV. DCCR
SERVICE & WST SYSTEM

Aux.SERV. ATPC CONTROLLER
CH.
F QB3
2x2 Mb/s SERVICE UNIT
V batt. DC/DC
CONVERTER
OS
ECT
Fig. 8. Single channel regenerator block diagram
The baseband subrack do not allow the protection neither of the physical interface (optical or electrical)
of the channel, neither of the RRA function, because the embedded switching section, included inside
each RRA unit is inserted between the RRA and modem function and therefore it protects only the radio
section (modem and transceiver). See next Fig. 9.
BASEBAND SUBRACK
CH1 O/F int RRA1 MODEM 1 TRANSCEIVER 1

HITLESS SWITCH
CH2 O/F int RRA2 MODEM 2 TRANSCEIVER 2
CH3 O/F RRA3 MODEM 3 TRANSCEIVER 3
CH0 O/F RRA STBY MODEM STBY TRANSCEIVER STBY

(occasional)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 9. Baseband functional protection scheme
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 55 / 514
514
Fig. 10. herebelow indicates the slot position of the baseband subrack where the units can be installed
in the various radio configurations.

CONNECTOR

AREA
SERVICECEC NOT USED

E STBY
RRA
RRA
SYSTEM MODEM
CONTROLLER MM
CONTROLLE
R
POWER
NOT USED SUPPLYSUPPL
Y
BATTERY
FILTER
FILTER
Fig. 10. Baseband board positions
In the following, the main characteristics of each unit is reported.
2.4.4.3 RRA board

Performs the following main functions :
• STM–1 bi–directional interface, electrical or optical selectable by means of interchangeable
plug–ins
• Extraction/Insertion RSOH line side to/from Aux. Service Board
• Hitless Switch functionality.
Just one unit has been developed for utilization with both STM–1 and STM–0 capacity.
Each RRA unit is equipped with an embedded STM–1 electrical interface. As an option, a S 1.1
STM–1 optical interface can be used instead. This optical interface is realized by a plug–in unit that
can be installed in the RRA through the front panel.
2.4.4.4 RRA Stand–by board

The unit performs the same functionalities of RRA board but, moreover, the hitless switch circuits
(Tx/Rx distributors and a switching logic unit) are is installed on board and dedicated to the radio
section protection.
The protection supplied is N+1 type and it is also utilized in 1+1 configuration .
Only one RRA STBY has been developed for utilization with both STM–1 and STM–0 capacity.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 56 / 514
514
2.4.4.5 Modem unit
Performs the following main functions:
• Terminal modulator
• Terminal demodulator
•
XPIC
• Baseband signal combiner

Two different 128 QAM modems have been developed, according to the two capacities that can be
transmitted:
• STM–1 Modem with one 2 Mbit/s WST service stream: to be used in both alternate and co–polar
frequency arrangements with all the spacings including 28 MHz.
• The STM–0 Modem without WST service stream: utilized in 7 , 8 and 13 GHz bands with 14
MHz channel spacing in both alternate and co–polar frequency arrangements.
Each modem can be equipped with an optional plug–in board . This board gives the access to the
IF signals necessary to the demodulator for XPIC or for Space Diversity functionalities. In case of
presence of both functions the modem must be equipped with two identical plug–in boards.
2.4.4.6 Service Unit

The Service board provides an external access to the auxiliary service channels, utilizing SUB–D
connectors in the subrack connector area. Moreover the unit manages the ATPC functionality.
Service unit consents the terminal to transmit one WST 2 Mb/s service stream in Radio Frame
Complementary OverHead in protected way on channels x and y (that can be chosen among the
couples specified in Tab. 8. on page 50), and contains the logic switching unit. The WST interface
is present on the unit front panel. The accesses to the other WST service streams that can be
transmitted one for each channel in non–protected way are in the connector area.
2.4.4.7 System Controller

The S.C. is devoted to the equipment management. It exchanges alarms, commands and
management information with the other units of the equipment and provides the following interfaces
for local and remote management:
• Channel communication for TMN utilizing a QB3 interface (BNC connector) info model based
• “F” interface (RS232 toward the local PC) (SUB–D 9 pin connector) towards Local Craft
Terminal
• QECC interface for remote management through DCC channels.
2.4.4.8 Additional Housekeeping unit

This optional unit (equipped as depicted in Fig. 4. on page 48) increases by 18 the number of
Housekeeping inputs available.
2.4.4.9 Power Supply

PSU units are grouped in 2–units groups (i.e. PSU0+PSU1, PSU2+PSU3, ...). Each PSU pair
converts and then distributes, through the backpanel, power supply to the correspondent pair of
RRA, whereas each PSU board supplies only the associated MODEM board (i.e. PSU0 supplies only
MODEM0 board, etc.) If not utilized, the P.S. slots are provided with a front plate cover.
Each P.S. gets the primary voltage from both batteries, connected in parallel.
The P. S. units supply the secondary power voltage to all the units starting from the primary voltage:
– 48 to – 60 Vdc (± 20%);
The system can also be powered by batteries with different voltage: ± 24 Vdc (± 20%). In this case,
on–purpose designed DC/DC converters are available and have to be installed in the lower area
of the rack.
2.4.4.10 Battery filter

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Two battery filters, located in the lower side positions of the subrack, supply the DC power to the
common units (System Controller, Service) in 1+1 protected way.
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 57 / 514
514
2.4.5 ADM 1650SM–C
2.4.5.1 WMSN rack configuration
When the Wireless Multi Service Node functionality is requested, an additional 1650SM–C ADM has to

be installed in the upper position of the LSY rack, just above the baseband regenerator subrack .
WMSN provide the mapping functionality (STM–1 frame creation), synchronization management and
tributary add–drop, network protection and VCs cross–connection.
Fig. 11. WMSN terminal rack equipped with 1650SM–C ADM
2.4.5.2 ADM 1650SM–C mechanical assembly
A detailed view of the 1650SM–C add–drop multiplexer is shown in Fig. 12.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 12. 1650SM–C add– drop multiplexer
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 58 / 514
514
2.4.5.3 WMSN block diagram
In Fig. 13. , the block diagram of the MST functionality, relevant to a single channel, is shown.
Fig. 13. MST– single channel functional block diagram
This configuration, in particular, gives the possibility to manage up to 8 STM–1 channels line–side and to
transmit them radio side with or without radio protection, in the following configurations:
– Up to 7+1 or 8+0 configuration in one direction (OS). The obtained functionality is the one
corresponding to a Line Terminal (LT).
– Up to 4+0 or 4+1 configuration in two different directions (TS). The terminal is configured as a
Wireless Add Drop Multiplexer .
The 1650SM–C equipment consist of the following sub–system units:

– Compact ADM
– Access module
– Auxiliary and overhead
– Power supply
The Compact ADM is built upon a matrix that can accept, through an access module providing the physical
interface for the asynchronous or synchronous signals, a maximum of 63x2 Mb/s, 3x34 Mb/s, 3x45 Mb/s,
140 Mb/s or 155 Mb/s streams.
Inside the ADM, a synchronization unit provides the timing reference needed by all the components of the
network element, with a max. daily drift of 0.37 ppm.
A control sub–system realizes the Synchronous System Management Function (SEMF), according with
ITU–T G.783 recommendation. The sub–system operates with a double controlling system utilizing an
Equipment Controller (EC) for DCC networking and a Shelf Controller (SC) for alarm detection and
reporting, performance monitoring and equipment protection switching.
A wide range of auxiliary service channels is offered according to SDH standards utilizing SDH and POH
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
bytes. These bytes are used for alignment word, parity check, network management operations,
performance monitoring; some data and orderwire channels are available to the user.
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 59 / 514
514
The unit utilizes a power supply distributed architecture where the –48/–60 V battery voltage is distributed
to all the cards and here is DC/DC converted to the voltages necessary to each card.
Two batteries can be used at the input, with automatic selection on the one with higher voltage.

The distribution is protected against single converter failure.
This handbook gives no detailed information on 1650SM–C equipment. For this purpose,
please refer to 1650SM–C specific documentation (see para.18.2.2.2 on page 471) with the
following exception:
In the application for 9600LSY, the FAN SHELF used for 1650SM–C is not
that described in the 1650SM–C documentation, but that described in this
handbook.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 60 / 514
514
2.4.6 FANS Subrack
The usage of the fan unit inside the rack is mandatory to respect Safety international standards and the
utilization is compulsory in all the system configurations, either in regenerator and WMSN case.
The FANS subrack is developed to be used both in regenerator and in WMSN configurations. In the first
case it is installed only between the baseband subrack and the transceiver assembly, just above the
receiving branching.
In the second case a second fan subrack is moreover installed in the higher part of the rack, just under
the 1650 M–C unit.
The subrack, 600mm wide and 50 mm high, can contain one or two sub–units with 4 fans each as shown
in the Fig. 14. herebelow.
SUBUNIT “A” SUBUNIT “B”
Fig. 14. FANS Subrack
As a general rule, a subunit must be equipped when there are boards over their ventilation area.
Further information on equipping rules are given in para.3.9 on page 169.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 61 / 514
514
2.4.7 System wiring
a) Internal connections
Four different connection kits have been designed to cover all the needed system configurations:

• Common kit
This cable kit is utilized in all the configurations in quantity 1. It includes the cables for :
– Can bus
– Unit presence
– Rack lamps
– Battery cables
• Channel dedicated kit

It includes all the connections among the units relevant to each single channel.
It has to be foreseen with quantity equal to the total number of radio channels present in the
terminal, including the spare channel.
Two different codes are present in this category: one for channels without space diversity, a
second one for channels with space diversity.
• Optional kit for reused channels

It includes the cables needed for the frequency reuse operation. They are the IF cables and
RF cables for the synchronization of the Rx local oscillators. One kit is used for one couple of
reused channels.
Two different codes are envisaged: one kit foresee short length cable needed for reused
channels connection inside the same rack.
The second must be used when the interconnections are relevant to two different racks.
• Interconnection cables to 1650SM–C

Three dedicated cable kits have been developed for the interconnection from the radio
regenerator to the 1650SM–C unit:
– Common part cable kit (including rack lamp cable)
– 1+1/2+0 basic cable kit (signal cables)
– 1 cable kit for one extension channel (signal cables, one for each added channel besides
1+1/2+0))
b) External connections
Main signal interfaces of the terminal are present on the front panel of each RRA unit.
Alarm interconnections are directly present in the access area of baseband subrack and no
distributor board is foreseen neither in baseband nor in TRU subrack.
2.4.8 Installation materials
This handbook gives no detailed information on Installation materials, as well as on Installation

procedures and Commissioning procedures and related Acceptance Test documents. For this
purpose, please refer to specific documents REF. [E] and [F] on page 469.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 62 / 514
514
2.5 Configurations
2.5.1 Foreword
This paragraph describes in detail the different configurations of 9600LSY family taking into account the
various peculiar aspects, and comprehends the following main paragraphs:
– para.2.5.2 herebelow Station configurations

– para.2.5.3 on page 68 Radio channel configurations
– para.2.5.4 on page 76 System configuration for network solutions
– para.2.5.5 on page 77 Branching configurations
As far as Fan subrack configurations are concerned, refer to para.2.4.6 on page 61.
The handbook parts that should be read before starting this paragraph are:

2.5.2 Station configurations
The 9600LSY family allows the radio transmission of both STM–1 and STM–0 utilizing protected and
unprotected heterofrequency configurations N+0, N+1 or 2x (N+1) CCDP type.
Several types of configurations are available, allowing to address different network applications .
Referred to the maximum rack implementation, the list shows the widest allowed configurations:
– 7+1 Terminal regenerator in 1 ETSI rack

– 8+0 Terminal regenerator in 1 ETSI rack
– 7+1 Terminal WMSN in 1 ETSI rack
– 8+0 Terminal WMSN in 1 ETSI rack
– 2x(7+1) Terminal regenerator or WMSN CCDP in 2 ETSI racks
The complete list of the possible configurations foreseen for the 9600LSY family is hereafter indicated,
sub–divided in several blocks:
a) Regenerator configuration utilizing co–polar branching solution:
9600LSY REG. 1+1 CP

9600LSY REG. 2+1 CP
9600LSY REG. 3+1 CP
9600LSY REG. 4+1 CP
– 1 RACK
9600LSY REG. 5+1 CP
9600LSY REG. 6+1 CP – 1 NETWORK ELEMENT
9600LSY REG. 7+1 CP – 1 RADIO PROTECTION CHANNEL
9600LSY REG. 2+0 CP (only in N+1)
9600LSY REG. 3+0 CP – 1 POLARIZATION PER RACK
9600LSY REG. 4+0 CP
9600LSY REG. 5+0 CP
9600LSY REG. 6+0 CP
9600LSY REG. 7+0 CP
9600LSY REG. 8+0 CP
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 63 / 514
514
b) Regenerator configuration utilizing alternate–polar branching solution:
9600LSY REG. 1+1 AP

9600LSY REG. 2+1 AP

9600LSY REG. 3+1 AP

9600LSY REG. 4+1 AP
– 1 RACK
9600LSY REG. 5+1 AP
– 1 NETWORK ELEMENT
9600LSY REG. 6+1 AP
– 1 RADIO PROTECTION CHANNEL
9600LSY REG. 7+1 AP
(only in N+1)
9600LSY REG. 2+0 AP
– 4 CHANNELS MAX ON H POLARIZATION
9600LSY REG. 3+0 AP
– 4 CHANNELS MAX ON V POLARIZATION
9600LSY REG. 4+0 AP
9600LSY REG. 5+0 AP
9600LSY REG. 6+0 AP
9600LSY REG. 7+0 AP
9600LSY REG. 8+0 AP
c) Regenerator configuration utilizing single protection channel, installed into a single rack and
with alternate–polar branching solution:
9600LSY REG. 1+1 FREQUENCY REUSE 1STBY

9600LSY REG. 3+1 FREQUENCY REUSE 1STBY – 1 RACK
9600LSY REG. 4+1 FREQUENCY REUSE 1STBY – 1 NETWORK ELEMENT
9600LSY REG. 5+1 FREQUENCY REUSE 1STBY – 1 PROTECTION CHANNEL
9600LSY REG. 6+1 FREQUENCY REUSE 1STBY – 4 CHANNELS MAX ON
9600LSY REG. 7+1 FREQUENCY REUSE 1STBY H POLARIZATION
9600LSY REG. 2+0 FREQUENCY REUSE 1STBY – 4 CHANNELS MAX ON
9600LSY REG. 3+0 FREQUENCY REUSE 1STBY V POLARIZATION
9600LSY REG. 4+0 FREQUENCY REUSE 1STBY – 4 DIFFERENT
9600LSY REG. 5+0 FREQUENCY REUSE 1STBY FREQUENCIES MAX
9600LSY REG. 6+0 FREQUENCY REUSE 1STBY – 8 CHANNELS MAX
d) Regenerator configuration utilizing double protection, installed into two racks and co–polar
branching solution:
9600LSY REG. 2x(1+1) CP

9600LSY REG. 2x(2+1) CP
9600LSY REG. 2x(3+1) CP – 2 RACKS
9600LSY REG. 2x(4+1) CP – 2 NETWORK ELEMENTS
9600LSY REG. 2x(5+1) CP – 2 RADIO PROTECTION CHANNELS
9600LSY REG. 2x(6+1) CP (only in N+1)
9600LSY REG. 2x(7+1) CP – SECOND RACK ONLY FOR REUSED
9600LSY REG. 2x(2+0) CP CHANNELS
9600LSY REG. 2x(3+0) CP – 1 POLARIZATION PER RACK
9600LSY REG. 2x(4+0) CP – 8 CHANNELS MAX PER EACH RACK
9600LSY REG. 2x(5+0) CP
9600LSY REG. 2x(6+0) CP
9600LSY REG. 2x(7+0) CP
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
9600LSY REG. 2x(8+0) CP
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 64 / 514
514
e) Regenerator configuration utilizing double protection, installed into two racks and
alternate–polar branching solution:
9600LSY REG. 2x(1+1) AP

9600LSY REG. 2x(2+1) AP

9600LSY REG. 2x(3+1) AP – 2 RACKS

9600LSY REG. 2x(4+1) AP – 2 NETWORK ELEMENTS
9600LSY REG. 2x(5+1) AP – 2 RADIO PROTECTION CHANNELs
9600LSY REG. 2x(6+1) AP (only in N+1)
9600LSY REG. 2x(7+1) AP – SECOND RACK ONLY FOR REUSED
9600LSY REG. 2x(2+0) AP CHANNELS
9600LSY REG. 2x(3+0) AP – 2 POLARIZATIONS PER RACK
9600LSY REG. 2x(4+0) AP – 4 CHANNELS MAX ON H POLARIZATION
9600LSY REG. 2x(5+0) AP PER EACH RACK
9600LSY REG. 2x(6+0) AP – 4 CHANNELS MAX ON V POLARIZATION
9600LSY REG. 2x(7+0) AP PER EACH RACK
9600LSY REG. 2x(8+0) AP
NOTE:
The rack and the subracks have been designed to host up to 10 channels, even if the normal maximum
configuration is limited to 8 channels. In fact, the expansion of the systems without traffic interruption is
available only for this last maximum configuration.
However, it could be possible , for particular customer requirements or utilizing some channel plans, to
foresee even the possibility to get 10 channels per rack.
A terminal can be configured as a WMSN simply adding a 1650SMC device to the radio regenerator
equipment .
Each configuration is easily expansible to higher capacities just adding the foreseen expansion kits.
In Fig. 15. and Fig. 15. , a view of a 8 channel regenerator terminal and 8 channel WMSN are respectively
shown
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 15. 9600LSY 7+1/8+0 regenerator Fig. 16. 9600LSY 7+1/8+0 WMSN
configuration
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 65 / 514
514
In the next Fig. 17. , the block diagram of a 7+1 regenerator is shown.
STM–1 USER
RADIO PROTECTION SWITCHING

INT/RST MODEM TRANSCEIVER

STM–1 USER

MODEM TRANSCEIVER

INT/RST
STM–1 USER
STM–1 USER
STM–1 USER
STM–1 USER
STM–1 USER
MODEM TRANSCEIVER
Fig. 17. 9600LSY 7+1 Regenerator configuration
Next Fig. 18. shows a block diagram illustrating a Wireless Multiservice Node for 7 x STM–1 channels
transmitted in only one direction (OS) and configured with radio protection implementing a 7+1 radio
configuration.
7X STM–1or 140 or 3x45 or 3x34or 63x2 Mb/s
OMSN REGENERATOR
TRAF.PORT AGGREG. RST MODEM TRANSCEIVER

RADIO PROTECTION
SWITCHING

MODEM TRANSCEIVER
Fig. 18. 9600LSY – WMSN–OS 7x STM–1 configuration with radio protection for 7+1 STM–1
transmission.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 66 / 514
514
In the next Fig. 19. a Wireless Multiservice Node (east–west) two sides configuration (WMSN–TS) with
four STM–1 streams for each direction is presented with possibility to drop/insert each STM–1 signal.
Fig. 19. 9600LSY WMSN Two Sides configuration

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 67 / 514
514
2.5.3 Radio channel configurations
Channel arrangement

The following Fig. 20. shows the configurations supported according to the frequency arrangement.

.....
V (H)
H (V) .....
Alternate channel dual–polarized, up to (7+1) / (8+0)

(ACDP operation)
.....
V (H)
H (V) .....
Co–channel dual–polarized, up to (7+1) / (8+0)

(CCDP operation)
Fig. 20. Channel arrangement

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 68 / 514
514
Frequency Channel assignment according to station layouts
In the following the possible station layouts will be analyzed with the relevant evolutions.
Fig. 21. shows an example of basic configurations from which the possible evolutions are depicted in
following Fig. 22. thru’ Fig. 26.
channels
1–3–5–7
1 3 5 7
A) O n e p o la r p e r r a c k
BB
(3 + 1)
channels
1–2–3–4
1 2 3 4
B) One polar per rack
BB
(3 + 1)
channels
1–3 1–3 1 3
REUSED C)T w o p o l a r p e r rack
BB (3 + 1 )
f r e q. R e u s e
REUSED
channels
1–2 1–2
1 2
REUSED D) Two polar per rack
BB ( 3 +1)
f r e q. R e u s e
channels
1–3 2–4 1 3
E )Two polar per rack
BB 2 4 (3 + 1)
Fig. 21. 3+1 terminal basic station layouts

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 69 / 514
514
Fig. 22. shows channel assignment rearrangement starting from basic layout of case A) of previous
Fig. 21. on page 69.

channels
channels 1–3–5–7 1–3–5–7
1–3–5–7 reused
BB
BB
3 5 7
1
1 3 5 7
2 4 6 8
T w o p o l a r p e r rack (7+1/8+0) Freq.Reuse

One polar per rack 3+1
channels channels channels

1–3–5–7 2–4–6–8 1–3–5–7 1–3–5–7 2–4–6–8 2–4–6–8
reused reused
BB BB BB
3 5 7
1 3 5 7 1
2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8
T w o p o l a r p e r r a c k (7+1 ) T w o p o l a r p e r rack 2* (7+1/8+0) Freq.Reuse
channels channels
1–3–5–7 2–4–6–8 1–3–5–7 2–4–6–8
reused
BB BB
1 3 5 7
2 4 6 8
T w o p o l a r p e r r a c k 2 * (7+1 ) f r e q. R e u s e
Fig. 22. Terminal station layout: extension starting from A) basic layout
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 70 / 514
514
Fig. 23. shows channel assignment rearrangement starting from basic layout of case B) of previous
channels
channels 1–2–3–4–5–6–7–8
1–2–3–4
BB
BB
1 3 1 3 5 7
2 4 2 4 6 8
One polar per rack 3+1 O n e p o l a r p e rr a c k (7+1)

1–2–3–4 1–2–3–4 1–2–3–4–5–6–7–8 1–2–3–4–5–6–7–8
reused reused
BB BB BB
1 3 1 3 5 7
2 4 2 4 6 8
T w o p o l a r p e r r a c k (7+1) F r e q. R e u s e O n e p o l a r p e r rack 2 x (7+1) Freq.Reuse
channels channels
1–2–3–4 1–2–3–4 5–6–7–8 5–6–7–8
reused reused
BB BB
1 3 5 7
2 4 6 8
T w o p o l a r p e r r a c k 2 * (7+1) f r e q. R e u s e
Fig. 23. Terminal station layout: extension starting from B) basic layout
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 71 / 514
514
Fig. 24. shows channel assignment rearrangement starting from basic layout of case C) of previous

channels
channels
1–3–2–4 1–3–2–4
1–3 1–3 reused
reused
BB
BB
3
1
1 3
2 4
Two polar per rack (3+1) Freq.Reuse Two polar per rack (8+0) Freq.Reuse

1–3–5–7 1–3–5–7 1–3–2–4 1–3–2–4 5–7–6–8 5–7–6–8
reused reused reused
BB BB BB
3 5
1
1 3 5 7 7
2 4 6 8
Two polar per rack (7+1/8+0) Freq.Reuse Two polar per rack 2* (8+0) Freq.Reuse
channels channels
1–3–5–7 1–3–5–7 2–4–6–8 2–4–6–8
reused reused
BB BB
1 3 5 7
2 4 6 8
Two polar per rack 2* (7+1/8+0) Freq.Reuse
Fig. 24. Terminal station layout: extension starting from C) basic layout
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 72 / 514
514
Fig. 25. shows channel assignment rearrangement starting from basic layout of case D) of previous
channels
channels
1–2–3–4 1–2–3–4
1–2 1–2
reused
reused
BB
BB
1 3
1
2 2 4
Two polar per rack (3+1) Freq.Reuse Two polar per rack (7+1/8+0) Freq.Reuse
channels channels
1–2–3–4 1–2–3–4 5–6–7–8 5–6–7–8
reused reused
BB BB
3 5
1 7
2 4 6 8
Fig. 25. Terminal station layout: extension starting from D) basic layout
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 73 / 514
514
Fig. 26. shows channel assignment rearrangement starting from basic layout of case E) of previous

channels
channels 1–3–2–4 2–4–1–3
1–3 2–4 reused
BB
BB
1 3
1 3
2 4 2 4
Two polar per rack (3+1) Two polar per rack (7+1/8+0) Freq.Reuse

1–3–5–7 2–4–6–8 1–3–2–4 2–4–1–3 5–7–6–8 6–8–5–7
reused reused
BB BB BB
3 5 7
1 3 5 7 1
2 4 6 8 2 4 6 8
Two polar per rack (7+1)

channels channels
1–3–5–7 2–4–6–8 1–3–5–7 2–4–6–8
reused reused
BB BB
1 3 5 7
2 4 6 8
Two polar per rack 2* (7+1) Freq.Reuse
Fig. 26. Terminal station layout: extension starting from E) basic layout
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 74 / 514
514
Fig. 27. shows an example of 4+0/4+1 EAST/WEST terminal basic configurations.
channels
1–3–5 1–3–5
A) T w o p o la r e a s t–w e s t p e r r a c k
1 3 5
2–4 2–4
2*(4 + 1)
BB 2 4
channels
1–3–5 1–3–5
1–3 1–3
1 3 5 B) T w o p o la r e a s t–w e s t p e r r a c k
reused reused 2*(4 + 1) f r e q. R e u s e
BB
channels
1–2–3 1–2–3
1 2 3 C) T w o p o la r e a s t–w e s t p e r r a c k
1–2 1–2
reused reused 2*(4 + 1) f r e q. R e u s e
BB
channels
1–2–3–4–5 1–2–3–4–5 1 2 3 4 5 D) O n e p o l a r e a s t–w e s t p e r r a c k
2*(4 +1)
BB
Fig. 27. 4+0/4+1 EAST/WEST terminal basic station layouts

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 75 / 514
514
2.5.4 System configuration for network solutions
Besides the radio configurations presented previously, the 9600LSY family supplies an answer to various
transmission problems supplying particular functional solutions.

The purpose of this paragraph is to describe these functionalities giving some simple system block

diagrams and/or short comments.
Space Diversity
All the available configurations in all the frequency bands of 9600LSY family may include the Space
Diversity protection. This feature is obtained adding to the system a second receiver connected,
through a dedicated branching, to the Space diversity second antenna.
This second receiver, exactly equal to the main one, is installed inside the transceiver unit, in the
dedicated area just aside the main one.
The two IF signals (coming from the main and diversity receivers) are sent to the modem, where are
processed by two demodulators and summed by a new designed baseband combiner.
To achieve this function, one plug–in IF module with A/D converters must be added to the modem
unit.
Expansion procedure
9600LSY is a fully expansible radio system. It means that, starting from the minimum 1+1 / 2+0
configuration, it is possible to increase the traffic capacity adding to the station the units necessary
to increase the number of radio channels up to the maximum allowed by the configuration.
The expansion procedure is reported in para.3.5.2 on page 131.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 76 / 514
514
2.5.5 Branching configurations
The branching for N+0 or N+1 configurations is realized in two different ways to be connected to a single
or double polarized antenna (1 or 2 polarizations per rack versions) and can manage up to 8 RF channels.
In both cases, Tx and Rx filters and channel circulators are accommodated in two horizontal lines
respectively at the bottom side and at the upper side of the transceiver subrack.
They are connected to the antenna circulators sited over the top of the rack by means of branching
connections installed along one or both rack side walls.
Depending on the frequency band, the branching is realized utilizing coaxial connection (4 and 5 GHz
bands) or using waveguides (from 6 GHz to 13 GHz).
The branchings connected to the space diversity receiver (this function is foreseen in all the bands and
for all the configurations) follow the technological choice utilized for the main branching.
The utilization of narrow band RF branching filters allows to avoid the use of –3 dB hybrids ( –3dB couplers
previously used for CCDP application) in all the frequency plans and for all the frequency spacings
including 28 MHz.
In all configurations, the connections among transceivers and relevant channel–depending branching
units are realized by vertical parallel coaxial cables without any cross connection.
This realization permits to simplify the installation operations (see Fig. 28. herebelow).
Rx Diversity branching
Rx branching
Coaxial interconnections
Branching H or V Branching V or H
Tx branching
Channel circulator block + RF filter
Channel circulator block without RF filter
Fig. 28. Schematic diagram of transceiver to branching connections

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 77 / 514
514
Branching extension without traffic interruption
More and more often customers require to expand installed systems without causing traffic interruption.
Following this requirement, a particular branching solution has been developed.

This solution consists in having all the channel circulators needed for the maximum rack configuration

installed in advance, even if , at first, only a few of them are really utilized.
Dedicated codes including four circulators have been inserted in the catalogue. These blocks, one code
for each frequency band, are usable for all the terminal configurations. The unused circulator port that
will be connected to the filter branching in the future when expanding of the system, is closed by a short
circuit device. This device consents the signal to flow toward the antenna in transmission side or toward
the first active receiver in receiving side.
During the expansion operation, the short circuits devices are removed and the branching filters are
connected to the open circulator port, with easy and very short operation.
In such a way the traffic interruption can be minimized at minimum.
Taking in account that operating in TX side the expansion is performed adding the new channels as last
respect to the existing ones, this operation could be considered safe from the traffic interruption point of
view.
In Rx side the new channel are inserted between the antenna circulator and the first existing channels.
For this reason removing the short circuit device and leaving open the antenna port can lead to a lack of
signal to the following Rx channels until the new filter in installed.
Moreover, if in the receiving side the space diversity functionality is present, operating the expansion in
separated time on the main receiver branching and on the diversity receiver branching , the traffic
interruption can be completely avoid.
The circulators blocks are available in the bands from 6 to 13 GHz included.
At these frequences, the additional cost due to the presence of all the circulators even not utilized can
be supported by the systems, even in case of simple configurations.
At 4 and 5 GHz, on the contrary, the cost of the circulators is much heavier. For this reason the described
solution is not applied, and the traditional method (addition of the needed circulators at the moment of the
expansion) is still utilized.
Whatever is the number of working channels present in the rack, the number of the circulator blocks to
be used is 4 if the space diversity is not present, and 6 if it is implemented. This rule is valid both with
co–polar and alternate polar branching solution.
Balanced branchings
The so called “balanced branchings” consents to get a constant attenuation of the branching for all the
channels relevant to the same terminal. So, also the system gain is constant whatever channel it is referred
to.
To get this performance the rule that has been followed is to insert the successive transmitters to the first
following the first and , on the contrary, to insert the added receiver before the existing ones.
The next figures give an exemplification of the balanced branching connections in the two cases of one
polarization per rack and two polarization per rack.
Solution for branching in 6L band ( 9662LSY)
ITU–R F. 383 channel plan foresees a frequency distance between the innermost channel of 44.49 MHz.
This narrow distance between channels 8 and 1’ has obliged to insert, inside the branching in transmission
side, a dedicated wide–band filter to avoid local interference between said channels that supplies an
additional filtering to the residual spectrum power generated by the transmitter 8 or 1’ at the frequency
of the receiver 1’ or 8 .
This filter is always installed in the branching, in all configurations (co–polar and alternate polar) and in
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
independent way respect to the channels effectively installed in the link. It means that even if channels
8 and 1’ are not utilized, the branching contains the filter. In such a way, we are free to install successively
the channels 8 and 1’ for expansions of the link, without necessity to add the filter and , at last, without
causing traffic interruption.
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 78 / 514
514
One polarization per rack branching
In Fig. 29. herebelow, the branching version for 8 RF channels arranged in 1 polar per rack configuration
is shown. The picture include the space diversity optional branching.
MAIN
SP.DIV.
SP.DIV.Rx
MAIN Rx BRANCHING
RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Tx BRANCHING
Fig. 29. 1 polar per rack branching version for 8 RF channels
The first slot on the left of the transceiver subrack is used for the spare transceiver (TR 0).
All the transceivers present in this configuration are connected to the single polarized branching and are
housed utilizing the slots in sequence starting from left side.
Please note the branching positions utilized for transmitter and receiver filters in the balanced branching
solutions.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 79 / 514
514
Two polarizations per rack branching
In Fig. 30. herebelow, the branching version for 8 RF channels arranged in 2 polar per rack configuration
is shown. The example here reported includes the space diversity option.

SP.DIV. ANTENNA
MAIN ANTENNA
SP.DIV. Rx
BRANCHING
MAIN Rx
BRANCHING
RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX
0 1 2 3 6 7 8 9
TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX
0 1 2 3 6 7 8 9
Tx BRANCHING
Fig. 30. Branching version for 8 RF channels, arranged in 2 polar per rack configuration
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 80 / 514
514
In Fig. 31. herebelow, a 3+1 configuration, again with 2 polarization per rack, is reported, in this case
including the space diversity functionality.
Note that the expansion of the system is obtained progressively filling the transceiver subrack (and the
branching, as consequence) adding new units starting from the left and right external sides of the subrack.
Diversity Rx
Branching
Main Rx
branching
RX0 RX1 RX8 RX9
TX0 TX1 TX8 TX9
Tx branching
Fig. 31. Branching version for 3+1 configuration with Space Diversity, arranged in 2 polar per rack
version
The first slot on the left of the transceiver subrack is reserved to the transceiver utilized for protection
(TR0).
It can work either on H or V polarization, depending on the RF channel utilized .
As a consequence, the branching installed in the left part of the rack can be connected either to the H
antenna polarization or the V one.
Once that the polarization (H or V) of the left side branching has been chosen, all the units that must be
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
connected to this antenna polarization will be installed on the left side and connected to this branching .
The others (connected to V or H polarization) will be installed and connected to the branching located on
the right side.
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 81 / 514
514
2.6 Radio Transmission features
2.6.1 Foreword

This paragraph describes in detail the Radio Transmission features of 9600LSY family, and comprehends
the following main paragraphs:
– para.2.6.2 herebelow Frequency reuse technique (CCDP)

and XPIC Cross Polarization Canceller
– para.2.6.3 on page 90 Transmitted power control: static and ATPC
– para.2.6.4 on page 93 Loopbacks

2.6.2 Frequency reuse technique (CCDP) and XPIC Cross Polarization

Canceller
2.6.2.1 Introduction
Efficient bandwidth is a relevant issue in the digital radio application.

Multilevel signalling is a standard mean to get high spectral efficiency.
Unfortunately its sensitivity to channel impairments increases with the number of modulation levels. In
radio links carrying several channels, additional bandwidth saving is usually achieved by using both
horizontal and vertical polarization, with cross polarized adjacent channels to minimize interference.
A further improvement of transmission capacity can be obtained by the simultaneous use of the RF
channel for two independent digital transmissions on orthogonal polarization, which is commonly
addressed to as Cross–polarized co–channel frequency reuse technique.
Frequency reuse systems actually result in doubling the spectral efficiency of conventional transmissions.
However this is paid in terms of additional signal distortion, because of inevitable cross–coupling of dual
polarized channels. This is due both to propagation conditions (notably rain and ground reflections) and
imperfections in the antennae and waveguide feeders. The result of reduced cross polarization
discrimination (XPD) is cross polarization interference (XPI) , which sums up with intersymbol
interference generated by channel dispersions and give rise to potentially serious impairments in
detection.
XPI and intersymbol interference can be jointly contrasted by resorting to adaptive processing techniques.
Baseband equalizations together with cross polarization interference canceller (XPIC) allow signal
distortion to be kept within tolerable limits, thus making frequency reuse a viable option.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 82 / 514
514
2.6.2.2 XPIC Operating principle and receiver architecture
The idea behind the XPIC operation is that of adjusting the amplitude and phase of the received signal
samples of the opposite polarization, so as to provide an estimate of the XPI corrupting the desired co–pol
signal. This estimate can then be subtracted from the main signal, producing cross–pol interference
cancellation. Taking into account the time–varying nature of the channel, the XPIC operation must be
adaptively adjusted according to a proper rule to track the variation in both co–polar and cross–polar
channels parameters.
To counteract both XPI and multipath fading, the joint use of XPIC and adaptive equalization is advised.
Following this approach, the adopted cross–pol co–frequency receiver structure results in an arrangement
of four adaptive bandspaced transverse filters, as show in Fig. 32.
H pol.
received signal EQUALIZER H data
XPIC
H error signal
V error signal
XPIC
V pol.
received signal EQUALIZER V data
Fig. 32. XPIC operating principle
In the same figure the XPIC updating criterion is also addressed. The XPIC tap–weights are adjusted so
as to minimize the correlation between cross–pol received signal and co–pol error signal.
This operation minimizes the correlation between error signal and cross polarization interference.
A fundamental issue in a frequency reuse system design is the receiver recover capability. As a matter
of fact, deep fading occurrences, which can produce a system loss of lock, are usually of short duration,
so that also moderate hysteresis effects on system lock–in can severely increase the total outage time (C/I
typical values 2 – 5 dB).
Therefore, care must be taken in the choice of the receiver synchronization strategies, in order to avoid
any interaction between dual–pol sections of receiver during the recovery process.
The adopted frequency reuse system architecture is sketched in Fig. 33. on page 84.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 83 / 514
514
H IF
LO DEM
DOWN
H
RX IF +
CONV DATA
XPIC

H UP

MOD TX
DATA CONV LO master
. synchr.
LO slave
V UP
MOD TX
DATA CONV
DEM
DOWN V
RX IF +
CONV
XPIC DATA
LO
V IF
Fig. 33. Frequency reuse system architecture
The only design constraint is that a common RF local oscillator is used for both dual–pol signals, while
two independent decision directed carrier recovery loops are employed for the demodulation from IF to
baseband for each equalizer canceller pair input signals.
This approach preserves the precise phase and frequency relationship between the received signal and
the cross–pol signal used for XPI cancellation.
And this is true even when the carrier associated with the received signal is out of lock. Such coherence
has very important implications because without cancellation, when the terminal is out of lock, XPI
distortion will be so severe that the terminal will not easily regain lock.
Another advantage of such an arrangement is that no constraints are imposed on Tx oscillators. In
addition, a joint recovery process of cross–pol carriers is avoided.
The equalizer/canceller system operation is based on dual–pol received signal samples. Therefore, a
critical point of receiver design is to devise the proper signal sampling strategy. We chose to employ a
separate symbol synchronizer for each cross–pol branch of the receiver. As indicated in Fig. 33. , the
same clock is used to sample the input signal of an equalizer and of the associated XPI canceller. This
makes the XPIC operation independent of the synchronization of dual polarized transmitted data streams.
It is of great importance to observe that the above synchronization strategies result in a complete
independence of operation of the receiver branches on opposite polarization. This allows operation even
when the receiving digital terminal on the opposite polarization is out of service.
2.6.2.3 XPIF Factor
The receiver performance can be assessed in term of the XPI rejection capability of the canceller. This
is quantified by the cross–polarization improvement factor (XPIF), which is the difference of the carrier
to XPI ratio (C/XPI’s) corresponding to a predefined error performance in a dual polarized system with and
without XPIC, respectively.
Typical values (optimum phase) for a 128 MLC system is 22 dB.
2.6.2.4 XPIC Card
The XPIC card is a daughter board that has to be inserted in both modem units of the main and reused
channel of each bearer that is reused. This unit is installed in the system only if the reuse of frequency is
implemented. It can be also added to the modem in second step if a expansion of the system utilizing the
reuse of a frequency is required after the first installation.
The unit has a second utilization, again as daughter board, as baseband combiner when the space
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
diversity functionality is implemented in the link.

In case of both functionality presence (XPIC and Space diversity), two units are necessary and both must
be installed inside the modems.
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 84 / 514
514
2.6.2.5 Rack configurations for frequency reuse
Frequency reuse technique allows to double the transmission capacity of each radio channel; a certain
number of channels is then transmitted at the same frequency of the main one on the second antenna
polarization.
We can envisage two main different topologies of reused systems: with one spare channel and with two
spare channels.
a) Reused systems with a single protection channel
Terminals with a single protection channel are installed in only one rack .
The maximum number of channels is 8 and up to 4 different frequencies can be utilized.
Each terminal is identified in the network as a single N.E.. Higher configurations are not allowed.
Fig. 34. hereafter reported shows an example of a reused terminal .
In the example all the channels are reused and the spare channel, transmitted by the first transceiver
installed on the left side of the shelf, is channel 1H. The configuration obviously utilizes double
antenna polarization.
TRU
RRA/MODEM
AND ACCESS
AREA
(BASEBAND
SHELF)
Rx
BRANCHING
CROSS–CORRESPONDENCE
1 2 3 4 4 3 2 1
OF H–V CHANNELS HHHH VVVV
CHANNELS 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Tx
BRANCHING
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 34. 7+1 reused terminal with single protection (ch. 1H)
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 85 / 514
514
b) Reused systems with two protection channels
Two protection channels are available when a complete 2x(n+1) system is installed in two racks. In
this case there will be two n+1 systems , one for each rack, using n+1 frequencies. One spare channel
for each rack is present. Maximum number of channels for each polarization is 8 (including the spare

channel).

A terminal, configured as above, always consists of two independent Network Elements, one for each
rack.
Two different solutions are available: each rack can be configured with alternate polarization and with
only one polarization.
If the two–rack system is foreseen since the beginning, a solution with only one polarization per rack
is recommended. In case of future expansion, in fact, there is no necessity to connect the branchings
of the two racks, avoiding heavy mounting operations and long traffic interruptions.
However, the with 2PPR solution is also available.
Obviously if an 1PPR or 2PPR existing system has to be expanded with reused channels utilizing
the second rack, the AP or CP solution, already adopted in the installed system has to be foreseen
also in the second rack.
In Fig. 35. below, a 7+1 reused terminal with double spare channels, with the 2 polar per rack
recommended solution, is shown.
RACK 0 RACK 1
TRU TRU
RRA/MODEM RRA/MODEM
AREA AREA
(BASEBAND (BASEBAND
SHELF) SHELF)
Rx Rx
BRANCHING BRANCHING
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OF H–V CHANNELS VVVVVVVV
HHHHHHHH
CHANNELS 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Tx Tx
BRANCHING BRANCHING
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 35. 2 x (7+1) reused terminal with double protection (on ch. 1H and 1V) in 1PPR solution
In the figure, two other slots are available in each rack for future expansion.
The shown terminal layout foresees the “side to side” rack position, but the “back to back” solution
is also possible.
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 86 / 514
514
c) Expansion of a single protection reused system to double protection
Fig. 36. herebelow shows the expansion of a single protection reused terminal to a higher
configuration. Taking into account the limitation concerning the maximum allowed configuration in
case of single protection–single rack terminal (7 working channels and 4 different frequencies), the
expansion utilizes a second rack .

In this case the system is modified into a double protection one. The second spare channel is housed
in the second rack (in the shown case on ch. 2H) .
The rack utilized for the expansion utilizes the 2PPR configuration used by the first rack.
This solution consents to expand a single rack double polarized terminal up to 7+1/8+0 reused
configuration. The new added rack will be identified as a second network element .
TRU TRU
RRA/MODEM RRA/MODEM
AREA AREA
(BASEBAND (BASEBAND
SHELF) SHELF)
Rx Rx
BRANCHING BRANCHING
OF H–V CHANNELS 1 3 5 7 7 5 3 1 2 4 6 8 8 6 4 2
HHHH VVVV HHHH VVVV
CHANNELS 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Tx Tx
BRANCHING BRANCHING
RACK 0 RACK 1
Fig. 36. Expansion from 7+1 single protection to 2 x (7+1) reused terminal
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 87 / 514
514
2.6.2.6 Interconnections in reused systems
The specific connections needed for the terminals equipped for the frequency reuse technique are
hereafter described:

– Local Oscillator Synchronization
The two local oscillators connected to the two RF receivers (main and reused) working on each
reused frequency must be together synchronized. This function is obtained by a phase lock loop
system utilizing a 2 GHz reference signal transferred from the L.O. of the “main” receiver ( master
local oscillator) to the L.O. of the “reused” receiver (slave local oscillator). This connection is
performed by means of a coaxial cable between oscillators and a “Frequency Reuse Kit” (a special
module and associated cabling) inside the Master Oscillator. In case of failure of the main local
oscillator or lack of the synchronization signal due to whatever cause , the slave Rx L.O. of the reused
channel utilizes its own RF signal , obviously unlocked to the main LO, to feed the Rx down converter
and to maintain in service the reused channel.
In case of failure of the master LO, The slave one can assume the master functionality and to be
utilized as source of the reference signal to be used to feed the signal to the frequency multiplier
contained in the main LO and allowing the protection of the master LO .
Fig. 37. herebelow shows how the mutual protection between the two LOs can be obtained.
MASTER LO SLAVE LO
2GHz 2GHz
oscillator oscillator
FR Synch. signal coaxial cable

module
XN XN
multiplier multiplier
RF OUT RF OUT
Fig. 37. Main / slave LO mutual protection
If main and reused channels are located in different racks , cable interconnections between the two
racks are needed . The maximum loss acceptable is 10 dB and the cable length is y 7 m .
– I.F. interconnection cables
The XPIC unit, to perform the interference cancellation, must receive the IF signal from both main
and reused receiver. For this reason, in addition to the “standard” cables (used in a non–reused
systems), a IF cable for each XPIC unit must be utilized to connect the main receiver to the
demodulator of the reused system and vice versa.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Two dedicated cable kits, including both the LO and IF connections, are foreseen. They are available
with different cable lengths depending on the connection necessity (inside the same rack or between
the two racks). Only one kit is needed for a couple of reused channels.
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 88 / 514
514
– RF branching interconnection
In case of single polarized rack used in two racks terminal, no branching interconnections are needed
between the racks, each of them being connected directly and independently to one antenna port.
On the contrary, in case of usage of alternate polarization on both racks, the transceivers utilizing the
same antenna polarization must be connected to the same branching. It means that the some
waveguides or cables (depending on the frequency band) will connect the two racks to send to the
two antenna polarization all the H and all the V channels. Following Fig. 38. shows how this is carried
out.
RX BRANCHING RX BRANCHING
TX BRANCHING TX BRANCHING
RACK 0 RACK 1
Fig. 38. Branching interconnections
All the branching configurations do not include passive hybrids. Their utilization has been avoided
thanks to the use of narrow channel filters that allows to transmit channels down to a minimum
distance of 28 MHz on the same branching .
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 89 / 514
514
2.6.3 Transmitted power control: static and ATPC
The product allows two ways to adjust the transmitted power: the first one in a static way, the second one
under automatic control loop (ATPC function).

2.6.3.1 Transmit power static adjustment
The capability to adjust transmitted power in a static and fixed way has been introduced for those countries
where, due to internal rules, the ATPC function is not accepted or for those hops in which, due the short
length and interface problems, a fixed reduced transmitted power is preferred.
The range of the possible attenuation depends on the frequency band involved and is detailed in chapter
“Technical Specifications”.
The step for adjustment is 1 dB, with an accuracy of ± 0.5 dB. The setting of the transmitted power can
be performed locally by means of ECT.
2.6.3.2 ATPC function
The automatic control of the transmitted power (ATPC) function allows to regulate the transmitted power
in order to supply a reduced power in situation of normal propagation and the maximum power in
conditions of fading.
In synchronous radio link systems, the ATPC device is considered a very important function taking into
account the following advantages:
– reduction of the internal interferences of the radio system and with other systems
– reduction of the average consumption of the transmitter considering that the maximum power is
supplied for small percentages of time
– improvement of the averages conditions of the transmitter about the linearity and consequent
reduction of phenomena of background error due to non linear distortion that with ATPC could be
revealed only in conditions of fading
– possibility to increase the System Gain as a consequence to the reduction of the Back–off on the
power transmitted taking into account what above mentioned
– substitution of a possible microwaves attenuator to realize different ”range” of power.
As far as concern the values relative to the operating range of the ATPC, refer to chapter “Technical
Specifications”.
ATPC working principle
The ATPC system is based on a control loop of the power transmitted between a TX transmitter and a RX
receiver connected in a radio link.
With reference to Fig. 39. on page 91, the receiver furnishes through the AGC voltage the information of
the received power to the ATPC controller; it compares the voltage with threshold values (presettable) and
according to the obtained result send through to the ATPC controller on the remote station of the link the
orders of increase/ decrease of transmitted power. These orders are processed and therefore transferred
to the associated transmitter.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 90 / 514
514
STATION A STATION B
PRX RX
IF
IF DEM
MOD
VATPC
COMATPC
ATPC AGC
CONTROL
RFCOH RFCOH
EXTRACT INSERT
RX FAILURE PRX ATPC
ATPC DATA ATPC DATA
PRX PTX
DEM IF RX TX IF MOD
N.B. ATPC regulation shown in one direction of transmission only and valid for each channel
Fig. 39. ATPC Functionality
The information of control of the transmitted power is exchanged between the two stations of a link utilizing
service channel at 64 Kbit/s inserted in RFCOH bytes (avoiding to touch standard SOH bytes).
In the protected configurations these information are transmitted 1+1 protected.
The information regarding the ATPC functionality can be resumed in the following (for each channel):
– received power (absolute digital value to be transmitted towards the remote station in order to move
the Tx output power).
– Rx failure (for remote Tx inhibition with reused system configuration)
– ID_channel + ID_direction (for identification of ATPC channel in order to avoid problems in case of
crosstalk/interference or in case of 1+0 east–west configuration release 2.0)
These information are organized in registers of SPRI (Serial Peripheral Register Interface) where the PRx
and ID_ch information are transmitted with higher priority than Rx fail.
The information for each channel received in remote station is sent to the relevant transmitter where the
PRx information received is compared to the thresholds set and it is decided to send up or down or hold
commands to the RF transmitter.
The Rx failure received in the Tx remote station is used to switch off the relevant transmitter in case of
frequency reuse or to set the Tx at low Pout in case of standard configuration (no frequency reuse
application).
The service channel above mentioned is a point to point type and in the SDH systems is terminated in each
RRA/Modemodulator.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 91 / 514
514
Organization of the control system
The ATPC control system is replied for each channel without any centralized function.
The system control is organized in two parts for each channel and for each direction:

– the Rx system control implementing PRx detection, eventual Rx failure detection and insertion of the

above data in RFCOH bytes
– the Tx system control implementing extraction of data from RFCOH bytes and PTx drive.
ATPC Threshold management
The transmitter is able to change the output power in the range MAX TL (max level) and MIN TL (min level).
The transceiver has an its own default value for MAX TL, MIN TL and NOM TL (nominal level).
It is possible to set the following values:
A MAX TL (max level ATPC) where A MAX TL x MAX TL
A MIN TL (min level ATPC) where A MIN TL y MIN TL
with the constrain:
MIN TL x A MIN TL x NOM TL
A MIN TL x A MAX TL x MAX TL
The extreme thresholds MAX TL and MIN TL are reported in the data sheet (see par. 3.3.2)
It means that:
– the ATPC range is not fixed but variable according to the values set for A MAX TL and A MIN TL
– the max ATPC output power can be different from the max output power of the transmitter and the
ATPC functionality can be maintained with reduced range
The receiver has an its own default value (not changeable) for a receive power threshold called EXTRA
POWER threshold depending on the signal (STM1 or STM0) corresponding to guaranteed threshold
10E–6.
On the receiver it is possible to set a received power Low threshold for loop activation within the following
limits:
LOW threshold: in the range from –40 dBm to –EXTRA POWER threshold dBm
When the received signal decreases and overcomes the LOW threshold the transmitter increases the
output power up to the nominal value. Only if the received signal overcomes the EXTRA POWER threshold
the transmitter increases the output power reducing its back–off (if LMA>LN only). The hysteresis for both
thresholds is 3dB.
The PRx value sent to the transmitter is refreshed with 10ms time interval.
In case of loss of Tx_Rx ATPC signal, exchanged between Tx and Rx, the output power is frozen and an
ATPC loop alarm must be activated (no other actions are taken); when the communication is restored the
ATPC loop alarm is disactivated after an hysteresis to be defined.
It is possible to enable or to disable ATPC function: when ATPC is disabled the output power can be driven
normally according to 3.3.2.
Every power change, from manual to automatic and viceversa is performed at the speed of 1dB /10ms.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
To be sure that a decreasing of Rx power of one receiver corresponds to a PTx increasing of the relevant
Tx in remote station an “identifier station code” must be used. The same “identifier station code” should
be set on the two station involved in the ATPC functionality avoiding that in crosstalk/interference or
RFCOH bypass in repeater the Tx in one station can be driven by a not relevant Rx.
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 92 / 514
514
2.6.4 Loopbacks
The loopback function makes fault location and maintenance tests fast and simple.
In 9600LSY, the following loopbacks can be performed:

• Line loopback (RRA)

A Line Loopback is a loopback where the incoming signal to a physical port is looped back onto
the outgoing signal (see Fig. 40. )
• Internal loopback (RRA – RFCOH)

An Internal Loopback is a loopback where the internal outgoing signal of a port is looped back
onto its internal incoming signal (see Fig. 41. and Fig. 42. )
RPS RFCOH MODEM RT

SPI RST RST
RSPI
RRA MD TRI
Fig. 40. Loopback A: RRA line loopback
RST RFCOH MODEM RT

SPI RST RPS
RSPI
RRA MD TRI
Fig. 41. Loopback B: RRA internal loopback
MODEM RT
SPI RST RST RPS RFCOH
RSPI
RSPI
RRA MD TRI
Fig. 42. Loopback C: RFCOH Internal loopback
All of these are loop and continue loopbacks (the signal is sent back and continues its path).
the residual BER values (RBER) are not guaranteed in Radio Local Loop condition on.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 93 / 514
514
2.6.4.1 Caution: channel lockout
To make measures on a looped–back channel meaningful, the following sequence must be followed:
channel lockout on ⇒ channel loopback on ⇒ measures

This avoids that possible arising alarms can activate protections. To exit from this conditions, thus leading
system back to normal operating conditions, perform reverse command sequence:
end of measures ⇒ channel loopback off ⇒ channel lockout off
Channel lockout on/off and loopback on/off are performed by Craft Terminal (see Operator’s Handbook
for details).
2.6.4.2 Caution: recoverable and unrecoverable loopbacks (with RECT)
A LHR Network Element can be controlled, besides by the local Craft Terminal (ECT), by a Remote Craft
Terminal (RECT). In certain conditions, that are explained here, loopbacks set–up by RECT are not
recoverable by RECT, therefore their setting–up by RECT must be avoided.
The remote control by RECT is carried out by means of the DCC channel which allows to access the
Equipment Controller from the Remote Craft Terminal, as depicted in Fig. 53. on page 116.
DCC control channel uses two radio channels, in 1+1 protected configuration.
The couple of radio channels (x,y in Fig. 53. on page 116) which carry the protected service channel (as
well as the WST channels, if any) is defined via software. These channels can be chosen among the five
couples defined in Tab. 8. on page 50.
Figure in Fig. 43. on page 95 shows the position of the Equipment Controller EC with respect to the
loopback points A,B,C (these loopbacks are named as indicated in previous Fig. 40. thru’ Fig. 42. ).
Therefore, having defined x&y the couple of radio channels transporting the service channel, the following
rules must be followed for loopback setting–up:
– loopbacks on channels other than x&y:
there are no limitations (as these channels are not used for DCC communication purposes):
loopbacks set–up by the local or remote Craft Terminal can be always removed by the local or remote
Craft Terminal
– loopbacks on channels x&y (used for DCC communication purposes) set–up by the local or remote
Craft Terminal:
• can be always removed by the Local Craft Terminal
• with regard to the remotion possibility by Remote Craft Terminal :
a) if only one DCC channel is available, i.e., when any of CH–x or CH–y is unavailable for
any reason, the loopback cannot be removed by the Remote Craft Terminal, according
to the direction from which the RECT tries (unsuccessfully) to access the controlled NE,
because its EC is not reachable, as depicted in Figures and in Fig. 43. on page 95.
b) if both DCC channels are available, the loopback remotion by RECT is possible; obviously:
• unrecoverable loopbacks must never be set–up on both channels CH–x and CH–y
• no failure on the other channel (not looped–back) CH–x or CH–y should occur in the
meanwhile
otherwise the same unrecoverable condition of previous point a ) will occur.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 94 / 514
514
BB RT
A B C
1
EC
BB RT
A B C
RECT
2 EC
BB RT
A B C
RECT
3 EC
LOOPBACKS NOT RECOVERABLE BY REMOTE CRAFT TERMINAL
A = RRA (RMD) line loopback (see Fig. 40. on page 93)

B = RRA (RMD) internal loopback (see Fig. 41. on page 93)
C = RFCOH (RMD) Internal loopback (see Fig. 42. on page 93)
Read carefully text to interpret correctly this figure
Fig. 43. EC position with respect to loopback points and consequent unavailability by RECT (CH–x/y)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 95 / 514
514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
STATION 0 STATION 1 STATION 2 STATION 3
03
BB RT RT BB IBB RT RT BB
A B C C B A A B C C B A
EC EC EC EC
955.203.292 Q
RECT CONTROL
1320CT
or OS
STATION 3 STATION 2 STATION 1 STATION 0

BB RT RT BB BB RT RT BB
A B C C B A A B C C B A
EC EC EC EC
Read carefully text to interpret correctly this figure

1320CT
or OS
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
Fig. 44. Allowed and not allowed loopbacks by RECT (CH–x/y)
ALLOWED LOOPBACKS
(RECOVERABLE BY RECT) A = RRA (RMD) line loopback (see Fig. 40. on page 93)
B = RRA (RMD) internal loopback (see Fig. 41. on page 93)
NOT ALLOWED LOOPBACKS C = RFCOH (RMD) Internal loopback (see Fig. 42. on page 93)
(NOT RECOVERABLE BY RECT)
96 / 514
2.7 Signal Transmission
2.7.1 Foreword
This paragraph describes in detail the Signal Transmission features of 9600LSY family, and comprehends
the following main paragraphs:
– para.2.7.2 herebelow STM–0 & STM–1 Transmission

– para.2.7.3 on page 98 SDH mapping adopted
– para.2.7.4 on page 99 SDH interface usage
– para.2.7.5 on page 100 SOH bytes and service channel access

2.7.2 STM–0 & STM–1 Transmission
One of the most important peculiarity of the 9600LSY family is to allow the selection of the system capacity
according to the customer needs (and allowing band saving utilizing STM–0 capacity, if it can be useful).
In particular, this feature can be applied to 7, 8 and 13 GHz bands, utilizing well defined channel
arrangements for medium capacity transmission. Please refer to section FREQUENCY PLANS & PART
NUMBERS to analyze the frequency arrangements and the channel steps foreseen for the various
frequencies in case of STM–0.
Of course, the STM–0 transmission is suitable to transport also plesiochronous signals with capacity 21x2
Mbit/s, 1 x 34 Mbit/s or 1 x 45 Mbit/s and the systems have been studied to allow an easy migration from
STM–0 to STM–1 (or vice–versa) when the traffic and the band requirements are going to change.
As far as concerns the Way Side Traffic capacity, it is possible to transmit a single 2 Mbit/s WST stream
for each channel carrying STM–1, whether in case of STM–0 it is not possible to transmit any WST.
It is necessary to underline that no direct interfaces at STM–0 level are foreseen. In case of STM–0, the
interface user side is always at STM–1 level but only the first VC–3 is mapped ; in this way it is possible
to maintain the same electrical or optical interface (part numbers) independently from the signal capacity.
The real transformation between STM–1 interface and STM–0 signal takes place inside the RRA/Modem
unit before modulation (or after demodulation) function.
In case of migration from one capacity to the other, no RRA change is necessary. Only the modem has
to be substituted inside the baseband assembly; simple hardware and software presettings (with a new
software configuration) are sufficient to upgrade the system.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 97 / 514
514
2.7.3 SDH mapping adopted
Generalized Multiplexing structure

Fig. 45. shows the more generalized multiplexing structure obtained merging the ITU–T G.707

multiplexing figure with the correspondent figure of ITU–R F.750 (that shows also the RR–RP functional
reference point for STM–0 transmission).
Note that in European Standard only a subset of the generalized multiplexing structure is adopted, where
only plesiochronous interfaces at 2, 34 and 140 Mbit/s are used, but also the multiplexing of 3xAU–3 into
AUG is forbidden (see Fig. 46. ).
Fig. 45. General Multiplexing Structure

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 46. General European Multiplexing Structure with addition of 45 Mbit/s
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 98 / 514
514
2.7.4 SDH interface usage
The system can provide several kinds of user interfaces that may be synchronous (SDH) or
plesiochronous (PDH) and depend on the type of stations involved (Regenerator or WMSN) and the type
of transmitted bit rate (STM1 or STM0)

All the available interfaces are summarized, according to the different possible situations In Tab. 6. on
page 44. Details about electrical characteristic of each interface are reported in chapter “Technical
Characteristics”.
It is important to point out that in case of WMSN station (obtained coupling a 9600LSY Regenerator with
a 1650SMC device) inside the same rack), the interface between 9600LSY Regenerator and 1650SM–C
is electrical and the equipment is represented by two separated N.Es .
Some general information that are valid for each version (line rate, physical interface) of the SDH and PDH
traffic interfaces are herewith outlined:
a) general rules for SDH unit:
• SOH/POH bytes management according to the standard TTP or CTP rules (see also NERM)
• Optical interfaces according to the standard G.957 short and long haul (see also NERM)
• Automatic Laser Shut–down in compliance with G.958
b) general rules for PDH unit:
• POH bytes management according to the standard TTP rules: (see also NERM)
• Asynchronous bit mode mapping into the relevant VC payload.
• Structure and /or not–structured PDH signals are transparently transported. The frame
structure information (e.g. : CRC,E,A,S bits) are neither handled nor monitored: bi–directional
passthrough at the PDH/SDH interfaces; furthermore, any potential PDH–AIS condition is
transparently forwarded into the relevant VC.
• Detection of VC signal fail conditions set to all “1” the outgoing PDH stream.
Detection of the incoming PDH–AIS conditions (G.706 standard, detection time = 4 frames) can be
enabled/disabled, without consequent actions at VC layer.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 99 / 514
514
2.7.5 SOH bytes and service channel access
2.7.5.1 Overview

In the SDH system some SOH bytes (of SDH frame) are used to transmit the service channels. So we

can distinguish:
c) RS–OH bytes, that can be inserted/extracted both in multiplex and in regenerator station,
and
d) MS–OH bytes that can be inserted/extracted only in multiplex station.
Moreover, radio side, the transmission of 1 Way Side Traffic service stream (only in case of STM–1
transmission) is performed mapping it on the bytes of two columns of the RFCOH. The AUX/EOW bytes
handled by the Regenerator and by the WMSN support two types of applications:
1) Local access as termination: the auxiliary bytes of a trail termination can be bi–directionally
interconnected to the voice/data interfaces of the local service unit embedded in the equipment
itself.
2) Cross–connection: the auxiliary bytes of two different trail terminations can be bi–directionally
interconnected providing an auxiliary channel pass–through between every couple of STM–1
ports or different OH sections; it means each single byte can be configured to be
passed–through from one direction (i.e. line side) to another one (i.e. radio side).
The auxiliary bytes connections are always unprotected and the selection of the bytes and the ports are
performed by CT/OS. The dashed cells in Tab. 9. herebelow show the set of potential OH bytes suitable
to be processed as auxiliary channels at the section or the path terminations, with the associated meaning.
RFCOH is a proprietary function implemented to transmit radio specific information (DSI, ATPC,
MC, WST) and to re–route over radio hop a few RS–OH byte terminated.
Tab. 9. OH bytes suitable for handling on MST
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1
A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 J0 n n 1 J1
ÇÇÇ ÇÇÇ ÇÇÇ

B1 d D E1 d f F1 n n 2 B3
RS–OH

D1 d D D2 d f D3 f f 3 C2
4 G1
ÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇ
B2 B2 B2
ÇÇÇ
K1
ÇÇÇ
f f
ÇÇÇ
K2
ÇÇÇ
f f 5 F2 VC–4/3

D4 f f D5 f f D6 f f 6 H4 OH

MS–OH D7 f f D8 f f D9 f f 7 F3
ÇÇÇD10
S1
f
f
f
f
ÇÇÇ
D11
f
f
f
f
M1
ÇÇÇ
D12
E2 n
f f
n
8
9
K3
N1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 100 / 514
514
Tab. 10. OH bytes suitable for handling on RST
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 J0 n n 1
B1 d d E1 d f F1 n n 2
RS–OH
D1 d d D2 d f D3 f f 3
4
5
6
MS–OH PASS THROUGH 7
8
9
Tab. 11. RFCOH byte structure
Column 1 Column 2
DSI MC
ATPC MC
D1 MC
D2 MC
D3 MC
E1 FAIL serv + K0
F1 d,n,f
d,n,f d,n,f
d,n,f d,n,f
where the meaning of the bytes is summarized as follows:
for RS–OH bytes:
A1–A2: 6 bytes: A1= (11110110) A2=(00101000) for frame alignment;

J0: RS Trace for STM identification;
d: 6 bytes for media specific usage;
n: 4 bytes reserved for National Use;
f: 4 bytes reserved for Future international standardization;
B1: RS Error checking (BIP–8) for regeneration section.
E1: RS Voice for order wire channel;
F1: data channel as user channel;
D1–D2–D3: RS DCC data communication channel [192 Kb/s (TMN bytes for regenerator
section)];
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 101 / 514
514
for MS–OH bytes:
B2: MS Error checking (BIP–24) for terminal station.

E2: MS Express channel.

n: 2 bytes reserved for National Use;

f: 26 bytes reserved for Future international standardization;
K1–K2: MPS channel K1(b1..b8) and K2(b1..b5), MS–FERF/AIS K2(b6..b8):
”110” indicates that the receive end is detecting a section failure or is receiving
MS–AIS;
D4..D12: MS DCC data communication channel [576 Kb/s (TMN bytes for multiplex section)];
S1: SDH Synchronization Quality Level: S1 (b5..b8)
M1: Multiplex Section Remote Error Indication
for POH bytes:
J1: Path trace (check end to end path connection)

B3: Performance monitoring (BIP8 of VC4)
C2: Signal label (full or empty VC)
G1: Path status (FERF,FEBE) backward to the origin
F2: Path user service channel
F3: Path user service channel
H4: Multiframe alignment (indicates tributary location)
K3: 4 bits for APS channel, 4 bits spare
N1: Network operator byte for Tandem Connection Monitoring (TCM) function
for RFCOH bytes:
Proprietary channels
MC: Monitoring channel:EWL, EWH, HBER, RTF, FAIL SERV.

k0: Proprietary radio channel identifier
DSI: Digital Switching Information channel for RPS
ATPC: Data channel for automatic transmitting power control
RS–OH bytes re–routed over radio hop
E1: radio Order Wire

F1: radio data channel
D1–D2–D3: RS DCC data communication channel [192 Kb/s (TMN bytes for regenerator
section)];
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 102 / 514
514
2.7.5.2 Regenerator Case
As far as the 9600LSY Regenerator, it allows the management of:

– Termination of RS–OH or RFCOH bytes to auxiliary ports

– RS–OH – RFCOH bytes cross connection
The following Tab. 12. shows for the Regenerator the possible AUX/EOW user interfaces suitable to
access the terminated channels:
Tab. 12. Reg. AUX/EOW user interfaces
USER INTERFACES QUANTITY
9600 baud with interface V24/V28 (selectable) 1
64 Kb/s G.703 (one is 64/128Kb/s selectable) 3
64 Kb/s V11 3
64/128 Kb/s V11 (SW configurable) 1
64 Kb/s G.703 (Party line) 1
Voice frequency (E1) (EOW) 1
Voice frequency (E1) (Party line) 3
Voice frequency (point to point between adjacent radio sections) 1
Among them it is possible to choose, by software pre–setting, up to six 64 Kbit/s channels plus one voice
frequency channel (EOW), to be transmitted radio side in 1+1 protected way and to be dropped and
inserted in every radio station.
With reference to Tab. 10. on page 101, the RS–OH bytes terminated line side may be in principle mapped
upon software configuration control in the following interfaces as summarized in the following table:
USER INTERFACES
RFCOH bytes (line side) [1] EOW
V.11 V.24 G.703
(Q 23)
E1 X X X X
F1 X X X
d,f,n [2] X X X
Notes:
[1] For the DCCR (D1–D3) and J0 the interfaces is towards SC
[2] max 14 bytes d,n,f.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 103 / 514
514
With reference to Tab. 11. on page 101, the RS–OH bytes terminated radio side through the RFCOH
function may be in principle mapped upon software configuration control in the following interfaces as
summarized in the following table:

USER INTERFACES

RFCOH bytes (radio side) [1] EOW
V.11 V.24 G.703
(Q 23)
E1 X X X X
F1 X X X
5 bytes out of d,f,n X X X
Note:
[1] For the DCCR (D1–D3) and k0 the interface is towards SC
Practically common usage of user interfaces and possible mapping is:
– E1 always terminated on the EOW two ways (line side and radio side)
– F1 plus max 3 bytes accessible (normally radio side) through the user interfaces 2 x 64 Kb/s, 1 x
V11 and 1 x V24.
– Each interface (with the exception of the voice type ) supports only one direction; the same byte can
be assigned to different direction (for example line side and radio side) using 2 interfaces.
Way Side Traffic (WST)
Additionally, the regenerator allows the transmission, radio side, of one 2 Mb/s Way Side Traffic (WST)
that represents a service traffic in addition to the main one.
Both the WST and service channels are transmitted using the radio frame complementary overhead
(RFCOH, an arbitrary and unstandardized extra SDH frame overhead).
The main features of the 2 Mbit/s WST Channels management are the following:
– STM–1 capacity:
One 2 Mbit/s Way Side Traffic can be inserted in each STM–1 channel whatever is the channel
spacing (28, 29, 29,65, 30, 40 MHz) used in the channel plans.
– STM–0 capacity:
No 2 Mbit/s Way Side Traffic can be inserted.
– WST protection:
WST can be transmitted in unprotected way, one for each radio channel, by means of the interfaces
(1.0/2.3 – 75 Ohm coax male connectors) allocated in the access area of the subrack.
The possibility to transmit one 2Mb/s WST stream in protected way (on channels 0 and 1 ) is also
given. In this case the access is located on the front panel of Service unit that hosts the WST switching
functionality.
Automatic switching criteria are : Signal Fail (SF), HBER, LBER and EW.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 104 / 514
514
2.7.5.3 WMSN Case
WMSN functionality is realized utilizing a1650SM–C add–drop multiplexer .

When WMSN functionality is implemented, all the accesses to services are located on the 1650SM–C unit,
and the ones located on the regenerator section no longer are no longer utilized.
For the description of the available service channels relevant to this unit, please refer to 1650SM–C
Technical Handbook.
For an easy clarification about the service accesses, hereafter the front view of the 1650SM–C view is
reported in Fig. 47. herebelow. The service access ports are located on the SERGI card:
– for the DCCR (D1–D3) and J0 the interfaces is towards SC

– for the DCCM (D4–D12) , S1 and M1 the interface is towards SC.
– POH bytes of terminated VC–4
In particular, the SERGI unit supplies the access to the auxiliary channels (A) and to the 2 Mb/s Service
stream (B) . Moreover, the connection for the telephone jack is present (C).
(A)
(B)
(C)
1650SM–C
SERGI
Fig. 47. 1650SM–C and unit SERGI front view

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 105 / 514
514
2.7.5.4 Engineering Order Wire characteristic
The EOW Channel allows the access to the phone services of the system.
It is interfaced with the telephone set with DTMF (Dual Tone Multi Frequency) Tones and with association

circuits, branching, exchange and receiving of the phone signal.

The EOW Channel allows the following types of linking:
– between two station (selective call)
– between one station and all the others (omnibus call)
– between one and more stations called in selective mode (multi selective call).
Numbering System
The compatibility with the actual generation of devices is guaranteed by the type of numbering used, with
the two digits that identify the actual
The above statement, limited the max number of devices linked in 90.
Is important to remember that the numbers available are from 10 to 99.
The omnibus call number is identify in the number 00, as in the actual boards.
The multi–selective call can be utilized connecting in conference mode up to the maximum number of
available telephone numbers (90).
This new release is full compatible with the current systems, except few new features here below
described:
– Introduction of the time checks during a phone’s call.
– Automatic ring management (Routing)
A second voice channel is also available for voice transmission in point to point link between adjacent
regenerator terminals. The interface is present on the connector area of the baseband equipment and
the channel can be addressed on one byte of RFCOH .
In case of WMSN configuration it is possible also to connect by cable the service to 1650SM–C unit to be
inserted in MSOH and to be available in MST sections.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 106 / 514
514
2.7.5.5 Data Channel Characteristics
a) In case of G.703 64 Kbit/s co–directional interface the timing signals (64 KHz and 8 KHz) are derived
from the data stream.
Fig. 48. G.703 64 Kbit/s co–directional interface
b) In case of RS422 A V11/V24 64 Kbit/s contra–directional interface the timing signal (64 KHz and 8
KHz) are directed towards the user. The code is NRZ.
Fig. 49. RS422 A V11/V24 64 Kbit/s contra–directional interface

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 107 / 514
514
c) In case of RS232C V24/V28 asynchronous up to 9600 baud no timing signals are required. The signal
is internally over sampled up to 64 KHZ. The code is NRZ.

Fig. 50. RS232C V24/V28 asynchronous interface
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 108 / 514
514
2.8 Synchronization
2.8.1 Foreword
This paragraph describes in detail the Synchronization features of 9600LSY family, and comprehends the
following main paragraphs:
– para.2.8.2 herebelow Introduction

– para.2.8.3 herebelow Synchronization in Regenerator station
– para.2.8.4 herebelow Synchronization in WMSN station by means of 1650SM–C ADM

2.8.2 Introduction
SDH transmission operates on general principles that implies the existence of timing devices that form
part of a synchronizing network.
Different behaviors for synchronization are present depending from the type of station either Regenerator
or WMSN.
2.8.3 Synchronization in Regenerator station
In this case each incoming STM1 stream takes the network synchronization that is recovered by the
equipment and forwarded to the radio hop or to the line re–timing the transmitted signal by means of the
recovered clock.
The regenerator does not need any other synchronization circuit.
2.8.4 Synchronization in WMSN station by means of 1650SM–C ADM
The synchronization requirements implies that a WMSN equipment must include a synchronization
subsystem for a slave clock which functions are specified in ITU–T Rec. G.783 as the Synchronous
Equipment Timing Source (SETS).
The Alcatel 9600LSY radio families are provided with 1650SM–C ADM unit that supplies such
functionalities.
By selecting the external or internal reference source, the equipment works synchronized to the reference.
The 1650SM–C unit can automatically change the reference involved if the selected one is not correct
or can holdover the ”operation mode” if no input reference is available.
1650SM–C supplies the synchronizing and timing signals to all the equipment units (N.B.) by selecting
the synchronizing signal among the available input references.
To this purpose the unit can:
– select the reference source involved;
– change the reference (or mode) when it losses synchronism;
– lock the Local Oscillator to the reference available;
– work in Hold Over/Free Running LO mode when all references are lost.
N.B. In a radio terminal only the ADM takes directly the synchronism from the internal
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
synchronization path, while units of other subracks take indirectly the synchronism by means
of its own phase locked oscillators (e.g. modemodulators). Finally there are units that do not
need synchronism at all (e.g. units of transceiver).
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 109 / 514
514
The “Compact ADM unit” also provides an output synchronization signal at 2.048 MHz with an interface
according G.703 (T4 signal in G783)
This signal is squelched when the unit is working in Free Running or in Hold Over modes.
A maximum of 6 independent references can be defined by mixing type and PDH/SDH parts (the selection

is accomplished by means of craft terminal).

The selection may happen between:
– timing reference signals coming from the TTF blocks on Compact–ADM (T1 signal in G783)
– timing reference signals coming from the SDH ports (T1 signal in G783)
– 2.048 MHz signal coming from the PDH ports (T2 signal)
– 2.048 MHz clock coming from external source (T3 signal in G783)
The choice of the sources can be made in independent manner for the internal clock reference output and
for the external 2 MHz output.
By Craft Terminal it is also possible either to enable or to disable the Timing Marker algorithm.
The automatic selection of one of the possible synchronization sources is performed on the base of quality
(SSM algorithm) or priority criteria:
a) Priority Algorithm
See flow chart in Fig. 51. on page 112.
The reference source choice is performed checking the signal quality by detecting for every STM–1
synchronization source:
• LOS (= LOS + MS–AIS + LOF + EXC–BER)

• DRIFT
and for every 2 Bit/s interface or synchronous tributary selected as source:
• LOS (= LOS + AIS + LOF)

• DRIFT
• LOF (+ LOM + CRC4 MISMATCH) For 2 Mbit/s interface only
b) SSM Algorithm
See flow chart in Fig. 52. on page 113.
If the Timing Marker procedure is enabled, the CRU checks the S1 Bytes from the synchronous frame
of the selected sources and the preset value of the 2 Mbit/s sources then, by the SSM algorithm,
chooses the better source to be used.
The SSM algorithm is in compliance with ETSI DE/TM 1015–6.
The two Algorithms define synchronization source, by switching the reference.
The switch between the source is hitless.
The switch from one reference to the other one occurs without passing through the Holdover mode.
The reference, sent to the PLL circuits, generates the 622 MHz signal used for internal
synchronization.
The PLL can operates in these following different modes:
• Normal
The PLL output is frequency locked to one of the selected references.
• Holdover
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
In absence of an external reference, the ”clock” stored the frequency difference to the last
reference.
This information is used to fix the oscillator frequency value.
The holdover mode guarantees .37 ppm of frequency drift within the first 24 h
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 110 / 514
514
• Free running
Without any reference and information stored in memory, the VCO oscillates at its natural
frequency.
Frequency variations can be due to temperature variations, components degradation etc.
The free running stability is ± 4.6 ppm. The following setting can also be managed by Craft
Terminal:
• Lock out
The command allows to disable/enable a timing input from being considered as possible source
of timing.
• Forced switch
The command allows to force the selection of a timing input.
If the source forced becomes unavailable, the internal oscillator will be selected.
• Manual selection of timing source

The command allows to force the selection of a timing input.
If the source manual selected becomes unavailable, the manual mode is terminated and
automatic selection algorithm is initiated.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 111 / 514
514
The allowable timing references, pointing by S, must be arranged according to decreasing priority
level (i.e. priority level of timing reference pointing by Sj is y than priority level of Sj+1)
Fig. 51. Synchronization Reference Source Priority Algorithm Flow Chart

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 112 / 514
514
The allowable timing references, pointing by S, must be arranged according to decreasing priority
level (i.e. priority level of timing reference pointing by Sj is >= than priority level of Sj+1).
Fig. 52. SSM Algorithm Flow Chart

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 113 / 514
514
2.9 Equipment Control
2.9.1 Foreword

This paragraph introduces the Equipment control features of 9600LSY family, and comprehends the
following main paragraphs:
– para.2.9.2 herebelow Introduction

– para.2.9.3 on page 115 The NE architecture
– para.2.9.4 on page 117 The F interface
– para.2.9.5 on page 117 The Qecc/QB3 interface
– para.2.9.6 on page 118 ECT and RECT
2.9.2 Introduction
9600LSY Digital Radio Relay Systems cannot operate correctly without Control and Management
Functions which are usually partially embedded as Synchronous Equipment Management Function
(SEMF) and Message Communication Function (MCF) in the involved Network elements..
Equipment control may be performed locally through an Equipment Craft Terminal (1320 CT) or remotely
through a Craft Terminal in a remote site.
External control units may be dedicated to a Radio subnetwork or may be the Control Elements of an SDH
Network including Radio Links, Fiber Optic Lines, Synchronous Multiplexers and Cross–Connect
Equipment.
Inside an overall Managed Telecommunication Network, SDH Digital Radio Relay Systems are part of a
Managed Synchronous Network. The 9600LSY DRRS equipment interfaces the TMN according to ETSI
Standard and ITU–T Rec G.784, G.773 and ITU–R Rec 750.
The architecture of the management process, which is intrinsically a distributed process based on
Manager and Agent Functions, may influence in the design, the Equipment Control Architecture and the
identification of the Network Elements to be managed.
To connect SDH Radio Equipment to a TMN System Q–type Interfaces are used, adopting the standard
Infomodel based Q–Type Interfaces Qecc and QB3 for a full integration in a multivendor environment.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 114 / 514
514
2.9.3 The NE architecture
A Digital Radio Relay Link identified as a Radio Switching Section is composed of two Radio Relay
Terminals (RRT). Each physical entity RRT is a SDH NEs and therefore according to ITU–T Rec G.784
they must have TMN Q3 and Qecc Interfaces.

All the SDH NE must be able to terminate the Regenerator Section (RS).
Two types of RRT are available depending on the ability to terminate a Multiplex Section (MS) or a
Regenerator Section (RS) only. This ability is required when the RRT having PDH tributaries (140 Mb/s,
2, 34 or 45 Mb/s) behaves like an SDH Multiplexer (i.e. WMSN station composed at least by two NEs:
1650SMC + LHR). When the RRT has SDH tributaries this ability is not strictly required and therefore the
RRT may be equipped with an RRA (Radio Regenerator Adaptation) Assembly (Regenerator station
equal to the NE LHR/LHRC).
Associated to the RS and the MS there are in the SOH of the SDH frame two Embedded Control Channels
(having as physical interfaces the D1–D3 bytes in the RS–OH and D4–D12 bytes in the MS–OH) carrying
the management information between the ends of the RS and MS respectively. These channels are
terminated in the Message Communication Function (MCF), located in the Equipment Controller of the
NE, which behaves like a Packet Switching Node. The communication interface of these channels on the
physical interfaces D1–D3 and D4–D12 is a 7–layer full OSI protocol stack as defined in ITU–T Rec G.784
named Qecc.
While the inter–site or inter–office communications links between SDH NEs will normally be formed from
the SDH ECCs, within a particular site (intra–site connections) or when the SDH NE is acting as Gateway
Network Element (GNE) towards a Data Communication Network connecting the NE with an Operation
System (OS) a 7–layer full OSI protocol stack named QBX is used. QBX is a Q3 type interface and with
reference to the foreseen protocol suites: QB1 is a Connection oriented over X.25 (CONS1) interface, QB2
is a Connectionless Mode over X.25 (CLNS2) interface and QB3 is a Connectionless Mode over ISO 8802
LAN interface.
The previous Q–type interfaces in their standardized versions implies the use of a Management
Application Software based on an object–oriented Information Model and the use at the 7th layer of the
OSI stack of protocols as CMISE, ROSE and ACSE.
The availability on the NE of all these Q–Type TMN interfaces do not imply the contemporary use of all
of them. Their use and the criteria for selecting them is the TMN network designer responsibility according
to the management traffic load and the network layout. The only limitation imposed by standards is that
in the RRRs (and obviously in the RRTs equipped with RRA) the only RS–OH has to be terminated
whereas the MSOH has to be passed–through.
As far as the QB3 and Qecc interfaces is concerned the following criteria in their use have been adopted.
In the WMSN station equipped with the Mux assembly, on the line side the DCC bytes of the MS–OH and
the RS–OH are transferred to the MCF and then processed by the SEMF or re–routed by the MCF to their
destination. While the DCCM bytes of the MS–OH are reinserted in the SDH frame, the DCCR bytes of
the RS–OH are reinserted in the SDH frame through the RFCOH and MODEM units with 1+1 protection
(Radio Channel 1 and 0). In the Regenerator station, while the DCCR of the RS–OH are processed in the
same way as previously described, the MS–OH remains untouched and is carried transparently.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 115 / 514
514
STATION A STATION B

TR TR

radio channels x,y
(N.B.)
D1–D3
MD MD
radio channels x,y RPS RPS radio channels x,y

(N.B.) (N.B.)
radio channels x,y
D4–D12 D4–D12 D4–D12
D1–D3 RRA RRA D1–D3
SEMF SEMF
F F
MCF MCF
1320CT
QB3 QB3
ECT for Station A

RECT for Station B
Fig. 53. DCC management: Regenerator case
STATION A (REG.) STATION B (WMSN)
TR radio channels x,y TR

(N.B.)
D1–D3
MD MD
RPS radio channels x,y RPS

(N.B.)
D4–D12 D4–D12 D4–D12
D1–D3 RRA RRA MUX D1–D3
D1–D3
SEMF SEMF SEMF
F
MCF MCF MCF
F
1320CT 1320CT
QB3 QB3
ECT for Station A ECT for Station B

RECT for Station B RECT for Station A
Fig. 54. DCC management: WMSN case
N.B. The couple of radio channels (x,y in Fig. 53. and Fig. 54. above) which carry the protected
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
service channel (as well as the WST channels, if any) is defined via software. These channels
can be chosen among the five couples defined in Tab. 8. on page 50.
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 116 / 514
514
2.9.4 The F interface
The ”F” interface is the control interface connecting a Craft Terminal to a Equipment Controller.
The F interface is not a standard interface since in TMN there is only the F interface as reference point
between WSF (Work Station Function) and OSF (Operation System Function) and the F interface is not
yet standardized.
An F interface has been standardized for all the ALCATEL equipment and is using the following protocols:
– Physical Layer:
Standard: EIA RS232C/ITU–T V24–V28
Type: Point–to–point, Asynchronous full Duplex
Transmission rate: 38600 bit/s
Connector: 9 pin female Sub D
– Data Link Layer:

Asynchronous HDLC standard protocol
ISO 3309 – ISO 4335 – ISO 7809
In 9600LSY terminal regenerator, F interface is located on the front panel of the System Controller unit.
In case of WMSN configuration, F interface available on 1650SM–C unit is the one to be utilized as terminal
interface and represents the unique access to the terminal. In this case, by means of RECT software it
is possible to control, besides all the other terminals, also the functionality of the “regeneration” section
of the WMSN terminal. For this reason, the RECT option has to be always foreseen in case of WMSN
functionality.
2.9.5 The Qecc/QB3 interface
In the TMN (Telecommunication Management Network) Architecture, while Qecc is the communication
interface on the DCCs (Data Communication Channel) used as ECCs (Embedded Control Channel) in a
SDH Subnetwork, the QB3 interface is used to interface the SDH Subnetwork to the OSs, usually through
a DCN (Data Communication Network). The Gateway Function performing the protocol conversion (from
Qecc to QB3 and vice versa) is carried out by the GNE (Gateway Network Element) of the subnetwork.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 117 / 514
514
2.9.6 ECT and RECT
ECT

ALCATEL TMN management products 1320 CT called Craft Terminals (CT) consists of a compatible

personal computer and application software specially developed for monitoring transmission
equipment. The CT designed to monitor a single transmission equipment is called Equipment Craft
Terminal (ECT) or 1320 CT.
For each station an ALCATEL proprietary Software Package (SWP) is to be employed:
• SWP REG. 9600LSY for the Regenerator station
• and, additionally, SWP 1650SMC for the WMSN station.
The Equipment Craft Terminal, connected to the F interface of the Equipment Controller, enable an
operator to perform locally the following Element Management functions:
• Equipment Management
• Transmission Management
• Test management
• External points management
• Alarm (fault) management
• Synchronization management
• Radio Management
• Performance Monitoring Management
• Event log manager
• Overhead Management
• Connection Management
• Software Management
• Communication and Routing Management
• Security Management
• Support Management
RECT
The Remote Equipment Craft Terminal is a feature only present in the Single NE Link architecture
which allows the local operator, using an ECT connected to the F interface of the Equipment
Controller, to zoom and perform a complete set of management operations on all the reachable SDH
NEs in the SDH.
The Remote NE can be physically reached through QB3/Qecc.
The Remote Craft Terminal feature applies in NR5 to both Q3 and QB3* NEs, with the exception of
DXC. The feature is basically the same as for NR3 NEs, with the usual difference related to the
support of TSD–IM interface for the management of Q3 NEs.
Despite the fact that this is supposed to be a NE related feature, it becomes a network feature
considering that the network can be composed of both Q3 and QB3* NEs and that an harmonization
is necessary between the two technologies.
The IM–CT is able to manage both Q3 and QB3* NEs (in the sense that both QB3* and Q3 application
are working simultaneously), but it shall be connected to a Q3 NE. Viceversa Nectas CT will keep
on being able to manage only QB3* NEs, and it shall obviously be connected to a QB3* NE.
It’s worth reminding that R–ECT can be connected to any NE pertaining to the same area of the local
NE and to any NE pertaining to different areas (assuming that the DCN network has been correctly
designed and hence inter–area communication is possible from networking viewpoint).
As far as DXC is concerned, the R–ECT feature is not supported, i.e. a DXC CT can be connected
to only one DXC at a time.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 118 / 514
514
Of course, due to the limitation of the physical resources in the Equipment Controller of the NE, some
network design constraints must be taken into account as the total number of managed NEs (64),
the number of the QB3 NEs (32), the number of the QB3* NEs (32), the number of associations
permanently open (31) between the CT and the remote NEs.
The RECT features and limitations are briefly the following:
1) The RECT function provides a remote login facility similar to those offered by an OS to manage
several configured NEs, included the local one.
2) The contemporaneous presence of the RECT function and an OS is possible. The access
disable flag avoids access conflict between the OS and both RECT and ECT on some
operations as configuration modification and remote control with access filtering.
3) The NE which may be remotely controlled by a RECT must be configured and must be loaded
with the same SW version supporting the RECT function. A NE not supporting RECT function
shall refuse the incoming association issued by a RECT and the ECT displays only local
information.
4) Only three RECTs shall be active at a time over one NE. The coexistence of ECTs and RECTs
in the whole network is guaranteed since the conflict in configuring the QB3 NEs is solved locally
by the NE itself.
5) The operator, through the RECT function, is able to see the alarm synthesis of the whole
network .
6) In a SDH network the maximum number of QB3 NEs equipped with the RECT function are 32
and the maximum number of NEs (QB3* NEs and QB3 NEs) manageable by the RECT function
are 64. These figures identify what it is understood as ”small SDH network” for which the RECT
function may substitute the Element Manager.
N.B. Refer to CT Operator’s Handbooks listed in Tab. 79. on page 468, Tab. 82. on page 470, and
para.18.2.2.2 on page 471 for further information on:
– HW and SW requirement of the PC to be used as ECT and RECT

– detailed description of ECT and RECT functionalities and operations allowed.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 119 / 514
514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
120 / 514
3 PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION
3.1 Introduction
This chapter gives detailed operative information regarding:
– the equipment’s items (P/Ns, equipping rules, labels for remote inventory)
– their physical and logical position in the system
– the unit assembly/subassembly and front panel drawings, with the usage description of the access
points (connectors, visual indicators, buttons)
– hardware setting description
Please refer to chapter 4 on page 175 detailed operative information regarding:

– system cabling
– pinout description of connectors for Customer usage
and is organized as follows:
– Part list: on page 122
– Rack and shelves summary: on page 126
– Top Rack Unit (TRU) on page 128
– Board provisioning and expansion guideline in BB & TR shelves on page 129, including:
• General equipping rules on page 129
• Channel provisioning/expansion guideline on page 131
– Base Band shelf on page 134, including:

• Base Band shelf unit layout and equipping rules on page 135
• SYSTEM CONTROLLER unit operative information on page 140
• SERVICE unit operative information on page 144
• RRA–CHANNEL unit operative information on page 147
• RRA–STANDBY unit operative information on page 149
• MODEM unit operative information on page 150
• PSU and PSF units operative information on page 153
• Additional Housekeeping unit operative information on page 154
• Kit Loudspeaker operative information on page 155
– Transceiver shelf on page 156, including:

• Transceiver shelf unit layout on page 156
• Equipping rules of Transceiver units or substitutive Dummy Plates on page 156
• Composition of transceiver units on page 157
• TRANSCEIVER unit operative information on page 158
– Branching on page 168, including:

• Branching drawings and Branching–Transceivers connections on page 168
• Branching Front Plate Kit (Rx branching area) on page 168
– FANS shelf and FANS assembled unit on page 169, including:

• FANS shelf equipping rules on page 169
• FANS assembled unit equipping rules on page 169
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
• FANS assembled unit operative information on page 171
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 121 / 514
514
3.2 Part list
Tab. 13. 9600LSY Part list – Common parts (frequency independent)

REF [x] is used in other parts of this handbook to refer to the item.
ANV P/N MAX EQUIP.
REF NAME POS
Factory P/N Qty RULES
RACK AND TRU
3AN44815AA––
[1] OPTINEX RACK WITH TRU 1
282501018 (A) in Fig. 55.
page 126 para.
3AN44816AA––
[2] OPTINEX RACK WITHOUT TRU 1 2.4.2
282501019
page 51
3DB00734AA–– (B) in Fig. 55.
[3] TRU 1
593230032 page 126
1AB162710001
CIRCUIT BREAKER 1A 72VDC
001791351
1AB162710002
001791352
1AB162710003
001791353
1AB162710005
[4] CIRCUIT BREAKER 10A 72VDC para.3.4 page 128
001791355
1AB162710006
001791356
1AB162710007
001791357
3DB03114AA––
KIT FUSERBREAKER
299702945
SUBRACKS
3DB02143AA–– (D) in Fig. 55.
[5] SUBRACK 2G LH 1
593230033 page 126
3DB02294AA–– (G) in Fig. 55.
[6] RT SUBRACK 1
593230034 page 126
(E) , (L)
3DB03242AA––
[7] FANS SUBRACK H=50 2 in Fig. 55.
593230036 para. 3.9
page 126
page 169
3DB03238AA–– (A) in Fig. 91.
[8] FANS ASSEMBLED 3
411200559 page 169
Tab. 13. continues ...

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 122 / 514
514
ANV P/N MAX EQUIP.
REF NAME POS
SYSTEM WIRING
3DB02842AA––
[9] CABLE KIT COMMON PARTS 1
299702891
CABLE KIT 1 CHANNEL NO 3DB02843AA––
[10] 8
SPACE DIV. 299702892
CABLE KIT 1 CHANNEL WITH 3DB02844AA––
[11] 8
SPACE DIV 299702893
CABLE KIT FOR REUSE 3DB02845AA––
[12] 4
(1 RACK) 299702894
CABLE KIT FOR REUSE 3DB02846AA––

[13] 8
(2 RACKS) 299702895 para.4.3
CABLE KIT FOR 1 EXTEN. 3DB03202AA–– on page 183
[14] 8
CHANNEL FOR WMSN 299702950
3DB03264AA––
[15] FANS UNIT CABLE KIT 1
299702953
FANS UNIT EXTENSION 3DB03266AA––
[16] 1
CABLE KIT 299702954
PLUGS KIT COMMON PART 3DB03213AA––
1
(LSY) 299702951
PLUGS KIT 1 CHANNEL 3DB03214AA––
8
EXTENSION (LSY) 299702952

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 123 / 514
514
ANV P/N MAX EQUIP.
REF NAME POS

RSA/RRA
3DB02147AA–– (C) in Fig. 64.
[17] RRA CHANNEL 8
411200537 page 135 Tab. 19.
3DB02151AA–– (G) in Fig. 64. pg 137
[18] RRA STANDBY 1
411200538 page 135
3DB02136AA––
[19] MODEM LH STM1 – 1WST 8
411200535 Tab. 20.
3DB02140AA–– pg 138
[20] MODEM LH STM0 – 0WST 8
411200536
(D) in Fig. 64.
3DB00829AA–– page 135 Tab. 20.
[21] CANC–COMB STM1 16
487210334 pg 138
&
3DB03373AA–– Fig. 74.
[22] CANC–COMB STM0 8
487210822 pg 151
3DB02155AA––
[23] SERVICE 1
411200539 (B) in Fig. 64. Tab. 18.
3DB02158AA–– page 135 pg 136
[24] ADDITIONAL VOICE 1
483200156
3DB02162AA–– (A) in Fig. 64. Tab. 16.
[25] SYSTEM CONTROLLER 1
411200540 page 135 pg 136
48MB FLASH CARD 1AB15177001
[26]
(standard) 084617912 Fig. 65. Tab. 16.
1
FLASH CARD 80MB 1AB15050001 page 140 pg 136
[27]
(for future applications) 084617902
3DB02740AA–– (H) in Fig. 55. Tab. 17.
[28] ADDITIONAL HOUSEKEEPING 1
411200550 page 126 pg 136
3DB00619AA–– (E) in Fig. 64. Tab. 21.
[29] DC/DC CONVERTER BB 2G LH 8
478200004 page 135 pg 138
(F) in Fig. 64.
3DB01806AA–– Tab. 23.
[30] FILTER P.S.U. 5.3/3.4V 2 page 135
478200006 pg 139
OPTICAL MODULES
3AL78815AA––
[31] S–1.1 OPTIC.INTERF. FC/PC 8 (C) , (G)
474166420 Tab. 19.
in Fig. 64.
3AL78815AB–– pg 137
[32] S–1.1 OPTIC. INTERF. SC/PC 8 page 135
474166424

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 124 / 514
514
ANV P/N MAX EQUIP.
REF NAME POS
EQUIPMENT ACCESSORIES
BRANCHING FRONT PLATE 3DB03382AA–– (F) in Fig. 55. Tab. 28.
[33] 1
KIT 299702965 page 126 pg 168
(C) + (D)
3AN49589AA––
[34] DUMMY PLATE W40 (RRA) 8 in Fig. 64.
299701212 Tab. 22.
page 135
pg 139
DUMMY PLATE L40 (DC/DC 3DB03010AA–– (E) inFig. 64.
[35] 8
CONV.) 299702912 page 135
3DB03190AA–– (A) in Fig. 79. Tab. 27.
[36] RT FRONT PLATE KIT 8
299702947 page 156 pg 156
3DB03609AA–– Fig. 92. Tab. 29.

[37] COVER 2
261202666 page 171 pg 169
3DB04125AA–– (J) in Fig. 55. Tab. 24.
[38] KIT LOUDSPEAKER 1
299722014 page 126 pg 139
3CY07335AA–– para.3.6.3
[39] TELEPHONE KIT (DTMF) 1
299702019 on page 144
3DB03008AA––
[40] LSY SYSTEM TOOL KIT 1
299702910 para.7.3.2
3DB03007AA–– on page 358
[41] LSY MAINTENANCE TOOL KIT 1
299702909
3DB01926AA–– t.b.d.
DISTRIBUTOR FRAME M.W.W. 1
487239034 future release
TRANSCEIVERS: Refer to part lists specific for each frequency (i.e. specific chapter listed in
Tab. 67. on page 414).
SOFTWARE AND SOFTWARE LICENCES: Refer to Operator’s Handbooks listed in Tab. 79. on
page 468
INSTALLATION MATERIALS: Refer to Installation Handbook ref.[E] on page 469
DOCUMENTATION: Refer to para.18.2 on page 466.
end of Tab. 13.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 125 / 514
514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
C
J
Legend on page 127
955.203.292 Q
REGENERATOR
3.3 Rack and shelves summary
F
E
H
D
G
A
B
J
Fig. 55. Rack and shelves layout

WMSN
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
I
126 / 514
Tab. 14. Rack and shelves
POS in P/N DESCRIPTION

NAME
Fig. 55. (REF in Tab. 13. on page 122)
OPTINEX RACK WITH TRU [1]

(A) OPTINEX RACK WITHOUT para.2.4.2 on page 51
[2]
TRU
(B) TRU [3] para.3.4 on page 128
ADDITIONAL
(C) [28] para.3.6.8 on page 154
HOUSEKEEPING
(D) SUBRACK 2G LH [5] para.3.6 on page 134
(E)
FANS SUBRACK H=50 [7] para.3.9 on page 169
(L)
Area for Rx branching –– para.3.8.1 on page 168

(F) BRANCHING FRONT
[33] para.3.8.2 on page 168
PLATE KIT
(G) RT SUBRACK [6] para.3.7.1 on page 156
(H) Area for Tx branching –– para.3.8.1 on page 168
(I) 1650SM–C –– para.2.4.5 on page 58
(J) KIT LOUDSPEAKER [38] para.3.6.9 on page 155

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 127 / 514
514
3.4 Top Rack Unit (TRU)
The T.R.U. subrack is located at the rack top area of the OPTINEX rack and appears as follows:

RED (1)
RED (2)
YELLOW
GREEN
1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B
BREAKERS BREAKERS
BATTERY “A” BATTERY “B”
Fig. 56. Top Rack Unit front view
The main functions are:
a) Power supply distribution to all the functional blocks present in the rack.
It is possible to distribute the two battery voltages up to 6 functional blocks installed into the rack.
All the output voltages are protected by automatic circuit breakers (up to 12).
In general, the choice of the breakers, existing also for lower current ranges, has to be chosen
following the effective current consumption needed by the subracks.
Maximum current supplied by each battery shall not exceed 60 A.
Tab. 15. TRU breaker utilization in 9600 LSY/LHR

MAX NOMINAL
BREAKER CIRCUIT
USAGE ABSORBED ABSORBED
NUMBER BREAKER
POWER (W) CURRENT (A)
1A and 1B transceiver slot 1 to 5 335 12.5 15 A
2A and 2B transceiver slot 6 to 10 335 12.5 15 A
3A and 3B baseband subrack 250 9.5 10 A
4A and 4B ADM 1650 SM–C see 1650 SM–C documentation 4A
5A and 5B FANS for BB subrack 40 1.5 2A
6A and 6B FANS for ADM subrack 40 1.5 2A
N.B. The value of circuit breakers is determined as follows:
Circuit Breaker (A) = [ (Max Absorbed Power (W)) / (Nominal Battery Voltage (48V)) * 1.5 * 1.2]
For circuit breaker and Fuserbreaker P/Ns see REF.NO TAG in Tab. 13. on page 122
b) Station alarm management

A rack lamp unit is inserted in the TRU box to display the rack alarm general indications.
For the lamp meaning description, please refer to para.7.4.2 on page 363.
c) Extension Q2 bus unit or rack alarm distribution unit (optional units, in alternative).
Top Rack Unit Hardware settings

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Please refer to OPTINEX rack specific documentation (see para.18.2.2.1 on page 471).
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 128 / 514
514
3.5 Board provisioning and expansion guideline in BB & TR shelves
3.5.1 General equipping rules

According to Fig. 57. herebelow and Fig. 58. on page 130:
a) in Base Band shelf, units SYSCO, SERV, PSF–1 and PSF–2 are always equipped
b) the number associated to RRA, MD and PSU groups is related to physical (but not necessarily also
logical) channel (0 – 9). The same number identifies the associated TRI
PHYSICAL CHANNEL BASE BAND SHELF TR SHELF

0 RRA–0 MD–0 PSU–0 TRI–0
.... .... .... .... ....
c) only 8 RRA, MD and PSU groups and the associated TRI can be equipped at most. The slot positions
that must be used depend on the system configuration; in particular:
1) with single polarization configurations, RRA, MD, PSU and TRI groups must be equipped in
the logical number sequence 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 (see Fig. 59. on page 131).
Thus, in these configurations, RRA, MD, PSU and TRI groups 8 and 9 are never equipped, as
ÉÉÉÉ
depicted in Fig. 57. herebelow;
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
S
S R R R R R R M R M R M R M R M
M
ÉÉÉÉ
Y M M M M
E R R R R R R D R D R D R D R D
S R D D D D D
ÉÉÉÉ
A A A A A A 5 A 6 A 7 A 8 A 9
C V 0 1 2 3 4
ÉÉÉÉ
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
O
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
P P P P P P P P P P P P
S S S S S S S S S S S S
F
1
U
0
U
1
U
2
U
3
U
4
U
5
U
6
U
7 ÉÉÉÉ
U
ÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉ
8
U
9
F
2
UNITS
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ NEVER
EQUIPPED
T T T T
R
T T T T
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
T T
ÉÉÉÉÉ
R R R R R R R R R
I I I I I I I I I I
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
8 9
ÉÉÉÉÉ
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 57. Layout of max 8 channels in single polarization configurations
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 129 / 514
514
2) with double polarization configurations, RRA, MD, PSU and TRI groups must be equipped in
the sequence 0, 8, .... (see Fig. 60. on page 132, Fig. 61. on page 133 and Fig. 62. on page
133).

Thus, in these configurations, RRA, MD, PSU and TRI groups 4 and 5 are never equipped, as

depicted in Fig. 58. herebelow;
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
S
Y
E R
S R
R R R
M
R
M
R
M
R
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
M
R
R
R M R M
M
R D R D
R M
R D
R M R M
R D R D
ÉÉÉÉ
S R D D D D D
A A A A A A 5 A 6 A 7 A 8 A 9
ÉÉÉÉ
C V 0 1 2 3 4
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
O
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
F U U U U U U U U U U F
1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2
ÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ
UNITS
NEVER
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
EQUIPPED
ÉÉÉÉ
T T T T T T T T T T
ÉÉÉÉ
R R R R R R R R R R
ÉÉÉÉ
I I I I I I I I I I
3
ÉÉÉÉ
0 1 2 4 5 6 7 8 9
ÉÉÉÉ
Fig. 58. Layout of max 8 channels in double polarization configurations
d) in the unused slots, dummy plates mus be equipped to ensure EMC performance as well as
equipment correct ventilation;
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 130 / 514
514
3.5.2 Channel provisioning/expansion guideline
9600 LSY is a fully expansible radio system. It means that, starting from the minimum 1+1 / 2+0
configuration, it is possible to increase the traffic capacity adding to the station the units necessary to
increase the number of radio channels up to the maximum allowed by the configuration.
Hereafter the expansion procedure is reported with the help of some figures illustrating the slots to be used
to house the added transceivers inside the mechanical assembly. Please, keep in mind that for the
RRA/modem units the same procedure is still valid; it means that the Base Band shelf’s slots
corresponding to those utilized for the transceiver will host the associated RRA/modem units. In this way
the connections between transceivers and relevant modem units is realized by vertical parallel coaxial
cables, without cable cross–connections.
a) If the branching unit utilizes a single polarization, the transceivers and the branching unit will be
added using the slots starting from left and going toward the right side of the subrack, as shown in
the next Fig. 59.
The maximum channel number depends on the channel plan. In every case the maximum number
of transceiver that can be housed in the subrack is 8.
The slot used for the protection transceiver (slot 1) is fixed and it is the first on the left of the subrack.
The example reported in the figure is limited to 4 channels.
1+1/2+0 configuration expansion to 2+1/3+0 expansion to 3+1/4+0
H (V)
Fig. 59. Single polarization per rack expansion procedure in the transceiver subrack
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 131 / 514
514
b) If the branching unit utilizes two antenna polarizations , the transceivers and the branching unit
will be added installing them stating from the side walls and filling the subrack going toward the
subrack centre, in position left or right depending on the polarization of each transceiver, as shown
in the next figure.

The slot used for the protection transceiver (slot 1) is fixed and it is the first on the left of the subrack.
So, the antenna polarization of the radio channel used for protection (H or V) defines which branching
(H or V) will be installed at the left side of the rack. For the above reason, it is important to keep
in mind that H or V positions are not strictly associated to the left or right side of the subrack.
The maximum channel number depends on the channel plan.
The example reported in Fig. 60. is limited to 4 channels. It refers to a system with spare channel on
H antenna polarization and, consequently, with transceivers and branching connected to H
polarization on the left side of the subrack.

(adding 1 RT on V pol) (adding 1 RT on H pol)
1 2 1 4 2 1 5 2 4
H V H V V H H V V
2 2 4 2 4
1 1 1 5
V
Fig. 60. Two polarization per rack expansion procedure in the transceiver subrack with the H channels
on the left side
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 132 / 514
514
c) The next Fig. 61. shows the other possibility, in which the spare channel (2) utilizes the V polarization
and, consequently, the transceivers and branching are connected to V polarization and are
installed on the left side of the subrack.

(1 RT on H pol and (adding 1 RT on V pol) (adding 1 RT on V pol)

1 RT on V pol)
2 3 2 4 3 2 4 6 3
V H V V H V V V H
H 2 2 4 2 4 6
V 3 3 3
Fig. 61. 2 polarization per rack expansion procedure in the transceiver subrack with V channel on the
left side
The above figure shows only two of the possible expansions that depend on the mixing of (H) and
(V) transceivers that must be utilized.
d) The next Fig. 62. gives an example of the installation of the units in case of frequency reuse
technique utilization in a 7+1 protected terminal. At first, the terminal utilizes the first 4 channels (with
channel 4 V as spare channel). The successive expansion of the system is performed adding the
channels working on the same frequencies but transmitted on the opposite antenna polarization.
3+1/4+0 configuration 7+1/8+0 configuration
4 2 3 1 4 2 1 3 4 2 3 1
V V H H V V V V H H H H
1 2 3 4
H 2 4
V 1 3
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 62. Expansion procedure with reused channels
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 133 / 514
514
3.6 Base Band shelf
The following Fig. 63. shows the board–unequipped shelf layout.

SUB–D CONNECTORS 2MB WST CONNECTORS

ACCESS
AREA
BOARD
EQUIPMENT
AREA
Fig. 63. Unequipped Base Band shelf layout
The board equipment area is described in para.3.6.1 on page 135.
The access area is described in:
– para.4.2.2 on page 178 as far as SUB–D connector area is concerned
– para.4.2.3 on page 180 as far as 2Mbit/s WST connector area is concerned

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 134 / 514
514
3.6.1 Base Band shelf unit layout and equipping rules
Please refer to para.3.5 on page 129, for Board provisioning and expansion guideline in BB & TR shelves
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
S S R R R R R R M R M R M R M R M
M M M M M
Y E R R R R R R D R D R D R D R D
D D D D D
S R A A A A A A 5 A 6 A 7 A 8 A 9
0 1 2 3 4
C V 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
O
C
A G C C C C C C C C C
B D D D D D D D D D D
1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2
E E E E E E E E E E
F F
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
Fig. 64. Base Band shelf board equipment (slot numbering and board type and numbering)
For:
– slot (A) equipment, refer to para.3.6.1.1 on page 136
– slot (B) equipment, refer to para.3.6.1.3 on page 136
– slots (C) + (G) + (D) + (E) equipment, refer to para.3.6.1.4 on page 136
– slot (F) equipment, refer to para.3.6.1.5 on page 139.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 135 / 514
514
3.6.1.1 System Controller card
Tab. 16. System Controller card equipping rules

SLOT IN BASEBAND SHELF (see Fig. 64. on page 135)

The SYStem COntroller (SYSCO) card contains the subunit ESCON (in its turn, housing
the equipment configuration data memory device FLASH CARD) and the external
connectors for the QB3 and F interfaces.
Label for
(A) P/N
UNIT Remote
(REF in Tab. 13. on page 122)
Inventory
SYSCO [25] SYSCO
FLASH CARD [27] or [26] in alternative MEM–DEV
N.B. Refer to para.3.6.2 on page 140 for the unit physical views and operative information.
3.6.1.2 Additional Housekeeping unit
Tab. 17. Additional Housekeeping unit equipping rules
POSITION IN OPTINEX RACK (see Fig. 55. on page 126)

The Additional Housekeeping unit is an optional module to expand the number of
housekeeping (up to 40 input contacts in all).
Label for
P/N
(C) UNIT
Remote
Inventory
ADDITIONAL
[28] HK–DEV
HOUSEKEEPING
3.6.1.3 Service card
Tab. 18. Service card equipping rules

The SERVice (SERV) card contains the auxiliary AUX/EOW service channels, the
protection of the WST channels and the service channels, the switch logic of the RPS
protection (used only in case of 1+1 and N+1 configurations) and it can host (as option) a
module (TPH–DEV), adding a voice channel.
(B) Label for

P/N
UNIT Remote
Inventory
SERV [23] SERV
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ADDITIONAL VOICE [24] TPH–DEV
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 136 / 514
514
3.6.1.4 RRA, MD and PSU card groups and dummy plates
a) RRA
Tab. 19. RRA–CHANNEL and RRA–STANDBY cards equipping rules
Read carefully General equipping rules on page 129.

The RRA units are connected to the transmission line through one optical or electrical
interface. The electrical interface is placed directly on RRA units, instead the optical one
on a optical module placed inside the RRA unit itself (a drawer into the front panel).
Slot 3 of Base Band shelf can be used as a standby radio channel in N+1 and 1+1
configurations; otherwise it is used as a main radio channel in N+0 configuration. In N+1
and 1+1 configurations, this slot can be equipped by a RRAS (RRA stand–by) unit and only
in N+1, the same interface previously described for the RRA (optical) can be provided, if
extra traffic is actuated; in N+0 configuration, this slot can be equipped by a RRA unit, in
this case the optical interface module can be provided.
Just one physical RRA unit exists both for transmission of STM–1 signal or subSTM–1 one.
The same thing is applied to the RRAS unit.
(C)
and P/N
Label for
UNIT Remote
(G) (REF in Tab. 13. on page 122)
Inventory
RRA – CHANNEL
[17] RRA
all slots (C)
RRA – STAND–BY
[18] RRAS
slot (G) only
S–1.1 OPTIC.
[31] IS–1.1
INTER.FC/PC
S–1.1 OPTIC.
[32] IS–1.1
INTER.SC/PC
N.B. For the unit physical views and operative information, refer to para.3.6.4 on page 147 for the
RRA–CHANNEL, and to para.3.6.5 on page 149 for the RRA–STAND–BY.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 137 / 514
514
b) MD
Tab. 20. Modem cards equipping rules


The MoDem (MD) card types contain the modulator and demodulator function units. Only
128 QAM is supported in the current release. For each type of MD (supporting STM–1 or
sub STM–1 signal), an IF module is used in case of space diversity configuration as
daughter board of the MD board. The same physical module is used also in case of
frequency reuse configuration, always as a daughter board, but only for MD supporting
STM–1 signals. In case of space diversity with frequency reuse configuration with MD
supporting STM–1 signals, two of these daughter boards are used.
(D) Label for

P/N
UNIT Remote
Inventory
MODEM LH–STM1–1WST [20] RRAMD1280W0
CANC–COMB STM1 [21] IF1WCX
MODEM LH–STM0–0WST [19] RRAMD1281W1
CANC–COMB STM0 [22] IF0WC
c) PSU
Tab. 21. PSU cards equipping rules

The PSU boards power the Base Band shelf. Usually PSU units are equipped in pairs
(PSU0 + PSU1, PSU2 + PSU3, etc.), because each PSU pair gives power supply in
protected mode to a pair of MD and RRA, that are so protected from the failure of a single
PSU:
– PSU0 + PSU1 ⇒ (MD0+RRA0) + (MD1+RRA1)
(E)
Label for
P/N
UNIT Remote
Inventory
DC/DC CONVERTER
[29] PSL–4860
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
BB 2G LH
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 138 / 514
514
d) Dummy plates
Tab. 22. Dummy plates for RRA–Modem and PSU equipping rules

When a group of RRA, MD and PSU is not equipped, the corresponding slots must be
closed by dummy plates, to ensure EMC performance as well as equipment correct
ventilation.
Label for
P/N
UNIT Remote
Inventory
(C)
DUMMY PLATE W40
+ (RRA + MD)
[34] ––
(D)
DUMMY PLATE L40
(E) (DC/DC CONV.)
[35] ––
3.6.1.5 PSF cards
Tab. 23. PSF cards equipping rules

The PSF boards contain the filter for the PSU boards and the DC/DC converter to supply
System Controller and SERVICE boards; the two PSF boards are in protection between
them.
(F) P/N
Label for
UNIT Remote
Inventory
FILTER P.S.U. 5.3/3.4V [30] PSF
3.6.1.6 Kit Loudspeaker
Tab. 24. Kit Loudspeaker equipping rules
POSITION IN OPTINEX RACK (see Fig. 55. on page 126)

The Kit Loudspeaker is an optional unit to be inserted inside TRU. The kit includes the cable
for its connection to the system.
Label for
(J) UNIT
P/N
Remote
Inventory
KIT LOUDSPEAKER [38] ––
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 139 / 514
514
3.6.2 SYSTEM CONTROLLER and FLASH CARD unit operative information
Refer to:
– para.2.4.4.7 on page 57 for a brief functional description of the unit

– para.3.6.1.1 on page 136 for physical composition and P/Ns.

– chapter 5, and in particular:
• para.5.2.6 on page 276, for the detailed functional description of the SYSCO unit
• para.5.2.7 on page 280, for the detailed functional description of the Flash Card
The following information is given hereafter:
– Fig. 65. herebelow shows the unit assembly view
– Fig. 66. herebelow shows the FLASH CARD profile and insertion direction
– Fig. 67. on page 141 depicts the unit front view :
• for the front connectors usage, please refer to para.4.7.6 on page 207.
• the usage of the pushbuttons Lamp Test (7) and Reset (9), is explained in para.4.7.6 on page
207, and in chapter 7 on page 355.
• the usage of the other pushbuttons and leds is explained in chapter 7 on page 355.
– para.3.6.2.2 on page 142 describes the hardware setting options dependent on SWP and system
configuration.
Subunit
ESCON
J1
J2
J3
M1
Flash Card
M2
System Controller
M3
main board (ESC)
Fig. 65. System Controller assembly, front connector numbering and and internal view
TOP SIDE
INSERTION
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 66. FLASH CARD profile and insertion direction
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 140 / 514
514
(9) Reset Button
J1
I/O for
QB3 10 BASE 2
J2 J3 (2 BNCs in parallel)
I/O RJ45 for

M1 QB3 10 BASE T
and DEBUG–N or
local EC debug
I/O RJ45 for
CAN 0 BB and M2
local EC debug
F interface
M3
for ECT
(1) OR of all URGENT alarms (red)

(2) OR of all NOT URGENT alarms (red)
(3) ATTENDED alarm (yellow)
(4) OR of all ABNORMAL conditions (yellow)
(5) OR of all INDICATIVE alarms (yellow)
(7) Lamp Test Pushbutton
(8) Alarm storing Pushbutton

(Attended)
(6) bicolor led:
– red on: Card failure alarm
– green flashing: SW download in progress (in-
ternal or toward other boards)
– off: normal condition
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 67. System Controller front view
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 141 / 514
514
3.6.2.1 Lamp Test & Reset buttons
With reference to Fig. 67. on page 141, the pushbuttons Lamp Test (7) and Reset (9) allow the following
operations:

Lamp test Reset Effect
System lamp test of all the leds in all units of Baseband shelf
X
(Transceivers not affected)
X EC (Equipment Controller) reset
RC (Radio Controller) reset

X X N.B. to perform this operation, hold Lamp Test pushed and
contemporarily push Reset
For the meaning of EC and RC, make reference to para.5.2.2.1.2 on page 237.
3.6.2.2 Hardware settings
Refer to MSZZQ documents relative to the System Controller unit for the TC and Dip–Switch physical
position on the board (see Tab. 89. on page 510).
In the following, only the Dip–Switch banks associated to software configurations are taken into
consideration (for other Dip–Switch banks and TC meaning, please refer to the above cited documents).
a) on subunit ESCON (see Fig. 65. on page 140) :

a Dip–switch bank allows to clear (erase) the System Configuration memory. The use of this
dip–switch bank is explained in the 9600LSY Operator’s Handbook.
ATTENTION
(caution to avoid equipment damage)
These dip–switches must be usually in OFF position.

If unproperly set, these dip–switches will reset the FLASH CARD content, and you will loose all the
software herein contained (programs and system configuration data)
b) on main board ESC (see Fig. 65. on page 140) :
1) Equipment Type:
EQTYPE field is fixed to 0110 (Dec. 6) to indicate Long Haul system (there are no Dip–switch
banks to set).
continues..
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 142 / 514
514
N.B. Before using Tab. 25. or Tab. 26. for configuration setting/change purposes, verify that
the values correspond to those stated in the CT Operator’s Handbook associated to the
Software Package (SWP) running on your system. In the case of conflict between the
values stated in this manual and those indicated in CT Operator’s Handbook, these latter
will prevail.
2) BKPV (BacK–Panel Version) field

according to following Tab. 25.
Tab. 25. ESC Dip–Switch Bank I4 setting

BKPV
I4 switches Dec Description
3 2 1
0 0 0 0 LHRC Long Haul indoor terminal Regenerator Compact
0 0 1 1 LHR Long Haul indoor terminal Regenerator
0 1 0 2 LHRR Long Haul indoor terminal Regenerator Repeater
Dip–Switch I4 /4–5–6–7–8 must be set to 1 (Open or Off).
3) SLOT–ID field for LHR

according to following Tab. 26.
Tab. 26. ESC Dip–Switch Bank I1 setting
SLOT–ID
I1 switches Equip. Subrack STM0/ Space
Dec Subrack TRI
Type BB STM1 Diversity
6 5 4 3 2 1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 STM–0
SRTRI–1HET
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 STM–1
1+1
SRBB–11
0 0 0 0 1 0 2 HET STM–0 SD
SRTRISD–1HET
0 0 0 0 1 1 3 STM–1 SD
0 0 0 1 0 0 4 STM–0
SRTRI–N
0 0 0 1 0 1 5 STM–1
N+1 SRBB–N1
0 0 0 1 1 0 6 STM–0 SD
SRTRISD–N
0 0 0 1 1 1 7 STM–1 SD
0 0 1 0 0 0 8 STM–0
SRTRI–N
0 0 1 0 0 1 9 STM–1
N+0 SRBB–N0
0 0 1 0 1 0 10 STM–0 SD
SRTRISD–N
0 0 1 0 1 1 11 STM–1 SD
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Dip–Switch I1 /7–8 must be set to 1 (Open or Off).
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 143 / 514
514
3.6.3 SERVICE and ADDITIONAL VOICE unit operative information
Refer to:


– chapter 5, and in particular para.5.4.6 on page 297, for the detailed functional description of the unit
– Fig. 68. herebelow shows the unit assembly view
– Fig. 69. on page 145 depicts the unit front view :
• for the front connectors (J1) (J2) usage, please refer to para.4.7.4 on page 202.
• the usage of the front connector (J5) and leds in LINE O.W. area is explained in para.3.6.3.1
on page 146.
• the usage of leds in LINE TPH area is explained in para.3.6.3.2 on page 146.
• the led (3) and pushbutton (4) are presently unused.
• the other indications are self–explaining.
– para.3.6.3.3 on page 146 describes the hardware setting options.
Optional subunit
ADDITIONAL VOICE
(TPH–DEV)
J1
J2
J3
J4 SMA
J5
Fig. 68. Service unit assembly, front connector numbering and and internal view
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 144 / 514
514
J1
PROTECTED
WST 2 Mbit/s
J2
J3
NOT OPERATIVE IN
CURRENT RELEASE
J4
(1) Indication of the No

of the Rx
protected channel
(1 digit display)
(2) Manual operation

of N+1 logic (6) line busy (yellow)
(yellow)
(7) line free (green)
J5 Telephone jack
(8) line busy (yellow) (*)
(9) line free (green) (*)
operative only
(3) Loudspeaker (*) with TPH–DEV
activated (green) equipped
(4) Pushbutton for

loudspeaker
activation/deactivation
(10) Card failure alarm (red)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 69. Service unit front view
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 145 / 514
514
3.6.3.1 EOW Channel use
After having connected the DTMF Telephone Kit (Ref.[39] in Tab. 13. on page 122) to the telephone
jack (connector (J5) in Fig. 69. on page 145), the User can implement two call modes:

• selective activates a two–way speech link between two users
• omnibus activates a one–way link with all users
The User number, within a 10 to 99 range, is software programmable.

To make an omnibus call, digit 00.
Front LED indications (LINE O.W. area in Fig. 69. on page 145):
• (7) (green) on: free line

• (6) (yellow):
– on: engaged line

– flashing: call received and acknowledged
Keys on telephone handset:
• * : forced line release

• # : line seizure
Three Party–Line (VF TX/RX A,B and C) paths are available on BB shelf’s connector M190 (see
3.6.3.2 TPH Channel use (Additional Voice)
It is possible only with subunit TPH equipped inside SERVICE board.

The DTMF Telephone Kit (Ref.[39] in Tab. 13. on page 122) must be connected to the system through
pins 7 and 20 of BB shelf’s connector M190 (see Tab. 43. on page 205).
The call procedure is equal to that explained in para.3.6.3.1 above but, in this case, the leds in LINE
TPH area are used instead.
Two Party–Line (VF TX/RX A and B TPH) paths are available on BB shelf’s connector M190 (see
Refer to MSZZQ documents relative to the Service unit for the TC and Dip–Switch physical position
on the board and their meaning (see Tab. 89. on page 510).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 146 / 514
514
3.6.4 RRA–CHANNEL unit operative information
Refer to:
– point a ) on page 137 for physical composition and P/Ns.

– chapter 5, and in particular:

• para.5.4.2 on page 287, for the detailed functional description of the unit
• para.5.4.4 on page 292, for the detailed functional description of the optical module
The following Fig. 70. shows:
– the protection cap (fixed by a screw) that must be removed to access the unit front panel, and must
be repositioned after having connected the cables
– the drawer (fixed by two screws) that must be removed only in case an optional a STM–1 optical
module has to be equipped.
J1
J2
Protection cap
Drawer extractable for the insertion of a STM–1 optical module
Fig. 70. RRA–CHANNEL assembly view and front connector numbering
3.6.4.1 Front connectors usage
Refer to para.4.7.2 on page 202.

Other information in Fig. 71. on page 148.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
None
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 147 / 514
514
STM–1 J1
ELECTR.
INTRF. yellow marker
INPUT
OUTPUT
green marker J2
Hole for drawer ALS restart key

extraction
(present also in
SC/PC
optical modules) OPTIONAL
STM–1 OPTICAL
MODULE
INPUT
OUTPUT
ALS restart key
FC/PC
Fig. 71. RRA–CHANNEL unit front view

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 148 / 514
514
3.6.5 RRA–STANDBY unit operative information
Refer to:
– point a ) on page 137 for physical composition and P/Ns.

As far as the protection cap and extractable drawer are concerned, the assembly view is as in Fig. 70. on
page 147.
The front view is as in Fig. 71. on page 148, with a difference in the lower part, where there is the display
shown in Fig. 72. herebelow:
Indication of the No Tx
of the Tx protected channel
(1 digit display)
Fig. 72. RRA–STAND–BY unit front view (particular)
Refer to para.4.7.2 on page 202.
None
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 149 / 514
514
3.6.6 MODEM unit operative information
Refer to:

– point b ) on page 138 for physical composition and P/Ns.

The following Fig. 73. shows the protection cap (fixed by a screw) that must be removed to access the unit
front panel, and must be repositioned after having connected the cables:
J1
J2
J3
J4
J5 MODEM
mother
board
Protection cap
Fig. 73. Modem unit assembly view and front connector numbering
Refer to para.4.6 on page 193.

Other information in Fig. 74. on page 151 and Fig. 75. on page 152.
They are on the mother board. Refer to MSZZQ documents relative to the Modem unit for the
TC and Dip–Switch physical position on the board and their meaning (choosing the unit type
according to the P/N in Tab. 89. on page 510. WARNING: there are different Modem units).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 150 / 514
514
The following Fig. 74. :
– depicts the internal connections between IF2 and IF3 inputs and the corresponding CANC–COMB
submodules
– describes the equipping rules of CANC–COMB submodules in the various configurations.
POS.A
IF INPUT MAIN
IF2 INPUT POS.B
IF3 INPUT
STM–0 CASE
CONFIGURATION POS.A POS.B
NO SPACE DIVERSITY UNEQUIPPED UNEQUIPPED
SPACE DIVERSITY CANC–COMB STM–0 UNEQUIPPED
N.B. : XPIC not envisaged with STM–0
STM–1 CASE
CONFIGURATION POS.A POS.B
NO SPACE DIVERSITY AND NO XPIC UNEQUIPPED UNEQUIPPED
SPACE DIVERSITY OR XPIC CANC–COMB STM–1 UNEQUIPPED
SPACE DIVERSITY AND XPIC CANC–COMB STM–1 CANC–COMB STM–1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 74. Modem unit assembly internal view and CANC–COMB equipping rules
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 151 / 514
514
Modulator output J1
blue marker
Modulator output monitoring J2
Main demodulator input J3

red marker
IF2 input J4
see Fig. 74.

on page 151
IF3 input J5

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 75. Modem unit front view
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 152 / 514
514
3.6.7 PSU and PSF units operative information
Refer to:
– para.2.4.4.9 on page 57 for a brief functional description of the PSU unit

– point c ) on page 138 for physical composition and P/Ns of the PSU unit
– para.2.4.4.10 on page 57 for a brief functional description of the PSF unit

– para.3.6.1.5 on page 139 for physical composition and P/Ns of the PSF unit
– chapter 5, and in particular para.5.3 on page 282, for the detailed functional description of the units
A3
I (1) ON/OFF
O (3) Input
switch
Power
Supply
A1
(2) PSU switched
on
(green)
(4) PSF powered
on
(green)
PSU PSF
3.6.7.1 Power supply connector pinout (on PSF unit)
Pins Meaning
A1 +BATT +BATTERY
A2 GND Ground
A3 –BATT –Battery
Fig. 76. PSU and PSF units front view
3.6.7.2 Front connector on PSF unit usage
Refer to Tab. 33. on page 190.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
None
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 153 / 514
514
3.6.8 Additional Housekeeping unit operative information
Refer to:


M1
M2
(1) LED
Fig. 77. Additional Housekeeping unit assembly view
3.6.8.1 Legend and connectors usage
a) (M1) SUB–D25 pins female connector pinout: see Tab. 52. on page 213.
b) (M2) SUB–D9 pins male connector: see Tab. 40. on page 192.
c) LED (red): indicates the failure of Additional Housekeeping unit
None
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 154 / 514
514
3.6.9 Kit Loudspeaker operative information
3.6.9.1 Installation
The Kit Loudspeaker is an optional unit to be inserted inside TRU and connected to the system as depicted
in Fig. 78. herebelow.

Refer to para.3.6.1.6 on page 139 for physical composition and P/Ns.
To equip the Kit, remove the TRU

plate (4 screws) and fix the kit
with the same screws
To be connected to
BB connector M190
(see Fig. 95. on page 178)
Fig. 78. Kit Loudspeaker

None
3.6.9.3 Usage
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
With reference to Fig. 69. on page 145 (Service unit front view):
– Pushbutton (4) activates/deactivates the loudspeaker
– Green led (3) on indicates the loudspeaker activation.
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 155 / 514
514
3.7 Transceiver shelf
3.7.1 Transceiver shelf unit layout

The Transceiver shelf unit layout is depicted in the following Fig. 79. herebelow:

T T T T T T T T T T
R R R R R R R R R R
I I I I I I I I I I
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A A A A A A A A A A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Fig. 79. Transceiver shelf equipment (slot numbering and board types and numbering)
General equipping rules
Please refer to para.3.5 on page 129, for Board provisioning and expansion guideline in BB & TR shelves.
3.7.2 Equipping rules of Transceiver units or substitutive Dummy Plates
Tab. 27. Transceiver units and substitutive dummy plates equipping rules
SLOT IN TRANSCEIVER SHELF (see Fig. 79. on page 156)
TRANSCEIVER
Each Transceiver is an assembly made up by components that, from item provisioning and
maintenance points of view, are independent items that are equipped, for types and
number, according to the system configuration, as shown herebelow:
FREQUENCY COMPONENTS TYPES AND NUMBER
DIVERSITY
REUSE TRI LO R FR KIT
N N 1 2 1 0
N Y 1 2 1 1 or 0
Y N 1 2 2 0
(A) Y Y 1 2 2 1 or 0
Refer to para.3.7.3 on page 157 for details.
N.B. For the P/Ns and Remote Inventory Labels of TRI units and modules, please
refer to the specific chapter between those listed in Tab. 67. on page 414.
DUMMY PLATE
When a transceiver is not equipped, the corresponding slot is closed by a dummy plate.
Label for
P/N
UNIT Remote
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Inventory
RT FRONT PLATE KIT [36] ––
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 156 / 514
514
3.7.3 Composition of transceiver units
a) TRI (Tranceiver)
The transceiver units have different P/Ns for the following characteristics (N.B.):
•
frequency range
• modulation (128 QAM, 64 QAM)

This P/N is comprehensive of the Transceiver box (see Fig. 80. on page 158) and the following
internal components (see Fig. 81. on page 159):
• RT control
• Amplifier
• Up Converter
• Delay Line
• DC/DC Converter
together with the associated internal cabling and the cabling relevant to the connection of Rx and Tx
LOs.
This P/N does not include the LO, R and FR KIT components, that are defined as separate items.
b) LO (Local Oscillator module)
There are always two Local Oscillators modules inside a transceiver, one for the Rx section, the other
for the Tx section (see Fig. 81. on page 159).
The Local Oscillator modules have different P/Ns for the following characteristics (N.B.):
• frequency range
• possible application for a particular channel plan
Inside a TRI, these Local Oscillators must have the same P/N.
c) R (Receiver module)
There can be one or two receiver modules inside a transceiver:
• in the case the Transceiver is used without the Space Diversity configuration, there is only one
Receiver (named Main Receiver) as shown in Fig. 81. on page 159 and Fig. 82. on page 160,
and the unit front connectors are those depicted in Fig. 87. on page 165;
• in the case the Transceiver is used with the Space Diversity configuration, two Receivers
(respectively named Main Receiver and Diversity Receiver) are equipped as shown in
Fig. 83. on page 160 and Fig. 84. on page 161, and the unit front connectors are those depicted
in Fig. 88. on page 166.
The Receiver Modules have different P/Ns for the following characteristics (N.B.):
• frequency range
The Receiver P/N includes the associated internal cabling.
Inside a TRI, the Main Receiver and Diversity Receiver must have the same P/N.
d) FR KIT (Frequency Reuse kit)
Only in case of Frequency Reuse systems:
• one Frequency Reuse kit is equipped inside the transceiver housing the Rx Local Oscillator
defined as Master, as depicted in Fig. 82. on page 160 and Fig. 84. on page 161.
• inside the transceiver housing the Rx Local Oscillator defined as Slave, the Frequency Reuse
kit is not equipped .
The Frequency Reuse kit has the same P/N for all frequency bands.
The Frequency Reuse kit P/N includes the module and the associated internal cabling.
N.B. The P/Ns of TRI units and modules must belong to the same Frequency Plan group: please refer
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
to the specific chapter between those listed in Tab. 67. on page 414.
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 157 / 514
514
3.7.4 TRANSCEIVER unit operative information
Refer to:

– previous para.3.7.2 and 3.7.3 for physical composition and P/Ns.

– Assembly views herebelow
– Internal composition on page 159
– Hardware settings on page 161
– Internal interconnection diagram on page 162
– Front connectors usage on page 165
3.7.4.1 Assembly views
COVER PLATE “A” TO

REMOVE FOR
INTERNAL SERVICE
(HARDWARE SETTING
OR REPAIR).
Arrows show screws

for cover remove/fix.
COVER PLATE “B”

NEVER TO
BE REMOVED
TRI P/N and Remote Inventory
Fig. 80. Transceiver assembly physical views

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 158 / 514
514
3.7.4.2 Internal composition
FREQUENCY REUSE
DIVERSITY INTERNAL COMPONENTS
USAGE TR HOUSING
N –– Fig. 81. herebelow

N LO MASTER Fig. 82. on page 160, in addition to those shown in Fig. 81.
Y
LO SLAVE Fig. 81. herebelow
N –– Fig. 83. on page 160, in addition to those shown in Fig. 81.
Y LO MASTER Fig. 84. on page 161, in addition to those shown in Fig. 81.
Y
LO SLAVE Fig. 83. on page 160, in addition to those shown in Fig. 81.
MAIN RECEIVER
PLATE COVERING RX LOCAL TX LOCAL

MAIN RECEIVER OSCILLATOR OSCILLATOR
DC/DC CONVERTER DELAY LINE RT CONTROL

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
UP CONVERTER AMPLIFIER
Fig. 81. Transceiver internal view: standard components and Main Receiver
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 159 / 514
514
TR.FREQUENCY REUSE KIT

Fig. 82. Transceiver internal view: without “Diversity Receiver” and with “TR.Frequency Reuse Kit”
DIVERSITY RECEIVER
MAIN RECEIVER
(inside)
N.B. The Diversity Receiver is mounted on the “PLATE COVERING MAIN RECEIVER” (see
Fig. 81. page 159)
Fig. 83. Transceiver internal view: with “Diversity Receiver” and without “TR.Frequency Reuse Kit”
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 160 / 514
514
TR.FREQUENCY REUSE KIT
DIVERSITY RECEIVER
MAIN RECEIVER
(inside)
N.B. The Diversity Receiver is mounted on the “PLATE COVERING MAIN RECEIVER” (see
Fig. 81. page 159)
Fig. 84. Transceiver internal view: with “Diversity Receiver” and with “TR.Frequency Reuse Kit”

They are on subunit RT CONTROL (see Fig. 85. herebelow) and are accessible removing the
cover plate “A” depicted in Fig. 80. on page 158. Refer to MSZZQ documents relative to the
Transceiver unit for the TC and Dip–Switch physical position on the board and their meaning
(choosing the unit type according to the P/N in Tab. 89. on page 510. WARNING: there are
different Transceiver units).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
HARDWARE SETTING DIP SWITCHES

Fig. 85. Position of Hardware setting dip switches
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 161 / 514
514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
N.B.
A
I
03
C
955.203.292 Q
B B
3.7.4.4 Internal interconnection diagram
Letters denote particulars enlarged on following pages

E
Fig. 86. Transceiver internal connection diagram
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
H
D F
G
162 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
A
E
D
C
03
continues ..
955.203.292 Q
Enlarged particulars of Fig. 86. page 162
B
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
163 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
.. continues
I
F
H
G
955.203.292 Q
Enlarged particulars of Fig. 86. page 162
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
164 / 514
DIVERSITY DESCRIPTION
N Fig. 87. herebelow

Y Fig. 88. on page 166

Y or N Fig. 89. on page 167 (meaning of access points)
N.B. For connection with Modem and Branching, refer to para.4.6 on page 193.
J9
J10
J11
J12
M2
J5
I1
J6
J7
J8
J13
J14
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 87. Transceiver front connector numbering (TR without Rx diversity)
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 165 / 514
514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
J1
J2
J3
J6
J4
J7
J5
955.203.292 Q
M1
J8
J13
J14
J9
J10
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
J11
J12
M2
I1
Fig. 88. Transceiver front connector numbering (TR with Rx diversity)
166 / 514
Rx diversity Rx main
section N.B.1 section
J1 Input RF Rx diversity Input RF Rx main J9

red marker
J2
Output 1 IF Rx divers. Output 1 IF Rx main J10
J3 Output 2 IF Rx divers. Output 2 IF Rx main J11

Output IF Rx divers. Output IF Rx main
J4 J12
monitoring monitoring
M1 N.B.2 N.B.2 M2
blue marker
ON/OFF switch I1
J5 Input IF Tx
(1) Unit switched on
J6 LO Rx Remote (green)
(Input or Output)
J7 LO Rx monitoring
(2) OR of internal alarms
J8 LO Tx monitoring (red)
N.B.1 Rx diversity section’s elements are

present only in units equipped with Rx
diversity (see Fig. 88. on page 166)
N.B.2 Socket to connect a recording instrument,

to monitor the Rx input field value
RF Tx output J13
monitoring
RF Tx output J14
Fig. 89. Transceiver front view – meaning of access points

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 167 / 514
514
3.8 Branching
3.8.1 Branching drawings and Branching–Transceivers connections

Branching drawings, organized per frequency bands and type (with/without Frequency Reuse/Diversity)
are given as separate documents annexed to this handbook.
Their list is given in Tab. 91. on page 513.
These drawings indicate also the connections among the branching and the Transceivers.
As far as the number of channels are concerned, such drawings show only some of the possible
configurations.
3.8.2 Branching Front Plate Kit (Rx branching area)
Tab. 28. Branching Front Plate Kit equipping rules
SLOT IN OPTINEX RACK (see Fig. 55. on page 126)
BRANCHING FRONT PLATE KIT

Equipping this kit, after having set up the connections involved in Rx branching area, is
mandatory in operating conditions to ensure correct equipment ventilation.
Label for
(F) UNIT
P/N
Remote
Inventory
BRANCHING FRONT PLATE
[33] ––
KIT
Fig. 90. Branching Front Plate Kit

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 168 / 514
514
3.9 FANS shelf and FANS assembled units
3.9.1 FANS shelf equipping rules

Presently, there can be either one or two FAN shelves, see pos. (E) and (L) in Fig. 55. on page 126:
– FAN shelf pos. (E) is mandatory in all configurations
– FAN shelf pos. (L) is mandatory whenever the 1650SMC shelf is equipped.
3.9.2 FANS assembled unit equipping rules
The FANS SHELF contains one or two independent FANS ASSEMBLED units, as depicted in following
ÉÉ ÉÉÉ
Fig. 91. :
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
FANSL
A
FANSL
B
ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉ
1 2 ÉÉÉ
Fig. 91. Fan shelf (slot numbering and board types)
Tab. 29. Fans unit & cover equipping rules

SLOT IN FAN SHELF (see Fig. 91. on this page)
Each fan unit contains four fans, a DC/DC converter and an internal control unit.
When one of the FANS ASSEMBLED is not equipped, the corresponding slot must be
closed by COVER to guarantee correct ventilation.
For FANS ASSEMBLED equipping rules, refer to:
– para.3.9.2.1 on page 170 (Base Band shelf)
(A) – para.3.9.2.2 on page 170 (ADM shelf)
(B) P/N
Label for
UNIT Remote
Inventory
FANS ASSEMBLED [8] FANSL
COVER [37] ––
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 169 / 514
514
3.9.2.1 Equipping rules for FANS assembled unit in Baseband–shelf
Tab. 30. Equipping rules for FANS assembled unit in Baseband–shelf

E= equipped
NE = not equipped
POLARIZATION CONFIGURATION FANSL–A FANSL–B
up to
E NE
single polarization 2+1 / 3+0
3+1 / 4+0 E E
two antenna polarizations

all E E
As far as the ADM–shelf’s FANS–shelf is concerned, only one FAN ASSEMBLED unit is envisaged
(FANSL B, on the rack right side).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 170 / 514
514
3.9.3 FANS assembled unit operative information
Fig. 92. herebelow and Fig. 93. on page 172 show the physical views of the FANS shelf and FANSL unit
and substitutive COVER assemblies.
FANS SHELF
FRONT PLATE
COVER
(must be equipped in not used
FANS ASSEMBLED slots to
guarantee correct ventilation)
FANS ASSEMBLED
Fig. 92. FANS SHELF, FANS ASSEMBLED and substitutive COVER assembly views
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 171 / 514
514
Hole for unit extraction

(1) LED
M1 M3 Can Bus
Power supply input Connector
DIP–SWITCH I
O
O
M2 Can Bus I1 I2 M4
Power supply input
Connector
Legend on page 173
Fig. 93. Front view of FANS SHELF equipped with both FANS ASSEMBLED units
Hardware settings
see point c ) on page 173

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 172 / 514
514
Legend for Fig. 93. :
a) (M1) (M4) Power supply connectors :

• Usage and connection: see:

– Tab. 34. on page 190 (Baseband–shelf’s FANS–shelf)
– Tab. 35. on page 190 (ADM–shelf’s FANS–shelf)
• Pinout:
Pins Meaning
A1 +BATT +BATTERY
A2 GND Ground
b) (M2) (M3) CAN–BUS connectors:

• see Tab. 38. on page 191
c) (I1) (I2) DIP–SWITCHES : to be set according to the position in the rack:
I1 I2 Subrack No Usage
I I 0 Baseband shelf
I O 1 future use
O I 2 ADM shelf
O O 3 future use
d) LED (red): indicating a failure in the FANS ASSEMBLED unit

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 173 / 514
514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
174 / 514
4 SYSTEM CABLING
4.1 Introduction
This chapter describes the 9600LSY system cabling with the following information:
– location of access points for cabling, with the exception of those present on the units’ front plates,
that are described in the paragraphs of previous chapter.
– types of cables used for internal connections
– point–to–point cabling of internal connections
– description of pinout of connectors for external connections.
This paragraph does not describe:
– the internal connections effective cable routing inside the equipment
– the kinds of cables used for external connections
For this information, please refer to the Installation Handbook (REF.[E] on page 469).
This chapter is organized as follows:
– Shelves’ connectors, on page 176, including:

• T.R.U. connectors, on page 176
• Base Band shelf access panel: SUB–D connectors layout, on page 178
• Base Band shelf access panel: 2Mb/s WST connectors layout, on page 180
• Transceiver shelf connectors, on page 181
– Cable kits and cable types, on page 183
– Power supply distribution connections, on page 190
– Signal connections between shelves, on page 191
– Modem–Transceiver–Branching connections, on page 193
– External interfaces, on page 202, including:

• Power Line Interface, on page 202
• SDH interfaces, on page 202
• Input / Output Unprotected WST, on page 202
• Input / Output Protected WST, on page 202
• Auxiliary Channels, on page 203
• Management interfaces, on page 207
• Station Alarms, on page 208
• Summarizing / Housekeeping alarms, on page 208, including:
– General characteristics, on page 208
– Out Housekeeping and Remote alarms, on page 209
– Input Housekeeping alarms, on page 212
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 175 / 514
514
4.2 Shelves’ connectors
4.2.1 T.R.U. connectors

M6 M4 M2
M8
M5 M3
M7 Alarm Extension M1
Front view
2A 4A 6A 2B 4B 6B
Box TRU
1A 3A 5A 1B 3B 5B
T.R.U.
Front view
M9
T.R.U.
Rear view
DC input and distribution
M10
b– b’– a’– a–
Rear view without cover

b+ b’+ a’+ a+
Legend on page 177
Fig. 94. Top Rack Unit connector numbering

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 176 / 514
514
a) (a–) (a+) (b–) (b+) (a’–) (a’+) (b’–) (b’+) :

Primary BATT.A and BATT.B. Power Supply input and distribution frame (N.B.)
b) (M7) :
for usage see Tab. 37. on page 191; pins connected in parallel to connector (M8)
c) (M6) :
for usage see Tab. 39. on page 192; pins connected in parallel to connector (M8)
d) (M1) to (M5) and (M10) :

RM Interface connections; pins connected in parallel to connector (M8)
e) (M9) :
Power Supply, alarm and service connections (N.B.)
f) (1A) to (6B) :
Output Power Supply connectors/breakers toward the user shelves indicated in Tab. 15. on page
128.
For the physical connection from connector/breakers to the user shelves, make reference to para.4.4
on page 190.
N.B. For further information on TRU unit (in particular for hardware presettings), please refer to
OPTINEX rack specific documentation (see para.18.2.2.1 on page 471).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 177 / 514
514
4.2.2 Base Band shelf access panel: SUB–D connectors layout

M179 M180 M194 M187
M185 M193 M183 M186 M192 M190 M191 M182
M188 M184 M189
Legend: see Tab. 31. on page 179
N.B. Dot in connector front view indicates Pin 1
Fig. 95. Base Band shelf access panel: SUB–D connectors layout
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 178 / 514
514
Tab. 31. Base Band shelf access panel: SUB–D connectors usage
CONN. CONN. TYPE SIGNALS USAGE

Can 0 B.B Terminator see Fig. 104. on page 189
M179 SUB–D9 pins female or
Additional Housekeeping see Tab. 40. on page 192
M180 SUB–D25 pins female Can Bus RT see Tab. 37. on page 191
see Tab. 41. on page 203 and

M182 SUB–D25 pins female Aux channel G703 and RS232
Tab. 42. on page 204
Out Remote alarms

M183 SUB–D25 pins female see Tab. 49. on page 210
(GA21–GA40)
M184 SUB–D9 pins male Rack lamps see Tab. 37. on page 191
M185 SUB–D25 pins female Input Housekeeping see Tab. 51. on page 212
M186 SUB–D25 pins female RT missing connections see Tab. 37. on page 191
Can 0 bus extension toward

FAN Shelf 0
M188 SUB–D9 pins female CAN 1 (Download) Terminator see Fig. 104. on page 189
M189 SUB–D9 pins female CAN 1 (Download) Terminator see Fig. 104. on page 189
Out party line OW,TPH and see Tab. 41. on page 203 and
M190 SUB–D25 pins female
loudspeaker Tab. 43. on page 205
see Tab. 41. on page 203 and

M191 SUB–D25 pins female Aux channel V11
Out Housekeeping and

Remote alarms (GA41–GA48)
Out Remote alarms

(GA1–GA20)
M194 SUB–D25 pins female Relè command HST for future use
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 179 / 514
514
4.2.3 Base Band shelf access panel: 2Mb/s WST connector layout

green markers
OUT J1
1
IN J2
OUT J3
2
IN J4
CH0 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 CH9
yellow markers
In current release only connectors (J1) and (J2) are used for the connection of the 2Mbit/s WST
of the corresponding channel. Connectors (J3) and (J4) are not used.
Fig. 96. Base Band shelf access panel: 2Mb/s WST front connector layout and numbering
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 180 / 514
514
4.2.4 Transceiver shelf connectors
M1
M2
BATT.A
M4 M3
M5
BATT.B
M7 BATT.A
M6
FOR TRANCEIVERS
BATT.B 0–4
FOR TRANCEIVERS
5–9
Legend on page 182
Fig. 97. Transceiver shelf connector numbering at rear–top side

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 181 / 514
514
a) Power supply connectors (M2) (M3) (M5) (M6) :

• Usage and connection: see para.4.4 on page 190

• Pinout:
Pins Meaning
A1 +BATT +BATTERY
A3
A
A2 GND Ground
A1
b) (M1) (M4) connectors: for usage see Tab. 37. on page 191.
c) (M7) connector: CAN RT bus terminated by a CAN bus terminator (see Fig. 104. on page 189).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 182 / 514
514
4.3 Cable kits and cable types
The following Tab. 32. lists the cable kits envisaged for 9600LSY system and indicates the cable types
used in such kits, the drawing of which are given in the associated figures.
Notes for figures:
a) the writings on cable connectors (like (A1) , (A2) , etc.) are used as ’CABLE SIDE information’ in the
following paragraphs, to point out the correct cable connections;
b) some labels are colored. In conjunction with the colored markers present on some units, this
facilitates cabling, matching the colour on cable label with that of colored marker on the unit front
plate;
c) in the Cannon–Cannon cables the pin connection is 1:1 (i.e. pin 1 left connected to pin 1 right, pin
2 left connected to pin 2 right, etc.).
Tab. 32. Cable kits and cable types

P/N (REF. in
CABLE
CABLE KIT Tab. 13. on FIGURE
TYPES
page 122)
CABLE KIT COMMON PARTS REF.[9] A, B, C, D, E Fig. 98. page 184
CABLE KIT 1 CHANNEL NO SPACE
REF.[10] F, G Fig. 99. page 185
DIV.
CABLE KIT 1 CHANNEL WITH SPACE
REF.[11] H Fig. 99. page 185
DIV
CABLE KIT FOR REUSE (1 RACK) REF.[12] K, N, P Fig. 100. page 186
CABLE KIT FOR
REF.[13] KK, NN, PP Fig. 101. page 187
REUSE (2 RACKS) (N.B.1)
CABLE KIT FOR 1 EXTEN. CHANNEL A, D Fig. 98. page 184

REF.[14]
FOR WMSN S Fig. 103. page 189
B Fig. 98. page 184
FANS UNIT CABLE KIT REF.[15]
Q Fig. 102. page 188
B Fig. 98. page 184
FANS UNIT EXTENSION CABLE KIT REF.[16]
R Fig. 102. page 188
ADDITIONAL HOUSEKEEPING REF.[28] D Fig. 98. page 184
Can–bus Terminator (N.B.2) –– T Fig. 104. page 189
N.B. 1 the use of this kit is not specified in current edition of this handbook.
2 Each Can bus line must be terminated by a plug with two load resistors (120 ohm resistors
mounted on SUB–D9 pins male connectors inserted on female connectors).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 183 / 514
514
A: 3–pins female for power supply

A1
N.B. A2
B: 3–pins female 450 for power supply
B1
B2
N.B.
C: 9–pins Cannon male / 9–pins Cannon male C2
N.B.
C1
D: 9–pins Cannon female / 9–pins Cannon male D2
D1
N.B.
E1 E: 25–pins Cannon male / 25–pins Cannon male E2
N.B.
N.B. Labelling depending on cable usage

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 98. System cabling: types of used cables (A, B, C, D, E)
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 184 / 514
514
F: Siem.M. 1.0–2.3 900 / Siem.M. 1.0–2.3 900
RT n signal flow MODEM n

F1 J10 J3 F2
blue label red label
G: Siem.M. 1.0–2.3 900 / Siem.M. 1.0–2.3 900

G1
J5 J1 G2
red label blue label
H: Siem.M. 1.0–2.3 900 / Siem.M. 1.0–2.3 900

H1 J2 J4 H2
white label white label
Fig. 99. System cabling: types of used cables (F, G, H)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 185 / 514
514
K: Siem.M. 1.0–2.3 900 / Siem.M. 1.0–2.3 900

K1 J11 V (H) J4 H (V) K2

J11 H (V) J4 V (H)
P: Siem.M. 1.0–2.3 900 / Siem.M. 1.0–2.3 900

P1 J11 V (H) J5 H (V) P2

J11 H (V) J5 V (H)

N: SMA.M. 900 / SMA.M. 900
RT n signal flow RT n
J6 H (V) J6 V (H)
N1 N2
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 100. System cabling: types of used cables (K, N, P)
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 186 / 514
514
KK: Siem.M. 1.0–2.3 900 / Siem.M. 1.0–2.3 900
RT n MODEM n
signal flow
J11 V (H) J4 H (V)
KK1 KK2
(RACK1) (RACK2)
RT n MODEM n
signal flow
J11 H (V) J4 V (H)
(RACK1) (RACK2)
PP: Siem.M. 1.0–2.3 900 / Siem.M. 1.0–2.3 900
RT n MODEM n
signal flow J5 H (V)
J11 V (H)
PP1 (RACK2) PP2
(RACK1)
RT n MODEM n
signal flow J5 V (H)
J11 H (V)
(RACK1) (RACK2)
NN: SMA.M. 900 / SMA.M. 900
RT n RT n
J6 H (V) signal flow J6 V (H)
(RACK1) (RACK2)
NN1 white label white label NN2
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 101. System cabling: types of used cables (KK, NN, PP)
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 187 / 514
514
Q: 9–pins Cannon male 300 / 9–pins Cannon male

Q2
Q1
R: 9–pins Cannon male 300 / 9–pins Cannon male 300

R2
R1
Fig. 102. System cabling: types of used cables (Q, R)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 188 / 514
514
S: 1–channel extension
S1
signal flow
S2
Sub.ADM STM n
J1 Sub.ADM STM n
J2
yellow label
green label
RRA n
J2
yellow label
S3
RRA n
J1
signal flow
green label
S4
Fig. 103. System cabling: types of used cables (S)
T: CAN–bus terminator
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 104. System cabling: types of used cables (T)
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 189 / 514
514
4.4 Power supply distribution connections
N.B. For CABLE TYPE and CABLE SIDE related information, please refer to para.4.3 on page 183.

Tab. 33. Power supply distribution: Cables belonging to CABLE KIT COMMON PARTS

CABLE CABLE SIDE (A2) & LABEL
N. CABLE SIDE (A1) & LABEL
TYPE (N.B.2)
1 Sub. RT / M2 Batt.A (N.B.1) T.R.U. Fuserbreaker 1A
1 Sub. RT / M3 Batt.B (N.B.1) T.R.U. Fuserbreaker 1B
1 Sub. RT / M5 Batt.A (N.B.1) T.R.U. Fuserbreaker 2A
A
1 Sub. RT / M6 Batt.B (N.B.1) T.R.U. Fuserbreaker 2B
1 Sub. B.B. / M1 Batt.A (N.B.3) T.R.U. Fuserbreaker 3A
1 Sub. B.B. / M2 Batt.B (N.B.4) T.R.U. Fuserbreaker 3B
Tab. 34. Power supply distribution: Cables belonging to FANS UNIT CABLE KIT
Cables belonging to FANS UNIT CABLE KIT
CABLE CABLE SIDE (B2) & LABEL
N. CABLE SIDE (B1) & LABEL
TYPE (N.B.2)
1 Fans Unit down (up) / M1 Batt.A (N.B.5) T.R.U. Fuserbreaker 5A
B
1 Fans Unit down (up) / M4 Batt.B (N.B.5) T.R.U. Fuserbreaker 5B
Tab. 35. Power supply distribution: Cables belonging to FANS UNIT EXTENSION CABLE KIT
CABLE CABLE SIDE (B2) & LABEL
N. CABLE SIDE (B1) & LABEL
TYPE (N.B.2)
1 Fans Unit down (up) / M1 Batt.A (N.B.6) T.R.U. Fuserbreaker 6A
B
1 Fans Unit down (up) / M4 Batt.B (N.B.6) T.R.U. Fuserbreaker 6B
Tab. 36. Power supply distribution: Cables belonging to CABLE KIT FOR 1 EXTEN. CHANNEL
FOR WMSN
CABLE CABLE SIDE (A2) & LABEL
N. CABLE SIDE (A1) & LABEL
TYPE (N.B.2)
1 ADM CONGI / C1 (N.B.7) T.R.U. Fuserbreaker 4A
A
1 ADM SERGI / S1 (N.B.7) T.R.U. Fuserbreaker 4B
N.B. 1 see Fig. 97. page 181

2 see Fig. 94. page 176
3 connected to Power Supply input connector of PSF–1 (see Fig. 64. page 135)
4 connected to Power Supply input connector of PSF–2 (see Fig. 64. page 135)
5 connected to Power Supply input connectors M1/M4 (see Fig. 93. page 172) of BB’s FANS
shelf (see POS.(E) in Fig. 55. on page 126)
6 connected to Power Supply input connectors M1/M4 (see Fig. 93. page 172) of ADM’s
FANS shelf (see POS.(L) in Fig. 55. on page 126)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
7 refer to 1650SM–C documentation
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 190 / 514
514
4.5 Signal connections between shelves
N.B. For CABLE TYPE and CABLE SIDE related information, please refer to para.4.3 on page 183.
Tab. 37. Signal connections: Cables belonging to CABLE KIT COMMON PARTS
CABLE 1st. SIDE CABLE 2nd SIDE

CABLE
N. CABLE CABLE
TYPE LABEL & CONNECTION LABEL & CONNECTION
SIDE SIDE
E 1 E1 Sub. RT / M4 (N.B.1) E2 Sub. BB / M186 (N.B.2)
C 1 C1 Sub. RT / M1 (N.B.1) C2 Sub. BB / M180 (N.B.2)
D 1 D1 Sub. BB / M184 (N.B.2) D2 TRU Alarm ext. / M7 (N.B.3)
Tab. 38. Signal connections: Cables belonging to FANS UNIT CABLE KIT and FANS UNIT
EXTENSION CABLE KIT
a) Configuration: BB FAN shelf only

CABLE
N. CABLE CABLE
SIDE SIDE
Fans Unit down (up) / M2
Q 1 Q1 Q2 Sub. BB / M187 (N.B.2)
(N.B.4)
T 1 T –– ––
(N.B.4)
b) Configuration: BB FAN shelf + ADM FAN shelf

CABLE
N. CABLE CABLE
SIDE SIDE
Q 1 Q1 Q2 Sub. BB / M187 (N.B.2)
(N.B.4)
Fans Unit down (up) / M3 Fans Unit down (up) / M2
R 1 R1 R2
(N.B.4) (N.B.5)
T 1 T –– ––
(N.B.5)
N.B. 1 see Fig. 97. page 181

4 connected to connectors M2/M3 (see Fig. 93. page 172) of BB’s FANS shelf
(see POS.(E) in Fig. 55. on page 126)
5 connected to connectors M2/M3 (see Fig. 93. page 172) of ADM’s FANS shelf
(see POS.(L) in Fig. 55. on page 126)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 191 / 514
514
Tab. 39. Signal connections: Cables belonging to CABLE KIT FOR 1 EXTEN. CHANNEL FOR
WMSN

CABLE

N. CABLE CABLE
SIDE SIDE
D 1 D1 ADM CONGI / C3 (N.B.1) D2 TRU Alarm ext. / M6 (N.B.2)
S1 Sub.ADM STMn / J1 (N.B.1) S4 RRAn / J2 (N.B.3)

S n
S2 Sub.ADM STMn / J2 (N.B.1) S3 RRAn / J1 (N.B.3)
N.B. 1 refer to 1650SM–C documentation

2 see Fig. 94. on page 176
3 see Fig. 71. on page 148
Tab. 40. Signal connections: Cables belonging to ADDITIONAL HOUSEKEEPING

CABLE
N. CABLE CABLE
SIDE SIDE
D 1 D1 Housek. / M2 (N.B.1) D2 Sub. BB / M179 (N.B.2)
N.B. 1 see Fig. 77. on page 154

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 192 / 514
514
4.6 Modem–Transceiver–Branching connections
The connections among Modems, Transceivers and Branching depend on the following possible
configurations:
– case a ) : without Reuse and without Diversity
see page 194
– case b ) : without Reuse and with Diversity
see page 196
– case c ) : with Reuse and without Diversity
see page 198
– case d ) : with Reuse and with Diversity
see page 200

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 193 / 514
514
a) Without Reuse and without Diversity
See Fig. 105. on page 195.

In this figure, the writings near the arrows (that show the signal direction) on the cable indicate the

CABLE TYPE and the CABLE SIDE information.
E.g. ’G2’ near ’MODEM J1’ means that:
• cable type ’G’ is used
• and that its side ’G2’ has to be connected to MODEM’s connector ’J1’
• signal flows out from connector ’J1’
N.B. For CABLE TYPE and CABLE SIDE related information, please refer to para.4.3 on page
183.
To locate the front connectors indicated in such figure, use:
• for MODEM unit: Fig. 75. on page 152
• for TRANSCEIVER unit: Fig. 87. on page 165
For the connections between TRANSCEIVER unit and Rx / Tx Branching, refer to documents cited
in para.3.8.1 on page 168.
Requirements:
• MODEM does not need any CANC–COMB module (see Fig. 74. on page 151)
• TRANSCEIVER:
– internal components: standard configuration (see Fig. 81. on page 159).

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 194 / 514
514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
TX RX
BRANCHING TRANSCEIVER SHELF BRANCHING BASE BAND SHELF
03
955.203.292 Q
G1
G2
J5
J6
J5
J1
J4
J3
J2
J14
MODEM n
J9
J10
J11
F2
F1
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
TRANSCEIVER n
Fig. 105. Modem–Transceiver–Branching connections: without Reuse and without Diversity
195 / 514
b) Without Reuse and with Diversity


183.
Requirements:
• MODEM needs one CANC–COMB module (see Fig. 74. on page 151)
• TRANSCEIVER:
– internal components: configuration with Diversity Receiver, in addition to standard

components (see Fig. 83. on page 160).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 196 / 514
514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
TX RX
TRANSCEIVER SHELF BRANCHING BASE BAND SHELF
BRANCHING
03
955.203.292 Q
H1
G1
G2
H2
J2
J1
J5
J6
J3
J5
J1
J4
J3
J2
J14
MODEM n
J9
J10
J11
F2
F1
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
TRANSCEIVER n
Fig. 106. Modem–Transceiver–Branching connections: without Reuse and with Diversity
197 / 514
c) With Reuse and without Diversity


183.
The connections must be done between two contiguous pairs of channels, i.e.:
• (MODEM 0 + TRANSCEIVER 0) connected to (MODEM 1 + TRANSCEIVER 1)
• ....
Requirements:
• both MODEMs need one CANC–COMB module (see Fig. 74. on page 151)
• TRANSCEIVERs: the two transceivers are configured differently from each other:
– one Transceiver as follows:
• internal components: configuration with “TR.Frequency Reuse Kit”, in addition to

standard components (see Fig. 82. on page 160)
• hardware setting: the Rx Local Oscillator must be configured as “MASTER”
– the other Transceiver as follows:
• internal components: standard configuration (see Fig. 81. on page 159)
• hardware setting: the Rx Local Oscillator must be configured as “SLAVE”

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 198 / 514
514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
RX
TX TRANSCEIVER SHELF BRANCHING BASE BAND SHELF
BRANCHING
03
955.203.292 Q
K1
F1
G1
N1
G2
F2
J5
J6
J14
J5
J1
J4
J3
J2
H (V)
J9
J10
J11
MODEM EVEN
K2
TRANSCEIVER H (V)
TRANSCEIVER V (H)
K2
J5
J6
J5
J1
J4
J3
J2
J14
V (H)
J9
J10
J11
F2
MODEM EVEN +1
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
G2
N2
G1
K1
F1
Fig. 107. Modem–Transceiver–Branching connections: with Reuse and without Diversity
199 / 514
d) With Reuse and with Diversity


183.
The connections must be done between two contiguous pairs of channels, i.e.:
• ....
Requirements:
• both MODEMs need two CANC–COMB modules (see Fig. 74. on page 151)
• TRANSCEIVERs: the two transceivers are configured differently from each other:
– one Transceiver as follows:
• internal components: configuration with “Diversity Receiver” and with

“TR.Frequency Reuse Kit”, in addition to standard components (see Fig. 84. on page
161)
• hardware setting: the Rx Local Oscillator must be configured as “MASTER”
– the other Transceiver as follows:
• internal components: configuration with Diversity Receiver, in addition to standard

components (see Fig. 83. on page 160)
• hardware setting: the Rx Local Oscillator must be configured as “SLAVE”

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 200 / 514
514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
RX
TX TRANSCEIVER SHELF BRANCHING BASE BAND SHELF
BRANCHING
03
N1
955.203.292 Q
H1
P1
F1
G1
G2
F2
H2
J2
J1
J5
J6
J3
J14
J5
J1
J4
J3
J2
H (V)
J9
J10
J11
MODEM EVEN
P2
TRANSCEIVER H (V)
TRANSCEIVER V (H)
P2
J2
J1
J5
J6
J3
J5
J1
J4
J3
J2
J14
V (H)
J9
J10
J11
H2
F2
MODEM EVEN +1
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
G2
G1
H1
P1
F1
N2
Fig. 108. Modem–Transceiver–Branching connections: with Reuse and with Diversity
201 / 514
4.7 External interfaces
4.7.1 Power Line Interface

The Power Line interface is located on the TRU unit (see Fig. 94. on page 176).
The main characteristics are reported in para.6.2.2 on page 323.
4.7.2 SDH interfaces
The SDH interfaces (line side) can be electrical or optical.

Their access is on the front panel of units RRA–CHANNEL and RRA–STANDBY (1 channel per unit); see
para.3.6.4 on page 147 (RRA–CHANNEL), and para.3.6.5 on page 149 (RRA–STANDBY).
– Electrical interfaces
The connector used is Siemens, 1.0/2.3 75–ohm male coax.
– Optical interfaces
The connector used is SC/PC or FC/PC.
For Optical Safety refer to para.6.8 on page 339.
Maximum cables number: N.8 inputs and N.8 outputs.
4.7.3 Input / Output Unprotected WST
The Subrack Access Area provides external access for WST channels by Siemens connectors, 1.0/2.3
75–ohm male coax.
Maximum cables number: N.8 inputs and N.8 outputs on BaseBand Subrack access area; see para.4.2.3
on page 180.
4.7.4 Input / Output Protected WST
Input /Output WST protected is available on Service unit (see para.3.6.3 on page 144)
The connector used is Siemens 1.0/2.3 75–ohm male coax.
Maximum cables number: N.1 input and N.1 output.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 202 / 514
514
4.7.5 Auxiliary Channels
The Subrack Access Area provides external access for auxiliary channels by three SUB–D 25 pins female
connectors specified in the following.
This table sums up the interfaces available:
Tab. 41. Summary of auxiliary channels
inserted/
N. bit/s Format Connector wires Notes
extracted
asynchronous
M182 on BB access
1 9600 V24/V28 RSOH/RFCOH 2
area. See
(selectable)
Tab. 42. on page
3 64k G703 RSOH/RFCOH 204 12
64k RSOH/RFCOH
M191 on BB access
3
RSOH/RFCOH area. See (SW configurable)
or V11 24
64K/128K (128 K) only Tab. 44. on page connected to 1 or
2+1
RFCOH 206 2 bytes
RJ11
Connector (J5) on
1 Speech telephonic RSOH/RFCOH 2 EOW
Service Unit
(Fig. 69. page 145)
Analog
3 Speech I/O –3dBm RSOH/RFCOH 12
Party line
M190 on BB access
1 Speech I/O –3dBm RFCOH area. See 4 TPH
Tab. 43. on page
205 Available on
Out 400 mW EOW
1 Speech 2 Remote Unit
4 ohm (only extract)
to loudspeaker
M182 on BB access
area. See
1 64k G703 RFCOH or ADM 4 TPH to ADM
Tab. 42. on page
204

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 203 / 514
514
Tab. 42. Aux channel G703 and RS232 – BB shelf’s M182 connector pinout
M182 : SUB–D25 pins female

PIN SIGNAL NAME SIGNAL DESCRIPTION

1 G703 TX+ (A) 64 kb data channel output port A
2 G703 RX+ (A) 64 kb data channel input port A
3 G703 TX+ (B) 64 kb data channel output port B
4 G703 RX+ (B) 64 kb data channel input port B
5 G703 TX+ (C) 64 kb data channel output port C
6 G703 RX+ (C) 64 kb data channel input port C
7
8 DATI 9600 TX 9.6 kb data channel output
9
1
14 10 G703 TX+ TPH 64 kb data channel output for VOAD
11 G703 RX+ TPH 64 kb data channel input for VOAD
12
13 GND
14 G703 TX– (A) 64 kb data channel output port A
25 15 G703 RX– (A) 64 kb data channel input port A
13
16 G703 TX– (B) 64 kb data channel output port B
17 G703 RX– (B) 64 kb data channel input port B
18 G703 TX– (C) 64 kb data channel output port C
19 G703 RX– (C) 64 kb data channel input port C
20
21 DATI 9600 RX 9.6 kb data channel input
22
23 G703 TX– TPH 64 kb data channel output for VOAD
24 G703 RX– TPH 64 kb data channel input for VOAD
25
N.B. Connector position in Fig. 95. on page 178.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 204 / 514
514
Tab. 43. Out party line OW, TPH and loudspeaker – BB shelf’s M190 connector pinout


1 VF TX+ A analog party line output path A

2 VF TX+ B analog party line output path B
3 VF TX+ C analog party line output path C
4 VF RX+ A analog party line input path A
5 VF RX+ B analog party line input path B
6 VF RX+ C analog party line input path C
7 WIRE ”A” TPH output telephone (TPH)
8 VF TX+ A TPH analog party line output path B VOAD
9 VF TX+ B TPH analog party line output path A VOAD
1
14 10 VF RX+ A TPH analog party line input path B VOAD
11 VF RX+ B TPH analog party line input path A VOAD
12 LOUDSPEAKER + output loudspeaker negative
13 GND
14 VF TX– A analog party line output path A
25 15 VF TX– B analog party line output path B
13
16 VF TX– C analog party line output path C
17 VF RX– A analog party line input path A
18 VF RX– B analog party line input path B
19 VF RX– C analog party line input path C
20 WIRE ”B” TPH output telephone (TPH)
21 VF TX– A TPH analog party line output path A VOAD
22 VF TX– B TPH analog party line output path B VOAD
23 VF RX– A TPH analog party line input path A VOAD
24 VF RX– B TPH analog party line input path B VOAD
25 LOUDSPEAKER – output loudspeaker negative

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 205 / 514
514
Tab. 44. Aux channel V11 – BB shelf’s M191 connector pinout


1 DATI+ V11 TX (A) 64 kb data channel positive output port A
2 CK+ V11 TX (A) TX clock positive port A
3 DATI+ V11 RX (A) 64 kb data channel positive input port A
4 DATI+ V11 TX (B) 64 kb data channel positive output port B
5 CK+ V11 TX (B) TX clock positive port B
6 DATI+ V11 RX (B) 64 kb data channel positive input port B
7 DATI+ V11 TX (C) 64 kb data channel positive output port C
8 CK+ V11 X (C) TX clock positive port C
9 DATI+ V11 RX (C) 64 kb data channel positive input port C
1
14 10 DATI+ V11 TX (D) 64 kb data channel positive output port D
11 CK+ V11 TX (D) TX clock positive port D
12 DATI+ V11 RX (D) 64 kb data channel positive input port D
13 GND
14 DATI– V11 TX (A) 64 kb data channel negative output port A
25 15 CK– V11 TX (A) TX clock negative port A
13
16 DATI– V11 RX (A) 64 kb data channel negative input port A
17 DATI– V11 TX (B) 64 kb data channel negative output port B
18 CK– V11 TX (B) TX clock negative port B
19 DATI– V11 RX (B) 64 kb data channel negative input port B
20 DATI– V11 TX (C) 64 kb data channel negative output port C
21 CK– V11 TX (C) TX clock negative port C
22 DATI– V11 RX (C) 64 kb data channel negative input port C
23 DATI– V11 TX (D) 64 kb data channel negative output port D
24 CK– V11 TX (D) TX clock negative port D
25 DATI– V11 RX (D) 64 kb data channel negative input port D

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 206 / 514
514
4.7.6 Management interfaces
The System Controller unit (see Fig. 67. on page 141) provides the following external access points:
– I/0 for TMN (QB3)

• BNC connector 10BASE2

• RJ45 connector 10BASET and EC Debug Network or EC local debug:
Tab. 45. RJ45 Connector for 10baseT interface on System Controller unit
Pin Signal
1 TPTXP
2 TPTXN
3 TPRXP
4
5
6 TPRXN
7
8 GND
– Craft terminal interface (F)

The connection for F interface (RS232 to local PC) is provided on ESC unit through a standard SUB
9–pin female connector:
Tab. 46. RS–232 for F interface connection table
RS232 RJ45
PAIR WIRE COLOR
(SAM side) (PC side)
1 A Not used Not used White / Blue ring
1 B Not used Not used Blue
2 A 5 4 White / Orange ring
2 B Not used Not used Orange
3 A 3 8 White / Green ring
3 B 2 7 Green
4 A Not used Not used White / Brown ring
4 B Not used Not used Brown
N.B. The special cable needed to connect the CRAFT TERMINAL to the system is supplied with
the equipment.
– Can Bus and RC debug local access by RJ45

for Alcatel internal use only.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 207 / 514
514
4.7.7 Station Alarms
Station alarm interface access is provided in TRU unit, connectors (M1) to (M5); see Fig. 94. on page 176.

Tab. 47. LHR Station Alarms connector pinout
PIN ALARM MEANING HW/SW

1 +VSERV +Service battery
2 C Alarm storing command HW
RATTD Yellow LED switch on – Alarm storing HW–SW
3
ABN Yellow LED switch on – Abnormal condition SW
1 6
4 RURG Red LED (1) switch on – Urgent alarm HW–SW
9
5 5 RNURG Red LED (2) switch on – Not Urgent alarm HW–SW
6 –VSERV –Service battery
7 CH Green LED switch on – buzzer HW
8 TOR VBATT1 failure or VBATT2 failure HW
9 GND GROUND
For further information, please refer to para.7.4.2 on page 363.
4.7.8 Summarizing / Housekeeping alarms
4.7.8.1 General characteristics
Standard Housekeeping Housekeeping external unit
I/O N I/O N
Input (station alarms) 22 Input (station alarms) 18 (additional)
Output (station controls) 48 –– ––
The interface characteristics here indicated apply both to summarizing alarms and housekeeping alarms:
– The presence of active alarm correspond to closed relay contact with a common wire available to
the customer.
– Electrical characteristics (V is voltage between the warm and the common wires) are:
• open contact ± 72 p V p ± 2V I p 0.2mA
• closed contact ± 2 p V <= ± 0V I p 50mA

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 208 / 514
514
4.7.8.2 Out Housekeeping and Remote alarms
Summarizing and Out Housekeeping interface access is provided by means of three SUB–D 25–pins
female connectors on Access area subrack specified in the following tables Tab. 48. thru’ Tab. 50.
For the meaning of the signals, please refer to Tab. 62. on page 364.
Tab. 48. Out Remote alarms (GA1–GA20) – BB shelf’s M193 connector pinout

1 OUT–GA1 output general alarm
1
14 10 OUT–GA16 output general alarm
13 GND gnd
13
16 COM–A common rele
19 COM–B common rele
22 COM–C common rele
25 COM–D common rele

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 209 / 514
514
Tab. 49. Out Remote alarms (GA21–GA40) – BB shelf’s M183 connector pinout


1
13 GND gnd
13
16 COM–E common rele
19 COM–F common rele
22 COM–G common rele
25 COM–H common rele

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 210 / 514
514
Tab. 50. Out Housekeeping and Remote alarms (GA41–GA48) – BB shelf’s M192
connector pinout


1 OUT–HK1 housekeeping output
9 TAND
1
12 TOR
13 GND
25 15 OUT–HK4 housekeeping output
13
16 COM–I common rele
19 COM–L common rele
22 COM–M common rele
25 COM–N common rele

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 211 / 514
514
4.7.8.3 Input Housekeeping alarms
Summarizing and Out Housekeeping interface access is provided by means of one SUB–D 25–pins
female connector on Access area subrack specified in the following Tab. 51. herebelow.

With the use of the Additional Housekeeping unit, it is possible to increase by 18 the HK Inputs. The access
is on the same unit (see Tab. 52. on page 213).
Tab. 51. Input Housekeeping – BB shelf’s M185 connector pinout

1 IN–HK1 housekeeping input
1
14 10 IN–HK19 housekeeping input
12
13 GND
25 15 IN–HK4 housekeeping input
13
25

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 212 / 514
514
Tab. 52. Input Housekeeping – Additional Housekeeping unit’s M1 connector pinout


1 IN–HK1–EXT housekeeping input

1
14 9 IN–HK9–EXT housekeeping input
25 14 IN–HK14–EXT housekeeping input
13
19 GND
20 XX internal use
21 XX internal use
22 XX internal use
23 XX internal use
24 XX internal use
25

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 213 / 514
514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
214 / 514
5 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
5.1 Introduction
The general block diagrams for LHR and WMSN configurations are respectively shown in following
Fig. 109. and Fig. 110.
CMI 9 RRA SW RFCOH MD TR
DCCR
WST 2Mb/s
RRA SW RFCOH MD TR
DCCR
WST 2Mb/s
DCCR
DCCR
ECT F
EOW
DCCR 64 Kb
QB3 SC SERVICE WST 2Mb/s
OS
DCCR
DCCR
CMI 0 MD TR
RRA RFCOH
DISTRIB.
RADIO
PROTECTION
Fig. 109. LHR system (N+1 / N+0)
RRA SW RFCOH MD TR
CMI 7
DCCR
WST 2Mb/s
RRA SW RFCOH MD TR
DCCR
WST 2Mb/s
1650SMC
CMI 1
DCCR
DCCR
CMI 0
F EOW
DCCR 64 Kb
QB3 SC SERVICE WST 2Mb/s
Nx64
Kb DCCR
DCCR
RRA RFCOH MD TR
DISTRIB.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ECT OS RADIO
PROTECTION
Fig. 110. WMSN system (N+1 / N+0)
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 215 / 514
514
This chapter describes in detail the functional operation of LHR equipment.
This handbook gives no detailed information on 1650SM–C equipment. For this purpose,
please refer to 1650SM–C specific documentation (see para.18.2.2.2 on page 471) with the

following exception:

In the application for 9600 LSY, the FAN SHELF used for 1650SM–C is not
that described in the 1650SM–C documentation, but that described in this
handbook.
The handbook parts that should be read before starting this chapter are:
– chapter 2 on page 39 System description

– chapter 3 on page 121 Physical Configuration
Information given in this chapter is organized as follows:
– Equipment Control subsystem para.5.2 starting on page 217

that includes:
• Control Subsystem Architecture (HW+SW): para.5.2.1 starting on page 217
• Control Subsystem Hardware Architecture: para.5.2.2 starting on page 237
• Control Subsystem Software Architecture: para.5.2.3 starting on page 242
• Signal Management: para.5.2.4 starting on page 245
• Remote Inventory subsystem: para.5.2.5 starting on page 274
• System Controller unit description: para.5.2.6 starting on page 276
• Flash Card description: para.5.2.7 starting on page 280
• Additional Housekeeping unit description: para.5.2.8 starting on page 281
– Power Supply subsystem: para.5.3 starting on page 282
– Baseband subsystem: para.5.4 starting on page 285

that includes:
• Interconnection general block diagrams: para.5.4.1 starting on page 285
• RRA–CHANNEL “STM1+1WST” and “STM0+0WST” : para.5.4.2 starting on page 287
• RRA–STANDBY “STM1+1WST” and “STM0+0WST” : para.5.4.3 starting on page 289
• STM–1 optical module: para.5.4.4 starting on page 292
• 128QAM MODEM “STM1– 1WST”and“STM0– 0WST”: para.5.4.5 starting on page 293
• Service and Additional Voice unit: para.5.4.6 starting on page 297
– Transceiver subsystem: para.5.5 starting on page 302

that includes:
• Interconnection general block diagrams: para.5.5.1 starting on page 302
• DC/DC converter module: para.5.5.2 starting on page 304
• Transmit and Service module: para.5.5.3 starting on page 305
• Receive & IF Rx module: para.5.5.4 starting on page 309
• Local Oscillator module: para.5.5.5 starting on page 310
– Fans subsystem: para.5.6 starting on page 312

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 216 / 514
514
5.2 Equipment Control Subsystem
5.2.1 Control Subsystem Architecture

The equipment control subsystem is the full set of software facilities and the full set of hardware items,
devices and connections necessary to support such software.
This paragraph provides the overall architecture of this subsystem describing the macro functionalities
performed (reported in the following in italic character) and partitioning these functionalities into hardware
and software components.
5.2.1.1 Functionalities
Digital transmission systems can be broadly described as a collection of multiplexing, framing, transport,
routeing, timing and protection processes. Each of these processes can be decomposed into a collection
of atomic functions. These atomic functions interact with other functionalities, the equipment management
functionalities, which provide the atomic functions with configuration data and monitor the signals they are
processing, providing performance monitoring and alarms conditions to an external management system,
which is able to access to these information by means of communication functions.
Thus, the product functionalities can be broadly described according to the following functional
decomposition (see Fig. 111. herebelow):
– Atomic Functions (AF)

– Equipment Management Functions (EMF)
– Message Communication Functions (MCF)
fault &
performance
atomic monitoring
function
atomic
function DCC line side
EMF MCF
DCC–R radio side
atomic
function
configuration &
provisioning Q F
Fig. 111. Functional decomposition
The generic supervision process inside the NE, describes the way in which the occurrence of a
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
disturbance or fault is analyzed with the purpose of providing an appropriate indication of performance
and/or detected fault condition.
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 217 / 514
514
Transmission and equipment supervision processes are concerned with the management of the
transmission resources in the network and they are only interested in the functionality provided by a NE.
They require a functional representation of the NE that is implementation independent.

From transmission point of view, most atomic functions monitor the signals they are processing for certain

characteristics and provide performance information and/or alarm conditions based on these
characteristics. Therefore, transmission supervision process provides information on the external
interface signals that are processed by an NE.
Any equipment fault is represented by the unavailability of the affected functions because the transmission
management has no knowledge of the equipment as such. Equipment supervision process is concerned
with the fault localization and repair of the equipment itself. It does not require a knowledge of the
transmission network.
The supervision process is performed both in the atomic functions and in the management functions, so
it can be decomposed into major sub–processes: atomic function fault management and performance
monitoring, management function fault management, management function performance monitoring and
radio performance monitoring (see Fig. 112. herebelow). These processes are described in the next
paragraphs.
Atomic function pZZZ Management function

Fault & Performance Performance Monitoring
Monitoring process process
cZZZ rpZZZ
Management function Management function

Fault Management Radio Performance
process Monitoring process
Fig. 112. Supervision process decomposition

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 218 / 514
514
5.2.1.2 Atomic Functions
5.2.1.2.1 Supervision process

5.2.1.2.1.1 Fault management and performance monitoring process

The following Fig. 113. shows the supervision process inside the atomic functions. The anomalies
integration, consequent action control and defects correlations functions are components of the fault
management process and are performed both in the trail termination function and in trail adaptation
function. The performance monitoring primitives processing function represent the performance
monitoring process and is performed only inside the trail termination function.
The output signals cZZZ are the input signals for the management function fault management process,
while the output signals pZZZ are the input signals for the management function performance monitoring
process.
1 second primitives
Anomalies Perf. Mon. pZZZ/rpZZZ
Defects
Primitives
Processing
Near end
Anomalies Anomalies
Integration
Near end Fault Cause
defects cZZZ
dZZZ
Defects
Correlation
Consequent
Actions report options
aZZZ Consequent enable/disable
Actions
Control
Fig. 113. Supervision process within atomic functions
Fault management process
– Anomalies integration (f1)

Anomalies integration (or defect filter) provides a persistency check on the detected anomalies while
monitoring the data stream. When passed the defect is being detected.
Two class of defects are reported to the defect correlation for further processing: transmission and
equipment defects. Equipment defects (hardware fault) with signal transfer interruption will be
reported per replaceable unit. These defects will cause a performance primitive N_DS (see below)
activation if equipment protection (EPS) is not available.
This function is performed by HW.
– Consequent action control (f2)

This process provides the generation and the control of action consequent to detected defects. The
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
consequent action control process for each specific atomic function is described in the related
sections.
This function is performed by HW.
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 219 / 514
514
– Defects correlation (f3)
Defect correlation process provides correlation to reduce the amount of information offered to the
EMF. It determines, from a set of activated defects, which fault is present.
This function is performed by SW.

These processes are summarized, for each atomic function, in Tab. 53. on page 221.
In order to simplify the reading of this table, it could be useful to remember the meaning of the RSPI
functional block (see ITU–R 750 and ETS 300 635). It represents the radio frequency signal conversion
into an internal logic level STM–1 signal, and vice–versa. It contains the following radio functions (see
Fig. 114. below):
– Modulation and TX functions in the Transmit side
– Demodulation and RX functions in the Receive side
rxLOS rxFail demLOS demFail
Receive Demodulation
function function
Radio side
Transmit Modulation
function function
txFail txLOS modFail modLOS
Fig. 114. RSPI functional decomposition
If it is not possible to distinguish between loss of signal and internal failure for a given subfunction with a
sufficient degree of confidence, the minimal set of defect should be txFail, modFail, rxFail and demFail.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 220 / 514
514
Tab. 53. Fault management process
Functional Consequent Defect

Defect Fault Causes
Blocks Action Correlations
SPI source Transmit Degraded – not Transmit Fail Transmit Degraded

(optical)
Transmit Fail – – Transmit Fail
SPI source – – – –
(electrical)
SPI sink Loss of Signal AIS – Loss Of Signal
(electrical/optical)
Loss of Frame AIS not Loss of Signal Loss Of Frame
RST source – – – –
RST sink Trace Identifier AIS not (Loss of Signal or Trace Identifier
(line side) Mismatch Loss of Frame) Mismatch
RST sink Trace Identifier AIS (1) Trace Identifier
(radio side) Mismatch Mismatch
RSPI – RFCOH – – – –
source
RSPI – RFCOH Loss of Frame AIS not (rxLOS or rxFail Loss Of Frame
sink or demLOS or –
demFail)
Radio Channel AIS not (rxLOS or rxFail Radio Channel
Identifier Mismatch or demLOS Identifier Mismatch
or demFail
or Loss of Frame)
RSPI source txLOS – – txLOS
txFail – not txLOS (2) txFail
modFail – not (txLOS or txFail ) modFail

(2)
RSPI sink rxLOS AIS – rxLOS
rxFail AIS not rxLOS (2) rxFail
demLOS AIS not (rxLOS or rxFail) demLOS

(2)
demFail AIS Not (rxLOS or rxFail demFail
or demLOS) (2)
(1) This defect correlation is configuration dependent:

• N+0: not (rxLOS or rxFail or demLOS or demFail or Loss of Frame)
• N+1/N+2: not (rxLOS or rxFail or demLOS or demFail or Loss of Frame or Radio Channel
Identifier Mismatch). These defects are those generated by the channel currently working (RPS
protection), the same defects generated by the channel currently in standby state are not
considered in this defect correlation procedure.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
(2) This defect correlation is different from the one reported in draft MI/TM–4048 (stable part)
In unbalanced configurations, defects coming from the unbalanced channels and generated from the not
working function (Rx or Tx) must be inhibited.
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 221 / 514
514
Performance monitoring process
The requirements for the performance monitoring is to provide both performance monitoring quality of
service (SDH regenerator section quality of service and typical radio sections quality of service) and

performance monitoring of radio specific parameters.

a) Sections quality monitoring
The performance monitoring of SDH regenerator section (line side) must be consistent with the
performance monitoring of the remaining part of the SDH network ( e.g. optical link ). Methodology
used to provide performance monitoring are defined in DEN/TM 2246, ETS 300 417 series and
ITU–T rec. G.783, G.784 and G.829. The evaluations on line side signal is given by means of B1
according to the standard methodology.
ADM LHR
....... MST RST SPI .. .....

SPI RST
Regenerator Section
Fig. 115. Regenerator section
Two different radio sections must be monitored (see Fig. 116. below):
a) Hop Section: the section between two radio stations inside the protection section. Due to
the RPS location it is not possible to perform the monitoring of the hop section by means
of standard methodologies. It must be provided in a proprietary way by means of Forward
Error Correction.
b) Link Section: the section identifying the protected section (the section outside the radio
protection switching). The performance monitoring of the radio link section may be
performed by using B1 bytes at each side of the section. Methodology used to provide this
performance monitoring are defined in DEN/TM 2246, ETS 300 417 series and ITU–T rec.
G.783, G.784 and G.829.
LHR/WMSN LHR/WMSN
... RST RPS RFCOH RSPI RSPI RFCOH RPS RST ...
Radio HOP
Radio LINK
Fig. 116. Radio sections

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 222 / 514
514
b) Radio specific parameter monitoring
Radio specific performance monitoring deals with monitoring of the radio specific functional blocks
RSPI and RPS. The parameters provided by this PM is used in close conjunction with the ordinary
ones related to quality transmission.

The global performance monitoring process performed in the LHR atomic functions is described in
the following Fig. 117. This process is completely applicable to the WMSN equipment. In this case
the PM related to the functional blocks performed by the WADM/WLT (i.e. at multiplex section level
by using B2 bytes) are added.
to EMF to EMF
RLS–1 TLS–1 FSRD NDS

One second
primitives
RLS–2 PSAD NEBC OFS
One second filter
Performance PSA PSR

primitives FEC RL TL EB Defect OOF
RPS RSPI RST
Fig. 117. PM inside atomic functions
The one second primitives processing performs an integration of reported anomalies and defects by
counting them during a one second interval. At the end of each one second interval the contents of
the counters is made available to the performance monitoring process within the EMF for further
processing. Hereafter these performance primitives are described:
• Near end Errored Block Count (N_EBC) (f11)

This primitive counts, every second, the number of errored near–end blocks within that second.
A block is errored if one or more EDC violations are detected.
• Near end defect second determination process (N_DS) (f12)

Every second with at least one occurrence of TSF consequent action (LOS, LOF, TIM ....) or
equipment defect is indicated as a near end defect second.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
• Out of Frame Second (OFS)

A OFS is a second in which the frame alignment process was in the OOF state for at least a part
of that second.
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 223 / 514
514
• Received Level Threshold Second (RLTS)
A Received Level Second is generated if in one second period the detected RL is below a
predefined threshold. The threshold value is also expressed in minus dBm. At least two RLS
events are required corresponding to two different threshold values (TBD).

• Transmitted Level Threshold Second (TLTS)
A Transmitted Level Second is generated if in one second period the detected TL is greater than
a predefined threshold. The threshold value is also expressed in dB. One additional TLTS
corresponding to a different threshold is optional (TBD).
This processing is performed only if ATPC functionality is available.
• Protection Switch Actual Duration (PSAD)

Protection Switch Actual Duration represents one second period in which a channel is in the
switched status for at least a fraction of that second. This event is generated only for automatic
switches.
This event is defined for any channel involved in the protection scheme, both protected and
protecting channel, for protected channel this means that the associated traffic is carried by the
protecting channel, for the protecting channel that it is carrying traffic from a protected channel.
TBD in case of 1+1 non revertive mode (protected and protecting).
• Failed Switch Request Duration (FSRD)

A Failed Switch Request Duration represents one second period in which at least for a fraction
of that second, an automatic switch request is detected active on the associated channel while
it is carrying regular traffic and the request cannot be completed. This event is required only
for working channels.
Hereafter the performance primitives that don’t require one second filter are described:
• Protection Switch Actual Count (PSAC)

Protection Switch Actual Count represents the number of protection switch actual occurrences
in one second. This counter is defined for any protected (working) or protecting (stand–by)
channel involved in the protection scheme (1+1, N+1, N+2). In case of protecting channel this
counter represents the number of any actual switch from any protected channel to this channel.
• Failed Switch Request Count (FSRC)

Failed Switch Request Count represents the number of occurrences in one second of the
following events:
– a protection switch request is activated on a working channel and the protecting channels
are not available
– a working channel is restored from a protecting channel while the request is still active on
that channel.
This event must be generated only on protected channel. It must be generated in all the
protection scheme. The activation of a switch criterion on a given channel doesn’t increment
the counter if another activation criterion is already present on that channel.
The one second primitives processing is performed by SW.
The following Tab. 54. reports, for each atomic function, the entity monitored by the performance
primitives and the one second primitives provided to EMF for further processing.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 224 / 514
514
Tab. 54. Entities monitored by the performance monitoring primitives
Functional Performance One Second

Monitored Entity
Block Primitives Primitives
SPI source – – –
RST source – – –
(line and radio side)
SPI sink Frame Alignment Out Of Frame OFS
RST sink SDH RS Errored Block N_EBC
(line side)
Transm. Def. => LOS, N_DS
LOF,
TIM)
Eqpt Def. => EQ
RST sink Radio Link Section Errored Block N_EBC
(radio side)
Transm. Def. => N_DS
demLOS,
LOF,
RCIM,
TIM
(1) Eqpt
Def. => EQ
RSPI source Transmitted level TL > Thres. 3 TLTS–3
TL > Thres. 4 (opt.) TLTS–4
RSPI – RFCOH sink Frame Alignment Out Of Frame OFS
RSPI sink Received level RL < Thres. 1 RLTS–1
RL < Thres. 2 RLTS–2
RL < Thres. N (opt.) RLTS–N
Radio Hop (2) FEC N_EBC
Transm. Def. => rxLOS, N_DS
rxFail,
demLOS,
demFail,
LOF,
RCIM
Eqpt Def. => EQ
RPS Protection switch actual PSA PSAC
PSAD
Protection switch failed FSRC
FSRD
(1) The transmission performance primitives are configuration dependent:

• N+0: demLOS, LOF, TIM
• N+1/N+2: demLOS, LOF, RCIM, TIM. The demLOS, LOF, RCIM defects are those generated
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
by the channel currently working (RPS protection), the same defects generated by the channel
currently in standby state are not considered as performance primitives.
(2) Radio Hop performance monitoring hasn’t be provided in N+0 configurations.
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 225 / 514
514
5.2.1.2.2 Test management process
In LHR NEs line and internal loopbacks can be performed at different levels, as described in para.2.6.4
on page 93.

The signal that is sent after the loopback can be an AIS (loop and AIS) or the same signal as it was received
(loop and continue).
Test process is performed by HW (according to software control).

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 226 / 514
514
5.2.1.3 Management Functions
The management functions are handled by means of synchronous equipment management function block
described in the following figure. It provides the means through which the synchronous network element
function is managed by an internal or external manager.

SEMF
fault & Supervision

PM Process
AFs
NER MAF MCF
configuration &
provisioning
Fig. 118. Equipment management function
The SEMF interacts with the atomic functions by exchanging information across the MP reference points.
This information flow is related to configuration and provisioning data and to anomalies and defects
detected in the atomic functions. The EMF contains a number of filters that provide supervision process
by means of a data reduction mechanism on the information received across the MP reference points. The
filters outputs are available to the management application functions (MAF), via the network element
resources (NER). The NER provide event processing and data storage, while the MAF process the
information provide to and by the NER. The MAF represents the information as managed object according
to the object oriented approach.
The MAF converts performance data and implementation specific hardware alarms into object oriented
messages for transmission on DCC–R channel and/or on Q interface. It also converts object oriented
messages coming from external manager into internal specific messages for AF configuration.
The information to and from MAF is provide by means of the message communication function (MCF).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 227 / 514
514
5.2.1.3.1 Supervision process
Fault management process

The following Fig. 119. shows the sub–processes composing the fault management process.

Unit
Alarms
Alarms
Logging
Fault Cause
Fault Cause Severity
Persistency Assignment
Alarms
MCF
Reporting
Station
Alarms
Fig. 119. Fault management inside management function
– Fault cause persistency (f4)

The equipment management function performs a persistency check on the fault causes before
generating an alarm.
––––––> Number of seconds for declaring and clearing the failure TBD.
– EMF fault management severity assignment
– EMF fault management logging
– EMF fault management reporting
– Unit alarms generation (f5)
– Station alarms generation (f7)

They represent a synthesis of alarm with the purpose to provide an audible and visual indication to
the station operator.
All the equipment defects (including the ASICs faults) must be reported per replaceable unit. If a
replaceable unit is reported as being faulty, all the signals processed by this unit are assumed to be
interrupted. The atomic function performed by this unit will represent this situation activating the
performance primitive Defect Second (DS).
All these processes are performed by SW.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 228 / 514
514
Performance monitoring process
The one second primitives related to the SDH regenerator section quality of service and typical radio
section quality of service must to be processed to determine the performance events (ES, SES, BBE). This
process is explained in the following Fig. 120.

Monitored
Second
Y
Defect ?
(p_DS)
N Anomalies?
(p_EBC >0)
Y
EB >=2400 ?
N N
Available Available
State ? State ?
Y Y
ES = ES +1
BBE = BBE + EB SES = SES +1
Data
Collection
Fig. 120. Performance events generation process

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 229 / 514
514
The following Fig. 121. shows the PM process inside the management functions.
Performance Reporting
QOS Alarm

Performance History Threshold crossing
Information control
Performance data collection
Performance Count Inhibition
Performance Events
SES ES BBE
Event processing
RPSI, RPS one second OFS NEBC NDS

performance primitives
Fig. 121. PM inside management functions
– EMF performance monitoring event processing (PM filter: f13, f14, f15, f16)
– EMF performance count inhibition
– EMF performance monitoring data collection (f31)

One second performance events are collected into current registers (15minutes and 24 hours).
Notice that no processing are necessary on RSPI and RPS one second performance primitives to
generate performance events.
– EMF performance monitoring recent registers history management (f31)

At least 16 recent registers are required for 15 minutes and 1 for 24 hours.
– EMF performance monitoring reporting management (f32)
– EMF performance monitoring threshold crossing check management
All these functionalities are, of course, performed by SW.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 230 / 514
514
5.2.1.3.2 Configuration and provisioning process
The information flow over the MP reference points related to configuration and provisioning data is
described in details for each atomic function in ETS 300 417 series and in G.783. It is to be noted the
necessity to provide to the RFCOH atomic functions with the following information:
– the radio channel identifier expected value (to be compared with the one received on radio side,
functionality performed sink side)
– the radio channel identifier value to be inserted in frame (functionality performed source side)
This information flow refers both to configuration and provisioning data passed to the atomic functions and
to status reports coming from the atomic function as response to a request from SEMF.
The channel number associated to each RT position and the definition of which positions assume
the spare rule in the radio protection scheme (RPS) must be configured by ECT operator.
This functionality is completely performed by software.
5.2.1.3.3 Software download
Software download process (local and remote) has the same feature already implemented for new
generation of the Alcatel equipment. In synthesis:
– this process is hitless and causes no loss of control functionality when in progress
– a roll back to previous release is available when problems arises with the new software version.
5.2.1.3.4 Security
5.2.1.3.5 Time stamping
Events are time stamped with the resolution of one second (according to G.784).

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 231 / 514
514
5.2.1.4 Message Communication Functions
This function provides facilities for the transport of the TMN messages. It receives and buffers messages
from the DCC, Q and F interfaces and from EMF. Messages not addressed to the local site are relayed

to one or more outgoing DCCs in accordance with the local routing procedures and/or to Q interface (see

the following figure). In this way the TMN can be provided with a direct logical link to any SDH equipment
via a single Q interface and the interconnecting DCCs.
MCF is associated with all atomic functions having a physical interface.
NE 1 NE 2 NE 3
AF DCC DCC AF DCC DCC AF
EMF EMF EMF
MCF MCF MCF
TMN
Fig. 122. DCC routing
Q interface
When the access to the TMN is provided by the Q interface, it will be conform to the ITU–T G.773.
– QB3 protocol stack
F interface
– F protocol stack
DCC interface
Only DCCR are managed in the MCF in case of LHR (line and radio side). DCCR and DCCM are
managed, line side, in case of WADM/WLT
– DCC protocol stack.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 232 / 514
514
5.2.1.5 Protections
Several types of protections are present in LHR equipment. They can be categorized into two classes: trail
and equipment protection.
The protection types can be characterized by the following parameters:

– protection architectures (1+1, M:N)

– operation type (revertive, not–revertive)
– protection switch requests
Hereafter this parameters are described only for Radio protection, in case of equipment protection similar
considerations can be applied.
5.2.1.5.1 Radio Protection (RPS)
Radio Protection is a trail protection. It is used to provide protection for a working channel. Generally, this
function provides ”m” protection channels for ”n” signals against trail associated failures, both for hardware
failure and temporary signal degradation or losses due to propagation effects (e.g. rain or multipath
phenomena).The signal on the working channel is protected. This type of protection is performed by
switching a working channel to a protection section when the working section fails or when its performance
falls below the required level. A RPS function is used to perform the switching between the protection and
working section. The status of the sections is made available to the RPS function to allow it to decide when
an automatic switch should be performed.
Protection architectures
LHR equipment can support two different protection architectures : 1+1 or M:N. They are
characterized by the detection of failure events by the RSPI function; and the resultant
reconfiguration uses the protection switching functions that are in the RPS.
• A 1+1 protection architecture has one working (protected) trail supporting one normal traffic
signal, one protection (protecting) trail and a permanent bridge.
At the source end, the normal traffic signal is permanently bridged to both working and
protection trail. At the sink end, the condition of the two traffic signals are monitored and the
better of the two is selected.
Due to permanent bridging, the 1+1 architecture does not allow an extra unprotected traffic
signal to be provided.
In 1+1 architecture single ended switching is provided. The switching is complete when the
traffic signal (service) is selected from protection trail at the end detecting the fault. The sink end
transfers the traffic signal (service) without communication with the source end.
This architecture is used both in revertive and non–revertive mode.
Protection
Section
RFCOH RSPI RSPI RFCOH
RST RPS RPS RST
Working
Section
RFCOH RSPI RSPI RFCOH
NE A NE B
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 123. 1+1 Protection Switch Architecture
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 233 / 514
514
• A M:N protection architecture has N working (protected) trails supporting a normal traffic signal
and M protecting trail that may support the normal signal (if a protection switch is active) or an
extra traffic signal or a null signal (if no protection switch is active),
At the source end, when a defect condition is detected on a working trail, or under the effect of

appropriate external commands, the transported signal is routed over the protection trail and

the possible extra traffic is lost. At the sink end, the signal from this protection trail is selected
instead.
In M:N architecture dual ended switching is necessary. The traffic signal is switched from the
active to the protection trail at both ends of the protection span.
Dual–ended switching requires a communication channel between the two end of the protection
trail. This channel is called RAPS (Radio Automatic Protection Switching) or DSI channel.
RAPS provides information regarding the activation of switching procedure or about information
on the channel status that have to be shared at both ends of the connection.
Under dual–ended switching protocol, switching at only one end is not allowed. The two ends
have to communicate each other to synchronize the transfer of the traffic signal (service). If, at
one end, a switching criterion is detected, with a certain priority, a parallelizing request for the
involved traffic signal is sent to the remote end. When the positive acknowledge is received, the
switching is performed.
This architecture is used in the revertive mode.
Protection
Section
RST RFCOH RSPI RSPI RFCOH RST
.
.. . . . .
.. . . . .
.. . . .
Working
Section
RST RFCOH RSPI RSPI RFCOH RST
NE A NE B
Only present if extra (occasional) traffic is supported.
Fig. 124. M:N Protection Switch Architecture
Operation Type
Operation type may be Revertive or Not–revertive.
M:N architecture is always revertive, 1+1 architecture may be revertive or not, this parameter can
be set by the management system, in revertive case it is possible to specify if the restore has to act
on channel 0 or on channel 1. In revertive mode of operation, the working channel is switched back
to the working section when the working section has recovered from failure or when a switch
command is released. In non–revertive mode of operation, the switch is maintained even after
recovery from failure or release of a switch command.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 234 / 514
514
Switching Initiation Criteria Priority Management
When more than one switch request are present, the highest priority is served. Refer to the list given
in the following Tab. 55. This information cannot be set up by the management system.
Tab. 55. Switching Initiation Criteria Priority
Priority Radio Protection Switch Request
1 Lockout
2 Forced Switch
3 AutoSwitch Signal Fail (SF)
4 AutoSwitch High Bit Error Rate (HBER)
5 AutoSwitch Low Bit Error Rate (LBER or EWH)
6 AutoSwitch Early Warning (EW or EWL)
7 Manual Switch
8 Wait To Restore
9 Do Not Revert [1]
10 Exercise [1]
11 No Request
N.B. [1] Do Not Revert and Exercise Request have been listed in this order because an
exercise request can only be performed when the protection channel is not in use.
Another priority criteria is associated to each channel. This information is used to select the channel
of highest priority when different channels have the same switch request. This priority may be set up
by the management system.
Lockout, forced and manual switch, exercise are external requests (from management system). In
the following some of these RPS requests are explained.
• Lockout
The lockout RPS request is applicable to a working and to a protection trail, in both cases it
excludes one trail (working or protecting) from protection schema. In fact it prevents a working
trail from being protected and it prevents a protection trail from being used for protection.
• Exercise
Exercising the RPS is done in order to detect silent failures on the RPS. The exercise operation
performs all the steps to perform a switch except for the actual switch.
Two types of exercise may be used:
a) Single exercise: the operator send one command to perform a single exercise. At the end
of the operation, the NE returns the result to the OS.
b) Continuous Exercise: after starting by the operator, the exercise operation is repeated till
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
the operator sends the stop command.
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 235 / 514
514
• Automatic Switch Initiation Criteria
An automatic switch is only initiated upon detection of a failure at the receiving end(i.e. Sink
side). If a failure occurs at the transmission end (i.e. Source side), an automatic switch will be
initiated by the remote(i.e. far end) network element when it detects the failure at its receiving

end. The failures that can be detected at the receiving end are the following:

– HBER is generated by the RSPI functional block
– LBER (or EWH): generated by the RSPI functional block
– EW (or EWL): Early Warning generated by the RSPI functional block
– Signal Fail: generated from RSPI–lossOfSignal and fails (RxLos, RxFail, DemLos,
DemFail, LOF and RCIM of the RFCOH block and Equipment Defect for the functional
block RSPI and RFCOH (TBC).
• Wait to restore
In the revertive mode, a working channel will be switched back to its working section when the
working section has recovered from its failure. In order to prevent several protection switches
due to an intermittent failure, a failed section must be fault–free during a fixed period of time
called wait–to–restore(WTR) period before it can be used again by a working channel. An Auto
Switch condition will override the WTR period.
The WRT period is not configurable by the management system.
In the non–revertive mode, when the working section has recovered from its failure it will go
directly to the ”Do Not Revert” state.
5.2.1.5.2 Equipment Protection (EPS)
Equipment protection is provided on:
– RRA unit when the user interface is protected

– Transceiver unit (Tx only) and RRA unit (RFCOH block only) in HST configurations
Protection architecture is 1+1 only.
No EPS is provided on tributary and aggregate (WADM/WLT subrack) units. As consequence the clock
reference unit function (on board the aggregate unit) is not protected.
No protection of the units composing the control subsystem (i.e. ’System Controller’ and ’Service’ units)
is envisaged (the payload traffic is not affected by their loss, because configuration data are present also,
and thus survive, on the peripheral units). Equipment configuration data, as a whole, are contained in a
non–volatile memory in the ’System Controller’ unit. Such data can be back–upped and restored to/from
the Equipment Craft Terminal/OS in order to limit the eventual reconfiguration of the NE to the delta
between the back up configuration and the state before the crash is occurred.
5.2.1.5.3 Network Protections
WADM/WLT provides the following network protections:
– MSP on STM1 ports

– SNCP on all the virtual container
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 236 / 514
514
5.2.2 Control Subsystem Hardware Architecture
This paragraph describes the control subsystem hardware architecture, defines the control elements, the
function partitioning among them and the external and internal interfaces managed by this subsystem.
5.2.2.1 LHR control subsystem architecture
5.2.2.1.1 Function partitioning
The control subsystem provides the resources to support the communication interfaces and the
processing functions required by the TMN.
As described in the previous para.5.2.1 on page 217 (Control Subsystem Hardware Architecture), the
functionalities performed by the control subsystem can be summarized as follows:
– Message Communication Function (MCF)
– Synchronous Equipment Management Function (SEMF)
• Virtual Machine Management Function (VMMF)
• Physical Machine Management Function on whole equipment basis (PMMF/E)
• Physical Machine Management Function on unit basis (PMMF/U)
– Basic Functions (BF)
Each of these functionality groups includes functions with similar characteristics in terms of scope of
operation and performance requirements. In fact:
– MCF have to support a high routing throughput and don’t require a high availability
– Management functions don’t require a strict real time processing and a high availability
– BF require a strict real time processing and high availability
5.2.2.1.2 Control elements
The control elements supporting the functionalities described above are:

– Equipment controller (EC)
– Radio Controller (RC)
– Supervisory Units (SU)
The control elements logical hierarchy is depicted in Fig. 125. on page 238.
The functionalities are splitted on the control elements composing the control subsystem architecture.
Equipment Controller
One EC has in charge the MCF and VMMF: it provides resources (physical interfaces and protocol
stack) required for the communication between NE and the management systems (OS and ECT),
it performs all the control and management functions of the virtual machine (info model).
No protection of this control element is performed. The EC is physically located aboard the System
Controller board.
Radio Controller
One RC has in charge the PMMF/E: it provides the resources to support the control and management
functions related to the real physical machine.
No protection of this control element is performed. The RC is physically located aboard the System
Controller board.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 237 / 514
514
Supervisory Units
The SUs have in charge the PMMF/U and the AF. This function requires a real time processing of
the data coming from the ASICs. The SU on board of each unit has the aim to provide an uniform

interface towards the RC avoiding a RC dependency from the HW where the SUs are

accommodated. One SU is accommodated in each unit.
OS
QB3
F
ECT ISSB
EC RC
System Controller
CAN
Rem Local Rem Local

Inv uP –––– – Inv uP
SU SU
Fig. 125. LHR control subsystem architecture

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 238 / 514
514
5.2.2.1.3 Communication interfaces
A set of (serial and parallel) interfaces are defined as part of the control sub–system to support the
communication task.
They can be classified as system internal or external interfaces.

All the communication links used by the different processing functions (RC and EC) to exchange data each
other or to read/write data from/to the controlled objects (ASICs or other devices on board the different
cards in the equipment) are defined as internal interfaces.
External interfaces are defined as the communication links provided by the control sub–system towards
external devices used for Operation and Maintenance functions or system debug activities.
All the interfaces are reported in Fig. 126. with the association of the units supporting these interfaces.
EC
ISSB
RC
SC
CAN
Inv. RRA Inv. SW Inv. SERV Inv. MOD

Mem. Mem. Mem. Mem.
uP uP uP uP
SPI SPI SPI

SW
ASIC ASIC ASIC
RRA–n SERV MOD–n
RT Inv.
Mem.
uP
RT–n
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 126. LHR communication interfaces
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 239 / 514
514
– External Interfaces
The control sub–system provides the following external communication interfaces:
• QB3 interface
• F interface

•

Qecc interface

• DBG interface
• HK/RA interface
• QAUX interface
All the above interfaces are supported, at the NE level, by the EC processor, as part of its MCF and
VMMF.
The ”QB”, ”F”, ”Qecc”, ”Qaux” interfaces are available as communication links between the NE
and external control equipments, as required by the TMN environment.
The ”QB3” protocol stack requires a 10BASE2 (or 10BASET) physical layer and IEEE 802.2 / 802.3
for the data link layer. Through this interface the NE is connected to a LAN for message exchange
with the OS station.
The ”F” interface is a local communication port provided to connect the NE to a local Craft Terminal
station (PC or WS); this interface is implemented as a low speed RS–232 port (bit rate is 38,4 Kbit/s
max). Remote CT functionality is performed by routing CT messages to DCCs and viceversa.
The ”Qecc” interface is defined as a TMN related communication interface based on the use of the
Embedded Communication Channels, available in the SOH portion of the SDH frame, as physical
layer. Through the ”Qecc” interface the NE can exchange management messages with a remote OS
(or Craft Terminal) station.
Qecc interface is implemented as a TDM serial link between the EC function and the ASICs on board
of port units. The TDM channel is terminated by the MHDLC, providing for the selection of the
channels to terminate and performing the standard HDLC functions. This interface uses the LAPD
(ITU–T Q.921) as data link layer protocol, this protocol is performed by the MCF inside the EC
function.
The “Qaux” interface is provided as an additional TMN communication interface for message
exchange between the NE and a remote OS station, based on the use of a 2 Mbit/s proprietary
channel.
The ”DBG” interface is a proprietary interface available for software debug activities. A local
communication port for debug is required for each processor (EC and RC) on board the System
Controller. The local debug ports are a low speed RS–232 UART based interface, available for VT100
or equivalent debug console.
An equipment network interface for debug activities should be provided as well, implemented as a
10BASE2 Ethernet channel. The EC function should provide a router function between this port and
the internal ISSB bus to allow the use of this port for debugging of RC processor too.
A set of ”traditional” parallel I/O interfaces for local signaling of alarm presence, such as rack lamps,
front panel LEDs and so on are provided by the EC processor.
– Internal Interfaces
The control sub–system provides the following internal communication interfaces:
• ISSB (Intra Shelf Serial Bus) interface
• CAN interface
• SPI interface
The ”ISSB” (Intra Shelf Serial Bus) interface is basically an equipment–internal Local Area Network
for communications among the different microprocessors in the same shelf: the EC processor and
the RC processor and other possible processors. It is a multimaster HDLC–based backplane serial
bus.
The “CAN” interface allows to connect the RC processor to the microprocessor on board the units.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
It is a serial broadcast bus, each node connected to the bus receives all the messages sent by the
other ones. A local filtering mechanism on each node permit to manage only the messages related
to the node. The maximum speed is 1 Mbit/s up to 40 meters length.
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 240 / 514
514
5.2.2.2 WMSN control subsystem architecture
The main characteristics of the WMSN control subsystem architecture are the following (see
Fig. 127. herebelow):
– LHR and ADM equipments (1650SMC) control architecture reuse

This means that from the management system point of view this equipment is seen as two different
network elements (both of them with an own address). In this way the LHR and ADM hardware control
architecture are reused without any modification, allowing to preserve the independence of the
software developments of the ADM and radio parts.
– Only one F and QB3 interface
The F and QB3 interfaces are present on the ADM part. The radio part sees the TMN information
by means of Qecc interfaces. RECT application is used to manage both the ADM part (directly
connected) and the radio part (via Qecc).
RECT OS
F QB3
ISSB QECC ISSB
SC EC EC RC
ADM Controller System Controller (radio)
SPI
ISPB CAN
Rem ASIC Rem ASIC Rem Local Rem Local

Inv ––– Inv Inv uP ––– Inv uP
Unit Unit Unit Unit
ADM part RADIO part

Legend :
EC : Equipment Controller (MCF, SEMF: Virtual Machine)
RC : Radio Controller (SEMF: Physical Machine)
SC : Shelf Controller (SEMF: Physical Machine)
ISSB : Intra Shelf Serial Bus
SPI : Serial Peripheral & Inventory
CAN : Controller Area Network bus
ISPB : Intra Shelf Parallel Bus
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 127. WMSN control subsystem architecture
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 241 / 514
514
5.2.3 Control Subsystem Software Architecture
This paragraph describes the software architecture of the equipment control subsystem.

5.2.3.1 LHR control software architecture

5.2.3.1.1 Functional Decomposition
The software implemented functions can be divided into the following groups:
– Message Routing Function (MRF)

It represents all the functions necessary to set up a management network intermediate system
(intermediate system communication function):
• QB3 protocol stack (layer 1 thru 3)
• Qecc protocol stack (layer 1 thru 3)
• F protocol stack (layer 1 thru 7)
– Virtual Machine Management Function (VMMF)

It represents all the functions necessary to set up a management network end system (end system
communication function) and to control and manage the virtual machine. No strict real time is
required.
• QB3 protocol stack (layer 4 thru 7)
• Qecc protocol stack (layer 4 thru 7)
• NER
• MAF
• EMF fault management:
– enable/disable alarm reporting
– alarm severity assignment
• EMF performance monitoring
• Configuration and provisioning (virtual machine)
• Persistent database management
• Software download and management
• Security
– Physical Machine Management Function (PMMF)

It represents all the functions necessary to control and manage the physical machine. No strict real
time is required.
• EMF fault management
• EMF performance monitoring
• Configuration and provisioning (physical machine)
– Basic Function (BF)

It represents all the strict real time signal processing functions that can be performed without
accessing the ASICs
• card fail alarm generation: this alarm is an ”OR” of different equipment alarm primitives
• alarms correlation between equipment and transmission alarms (transmission alarms are
masked by equipment alarms)
• standby cards alarms inhibition (transmission alarms of EPS and RPS standby cards)
• alarms time stamping, according to the time at which the alarm status change has been read
from ASIC
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 242 / 514
514
5.2.3.1.2 Module Decomposition
According to the functional decomposition described in the previous para.5.2.3.1.1 on page 242, the
partitioning of the software into the main design entities, the function and the purpose of each of them are
described hereafter.
a) Virtual Machine Manager
The Virtual Machine Manager is composed of two main parts (see Fig. 128. on page 244):
• Common Software (CSW)

CSW provides two different services:
– External Communication Service (ECS)

It manages the protocols for the communication with the manager OS and IM–CT.
– Network Element Function Application (NEFA)

This component provides a representation of the network element by means of an
information model. This information model describes the equipment from the
management point of view as a collection of managed objects, which can be manipulated
by a management system.
NEFA component is composed by a common part (NEFA–C) independent from the
physical resources of the network element that represents only the functionalities
performed in terms of functional managed objects, and a specific part (NEFA–S)
dependent from the physical resources that implements the equipment managed objects.
• Virtual Hardware Machine (VHM)
VHM manages the communication with the RC function both in terms of application data (it
sends to the RC the provisioning data and receives status and alarms) and in terms of
communication driver. The messages exchanged between EC and RC are logical messages
(information model oriented).
This component stores to persistent memory the data configuration coming from the
management systems.
b) Physical Machine Manager
Physical Machine Manager provides a proprietary representation of the managed system in terms
of transmission resources and physical resources. It implements the PMM functions and generally
provides the conversion between the data how they are known from the physical machine and the
info model representation based on managed objects.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 243 / 514
514
External Communication Service

(ECS)
Common
Software
(CSW)
NEFA Common (NEFA–C)
NEFA Specific
(NEFA–S)
NEFA
dataBase Handler (dBH)
Physical Machine Manager (PMM)
VHM EC/RC Interface Handler
Fig. 128. VMM module decomposition
5.2.3.2 WMSN control software architecture
From the software architecture point of view, this equipment is composed by two completely independent
parts, with different aims:
– Radio functionalities management

See the LHR software architecture for the functional and module decomposition description
(para.5.2.3.1 on page 242).
– ADM functionalities management

The functional and module decomposition of this part is inherited by the related ADM product (please
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
refer to 1650SMC specific documentation).
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 244 / 514
514
5.2.4 Signal Management
This paragraph describes the signal management performed by 9600LSY equipment.

5.2.4.1 STM–1 frame structure and WST mapping

Two types of frame can be envisaged depending on frequency channeling applications:
STM1 + 2xWST (8 columns) + RFCOH (2 columns)
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 J0 NU NU
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇ ÇÇ
B1 MD MD E1 MD F1 NU NU
ÇÇÇÇ
D1 MD MD D2 MD D3
ÇÇÇÇ
ADMINISTRATIVE UNIT OVERHEAD
B2 B2 B2 K1 K2
D4 D5 D6
ÇÇÇÇ
D7 D8 D9
ÇÇÇÇ
D10
S1
D11
M1
D12
E2 NU NU ÇÇ ÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
RFCOH channels 2xWST channels
(2 columns) (8 columns)
MD: Media dependent bytes

NU: Bytes reserved for national use
MSOH bytes are in bypass condition
STM1 + RFCOH (2 columns)
ÇÇ ÇÇ
ÇÇ ÇÇ
A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 J0 NU NU
ÇÇ ÇÇ
B1 MD MD E1 MD F1 NU NU
ÇÇ ÇÇ
D1 MD MD D2 MD D3
ÇÇ ÇÇ
ADMINISTRATIVE UNIT OVERHEAD
B2 B2 B2 K1 K2
D4 D5 D6
ÇÇ ÇÇ
D7 D8 D9
ÇÇ ÇÇ
D10
S1
D11
M1
D12
E2 NU NU ÇÇ
ÇÇ ÇÇ
ÇÇ
RFCOH channels
(2 columns)
MD: Media dependent bytes

NU: Bytes reserved for national use
MSOH bytes are in bypass condition

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 245 / 514
514
5.2.4.2 STM–0 frame structure
ÇÇÇÇ
STM0 + RFCOH (2 columns)
ÇÇÇÇ

A1 A2 J0
ÇÇÇÇ

B1 E1 F1
D1 D2 D3
ÇÇÇÇ
H1 H2 H3
ÇÇÇÇ
B2 K1 K2
ÇÇÇÇ
D4 D5 D6
ÇÇÇÇ
D7 D8 D9
ÇÇÇÇ
D10
S1
D11
M1
D12
E2
ÇÇ ÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
1xWST channel RFCOH channels
(4 columns) (2 columns)
The Multiplex Section Remote Error Indication (MS–REI) M1 is re–routed inside the STM–0 frame
from byte #(9,6) of STM–1 frame.
MSOH bytes are in bypass condition.
A single WST channel (2.048 Kbit/s) is composed by 36 bytes as described in the following:
Information (1 byte) 1st byte
WST_POH (1 byte)
Information (8 bytes)
P_WST Sg_stn Sg_stp
P_WST Sg_stn Sg_stp
stn 0 Sg_stn Sg_stp

stp Information (7 bits)
36th byte
WST (2.048 Kbit/s)
WST_POH: global SDH plus WST parity (BIP–8 operation)

P_WST: dedicated WST parity (BIP–2 operation)
Sg_stn: negative stuffing opportunity
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Sg_stp: positive stuffing opportunity

Information: 32 bytes
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 246 / 514
514
The characteristics of the frame are resumed in the following table:
Channel
Symbol
n. Code spacing Re–use
∆f/Sr
Signal WST rate

columns redundancy [MHz] operation
[Mbit/s]
40 1.612 Yes
30.0 1.209 Yes
STM–1 2 280 7.69% 24.812 29.65 1.195 Yes
29.0 1.168 Yes
28.0 1.128 No
STM–1 1 272 7.69% 24.103 28.0 1.161 Yes
STM–0 1 96 7.69% 8.507 14 1.645 –––––
The STM–1 signal with 0 WST channel is used only for special application (frequency re–use operation
in 28 channel spacing).
The STM–0 signal with 1_WST is derived directly from the STM–1 frame with 2_WST channels dividing
by three.
RFCOH SERVICES STRUCTURE
The structure of SERVICE CHANNELS inside the RFCOH area is the following:
RFCOH
column xx column yy
DSI 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8
ATPC 1.9 1.10 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6
D1 2.7 2.8 2.9 2.10 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4
D2 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 3.10 4.1 4.2
D3 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9 4.10
E1 5.1 5.2 K0
F1 reserved for service channel
reserved for service channel reserved for service channel
reserved for service channel reserved for service channel
Monitoring channel management:
1.X EWL alarm

2.X EWH alarm
3.X HBER alarm
4.X ATL alarm
[X=1 to 10number of channel]
5.1 FAIL service 0 (ATL_rfcoh1)

5.2 FAIL service 1 (ATL_rfcoh2)
The decision to select the MC signal coming from ch_ 0 or ch_1 is implemented according to the local DEM
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
alarms (and BIP–4 parity code).
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 247 / 514
514
SOH MANAGEMENT
This block diagram of Fig. 129. herebelow shows some connection for SOH bytes management:

– the SOH_BUS (5.1 Mb/s) that’s used to transport the RSOH bytes information from all the line–side

channels (0,1,2, …, N) towards AUX board.
– the RFCOH_BUS (1.152 Mb/s) towards channel_0 and channel_1 (radio–side)
Available bytes with standard interface (NxG.703) and with RS385 interface (NxV11).
CH_0
Cross–connection matrix RFCOH
CH_1 CH_0
CH_2
CH_1
CH N BYPASS FUNCTION
E1
F1
ATPC
1.8
DSI
1.9 MC
SOH BUS 2.2 E1
2.3 F1
2.5 D1
2.6 D2
2.8 D3
2.9 CH1 (#)
3.2 CH2 (#)
3.3 CH3 (#)
3.5 CH4 (#)
3.6 CH5 (#)
3.8
3.9
EXTERNAL INTERFACES
Fig. 129. SOH management

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 248 / 514
514
In case of RRA application, the access to SOH bytes is provided by RRA itself; in case of WADM and WLT
application, the access to SOH bytes is concentrated in the baseband part implementing WADM/WLT
functionality.
Each RSOH_byte, if terminated, must be terminated and accessible both at radio–side and line–side. The
managed bytes (line–side) are the following:
E1
F1
#1.8, #1.9,
#2.2, #2.3, #2.5, #2.6, #2.8, #2.9,
#3.2. #3.3, #3.5, #3.6, #3.8, #3.9
E1 and F1 are always connected (radio–side) to specific RFCOH channels.

The other ones can be connected (radio–side) to 5 available interfaces.
In terminal–to–terminal application the pass–through mode for each RSOH_byte is provided.
In WADM/WLT terminal application with radio repeater, when a specific service channel must be dropped
in the regenerator, the interested RSOH byte is re–routed in the RFCOH area according with the service
channel columns format (1152 Kbit/s stream):
Column 1 Column 2
DSI MC
ATPC MC
D1 MC
D2 MC
D3 MC
E1 FAIL serv + K0
F1 Channel #3
Channel #1 Channel #4
Channel #2 Channel #5
The selection of byte re–routing is performed by ECT/OS.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 249 / 514
514
RSOH standard_bytes
pass–through function

RST RFCOH
RSOH termination
E1
F1
USER INTERFACES
D1, D2, D3
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH5
CROSS CONNECTION
MATRIX FOR
SERVICE CHANNELS
ATPC
DSI
MC
RSOH termination
RST RFCOH
RSOH standard_bytes
pass–through function
Fig. 130. Service channels functional block diagram

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 250 / 514
514
The line side SOH bytes can be managed on the ten RST sections available in the maximum system
configuration ( 8+0 or 7+1 ).
SOH bytes handling:

Byte Handling type Access type User interface
E1 terminated Voice channel DTMF or 64 Kbit/s G.703 or V.11
F1 terminated 64 Kbit/s G.703 or V.11
MSU_RSOH terminated 64 Kbit/s G.703 or V.11
N.U._RSOH terminated 64 Kbit/s G.703 or V.11
D1:D3 terminated 192 Kbit/s Internal towards SC
J0 terminated 64 Kbit/s Internal towards SC
MSOH bypassed
Inside the RRA unit the “pass–through function” of RSOH bytes is provided, in order to transmit
channels coming from ADM line equipment in “transparent mode” through the radio system.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 251 / 514
514
DCCR Management
The DCCR are managed by EC both in line–side and radio–side.

The DCCR towards line–side are provided by the connection for all the channel–units, but are managed

by EC only the streams towards CH_0 and CH_1 on radio–side, where they are inserted inside the RFCOH

bytes.
RFCOH SECTION
RST SECTION CH_0
Line–side Radio–side
CK+SYNC REF
EPLD
CK+SYNC
DCCR extraction DCCR RSOH LOGIC

line–side extraction insertion CK+SYNC
& mapping in from RFCOH
6.48 Mb BUS radio–side
EPLD CK+SYNC
RST SECTION RFCOH SECTION CH_1
RST SECTION RFCOH SECTION CH_9
Fig. 131. DCCR management (ADM towards RADIO)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 252 / 514
514
CK+SYNC
RFCOH SECTION RST SECTION CH_0
Radio–side Line–side
EPLD CK+SYNC REF
DCCR demapping
DCCR from 6.48 Mb BUS
DCCR extraction mapping & insertion line side
EPLD
CK+SYNC
Fig. 132. DCCR management (RADIO towards ADM)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 253 / 514
514
Notes (see figure below):
– On RST section the DCCR are inserted/extracted by dedicated pins (192 Kbit/s) on
contra–directional interface.

– The DCCR extracted from RST on channels 0, 1, 2 and the DCCR radio–side are mapped inside
the first 6.48 Mbit/s DCC frame (link 1).
– The DCCR extracted from RST on channels 3, 4, 5, 6 are mapped inside the the second 6.48 Mbit/s
DCC frame (link 2).
– The DCCR extracted from RST on channels 7, 8, 9 are mapped inside the the third 6.48 Mbit/s DCC
frame (link 3).
RST section 6.48 Mb/s [link 1]

(channels 0)
RST section
(channels 1) 6.48 Mb/s [link 2]
MUX/DEMUX SC
6.48 Mb/s [link 3]

RST section
(channels 9)
RFCOH section
(channel 0)
SWITCH
RFCOH section
(channel 1)
Fig. 133. DCCR management

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 254 / 514
514
Tab. 56. DCC Mapping & Interleaving
The DCC frame is composed by 101.25 bytes (6.48 Mbit/s), and takes into account the
information from/to four STM–1 channels:
CR CR CR CR DR DR DR DR
D1(#1) D1(#2) D1(#3) D1(#4) D2(#1) D2(#2) D2(#3) D2(#4) x
D3(#1) D3(#2) D3(#3) D3(#4) CM CM CM CM x
DM DM DM DM D4 D4 D4 D4 x
D5 D5 D5 D5 D6 D6 D6 D6 x
D7 D7 D7 D7 D8 D8 D8 D8 x
D9 D9 D9 D9 D10 D10 D10 D10 x
D11 D11 D11 D11 D12 D12 D12 D12 x
CF2 CF2 CF2 CF2 DF2 DF2 DF2 DF2 x
F2 F2 F2 F2 CF3 CF3 CF3 CF3 x
DF3 DF3 DF3 DF3 F3 F3 F3 F3 x
x xx x
DR, DM, DF2, DF3: positive stuffing opportunity bytes

D1, D4, F2, F3: negative stuffing opportunity bytes
CR, CM, CF2, CF3: colored stuffing bytes
X: empty bytes
5.2.4.3 ATPC Management
The information regarding the ATPC functionality can be resumed in the following (for each channel):
– received power (absolute digital value to transmit towards the remote station in order to move the
Tx output power)
– Rx failure (for remote Tx inhibition with reused system configuration)
– ID_channel + ID_direction (for identification of ATPC channel in order to avoid the repeater bypass
of information and the exactly indication of transmission direction in case of 2+0 (N+0) east–west
configuration)
They can be organized in registers of the CAN_BUS where the PRx and ID_ch information are transmitted
with higher priority than Rx fail.
They can be sent to the remote station by means 64Kb/s channel 1+1 protected. The information for each
channel received in remote station is sent to the relevant transmitter where the PRx information received
is compared to the thresholds set and it is decided to send up or down or hold commands to the RF
transmitter.
The Rx failure received in the Tx remote station is used to switch off the relevant modulator. It will be
switched on after Rx failure removal. Of course the Rx failure alarm is not comprehensive of propagation
alarms.
The ATPC management is performed between two RFCOH sections. That means that in a repeater is
present an ATPC management EAST side and an ATPC management WEST side that work independent
way. The block diagram represented in the following is valid for terminal configuration but can be
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
considered valid also for repeater configuration EAST (or WEST) side if “RRA unit” indication is substituted
with “DROP_INSERT unit” indication.
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 255 / 514
514
RX1 unit RRA1 unit
RX0 unit

RRA0 unit

PRX DETECTION
Rx failure
From AGC VOLTAGE RFCOH EXTRACTION
MICROPROCESSOR
CAN_BUS
EQUIPMENT SERVICE
CONTROLLER UNIT/ATPC
64 Kb/s
TX1 unit
RFCOH INSERTION
TX0 unit
MOD
On/off
Rx failure
MICROPROCESSOR
CAN BUS
EQUIPMENT SERVICE
CONTROLLER UNIT/ATPC
Fig. 134. ATPC management

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 256 / 514
514
5.2.4.4 MC management on RX terminal
RRA 1
RRA 0
RFCOH HITLESS SW
DEMUX 0 DEMUX 1
SWITCH
ATL_RFCOH1 ATL_RFCOH0
DEM 0 OR local + remote

LOGIC
Fig. 135. MC management on RX terminal

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 257 / 514
514
5.2.4.5 Sub STM–1 framing processing
In case of multiplexing of an AU–4 via AUG, the position and the justification of AU–4 structure is managed
by octets H1H2H3 type:

H1 H2 H3
NDF 1 0 POINTER Negative justification
because the other part of the AUOH area:
H1 Y Y H2 U U H3 H3 H3
is filled with octets:
Y = 1001nn11 (where n is a non–specified value)
U = 11111111
In this sense, we can assume that the only managed transport situation is for an AU–4 structure inside
an STM–1 signal, and the STM–0 design is mapped with 3xVC–3 structures (partially filled with the first
container only) into an AU–4 unit (European standard).
The demultiplexing operation from an STM–1 signal to an STM–0 signal can be provided taking one
column for each three columns group, considering that only the first VC–3 inside the AU–4 structure of
STM–1 frame contains the significant payload.
The VC–4 POH is maintained in STM–0 frame.

The fixed stuffing columns (11, 12) of STM–1 frame are removed in STM–0 frame.
When the STM–1 standard interface is formed by an STM–0 signal, the AUOH row is mapped according
to the previous description (H1, H2 and H3 are extracted from the STM–0 format), and B2 parity
calculation has to be re–computed with the following criteria:
B2(#1) = B2 coming from STM–0 frame
B2(#2) = Y ⊕ U ⊕ H3
B2(#3) = Y ⊕ U ⊕ H3
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 258 / 514
514
Starting from three TUG–3 units, it is possible to generate the VC–4 structure with the mapping of
3xTUG–3, 18 bytes of fixed justification and the VC–4 POH as described below:
86 bytes 86 bytes 86 bytes

TUG–3 TUG–3 TUG–3
ÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ VC–4
ÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ 261 bytes
VC–4 POH
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇÇ
FILLED BYTES
Fig. 136. VC–4 generation from 3 TUG–3

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 259 / 514
514
During the multiplexing/demultiplexing of the STM–0 signal for the transmission in the radio section of the
first TUG–3 tributary, it is necessary to consider the following multiplexing structure, provided in SDH
European hierarchy:

3rd TUG–3 3rd TU–3: unequipped

2nd TUG–3 2nd TU–3: unequipped
STM–1 AUG AU–4 VC–4 TUG–3 TU–3 VC–3 C–3 = 34.368 Kbit/s
X7
TUG–2 TU–12 VC–12 C–12 = 2.048 Kbit/s
So, when we speak of STM–0 signal transmission we intend a non–standard interface, based on a single
TUG–3 container (the first) coming from the mapping of an AU–4 partially equipped.
The 2nd and 3rd TUG–3 are always considered as filled with TU–3’s unequipped container.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 260 / 514
514
STM–1 multiplexing structure with 3xTUG–3 carrying VC–3 container inside an AU–4 unit
VC–4 POH 1st TU–3 pointer 1st VC–3 POH

H1 H1 H1
H2 H2 H2
H3 H3 H3
H1 Y Y H2 U U H3 H3 H3
3xVC–3 (interleaved)
H1
H2
H3
H1 H2 H3
1st VC–3
Where:
Y=10010011
U=11111111
Fixed stuffing bytes
NOTE:
– In case of AU–4 pointer = 0 (NDF=0110 and SS_bits=10) the default value for AUOH row is:
AUOH = H1 Y Y H2 U U H3 H3 H3 = 68 93 93 00 FF FF 00 00 00
– In case of 3xVC–3 mapping structure, the TU–3 pointers for the unequipped containers are fixed to:
H1 H2 H3 = 68 00 00 (NDF=0110, SS_bits=10, pointer=0, pointer offset=0)
The STM–0 frame is defined as that frame obtained from the STM–1 one, by reducing its capacity to one
third of it.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
The SOH bytes are divided into triplets, and the first byte is taken while the other two discarded.
The Higher Order container is a VC4/3, carried in an AU4/3.
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 261 / 514
514
For hardware convenience it is defined a new entity: AU4/3 carrying a VC4/3, being them structured as
an one third of an AU4.
The AU4/3 mapping carries VC3, VC2, VC12 by two pointer levels (AU_level and TU_level, cascaded);
moreover, fixed stuff columns in their mapping into AU4/3 are in fixed position with respect to the VC4/3

carrier.

The most important advantage of this solution is the possibility to transmit only the significant part of an
STM1 signal sub equipped on a radio equipment, without any multiplexing/demultiplexing operation or
pointer processing; using the radio network element as a pure regenerator NE.
RST RREI RPI RF RF RPI RREI RST

branching branching
NNI: network node interface

RST: regenerator section termination
RREI: radio–relay equipment interface
RPI: radio physical interface
Fig. 137. Sub STM–1 terminal functional block diagram

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 262 / 514
514
STM–1 / STM–0 frame processing algorithm:
RPS
RSOH MUX B1 WST & services
termination calculation: Insertion on

the calculation is STM–1 frame
made over all bytes of
the frame after
scrambling and the
Filling “all 0” bytes for result is inserted in Div by 3
columns Nx2 & Nx3 the next frame before RPS
scrambling.
(except A1, A2 and
AUOH row) Services insertion
M1 change position on STM–0 frame
B2(#5.1) compensation
B2 compensation
B3 compensation RST section RFCOH section
STM–0 / STM–1 frame processing algorithm:
RPS
B1 handling: RSOH
WST & services MUX the byte is recovered from insertion
the SDH frame after
extraction on descrambling and is and B1
STM–1 frame compared with the calculation
calculation over the
previous elapsed frame
Interleaving of “all 0”
Services bytes for columns
extraction on Nx2 & Nx3
RPS
STM–0 frame Re–writing A1, A2
Re–writing AUOH M1 change position.
(M1 is moved in the original position
[#9.6] and “00” configuration is inserted
in [#9.4] byte)
B2 compensation
B3 compensation
B2 (#1, #3) compensation
RFCOH section RST section
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 263 / 514
514
5.2.4.6 SOH handling in normal operation condition
SOH handling in normal operation condition according to the default hardware configuration:

SOH BYTES TX SIDE RX SIDE NOTE
A1 – A2 Refresh Refresh
B1 Refresh Refresh
E1 insert insert
F1 insert insert
D1 – D2 – D3 insert insert
All the RSOH bytes are managed one by one
J0 insert insert
character or character or
multiframe multiframe
M.S.U. insert insert
NU_RSOH insert insert
MSOH Bypass Bypass All the MSOH bytes are in a fixed bypass
condition without any possibility to be
managed.
This operation is involved in Radio Section Termination area (RST) as in the following block diagram:
TX_SIDE SIGNAL FLOW
Line side Radio side

RST RPS RFCOH RSPI
RRA RADIO
RX_SIDE SIGNAL FLOW

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 264 / 514
514
5.2.4.7 Alarms detected in RST section
Alarm Consequent action

LOS (loss of signal) MS–AIS
LOF (loss of frame) MS–AIS
TIM (trace identifier mismatch) MS–AIS
OOF (out of frame) OFS count
MS–AIS (multiplex section AIS)
MS–RDI (multiplex section remote defect indication)
TIM: when J0 byte, extracted from SDH stream received, is different from the data written in
J0_register by micro–processor interface (according to the regenerator section trace
algorithm), Trace Identifier Mismatch (TIM) alarm is detected and the AIS condition is
activated.
MS–RDI: the Multiplex Section Remote Defect Indication is used to return an indication to the
transmit end that the received end has detected an incoming section defect or is receiving
MS–AIS.
MS–RDI is generated by inserting a “110” code in positions 6, 7 and 8 of the K2 byte before
scrambling.
MS–AIS: the Multiplex Section AIS indication detect an incoming AIS signal.
MS–AIS is generated by inserting a “111” code in positions 6, 7 and 8 of the K2 byte before
scrambling.
N.B. the Out of Frame Second (OFS) is declared when the STM–1 frame alignment process is in the
OOF state.
This parameter is used as additional performance parameter.
The proprietary management of K0 channel (Radio Channel Identification) inside the RFCOH section is
the same of J0 in RST section. The detected alarm is the following:
Alarm Consequent action
RCIM (Radio Channel Identifier Mismatch) MS–AIS

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 265 / 514
514
In the following diagram is indicated the functional representation of the system with the alarms indication
as reported to ECT/OS:
TX_LOS

LOS

LOF TX_FAIL
TIM (JO) MOD_LOS
MOD_FAIL
SPI RST RST RPS RFCOH RSPI
RRA channel MOD + TX
LINE–SIDE RADIO–SIDE
TX FAIL (#) RX_LOS

LOS RX_FAIL
TX DEGRADED (#)
LOF DEM_LOS
TIM (JO)
RCIM (K0) DEM_FAIL
RRA channel RX + DEM
(#) referred to optical interface.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 266 / 514
514
In the following diagram is indicated the functional representation of the system with the primitives for the
performance monitoring as reported to ECT/OS.
OOF
TL
EB (B1)
RRA channel MOD + TX
LINE–SIDE RADIO–SIDE
PSA RL
EB (B1) PSR OOF FEC
RRA channel RX + DEM
Legend:
EB: Errored Block
OOF: Out of Frame
TL: Transmitted level, is the level of the estimated transmitter power at the transmitter output.
The parameter is represented by two values:
– an integer fixed value expressed in [dBm] defining the transmitted power value;
– an integer offset value expressed in [dB] representing the variation with respect to the
nominal value.
RL: Received level, is the level of the estimated received power at the input of the receiver. In 2°
release both value will be reported. The parameter unit shall be expressed in [dBm] and
represented by the rounded nearest integer.
PSA: Protection Switch Actual, represents any actual switch from a protected (working) channel to
a protecting (stand–by) channel
PSR: Protection Switch Request, represents any activation of a switch initiation criteria which may
lead to automatic switches from a working channel to a stand–by channel and viceversa.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 267 / 514
514
5.2.4.8 Regenerator Section trace management
J0 expected K0 expected

(line side) (radio side)

K0 transmitted J0 transmitted
(radio side) (line side)
J0 transmitted J0 expected
(radio side) (radio side)
RST RST RPS RFCOH RFCOH RPS RST RST

sink source source source sink source
RRA channel (TX side) RRA channel (RX side)
Action to µP: Action to µP:

J0 mismatch alarm (with MS–AIS insertion in frame) K0 mismatch alarm (with MS–AIS insertion in frame)
J0 received value K0 received value
J0 mismatch alarm (with MS–AIS insertion in frame)
J0 received value
NOTES:
J0 is represented by an integer of 15 digits (multiframe mode9 or one byte (insert character mode).
The default value for J0 is “0000 0001” (unspecified Regenerator Section Trace).
The methodology of J0 management is described in the following para.5.2.4.8.1 on page 269.
K0 is represented by 6 bits (inside a RFCOH byte).

K0_mismatch alarm is detected after 3 consecutive frame of erroneous K0 received, and it is used as
channel switching criteria.
In the system without protection, J0 only is managed.

K0 transmitted and K0 expected are fixed to the default value (K0 = 000000).
In a repeater configuration only K0 management is performed.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 268 / 514
514
5.2.4.8.1 J0 management
The J0 byte located at # (1, 7) byte in an STM–1 is allocated to a Regenerator Section Trace. This byte
is used to transmit repetitively a Section Access Point Identifier so that a section receiver can verify its
continued connection to the intended transmitter. Within a national network, or within the domain of a
single operator, this Section Access Point Identifier may use either a single byte (containing the code
0–255) or the Access Point Identifier format as defined in clause 3/G.831. At international boundaries, or
at the boundaries between the networks of different operators, the format defined in clause 3/G.831 shall
be used unless otherwise mutually agreed by the operators providing the transport.
A 16–byte frame is defined for the transmission of Section Access Point Identifiers where these conform
to the definition contained in clause 3/G.831. The first byte of the string is a frame start marker and includes
the result of a CRC–7 calculation over the previous frame. The following 15 bytes are used for the transport
of 15 T.50 characters (international Reference Version) required for the Section Access Point Identifier.
The 16–byte frame description is given in Table 4/G.707 reported herebelow:
TABLE 4/G.707
16–byte frame for Trail APId
Byte # Value (bit 1, 2, … ,8)
1 1 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7
2 0 X X X X X X X
3 0 X X X X X X X
: : :
16 0 X X X X X X X
NOTES
1 C1C2C3C4C5C6C7 is the result of the CRC–7 calculation over the
previous frame. C1is the MSB.
2 0XXXXXXX represents a T.50 character.
In the case of interworking of equipment implementing the STM identifier functionality (see N.B.) and
equipment employing the Regenerator Section Trace function, the latter shall interpret the pattern
”0000001” in J0 as ”Regenerator Section Trace – unspecified”. This unspecified Regenerator Section
Trace can also be used if no use of the Regenerator Section Trace is made.
N.B. STM identifier: C1

In earlier versions of the Recommendation, the content of bytes located at S (1, 7, 1) or [1,
6N+1] to S (1, 7, N) or [1, 7N] was defined as a unique identifier indicating the binary value of
the multi–column, interleave depth coordinate, c. It may have been used to assist in frame
alignment.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 269 / 514
514
5.2.4.8.2 Trace Identifier Mismatch (TIM) detector
The Trail Trace Identifier is a 16_BYTE or 1_BYTE string used in SDH to detect mis–connections inside
a communication network. A receiver has to validate the received string, in order to be sure that it has not

been corrupted by line errors, and compare it with an expected value, in order to verify that it is connected

with the right transmitter. If this is not the case, the receiver has to declare a TIM (Trace Identifier Mismatch)
alarm.
The 1_BYTE string is made by a single byte (containing the code 0–255), while the 16_BYTE frame is
structured as previously described.
In the following, the algorithm to detect the TIM condition is described: this algorithm is applied at all SDH
layers in which Trail Trace Identifier feature is defined, so it is suitable for processing byte J0 (section trace)
and bytes J1, J2 (VCi path trace).
The algorithm behavior is shown in the following Fig. 138. :
DATA
16_BYTE
t, f, d
t, f, d TIM 1/16
COMB TIM1/16 machine alarm
t, f, d
1/16
1_BYTE TIM
valid CRC–7
t = true TIMX
f = false TIMX machine alarm
valid CONST
d = dontcare
Fig. 138. TIM algorithm
Incoming data are at the same time checked in order to find the standard 16_BYTE string with multiframe
alignment word and CRC–7, or a fixed 16 times repeating 1_BYTE string. The preset 16/1 is needed to
tell the system if a 16_BYTE or a 1_BYTE string is expected. After validation process (correct CRC–7 and
multiframe for the 16_BYTE string, same value 16 times for the 1_BYTE string), the received string is
compared with the expected one. If the preset 16/1 is set to ”16”, the comparison with 1 is always false;
if the preset 16/1 is set to ”1”, the comparison with 16 is always false.
Each output (that can assume three possible values: ”false”, ”true”, ”dontcare” if the received string has
not been validated) of the two comparisons is sent, through a COMB function, to a state machine (the
TIM1/16 machine) with four states: alarm, not alarm, and two intermediate states. ”False” causes the state
machine moving towards the alarm state, ”true” causes the state machine moving towards the not alarm
state, ”dontcare” leaves the machine in the state it is.
In parallel, further control is performed by the TIMX machine, in such a way that if for 8x16 times neither
a fixed string nor a correct multiframe alignment word plus CRC–7 can be found, the TIM alarm is anyway
declared (this feature is not required by standards at now).
The TIM algorithm described is fully compliant with the standard promptness requests about maximum
detection time and is able to detect all possible cross–misconnections:
– expected 1_BYTE string, with a different 1_BYTE or a 16_BYTE string received;
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
– expected 16_BYTE string, with a different 16_BYTE or a 1_BYTE string received;

– expected 1_BYTE or 16_BYTE string, with a random string received.
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 270 / 514
514
Here below, TIM algorithm is described in more details:
a) 16_BYTE DETECTOR
As it can be seen in the following Fig. 139. , the 16_BYTE detector internally consists of four
functions:
• a multiframe aligner in order to synchronize the machine itself to the 16_BYTE frame;
• a CRC–7 extractor, in order to calculate the CRC–7 from the received frame;
• a mismatch detector, in order to determine whether a received 16_BYTE frame is different from
the expected string;
• a command generator, which drives the TIM1/16 machine, depending on the outputs of the
preceding two functions.
valid CRC–7
CRC–7 detector
8
1 sync t, f, d
DATA Multiframe Aligner Command Generator
match
Mismatch detector
8
DATA EXP 1/16
Fig. 139. The 16_BYTE machine
b) 1_BYTE DETECTOR
The 1_BYTE detector internally consists of four functions:

• a mod 16 counter, in order to generate an independent sync;
• a 16 byte integrator, which detects whether the received bytes are of the 1_BYTE type;
• a mismatch detector, in order to determine whether a received 1_BYTE is different from the
expected one;
• a command generator, which drives the TIM1/16 machine, depending on the outputs of the
preceding two functions.
8 valid const
DATA 16 byte integrator
sync t, f, d
MOD 16 counter Command Generator
match
Mismatch detector
8
DATA EXP 1/16
Fig. 140. The 1_BYTE machine
5.2.4.8.3 K0 management
The K0 bits were defined in RFCOH section to perform a “proprietary” regenerator section trace internally
to the switching section.
K0 is represented by 6 bits (inside a RFCOH byte).
K0_mismatch alarm is detected after 3 consecutive frame of erroneous K0 received, and it is used as
channel switching criteria.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 271 / 514
514
5.2.4.9 N+1 Repeater configuration
0, 1 channels

DEMODULATOR ALIGNER DROP / INSERT MODULATOR

RFCOH management:
E1, F1, K0, DCCR, ATPC, DSI, MC,
CH1, CH2, CH3, CH4, CH5
NxWST management
2, 3, 4, .... channels
DEMODULATOR ALIGNER DROP / INSERT MODULATOR
RFCOH management:
E1, F1, K0, DCCR, ATPC, DSI, MC,
CH1, CH2, CH3, CH4, CH5
NxWST management
Optional: necessary in case of

WST drop–insert only, or in case
of K0 application requirement
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 272 / 514
514
5.2.4.10 MC management on Repeater configuration
DROP 1 W–E
DROP 0 W–E
OR operation on local
EWL and EWH alarms
DEMUX 0 DEMUX 1 MUX 0 MUX 1
SWITCH SPLIT
DEM 0
DEM 1
DEM 9
Remote modem Local modem alarms

alarms
ATL_rem RFCOH 0 ATL_loc RFCOH 0

ATL_rem RFCOH 1 ATL_loc RFCOH 1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 273 / 514
514
5.2.5 Remote Inventory subsystem

The Remote Inventory function permits the operator to retrieve information about any card or module

present on the equipment.
The available information, written in a 64x16 bit EEPROM on board (RI device), is: construction date, code
number, maker name, Card–type, etc. (see details in the Operator Handbook).
The Remote Inventory function is present in all the cards.

The RI can be also present on some sub–modules assembled on the board (such as optical modules,
micro–controllers and so on).
The relevant data are transported by the CAN bus and are managed by the System Controller unit, which,
besides the information retrieved from the units’ RI device, add the slot identifier (ID) information.
The System Controller unit can also manage the visual indications of the board (LEDs) and some I/O
parallel commands/contacts/alarms that can eventually be transferred by means of the CAN bus.
The agent microcontroller on each unit manages the Remote Inventory, with the exception of Power
Supply Units (PSU) and Battery Filter units (PSF), that are supported by ESC Agent.
The Remote Inventory of unit’s submodules (CANC–COMB modules, Additional TPH–DEV and Optical
interface) are supported by the respective Agent Unit.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 274 / 514
514
CAN 0 BB
SERVICE Extension HST

SERVICE
WEST HK DRIVER
Add. Add.
IfTPH
unit IfTPH
unit additional
TPH–DEV
MD0 MD1 MD2 MD3 MD4 MD5 MD6 MD7 MD8 MD9
If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit
CANC–COMB
MODULES
CH0 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 CH9
Optical Optical Optical Optical Optical Optical Optical Optical Optical Optical OPTICAL
If unit If unit If unit If unit If unit If unit If unit If unit If unit If unit
interface interface interface interface interface interface interface interface interface interface
MODULES HC12
ESC
Agent
N.12 Enable
PSU0 PSU1 PSU2 PSU3 PSU4 PSU5 PSU6 PSU7 PSU8 PSU9 ESC
Unit
Battery filter 1
Battery filter 2
CAN 0 BB
Enable
Remoty inventory Clock
Bus Data input EEPROM
Data output
+3.3V
gnd
Missing
N.B. SERVICE WEST and HST DRIVER not present in current release
Fig. 141. Remote inventory subsystem architecture

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 275 / 514
514
5.2.6 System Controller unit description
Refer to para.3.6.2 on page 140 for the unit physical views and operative information.

The Equipment System Controller (ESC) unit is made with two boards: the mother board and the subunit

ESCON.
The block diagram of Fig. 142. is relevant to the whole unit (mother board and the subunit ESCON).
The subunit ESCON performs the main functions:
– Equipment controller
– Radio controller
– DCCR management
– Remote Inventory management
– Station alarms management
– Summarizing alarms management
– Housekeeping alarms management
The mother board performs the following main functions:
– DCCR Mux /demux

– Alarm expansion
– I/0 Housekeeping /Station alarms/ Summarizing alarms with relays to Access area subrack
– Management of CAN–BUSes of baseband shelf and RT shelf
– Management of parallel missing card alarms
– Drivers and connectors for Equipment controller and Radio controller I/O circuits
– Management of Power Supply and Battery alarms
– ANDOR function
– Routering of SPRI register with a dedicate microcontroller.
On the board there is an 8–bits microcontroller, to convert the bus SPI of ESCON into CAN 0 BB–BUS,
Can 1 BB–Bus and CanRT bus.
The functions of Equipment Controller and Radio controller are described in para.5.2.2 on page 237.
The functions for the Remote Inventory management are described in para.5.2.5 on page 274.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 276 / 514
514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
N.B.
03
Resistive
Load
955.203.292 Q
RTX0 RTX2RTX2
RTX1RTX1 RTX3RTX3
RTX4RTX4
RTX5RTX5
RTX6RTX6
RTX7RTX7
RTX8RTX8
RTX9RTX9
CAN 0 BB
and
Resistive Resistive CAN0 BB RC local debug
Load Load
ocal
F
MPC860 MPC860
ISS
EN B EN QB3 (10base 2)
MD0MD1MD1
MD2MD2MD3 MD3 MD7 MD7MD8MD8MD9MD9
MD4MD4MD5MD5MD6MD6 QB3 (10base T
and Debug_N
RC or EC debug local)
EC
Resistive Resistive SPI
Load Load Local
bus
CAN0 BB FPGA
FPGA
Can 0 Can 1
CH0CH1 CH1CH2 CH2CH3CH3 CH4CH4 CH5CH5CH6CH6CH7CH7 CH8CH8CH9CH9 EXP.
Control. Control. P I O/HK
ALARM
UART
Fig. 142. System Controller block diagram

HC12
SERVICE WEST and HST DRIVER not present in current release

FPGA Card Missing
SPIL
514
SERVICE Extension HST
CAN 1 Download FPGA and RT Power
3DB 02839 AA AA
SERVICE SPRI Supply Alarms
WEST HKHK DRIVER
CAN RT
HC12 Router
Remote
SPI Inventory BB
CAN0 BB
Power Supply
and
Battery filter
277 / 514
DCCR Management

The System controller manages the DCCR at line side and radio side.

In order to connect DCCR to the Controller, the FPGA inside ESCON board requires a particular
bi–directional link working at 6.48 Mhz.
In order to avoid slips on dropped DCCR byte, due to different frequency between the clock extracted from
STMj (j=0 to 9) and the local timing used to resynchronize the resulting DCCR subframe, a stuffing
mechanism is realized.
The DCC mapping and interleaving is described in Tab. 56. on page 255.
An EPLD performs three bi–directional links in order to insert/extract the DCCR line side of the all RRA
units, and DCCR radio side from/to Service unit:
– On the first link 6.48.48 Mbit/s are mapped :

• DCCR 192Kbit from/to Service units
• DCCR 192Kbit from/to RRASTB0
• DCCR 192Kbit from/to RRA 1
– On the second link 6.48 Mbit/s are mapped:

– On the third link 6.48 Mbit/s are mapped:

Summarizing/Housekeeping Alarms
The ESCON subunit manages 9 Input and 14 Output signal alarms. By means of the alarms expansion
circuit located on ESC mother board, there are 22 Input and 56 Output signals available.
In 9600LSY application the following number of alarms are managed:
– 22 HK input
– 10 HK output
– 46 output alarms
In order to reduce the power consumption, all relays are switched off in normal conditions; the presence
of active alarms corresponds always to closed contact with a common wire available to the Customer.
The electrical characteristics of relays are: (V is voltage between the warm wire and the common one).
– open contact ± 72 v V v ± 2V I v 0.2mA

– closed contact ± 2 v V v ± 0V I v 50mA
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 278 / 514
514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
374
03
138
158 HK1
4 HK2
HK 1–4 Lamp OUT 11 0 0 8 OE HK3 ANDOR
HK4
4 4 alarms OUT 12 } 1SEL 1 A GA3
HK 13–16 SEL IN 1–4 OUT 13 2 2 GA4
CK GA5
3 GA6
Vcc 4 Rack lamps
158 5 INT to M184
4 OUT 14 E 6
374 GA7
HK 5–8 N GA8 connector of
4 4 7 OE GA9
HK 17–20 SEL 8 GA10
TUP M184
Accesstoarea
955.203.292 Q
IN 6–8 B GA11
8 GA12
CK GA13 (BB shelf)
GA14
158 ESCONX
GA 9–12 OUT 1 GA1 FREE
GA 21,22 4 374 GA15
OUT 2 GA2 TUP
SEL GA16
IN 9–12 8 OE GA17
ORALIM GA18
C GA19
GA20
PWANDOR CK GA21
GA22
From Battery
DCCR TO/FROM RFCOH ( Service) Filter 1 and 2
374 Alarms battery
GA23
Link 1
Stuffing SPI GA24
Link 1
DCCR TO/FROM RST (RRASTBY0 ) 8 OE GA25
el.store GA26
D GA27
GA28
DCCR TO/FROM RST (RRA1) DCCR mapping 6.48 CK GA29 Service Battery
GA30
DCCR TO/FROM
DCCR extracting
RST (RRA2 DCCR extracting Mbit FPGA
374 HK5
HK6
DCCR TO/FROM RST (RRA 3) 8 OE HK7
Stuffing HK8
Stuffing E HK9
Can 0 Can 1 HK10
Link 2
el.store
Link 2
DCCR TO/FROM RST (RRA4 ) el.store CK GA31
Control. Control. GA32
DCCR mappingDCCR mapping
DCCR TO/FROM RST (RRA5)
DCCR extractingDCCR extracting 374 GA33
DCCR TO/FROM RST (RRA6 GA34
8 OE GA35
Can 0 Can 1 GA36
GA37
F GA38
Link 3
DCCR TO/FROM RST (RRA 7) Stuffing GA39
CK
Link 3
Stuffing GA40
el.store
el.store
DCCR TO/FROM RST (RRA8 )
DCCR mappingDCCR mapping
DCCR TO/FROM RST (RRA9)
DCCR extractingDCCR extracting 374 GA41
514
GA42
3DB 02839 AA AA
8 OE GA43
Ck + SY from GA44
main channel G GA45
Sy
from GA46
CK GA47
main channel GA48
Ck + SY from CK 38.88 + SY
RRA 0,1,2,8,9 MUXMUX LogicLogic
Ck + Sy
from
Ck + SY from EPLD EPLD
Fig. 143. DCCR and summarizing/housekeeping alarms management block diagram

Sby channel
Daina
“ ”
Dip Switch
279 / 514
5.2.7 Flash Card description

The FLASH CARD contains, after the system SW loading and system configuration carried out

through the Craft Terminal:
1) the whole Equipment software programs (susceptible to be downloaded toward the Supervisory
Units);
2) the system configuration data. This configuration data set is named MIB and can be saved as
a file in the Craft Terminal (or OS) environment, as well as can be restored in the Flash Card
retrieving this file from the Craft Terminal (or OS);
3) the routing configuration data (N.B.):
– Local Configuration
– OS Configuration
– NTP Server Configuration
– LAPD Configuration
– Ethernet Configuration
– RAP Configuration
– MESA Configuration.
This configuration data set cannot be saved together with MIB data.
The presence of the FLASH CARD as individual part simplifies the maintenance procedure in case
of failure of the System Controller, as explained in para.7.7.4.4 on page 384 and para.7.7.4.5 on page
384.
N.B. This list is merely for general information only. Refer to the C.T. Operator’s Handbook for a more
precise list.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 280 / 514
514
5.2.8 Additional Housekeeping unit description
The Additional Housekeeping (HK–DEV) is an optional unit.

By its use, other 18 HK Inputs become available, besides those already available with the System
Controller unit.
Fig. 144. herebelow shows the unit block diagram.
(M1) is the connector for getting the 18 HK Inputs (for pinout see point a ) on page 154).
The connector (M2) is connected by cable to connector (M179) of Baseband shelf (see Fig. 95. on page
178). By this cable the unit:
– receives power supply

– is connected to the System Controller unit by CAN 0 BB bus
– sends the Card Fail and Card Missing signals to the System Controller
A red led on the front indicates the failure of Additional Housekeeping unit
18 Housekeeping
Inputs
M1 CEPT
INTERFACE
SUB–D 25 pins
female
3.45 V
Remote HC12
5.3 V Inventory mP
M2 HK–DEV Card Fail
led
SUB–D 9 pins
male HK–DEV Card Missing
Can 0 BB
Fig. 144. Additional Housekeeping block diagram

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 281 / 514
514
5.3 Power supply subsystem
The Power Supply subsystem distributes both batteries BATT.A and BATT.B voltages to each user circuit
in the following way:

a) Primary voltage distribution (see Fig. 145. herebelow for block diagram, and Fig. 94. on page 176
for physical implementation).
Primary sources BATT.A and BATT.B are connected to TRU distribution frame.
From TRU box, BATT.A and BATT.B are distributed by individual cables, each one protected by circuit
breakers, to the subracks (Tab. 15. on page 128 indicates the TRU breaker utilization).
b) Power Supply distribution in the Transceiver shelf (see Fig. 145. herebelow and Fig. 97. on
page 181).
Power supply cables from TRU are connected to following connectors:
• (M2) for BATT.A and (M3) for BATT.B, by means of which transceivers TR0 to TR4 receive
power through the shelf backpanel
• (M5) for BATT.A and (M6) for BATT.B, by means of which transceivers TR5 to TR9 receive
power through the shelf backpanel
BATT. A
BATT. B
TR0 TR9
TOP RACK UNIT
…...
TRX BACK PANEL
B.B. BACK PANNEL
FAN SUBRACKS
ADM BACK PANEL
Fig. 145. Power Supply distribution from Top Rack Unit and Transceiver shelf Power Supply
distribution
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 282 / 514
514
c) Power Supply distribution in the Baseband shelf
Power supply cables from TRU (see Fig. 145. on page 282) are connected to following connectors:
• BATT.A cable connected to Power Supply Input connector of PSF1 unit equipped in slot 25 (i.e.
on the left) of Baseband shelf

• BATT.B cable connected to Power Supply Input connector of PSF2 unit equipped in slot 36 (i.e.
on the right) of Baseband shelf
N.B. PSF unit front view is depicted in Fig. 76. on page 153
PSF1 and PSF2 position in the shelf is shown in Fig. 64. on page 135
The distribution of Power supply from PSF units to the subrack is depicted in Fig. 146. herebelow:
each PSF unit receives also the power supply voltage from the other PSF; after filtering:
• BATT.A and BATT.B primary voltages are distributed through the backpanel toward the Power
Supply units PSU0 .... PSU9 (slots (E) in Fig. 64. on page 135)
• converted voltages are distributed through the backpanel to units SERVICE and SYSTEM
CONTROLLER in the shelf (respectively in slot (A) and (B) in Fig. 64. on page 135), and,
through its cable, to ADDITIONAL HOUSEKEEPING unit (see para.3.6.8 on page 154)
The distribution of Power supply from PSU units to the units MODEM and RRA/RRAS is depicted
in Fig. 146. herebelow:
PSU units are grouped in 2–units groups (i.e. PSU0+PSU1 , PSU2+PSU3 , ..). Each PSU pair
converts and then distributes, through the backpanel, power supply to the correspondent pair of RRA
and MODEM.
AL0
+5,3V
Power MODEM 0
Supply 0 +3,45V +5,3Vp
+3,45Vp RRA 0 or
RRASTBY
AL1
+5,3V RRA1
Power +3,45V +5,3Vp
Supply 1
+3,45Vp
MODEM 1
–Battery 2
AL8
–Battery 1
+5,3V
Power MODEM 8
Supply 8 +3,45V +5,3Vp
Filter1 +3,45Vp
RRA 8
BATT. 1 DC/DC AL9
Bat 1 +5,3V RRA9

ALf1
Power +3,45V +5,3Vp
Supply 9 +3,45Vp MODEM 9
Bat 2
ALf2
+3,45Vp
BATT. 2 DC/DC
+5,3Vp
Filter2
SERVICE
Additional
Housekeeping
SYSTEM
SERVICE BATTERY CONTROLLER
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 146. Power Supply distribution in Baseband shelf
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 283 / 514
514
d) Service Battery to System Controller unit
In addition to the voltage distributed by PSF1 and PSF2 units, the System Controller unit receives
also the battery voltage by means of the cable used for Station Alarms management (see Tab. 37. on

page 191). This allows the System Controller unit to manage the TRU lamps also in case of power

supply missing from both PSF1 and PSF2 units.
e) Power Supply distribution to Additional Housekeeping unit
The Additional Housekeeping unit is powered as the System Controller unit (of which it must be
considered an extension), as depicted in Fig. 146. on page 283. From the physical point of view,
power supply is lead on the cable connecting the Additional Housekeeping unit to the BB shelf (see
f) Power Supply distribution in the Fans shelves
Power supply cables from TRU (see Fig. 145. on page 282) are connected to following connectors
of Fans shelf (see Fig. 93. on page 172):
• (M1) for BATT.A
• (M4) for BATT.B
As depicted in Fig. 163. on page 312, both BATT.A and BATT.B voltages are distributed to both FANS
ASSEMBLED units.
Inside each FANS ASSEMBLED unit, as depicted in Fig. 164. on page 313, there are two power
supply units (one receiving BATT.A power supply voltage, the other receiving BATT.B power supply
voltage) from which, diode–decoupled, power supply is distributed to the four fans of the assembly.
g) Power Supply distribution in the 1650SM–C (ADM) shelf
Please make reference to 1650SM–C specific documentation (see para.18.2.2.2 on page 471).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 284 / 514
514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
Select by ECT
HDB3 unprotected 1x2Mb/s from Access Area
FPGA NRZ Protected 1x2Mb/s from Service
03
9 9
1
1 RRA 9
STM1 MOD IF to TR
955.203.292 Q
and message exchange.
O/E RST SRS RFCOH 1

5.4 Baseband subsystem
DCCR 5.1 Mb The RFCOH and one WST can be protected

only two channels
From RRA 2/8/9
5.1 Mb
F Protected second WST
QB3 SC Protected use with Modem/ RRA
DCCR 1x2Mb/s
PIO in future release
Switch logic EOW
SERVICE 64 Kb
N+1
5.4.1 Interconnection general block diagrams
DCCR DSI,MC,ATPC
5.1 Mb
5.1 Mb
0
0
STM1
MOD IF 0 to TR0
514
O/E RST MUX RFCOH
3DB 02839 AA AA
RRA Stby
Fig. 147. Block diagram of “Up to 7+1 Terminal configuration Tx side”

Ktx HDB3 unprotected 1x2Mb/s from Access Area
FPGA
NRZ Protected 1x2Mb/s from Service
Select by ECT
The following Fig. 147. and Fig. 148. show the unit interconnection block diagram respectively for “Tx
side” and “Rx side” configurations, with regard to the transmitted/received signals and the internal signal
285 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
Select by HDB3 unprotected 1x2Mb/sto Access Area
03
ECT FPGA
NRZ Protected 1x2Mb/s to Service
9
9
1
RRA
955.203.292 Q
IF from TR DEM STM1
RFCOH APSE RST O/E
The RFCOH and one WST can be protected 1

only two channels 5.1 Mb RRA 2/8/9
DCCR
5.1 Mb
Protected second WST
Modem/ RRA F
in future release Protected
Switch logic QB3
1x2Mb/s SC
N+1 DCCR PIO
EOW
64 Kb
DSI,MC,ATPC SERVICE 5.1 Mb DCCR
5.1 Mb
0
IF from TR DEM RFCOH STM1

MATRIX RST O/E
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
RRA Stby
Fig. 148. Block diagram of “Up to 7+1 Terminal configuration Rx side”

HDB3 unprotected 1x2Mb/sto Access Area
FPGA
Select by NRZ Protected 1x2Mb/s to Service
ECT
286 / 514
5.4.2 RRA–CHANNEL “STM1+1WST” and “STM0+0WST” description
RRA–CHANNEL performs the following main functions:

– Electrical CMI –NRZ and NRZ–CMI conversion

– RSOH line side Extraction /Insertion from/to Service Unit
– DCCR line side Extraction /Insertion from/to Service Unit
– RFCOH radio side Extraction/insertion from/to Service Unit
– DCCR radio side Extraction /Insertion from/to Service Unit
– Unprotected 1*2Mbit WST Insertion/Extraction
– Hitless Switch
– Serial BUS (Insertion on parallel wires of Modem/ RRA alarms)
On the front of the board the following interfaces are available:

– the STM1 electrical interface (it is fixed on the board and cannot be extracted)
– one red led to indicate the card failure
On the RRA–CHANNEL unit it is possible to insert the optical interface module (refer to para.5.4.4 on page
292 for its description).
RRA–CHANNEL description

An electrical CMI /NRZ conversion is performed with LOS input alarm generation in Tx section. In the
receive section the complementary operations are performed.
The RRA uses two ASICs:

– one implementing:
• the Input/Output RRA Section (Regeneration Termination Adaptation according to G783)
• and the Hitless switch, performing the RPS (Radio Protection Switching) function
– the other, implementing:
• the RFCOH Insertion/Extraction function
• and the unprotected 1*2Mbit WST Insertion/Extraction function.
All these functions are bi–directional.
Delay cells, placed in TX sides, compensate the static delays resulting from the different paths of the two
signals.
The delay can be set with one bit step in the range 0 to 256 bits.
Delay cells, placed in RX side, compensate the static delays resulting from the different paths of the two
signals. The static delay equalization is obtained by means an automatic procedure to facilitate the
approach during field installation.
At RX side, whenever both paths are aligned, the phase comparator generates an OK command,
indicating that a switching operation can be performed.
The Switch command comes from the logic switch placed on the service board.
Inside the ASIC, the loopback connections are present, as described in the Equipment Control Subsystem
description (see para.5.2.1.2.2 on page 226).
The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) is managed by the ASIC.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
The alarms, commands, and every other information regarding the communication with System controller
are organized in the registers of SPI and converted by Microcontroller in Can 0 BB–Bus.
The FPGA download uses Can 1 BB bus.
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 287 / 514
514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
To
03
RFCOH
DCCR RSOH RRASTBY
38.800 Vcxo A
Equalizer Mhz
Electrical
STM1 CMI/NRZ TCXO vcxo
SEL
LOS
955.203.292 Q
input Switch Optical To modem
Signal input
ASIC To modem
. RFCOH
NRZ+CK RSTRST RFCOH NRZ
MUXMUX Delay
256 bits
0–256 TX
RXRX TX
TX TX Loopback
only local
Loopback
2 * 2Mbit WST
2 * 2Mbit WST only local
Optical Optical loopback loopback
G.A “CERBERO”
STM1 ElasticElastic
memmemDelay
. Delay NRZ
Interface . 32bit 32bit 256
NRZ
RST 0–0–256 RFCOH RFCOH
NRZ+CK RST CK
CK
Elastic Elastic
mem mem .
DEMUX RX From Modem
DEMUX
A.L.S TX RX 32bit 32bit From Modem
TX RX
PhasePhase 38.88 Mhz
38.88 Mhz
delay
comparcompar
delay
Missing vcxo
TCXO WST1 FAIL
vcxo
SEL 155.520 Ok LOS_ R
TX fail /degrade Switch
Mhz Pat 38.88 Mhz
RFCOH
(only optical)version RSOH Ok Bit
DCCR Kofin NRZ 2Mbit WST
KRn From protected.
RRASTBY KAIS From/to Service
1–2
RRA MISSING
Fig. 149. RRA–CHANNEL block diagram

SPI Red led
NRZ/HDB3
WST1 LOS
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
68HC012 Parallel Parallel wire alarms
Serial Fast alarms RRA ALARMS RRA ALARMS
can
HDB3 1 * 2Mbit WST
Can 1BB Can 0BB unprotected.
Serial Bus To Service Parallel alarms from Modem
288 / 514
5.4.3 RRA–STANDBY “STM1+1WST” and “STM0+0WST” description
The RRASTBY unit performs the following main functions:

– Electrical CMI –NRZ and NRZ–CMI conversion

– RSOH and DCCR line side Extraction /Insertion to/ from Service Board
– RFCOH radio side Insertion/Extraction to/from Service Board
– TX/RX distributor
– Switch of the reference signal
– Unprotected 1*2Mbit WST Insertion/Extraction
In N+0 configuration there are two possibilities:
1) RRASTBY unit forced to be used as RRA unit

2) Use RRA unit instead of RRASTBY

– the STM1 electrical interface (it is fixed on the board and cannot be extracted)
– a one–digit display to indicate the number of the channel protected (1... 9)
– one red led to indicate the card failure
On the RRA–CHANNEL unit it is possible to insert the optical interface module (refer to para.5.4.4 on page
292 for its description).
RRA–STBY description
An electrical CMI /NRZ conversion is performed with LOS input alarm generation. In the receive section
the complementary operations are performed.
The RRASTBY uses an ASIC and a FPGA:

– one implementing:
• the Input/Output RRA Section (Regeneration Termination Adaptation according to G783)
• and the Hitless switch, performing the RPS (Radio Protection Switching) function
– the other, implementing:
• the RFCOH Insertion/Extraction function
• and the unprotected 1*2Mbit WST Insertion/Extraction function.
All these functions are bi–directional.
Delay cells, placed in TX sides, compensate the static delays resulting from the different paths of the two
signals.
The delay can be set with one bit step in the range 0 to 256 bits.
Delay cells, placed in RX side, compensate the static delays resulting from the different paths of the two
signals. The static delay equalization is obtained by means an automatic procedure to facilitate the
approach during field installation.
The Mux insert one of nine streams (38.88Mbit/s) from RRA 1 to RA 9.

From Switch Logic the unit receives the ” Keta” command that selects, by MUX, the transmit channel to
be paralleled toward the standby path.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 289 / 514
514
At RX side the unit receives a 155 Mbit stream from RFCOH section (this signal comes from standby
demodulator) and sends it by splitter to the respective RRA1/RRA9 unit.
Inside the RRASTBY there are the loopback connections, as described in the Equipment controller sub

system chapter.

The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) is managed by the ASIC.
The FPGA download uses Can 1 BB bus.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 290 / 514
514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
From RRA1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9
LOS_RIFn
DCCR RSOH KOP
03
FPGA
38.800
Equalizer
Mhz
Electrical Delay
Delay Vcxo
TCXO 256
0–
0–256
STM1 CMI/NRZ SEL A
LOS Switch
input
955.203.292 Q
Optical RST To modem
. RFCOH
Signal I/O NRZ+CK MUX NRZ
TX
RX TX
Loopback
1 * 2Mbit WST only local
Optical loopback ASIC
Optical Elasticmem Delay NRZ
STM1 NRZ+CK 32bit 0–256 RFCOH
. Elasticmem.
RST CK
32bit
Interface DEMUX RX From modem
Phase
A.L.S TX RX compar delay
vcxo
Missing TCXO 38.88 vcxo
Mhz 38.88
SEL Mhz LOS_ R
155.520
TX fail/degrade Mhz
(only optical version) RFCOH
RSOH RRA CARD fail
Switch
Red led
NRZ 2Mbit WST
Fig. 150. RRA STANDBY block diagram

FPGA protected.
SPLITTER FPGA“SCIARON” KAIS From/to Service
SPI to ASIC & FPGA 1–2
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
RRA
To RRA1………..RRA9
MISSING
68HC012 Serial Fast alarmsSerial Fast alarms RRASTBY 1 * 2Mbit WST
ALARMS NRZ/HDB3 unprotected.
can SeeTable
RRASTBY
DATA ALARMS
Parallel wire alarms RRASTBY
Can 1BB Can 0 BB ALARMS
Serial BusTo Service FPGA Parallel alarms from Modem HDB3 1 * 2Mbit WST
unprotected.
291 / 514
5.4.4 STM–1 optical module description
See Fig. 71. on page 148 (physical view) and Fig. 151. on page 292 (block diagram).

The STM–1 optical module is the optical physical interface for the STM–1 cards. Different types are

available according to the connector type, fibre and optical power range.
Each module contains two optical components (Tx and Rx), two level adapters, the remote inventory and
the ALS–restart push–button.
The RX optical component converts the 155.52 Mb/s STM1 optical signal into electrical, recoveries the
clock, detects the LOS alarm.
The TX optical component converts the electrical signal (data & clock) into optical, detects the
Laser–failure and Laser–degrade alarms. Receives the Laser–shutdown command from the controller
and the ALS–restart command from a front push–button.
OPTICAL EDR
INPUT DATA RX
Rx Opt. Module Level
ECKR Adapter CLOCK RX
LOS
EDT DATA TX
ECT Level
OPTICAL Adapter CLOCK TX
OUTPUT Tx Opt. Module
Laser Fail
Laser deg.
Laser
Shutdown
ALS–Restart o
o
Remote TO CAN BUS
GND Inventory Rinv
OPTICAL MODULE
Fig. 151. STM–1 optical module – block diagram

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 292 / 514
514
5.4.5 128QAM MODEM “STM1– 1WST” and “STM0– 0WST” description
The modem performs the following main functions:

– Terminal / repeater Modulator

– Terminal / repeater Demodulator
– XPIC / Base Band Combiner
– Demodulator first IF input

– Second IF input XPIC or IF diversity
– Third IF input XPIC from cross polar receiver (has to be utilized when reuse and diversity are used
contemporaneously)
– IF Modulator Output
The second and third IF input are associated to optional baby boards.
One red led is also present to indicate the MODEM card fail.
Modem description
In a single ASIC the following parts are implemented: MLC code and decoder, Mapping 128 QAM, Digital
filter, BSE, FSE, XPIC and Base Band combiner.
The main functions are described in the following, according to MODEM block diagram (see Fig. 152. on
page 296):
– I/O
The input/output interface, composed by NRZ signal and CK signal, is internal interface. The signals
come from/to RRA unit / RRA STBY or DROP in repeater configuration, no external access is
available.
The input/output signal is converted in four parallel streams; because of different transmission
capacities planned, the streams have, accordingly, different rates.
– MLC code error

The MLC 6,5/7 coding scheme employs a set of binary codes of decreasing Hamming distance
combined with nested signal constellations of increasing Euclidean distance. Each code selects one
of the two subsets into which the corresponding constellation level is portioned. In this way a more
efficient use of redundancy is possible, since more powerful codes “protect” points a low Euclidean
distance, while less powerful codes are used for points at larger Euclidean distance. The coding
scheme uses both convolutional and blocks code.
The convolutional codes are the powerful ones in the scheme, while the block codes is a simple parity
check.
The first level code/decoder convolutional is obtained by Viterbi decoder for the code 2/3
The second level code /decoder convolutional works with an other Viterbi for the code 7/8
The Third level has a Wagner decoder for code 24,23
To reduce the effects of burst errors due to the convolutional code, a suitable interleaving technique
has been implemented. The structure of the interleaving is based on the introduction of distinct delay
chains on the parallel signal stream.
The two signals, the “in phase” channel and the “quadrature” channel, after MLC code QAM mapping
they are sent at 1/T frequency to a 36 taps digital shaping filter. The two filtered signals come out from
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
the ASIC at 2/T frequency.

ASIC output signals are converted into analog signals by two D/A converters (10 bits) and, then, a
Butterworth filter (7 poles) filters them.
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 293 / 514
514
– BB/IF Side modulation
Two IF (140 MHz) in–quadrature carriers are modulated by the two filtered signals by means of two
balanced mixers. Then, modulated carriers are summed in order to generate a 128 QAM
CROSS–modulated signal.

– First IF/BB Side demodulation
First IF (140 MHz) signal (from main Transceiver) is BB converted by means of two mixers that are
controlled by a carrier recovery circuit.
Converted signal is, then, filtered by two Butterworth analog filters that have to guarantee proper NFD
for different modulation formats (poles number =9, cut–off frequency fco=0.55 – 0.65/T).
Two A/D converters sample filters out coming signals.
– Second IF and third IF

A baby board called second IF and third IF carry out the same function of the first IF main.
Second IF is applied from diversity or cross polar signal.
When diversity and co–polar are contemporaneously used, a third IF input is connected to
cross–polar main receiver.
– Clock recovery
A Gardner synchronizer that controls a VCXO, which provides a sampling signal at 2/T frequency,
performs clock recovery.
Gardner algorithm is implemented in ASIC “Modem”
– Equalizer cable for space diversity system
The delay’s
adjustment is
Self acting by
1IF Maim ECT
Delay 1
2IF diversity
Delay 2
3 IF cross Main
0 Delay 3
Every IF can be delayed a maximum 7x Ts/2 at Ts/2 step , compensate the static delays resulting
from the different paths of the two signals diversity.
An automatic procedure by ECT set the difference of the delays respective First and Second IF.
There is not automatic procedure for delay of the third IF.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 294 / 514
514
– Equalizer (FSE/DFE)
Into ASIC are implemented a synchronous equalizer (BSE – Baud Spaced Equalizer), and a
Fractionally Spaced Equalizer (FSE).
FSE consists of a dual structure FIR filter and two mixers. Filtering section is 4D structured, (i.e. it
consists of four 19 taps filters), DFE consist of four 1 tap decision.

– XPIC
When the frequency reuse is requested the XPIC cancellers the cross–polar interference.
On each way in dual polarization the IF signal is base–band converted, filtered and sampled by A/D
converters at 2/T frequency. Samples taken at t=KT are distinguished from those taken at
t=(KT+T/2) by XPIC S/P converters by means of 1/T frequency clock signal.
XPIC is adapted by means of error signals coming from equalizer and its central coefficient is left
spare for phase errors recovering.
XPIC output signal is sent to equalizer way adder.
XPIC way ASIC receives algorithm switch control signal and deep fading reset signal from equalizer
way ASIC.
– Base band Combiner

Space diversity is based on the simultaneous reception of the transmitted signal at two vertically
separated antennas, its effectiveness depend on the fact that the correlation between the two fields
is low if the antennas are well separated.
The baseband combiner, which operates on the coherently demodulated signals is based on the
minimization if the mean square error at the decision device.
The scheme is the same of XPIC with these difference: the central coefficient is constrained, we have
one Clock recovery by a Gardner synchronizer for each IF signal. An estimation of the power of the
signal at the output of the two FSE is calculated. The clock that has the grater power is selected
Gardner algorithm is implemented in ASIC “Modem”
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 295 / 514
514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
VCXO A Electronic +5.3
03
fuses +3.45 v
Los_M
From RRA or RRASTBY Data/ ck

or Elasticinterleaverinterleaver, FIR I D/A
Rate Rate
DROP S/P S/P encoderMLCencoderMLC,
store
adapter adapter mapper
mapper
955.203.292 Q
90 IF out
+
Mod
Mir Pseudo Pseudo FIR QFIR Q D/A
Squelch Main random random
DELAY
DELAY
DROPDROP 140Mhz
A/D XO
Delay to RRA or RRASTBY

IF + vco Decoder
VCXO Delay and ElasticElastic or
MAIN DecisionDecision MLC P/S
B andEqual SUM memory DROP
DEM 140Mhz T/2 Data/ck
loss 90
T/2 DROP MISSING
Card fail,missing A/D MODEM CARD
and fail
Remote Inventory VCXO C
gardnergardner
Clock Mhz Red led
2 Squelch
select
A/DA/D gardner gardner Modem Alarms

B&W Parallel wire alarms
90 90
Second IF + Delay vco’s TO
TO vco’s
carriercarrier
Fig. 152. MODEM block diagram

andand CorrCorr.
A/DA/D
EQUAL.
Agent Modem
Second IF loss T/2
T/2
A/DA/D
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
Baby boards spi ALARMS, SQUELCH
90 90 alarms CONTROL
Third IF + ASIC 68HC12
A/DA/D can
3 Squelch
Card fail,missing Can 0BB
Third IF loss
and
Remote Inventory
296 / 514
5.4.6 SERVICE and ADDITIONAL VOICE unit description
The Service Terminal performs the following main functions:

– Insertion/Extraction and termination of RSOH bytes

– Rerouting of RSOH bytes on RFCOH bytes
– Protection and management of RFCOH bytes
– System service channels and telephone services management
– I/O service channels and telephone services
– I/O DSI, ATPC, MC bytes, DCCR
– Switch logic N+1, 1+1, 1:1
– I/O protected WST channel
– Switch and SW logic for WST signals
N.B. The RFCOH bytes and 2 x 2Mbit/s WST can be protected only on the two channels selected
by ECT from the couples shown in the following table:
Tab. 57. Channels protectable for RFCOH bytes and 2 x 2Mbit/s WST
N+1 Terminal 2 X (4+1) WEST (N.B.) 2 X (4+1) EAST (N.B.)
0,1 0,1 9,8
0,9 0,4 9,5
1,2 1,2 8,7
8,9 3,4 6.5
1,9 1,4 8,5
N.B. Configurations not available in first release
On the front of the board are provided the following connectors and led:
– Phone Jack (EOW )

– Reset button
– One red led that indicates engaged line
– One green led that indicates free line
– One red led that indicates SERVICE card fail
– One display that indicates the protected Rx channel
– One yellow led indicating the manual operation of switch logic N+1
– Input /output 2 x 2Mbit protected WST
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 297 / 514
514
5.4.6.1 Service Channels
The characteristics of service channels are given in para.6.2 on page 316.

The service channels (see Fig. 153. on page 299) are managed by a FPGA able to provide on external

interfaces (programmable by ECT) the RSOH bytes from/to line side channel (channel 0 to 9) and also
RFCOH bytes protected in 1+1 from RRA units.
Eight channels are be provided towards Users. In particular:
– One (omnibus channels on E1 byte), one telephone jack and three analog party lines
– 3 x 64 kbit/s V11 or 2 x 64 kbit/s and 1 x128 kbit/s , V11 (Sw configurable for connection to 1 or 2
bytes)
– 3 x 64 kbit/s G703
– 1 x 9600 kbit/s V24/V28 Data channel
The service unit manages a TPH byte only to/from the RFCOH byte protected in 1+1 or to/from external
connection.
The desk telephone TPH, by HD selection, can be sent either into RFCOH byte or toward ADM in format
G703 (see block diagram).
E1, F1, D1–D3 bytes are always accessible both at radio and line side, while a maximum of 5 bytes line
and radio side may be accessed chosen between the remaining RSOH bytes.
At radio side, the service channels (comprehensive of DCCR, monitoring channels, ATPC, DSI bytes) are
dropped/inserted in 1+1 protected mode (splitted at Tx side and switched at RX side).
The Tx service alarm (ATL RFCOH) is remotized by means of monitoring channel (with 1+1 protection)
to be used with ATL and HBER remote alarms as minor switching criteria, while demodulator alarm and
HBER alarm are considered major switching criteria.
By means of a ” matrix ” function it is possible:
– to address to service the line–side user interfaces RSOH bytes from different RRA and/or RFCOH
bytes (7 bytes) on RRA used for 1+1 protection;
– to reroute RSOH bytes to RFCOH and viceversa.
For the detailed description of RSOH, RFCOH and DCCR management, please make reference to
para.5.2.4 on page 245 (Signal Management).
5.4.6.2 2Mbit Way side traffic
The FPGA, after HDB3/NRZ conversion, splits the 2Mbit/s asynchronous digital stream.
The two channels (N.B.) are inserted/extracted to/from a selected couple of RRA units among the those
specified in Tab. 57. on page 297. To minimize the errors during the switching operation a “make before
break“ switch is adopted and particular care is taken in switching logic.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
N.B. In first release, only one channel can be used (see Fig. 69. on page 145).
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 298 / 514
514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
Open on 1st SERVICE
unit in 4+0/4+1 DCCR Dip switch
E/W configuration 192kbit SERVICE CARD fail
Line side
Lineside K
FPGA K M RFCOH–RX/TX # 0
955.203.292 Q
Rerouting
Rerouting Radio
A Radio side
A side
RR
RR Red led
U RFCOH–RX/TX # 1
X
# 5–9
DEMUXDEMUX // RFCOH–RX/TX # 2
MATRIX
MATRIX RFCOH–RX/TX # 8
MATRIX
MATRIX
D
E RFCOH–RX/TX # 9
MUXMUX M
RFSOH–RX/TX
E1E1
# 0–4
U
FPGA X To /from RRA 0/1/2/8/9
NTONI”
“E Like RFCOH frame
COMBO
DCCR
I/O Radio DSI,ATPC,MC 192kbit SPI service
I/O Line
I/O TPH Additional ALARMS,

68HC012 CONTROL
TPHTPH AIS I/O
Hd Insertion
NRZ, CK, 64, SYNC command
V NRZ
CAN 0 BB
Out
G703
Loudspeaker WST Los 1and 2
NRZ NRZ RZ SERVICE
Fig. 153. SERVICE block diagram

COMBO
V11 G703 MISSING
V28
To M190 ANA ANA
LOG LOG
BB Access DUAL LINE CAN 1 BB
Area INTERFACE 1
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
EOW To ADM
RJ11
2x2 Mb/s
1x 9600Kb/s 3 x 64 kb/s 3 x 64 kb/s TPHTPH
Party x Party Lines
3 3xLine 1x 64 Kb/s1x 64 Kb/s
299 / 514
5.4.6.3 Switch Logic N+1
In, N+1 configuration, this function performs the hitless switch, by processing the propagation alarms
coming from demodulators. The Tx and Rx functions, respectively in station A and station B of the link,

must be connected by 64 Kb/s (DSI channel) to exchange information for Tx signal parallel before RX

switch. The 64 Kbit signal is processed in Switch logic.
The Switch logic N+1 is carried out inside FPGA and performs the following functions (see
Fig. 154. herebelow and Fig. 155. on page 301):
– gets the switching controls from the regular and standby channels
– determines the weights of various channels: priorities and simulations
– protects and releases the channels in N+1 configuration, using two service units in 4+1 E/W
configurations (this latter function not used in current release)
– performs the lookout and incoming inhibit
– manages the freezing operations
– manages the manual forcing at the receive side.
Modem 1 Parallel alarms
DAT A
T MD 1 Missing SYNC
O
CK
RRA 1
E RRA 1 Missing
S Modem 9
Parallel alarms
C MD 9 Missing
DAT A
U
SYNC
N
CK
I RRA 9
T RRA9 Missing
Modem 0
MD 0 Missing Parallel alarms
DAT A
SYNCH
CK
RRA Stby
ENTONI
RRAStby Missing
FPGA
RRA n Missing
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
SERVICE
Fig. 154. Switch logic N+1
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 300 / 514
514
The following figure shows the input/output of the switch logic:
J=0 to 9 channel units

n=1 to 9 channel units
FPGA
Switch commands
FAST SERIAL BUS
Agent Mod FailJ
Service SW forcing EWj
LBERj
HBERj
DSI 64 kb/s DEMfailj Modem
Modem J =0
J =0–9 –9
to/from EPLD
SWITCH DemCARD fail j
LOGIC Modem missing j
Los Mod j
KRRA Serial/Parallel
RRA fail j
To RRASTBY
KOP RRACARD fail j RRA and RRASTBY
Logic RRAmissing
Output J=0
Los R side Dem j n=1
Korifn LosStbyn
To RRA 1/9 OK pat n
KRPS
Ok bit n
Yellow led K_OPMAN

Los_Rifn RRASTBY
FROM RRAJ
K display RX
Fig. 155. Input/output command signals of the Switch logic

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 301 / 514
514
5.5 Transceiver subsystem
5.5.1 Interconnection general block diagrams

Please refer to:
– para.2.4.3.2 on page 53 for an introductive description

– Tab. 27. on page 156 for the transceiver equipping rules
– para.3.7.4 on pages 158 thru’ 167 for the assembly drawings and operative notes.
The transceiver operates from 4 to 13 GHz. Different P/Ns are envisaged according to the operating
frequency.
Each Radio Transceiver is equipped with the following modules (see Fig. 156. on page 303 for the
transceiver configuration without Rx diversity, and Fig. 157. on page 303 for the transceiver configuration
with Rx diversity):
– transmit & service module

– receiver & IF Rx module (main & diversity)
– DC/DC converter
– Local oscillators RX and TX
Fig. 158. on page 304 shows the signals exchanged among Transceiver internal modules.
For maintenance and installation purposes each Radio Transceiver unit must be considered as a unique
block.
A RI (remote inventory) identifies the unit Transceiver, the Local oscillator Tx and the Local oscillator Rx,
via software. RI is housed in the service TX.
A pin No_missing is available.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 302 / 514
514
OL TX MON
+VB
GND DC/DC OL TX RF TX
RF OUT
–VB CONVERTER
RI
RF MON
SERVICE TRX
IF IN
RI µP
OL RX MON
Can–bus
No_missing L.O. – Sync
.
OL RX RF RX RX IN
RI
IF OUT
Fig. 156. Functional block diagram of Transceiver without Rx Diversity
OL TX MON
+VB
GND DC/DC OL TX RF TX
RF OUT
–VB CONVERTER
RI
RF MON
SERVICE TRX
IF IN
RI µP
OL RX MON
Can–bus
No_ missing
L.O. – Sync
.
OL RX RF RX RX IN
RF RX
RI MAIN
RX IN
RF RX
IF OUT DIV.
IF OUT RF RX
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 157. Functional block diagram of Transceiver with Rx Diversity
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 303 / 514
514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
–V Battery
IF
ED
+5V
+V Battery adj +7V
+8V
Can–bus
03
4 Bit control for +7V adj
DC/DC
+5V
–12V
RF
PRX Measurement
955.203.292 Q
Squelch
4 Bit Remote inventory
RX
Main
Manual gain control
IF
Manual/Auto RX command
OL+/– command
5.5.2 DC/DC converter module

+3.3V
+8V
OL
+15V
Main
–12V
Squelch
Alarm loss loop
MON
OL
Alarm low level
3 Bit dati control
OL
Diversity
+5V
TX & SERVICE MODULE
–12V
RF
Measurement
Squelch
RX
Manual gain control
Diversity
Manual/Auto RX command
514
IF
3DB 02839 AA AA
OL+/– command
Fig. 158. Signals exchanged among Transceiver internal modules

+3.3V
following voltages: +5V, +8V, +7Vmax (digitally adjustable from 4V to 7V). See Fig. 158.
+8V
OR alarm module
+15V
OL TX
–12V
Alarm loss loop
MON
Alarm low level
MW
3 Bit dati control

OL
DC/DC converter receives primary voltage from the shelf backpanel and supplies to Service module the
RF
MON
304 / 514
5.5.3 Transmit and Service module
GENERAL
Transmit and Service module here described includes the following hardware components (depicted
in Fig. 81. on page 159:

• RT CONTROL
• AMPLIFIER
• UP CONVERTER
• DELAY LINE
Fig. 159. herebelow shows the module block diagram.
IF input connectors are 75Ω 1.0/2.3 Siemens, microwave output connectors are SMA 50Ω. Coaxial
cable connects Tx output to branching filters. Return loss of TX output is guaranteed by drop–in
isolator.
Transmit & service module performs the following functions:

• management of all transceiver functions by mean of service module
• IF amplification
• up–conversion of IF input signal to RF frequency
• linear microwave amplification
DC/DC +5V MW
+5V +8V
Power. red Drain fet finale
+8V
PTX meas
.
+7V adj
. Meas
Temp .
4 Bit for 7V
Attenuator
. com
+5V
+3,3V
RXmain OL TX
+5V +5V +8V
–12V –12V +8V +3,3V
OL+/–command +15V +15V
Squelch –12V
Remoteinventory
Manual gain control
µP Alarm loss loop
Alarm low level
Manual/auto 3 bit dati control
Remote. inv
IFblock
In IF
Can bus
RX div . OL RX
+5V
+8V
–12V +3,3V
IF detectorlevel
OL+/– command +15V
OL+/OL– command
Squelch –12V
Remote inventory
Alarm loss loop
Manual gain control Alarm low level
Manual/auto 3 bit dati control
Remote. inv
Squelch
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 159. Transmit and Service module block diagram
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 305 / 514
514
RT CONTROL
RT control performs the following functions:

• DC power distribution of the following voltages to different modules:

– TX amplifier : –12V, +5V, +8V, +15V ,+7Vmax.
– RX module: –12V, +5V.
– OL module : –12V, +3.3V, +8V, +15V
• Gain and output power of amplifying chain control
• Cable losses recovering
• Input IF level control
• OL+/– for up–converter setting
A microprocessor controls all the functions of Transceiver, besides it holds a Remote Inventory made
with an EPROM. Controlled functions are:
• Tx module linearization and temperature compensation of transmitted power.

warning management
protection vs over–temperature
management of BER measure
management of ATPC function with power consumption control
setting of Tx Pout .
ON/OFF by software command.
Selection of LO+ or LO− condition.
In Tx module the signals incoming/outgoing from microprocessor are:

RF detector level output
RF Attenuator command series
RF Attenuator command parallel
PTx Measurement
Temperature Measurement
Manual/Automatic TX command
Tx Temperature alarm
IF Tx detector level
OR alarm module
–12V
+8V
+15V
+7V (digitally adjustable)
OL+/OL– command
Presence reference negative voltage
Switch command for +8V
ATPC control
• LO module warning management.

Selection of frequency.
Selection of Master/Slave condition (for Rx–LO only)
In LO module the signals incoming/outgoing from microprocessor are:

Alarm loss loop TX
Alarm low level TX
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Dati
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 306 / 514
514
• Rx module warning management.
linearization and temperature compensation of field received indication.
Selection of master/slave condition.
Selection of LO+ or LO− condition.

squelching.
In Rx module the signals incoming/outgoing from microprocessor are:

PRx Measurement
Manual/Automatic RX command
Squelch command
Manual gain command
OL+/OL– command
• DC/DC converter warning management.

voltage control with ATPC command for power consumption reduction.
AMPLIFIER, UP CONVERTER AND DELAY LINE
The block diagram of up–conversion and amplification unit is shown in Fig. 160. herebelow.
REVEALED
OUT
xn T RF
LO Vatt
IF MONITORED
n = 2 for C band ÷ 4 for 11 & 13 GHz
Fig. 160. Block diagram of up–conversion and amplification unit
1) IF TX
The IF amplifier line accepts signal from 120 to 160 MHz with an input matched to 75 W.
It recovers cable losses (up to 30 m), therefore the incoming signal level can change from –12
dBm to –4 dBm ( standard input level is: –5 dBm).
IF signal is splitted and used to drive the circuits of Power consumption reduction. These circuits
include a delay line to synchronize the envelope resulting command with RF signal on final Fet
drain.
The output IF signal is held constant with an AGC circuit and with a power splitter 2 way 90
is possible to select L.O. condition ( USB or LSB).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 307 / 514
514
2) UP–CONVERSION
The mixer is implemented in MMIC technology developed in Alcatel.

In the same package are placed an SSB mixer, with four IF quadrature input signals, and a x2

frequency multiplier. The IF input level is –11 dBm +0 / −1 dB, and LO power is 15 dBm ± 1 dB
For 11 and 13 GHz frequency band the multiplying factor is x4, obtained with a third MMIC
placed in the same package.
On the same substrate and using the same technologies ,the RF chain is completed with an
active variable attenuator and a power amplifier, both realized in MMIC technology.
3) LINEAR MICROWAVE AMPLIFICATION
The RF output of up–converter is feeded into the input of power amplifier.
This is realized with two discrete transistor (GaAs Mosfets internally matched). Final Fets have
an output power of 4/12 W. At the output, before the drop–in isolator, a double microstrip
directional coupler will provide two signals, one for monitoring and one for AGC detector.
The circuits are implemented on a duroid metal–backed substrate.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 308 / 514
514
5.5.4 Receive & IF Rx module
GENERAL
RF
IN
T xn
Vatt
IF LO
n = 2 for C band ÷ 4 for 11 & 13 GHz
Fig. 161. Block diagram of Receive & IF Rx module
Receive & IF Rx module performs the following functions:
• low noise amplification of RF incoming signal

• signal variable attenuation following the incoming signal variations
• down–conversion to IF signal
• IF amplification.
The RF input of the module is connected to the branching by coaxial cable with SMA connectors/50
Ω .The return losses are guaranteed by drop–in isolator. The connectors for IF signals are 75Ω
1.0/2.3 Siemens.
FRONT END
The RF incoming signal is amplified by a first stage ultra low noise HEMT amplifier.
A variable attenuator, driven by the AGC voltage, allows a protection against up fading propagation.
A second stage contains a GaAs MMIC amplifier.
The down–conversion from RF to IF frequency is performed by the same micromodule used in

up–conversion function. It has four IF outputs signal in quadrature. A MMIC multiplier x2 doubles the
L.O frequency (x4 in 11 GHz version). The LO power is 15 dBm ± 1 dB.
The four outputs are connected with hybrid 90 and 180 to create IF signal ; by properly connecting
hybrid 90 is possible to select LSB or USB.
IF Rx
IF block amplifier contains two attenuators for AGC, controlled from a filtered detector. Then a IF filter
reduces the signal level of adjacent and alternate channels. The IF section supplies alarms for low
field, for RF–Rx failure and a measure of received signal level. Another function controlled by IF
section is the squelch of RX for low fields
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 309 / 514
514
5.5.5 Local Oscillator module
GENERAL

LO scheme for 9600LSY application includes the following functions:

• TX LO module
• Rx LO module, selectable master or slave option for H/V reuse applications.
A block diagram of the module is shown in the next Fig. 162.
Master
Lock Power Switch Slave
Alarm Alarm Position
Output Power Detection
Logic
Ext. VCO Power Detection
Diversity
Output
Switch Position
Lock Detect
X2 Splitter
VCO Switch
Multiplier
Main
Output
VCO External
Output VCO
Fig. 162. Block diagram of Local Oscillator module

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 310 / 514
514
TRANSMITTER LO MODULE
The module houses on the same multi layer board the Synthesizer, the Switch and the Multiplier.
It has two RF outputs port, named main and diversity and a monitor VCO output, moreover, for the
synchronization in master slave configuration, it makes available its VCO signal and can accept an
external VCO signal.
1) Synthesizer
The synthesizer is a single narrow band loop filter with a BiCMOS technology IC used for PLL
function, a low phase noise VCO and a 2° order active loop filter.
The signal is obtained locking the VCO frequency with a stable frequency reference TCXO.
At the output there’s RFIC in order to achieve a good isolation from external circuits.
The Synthesizer makes available the Lock Detection status.
2) Multiplier
The multiplier is composed by monolithic input buffer, a BJT active X2 multiplier, band–pass
filter, RFIC amplifier and power splitter.
To avoid dangerous emission, the output power is delivered only when the VCO is locked.
The unit makes available the output power detection
External VCO Input Power − 5 dBm ÷ + 5 dBm
3) Master/Slave Configuration
The Transmitter LO Module can run only in Master configuration, at the start up the Switch is
connected at the external VCO and only when its VCO is locked, the Switch must connect the
internal VCO
RECEIVER LO MODULE
1) Synthesizer
As that of Transmitter LO Module
2) Multiplier
As that of Transmitter LO Module
3) Master/Slave Configuration
– In Master configuration the LO runs with its internal VCO .

At the start up, the Switch is connected at the external VCO and there is no power delivered
at the output ports; when its VCO is locked, the Switch must connect the internal VCO and
give power at the outputs.
This setting does not to be modified by alarm during the running condition.
A buffer (Frequency Reuse kit module) is present between the output of the external VCO
and the MASTER/SLAVE input, with the aim of increasing insulation.
– In Slave configuration the LO runs with external VCO.

At the start up, the Switch is connected at the external VCO, after the start up time, if is
not detected the VCO external power, the Switch must connect the internal VCO.
During the running condition, in the case of lack of VCO external power, the switch must
connect the internal VCO; when the power of external VCO is back, the Switch must
reconnect the external VCO.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 311 / 514
514
5.6 Fans subsystem
The following Fig. 163. shows the block diagram of a fans shelf equipped with two FANS ASSEMBLED
units.

Fig. 164. on page 313 shows the block diagram of one FANS ASSEMBLED unit.
Please refer to:
– para.2.4.6 on page 61 for an introductive description

– para.3.9 on pages 169 thru’ 173 for equipping rules, assembly drawings and operative notes
– point f ) on page 284 for the power supply description.
The FANS ASSEMBLED unit includes a microprocessor to manage together with the System Control
subsystem, through the CAN bus:
– the Remote Inventory

– its logical address according to the position of the DIP–Switches present on the Fan–shelf front panel
– the unit alarms (internal PSU failure, individual Fan alarms).
FAN B FAN D FAN B FAN D
FAN A FAN C FAN A FAN C

0/1 0/1
LED LED
CAN CAN TERMINATION
BATTERY–A
BATTERY–B
Fig. 163. Fan subsystem block diagram

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 312 / 514
514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
µP
FAN ALARM
PSU ALARM
CAN
RI
FAN A
FAN B
PSU
BATT. B
BATT. A
LED
PSU
FAN C
FAN D
Fig. 164. FANS ASSEMBLED unit block diagram
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
313 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
314 / 514
6 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
6.1 Introduction
This chapter describes the technical characteristics of the 9600LSY.
Data indicated in the handbook must be considered as standard values

Data indicated in the contract must be considered as guaranteed values
– System characteristics on page 316, including:

• General Characteristics on page 317
• Power supply characteristics on page 323
• Mechanical characteristics on page 323
– Transceiver characteristics on page 324
– Regenerator and Modem characteristics on page 326, including:

• Modem on page 326
• XPIC & Combiner (XPIC STM–1 only) on page 328
• Regenerator on page 329
• Power consumption (Regenerator only) on page 331
– Branching interfaces on page 332
– Protections on page 332

– Environmental characteristics on page 333, including:
• General characteristics on page 333
• Mechanically active substances on page 333
• ETS 300019 Class 3.2: partly Temperature controlled locations on page 334
• ETS 300019 Class 3.1: Temperature–controlled locations on page 335
• Storage on page 337
• Transportation on page 338
– Optical Safety on page 339

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 315 / 514
514
6.2 System Characteristics
GENERAL NOTES ON FOLLOWING TABLES:

t May support both STM–1 and STM–0 transmission

* Tolerance: ± 0.5 dB at ambient temperature; ± 1.5 dB in temperature range –5 °C ÷ 55°C
Points A – A’ and C – C’ according to what defined in the relevant ETSI specification:
A’ RF TX
B’ TX
C’ TX D’
TX FILTER BRANCHING FEEDER
A RF RX
B C D
RX RX
RX FILTER BRANCHING FEEDER
Fig. 165. ETSI Reference points

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 316 / 514
514
6.2.1 General characteristics
EQUIPMENT 9640 9647 9662 9667 9674 9681 9611 9613

LSY LSY LSY LSY LSY LSY LSY LSY

Version INDOOR
Mechanical practice See para.2.4.2 page 51
Station type Regenerator Terminal – Wireless Multiservice Node (one side or two sides)
Configuration N+0 / N+1
Space diversity YES
Transmission 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x
capacity STM–1 STM–1 STM–1 STM–1 STM–1 STM–1 STM–1 STM–1
(2 x STM–1 with 2x 2x 2x 2x 2x 2x 2x 2x
frequency reuse STM–1 STM–1 STM–1 STM–1 STM–1 STM–1 STM–1 STM–1
with STM–1 only) (with (with (with (with (with (with (with (with
freq. freq. freq. freq. freq. freq. freq. freq.
reuse) reuse) reuse) reuse) reuse) reuse) reuse) reuse)
1x 1x 1x
STM–0 STM–0 STM–0
User interfaces – 155.520 Mb/s (STM–1) Electrical ITU–T Rec. G.703

– 139.264 Mb/s (PDH) Electrical ITU–T Rec. G.703
– 3 x 34.368 Mbit/s Electrical ITU–T Rec. G.703
– 155.520 Mb/s (STM–1) Optical ITU–T Rec. G.957 – G.958
Auxiliary channels STM 1 : 1 x 2 Mbit/s WST in RFCOH

STM–0 : no WST
Service channels – Omnibus voice channel (E1) DTMF (rec. Q23) 600 Ohm – Tx 0 dB,
Rx –4 dB, selective call.
– 3 x 64 Kb/s V11 or 2x 64 Kb/s + 1x 128 Kb/s (SW
configurable–contradirectional)
– 3 x 64 Kb/s G.703 (co–directional)
– 1 x 9.6 Kb/s RS 232
– TMN channel ( D1÷D3 regenerator terminal D4 ÷D12 WMSN )
– voice frequency party line (E1) (Four wire bal. , 600 Ohm, level –3 dB
– 1 voice frequency (point to point only)
– Digital party line for extension 64 Kb/s, G. 703 code
– Output to loudspeaker 400 mW, 4 Ohm
– Telephone set driver for TPH desk 600 Ohm, Tx 0 dB, Rx –4 dB.
LHR Transit time

– STM–1 – TBD
– STM–0 – TBD
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Tx Spectrum (C’) Fig. 171. on page 343
table continues
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 317 / 514
514
EQUIPMENT 9640 9647 9662 9667 9674 9681 9611 9613

Spectrum

Scrambler/
Descrambler
– STM–1 – 221.3–1
– STM–0 – 220–1
MODULATION 128 QAM
FREQUENCY 7.4÷7.7 10.7÷ 12.75÷

3.6÷4.2 4.4÷5.0 5.9÷6.4 6.4÷7.1 7.7÷8.3
BAND [GHz] F.385 11.7 13.25
(F.635) (F.1099) (F.383) (F.384) (F. 386)
(Channel plan) annex1) (F.387) (F.497) t
8.2÷8.5
7.1÷7.7
3.6÷4.2 4.4÷5.0 5.6÷6.2 (F.386
(F.385
(F.382) (Spain) (OIRT) annex3)
annex3)
t
7.4÷7.9
7.9÷8.4
3.6÷4.2 (F.385
(annex4)
(DTI) annex4)
t
t
7.2÷7.6
3.6÷4.2
(F.385
(F.635)
rec.1) t
3.4÷3.9
(OIRT)
TRANSMITTER
OUTPUT POWER
32,0 32,0 32,0 32,0 32,0 32,0 30,0 28,0
(W ATPC) *
[dBm] (A’)
TRANSMITTER
OUTPUT POWER
30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 30.0 28.0 27.0
(W/O ATPC) *
[dBm] (A’)
table continues
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 318 / 514
514
EQUIPMENT 9640 9647 9662 9667 9674 9681 9611 9613
1x10–3 BER TH
–74,0 –74,0 –74,0 –74,0 –73,5 –73,5 –73,5 –73,0

(A) (Received
typ typ typ typ typ typ typ typ
power) [dBm]
–73,0 –73,0 –73,0 –73,0 –72,5 –72,5 –72,5 –72,0
STM–1 gua gua gua gua gua gua gua gua
1x10–3 BER TH –78,5 –78,5 –78,0

(A) (Received typ typ typ
N.A. N.A.
power) [dBm] –77,5 –77,5 –77,0
STM–0 gua gua gua
1x10–6 BER TH –72,0 –72,0 –72,0 –72,0 –71,5 –71,5 –71,5 –71,0
(A) (Received typ typ typ typ typ typ typ typ
power) [dBm] –71,0 –71,0 –71,0 –71,0 –70,5 –70,5 –70,5 –70,0
STM–1 gua gua gua gua gua gua gua gua
1x10–6 BER TH –76,5 –76,5 –76,0

(A) (Received typ typ typ
N.A. N.A.
power) [dBm] –75,5 –75,5 –75,0
STM–0 gua gua gua
Net System Gain

(C–C’) dB* (with
branching losses
and with ATPC) 98 97.5 100 100.5 98.5 98.5 96 93.5
STM–1 10–3
1+1 and 3+1
Heterofreq.
Net System Gain

(C–C’) dB* (with
branching losses
and with ATPC) 96 95.5 98 98.5 96.5 96.5 94 91.5
STM–1 10–6
1+1and 3+1
Heterofreq.
Max input power at

antenna port
(Received field –16,0/TBD
[dBm]
10–3/10–10
Background BER
(at nominal Prx 1 x 10E–13
level)
Frequency reuse
YES (STM–1 only)
(XPIC)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
table continues
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 319 / 514
514
EQUIPMENT 9640 9647 9662 9667 9674 9681 9611 9613

NFD one adjacent >50 @

channels (guar) 40 MHz >50 @ >50 @
>50 @ >50 @ >45 @ >50 @
STM–1 [dB] 29.65 29.65 t.b.d.
40 MHz 40 MHz 28 MHz 40 MHz
>45 @ MHz MHz
29 MHz
NFD one adjacent

channels (guar) N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. t.b.d. t.b.d. N.A. t.b.d.
STM–0 dB
XPD antenna for

≥ 38
CCDP application
[dB]
XPIC filters 19 taps
XPI ratio lock–in

≥7
[dB]
XPI ratio lock–out

= 4
[dB]
table continues
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 320 / 514
514
EQUIPMENT 9640 9647 9662 9667 9674 9681 9611 9613
Behavior vs
modulated digital
channel
interference:
– co–channel
STM–1 1*10–3
Fig. 175. on page 345
– co–channel
STM–1 1*10–6
– co–channel
STM–0 1*10–3 Fig. 175.
Fig. 175.
N.A. N.A.
– co–channel on page 345
pg.345
STM–0 1*10–6
– adj.channel
STM–1 40 MHz
1*10–3 Fig. 176. Fig. 176.
Fig. 176.
N.A. N.A. N.A.
– adj.channel on page 346
pg.346 pg.346
STM–1 40 MHz
1*10–6
– adj.channel
STM–1 30 MHz
1*10–3 Fig. 177.
Fig. 177.
Fig. 177. on page 347 N.A. N.A.
– adj.channel on page 347
pg.347
STM–1 30 MHz
1*10–6
– adj.channel
STM–0 14 MHz
1*10–3
Fig. 178. on page Fig. 178.
N.A. N.A.
– adj.channel 347 pg.347
STM–0 14 MHz
1*10–6
table continues
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 321 / 514
514
EQUIPMENT 9640 9647 9662 9667 9674 9681 9611 9613

C/I for 1 dB

threshold degrad.
@ 10E–3 [dB] :
– co–channel 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31
STM1/STM0
– adjacent ch.
mono lateral –50 –50 N.A. –50 N.A. N.A. –50 N.A.
STM1 40MHz
– adjacent ch.
mono lateral –29 –29 –29 N.A. –29 –29 N.A. –29
STM1 30MHz
– adjacent ch.
mono lateral N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. TBD N.A. TBD TBD
STM0 14 MHz
C/I for 1 dB
threshold degrad.
@ 10E–6 [dB]:
– co–channel 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33
STM1/STM0
– adjacent ch.
mono lateral –48 –48 N.A. –48 N.A. N.A. –48 N.A.
STM1 40MHz
– adjacent ch.
mono lateral –24 –24 –24 N.A. –24 –24 N.A. –24
STM1 30MHz
– adjacent ch.
mono lateral N.A. N.A. N.A. N.A. TBD TBD N.A. TBD
STM0 14 MHz
C/I dB for Error

Free: 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32
co–channel
STM1/STM0
BER Curve:
– – STM–1 Fig. 169. on page 341
Fig. 170.
Fig. 170.
– – STM–0 N.A. N.A.
on page 342
pg.342
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 322 / 514
514
6.2.2 Power supply characteristics
EQUIPMENT 9640 9647 9662 9667 9674 9681 9611 9613


Input battery source –48 to –60 Vdc

or
± 24 Vdc
POWER
CONSUMPT.
Tolerance $ 10%
[W]
W/o Sp.Div. (with
Sp.Div.)
– 1+1/2+0 Het. ≤ 200 (210)

– 2+1/3+0 Het. ≤ 280 (300)
– 3+1/4+0 Het. ≤ 350 (380)
– 4+1/5+0 Het. ≤ 430 (460)
– 5+1/6+0 Het. ≤ 510 (540)
– 6+1/7+0 Het. ≤ 590 (630)
– 7+1/8+0 Het. ≤ 670 (710)
6.2.3 Mechanical characteristics
EQUIPMENT 9640 9647 9662 9667 9674 9681 9611 9613

Rack dimensions
[mm] (l x d x h)
all configurations 600 x 300 x 2200
weight:
– 1+1 Regen. TBD
– 3+1 Regen. TBD
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 323 / 514
514
6.3 Transceiver characteristics
GENERAL NOTES ON FOLLOWING TABLES:

(*) Tolerance: ± 0.5 dB at ambient temperature; ± 1.5 dB in temperature range –5 °C ÷ 55°C .

Points A – A’ and C – C’ according to what defined in the relevant ETSI specification (Fig. 165. on
page 316)
EQUIPMENT 9640 9647 9662 9667 9674 9681 9611 9613

Tx output range
with ATPC +15 to +15 to +15 to +15 to +15 to +15 to +15 to +15 to
guaranteed. +32 +32 +32 +32 +32 +32 +30 +28
( A’) ( * )
[dBm]
Tx output range
w/o ATPC (1dB
+15 to +15 to +15 to +15 to +15 to +15 to +15 to +15 to
step by SW preset)
+30 +30 +30 +30 +30 +30 +28 +27
guaranteed.
(A’) ( * )
[dB]
Max. ATPC Range

17 17 17 17 17 17 15 13
[dB]
NF guaranteed [dB] 2.3 2.3 2.5 2.5 2.8 2.8 3.0 3.5
NF Typical [dB] 2.0 2.0 2.2 2.2 2.5 2.5 2.7 3.2
IF freq. [MHz]
140
Nominal Received
–30
level [dBm]
IF Nominal input /
–5 ± 1 dB
output level [dBm]
L.O. freq. stability

± 10
(p.p.m.)
AGC range [dB] > 60
AGC response time

100
[dB/sec.]
table continues
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 324 / 514
514
EQUIPMENT 9640 9647 9662 9667 9674 9681 9611 9613
Transmitted
spectrum
(Typical) (C’) Fig. TBD
– STM–1
– STM–0
ETSI normatives
Referred for
spectrum mask:
– Referred class
STM–1 ETSI EN 300234, EN 301127, EN 301461
– Referred class
STM–0 ETSI EN 301216
Spectral lines at Compliant with the relevant ETS (EN) specification according to the freq.
symbol rate (dBm) arrangement
Tx and Rx spurious Compliant with the relevant ETS (EN) specification according to the freq.
signals emission arrangement
IF filter selectivity
See Fig. 172. on page 344
STM–1/STM–0
Transceiver power
consumption [W]
– 1+1/2+0 120
– 2+1/3+0 180
– 3+1/4+0 230
– 4+1/5+0 290
– 5+1/6+0 350
– 6+1/7+0 410
– 7+1/8+0 470
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 325 / 514
514
6.4 Regenerator and Modem characteristics
6.4.1 Modem

EQUIPMENT 9640 9647 9662 9667 9674 9681 9611 9613
Modulation type 128 QAM CROSS
Coding MLC
2/3 7/8 24–23
Error corrector
MLC 6.5/7 (7.69 % redundancy)
Coding gain TBD

Radio scrambler/
2 7,3 – 1
descrambler
Equivalent roll– off
0.21
factor
Gross symbol rate
[Mbit/s]
– STM–1 24.458
– STM–0 8.153
Intermediate
modulator
140 " 50 ppm
frequency
[MHz]
IF impedance
75 Ohm
(all modem ports)
IF nominal
modulator output –5 " 1 dB
level [dBm]
IF input/output
Return Loss (all x – 25 dB in the band 140 MHz " 15 MHz
modem ports)
Shaping filter (Tx
Raised cosine
side)
Shaping filter and
T/2 equaliser ( 19 taps )
equalizer (Rx side)
Digital filter 36 taps
Demodulation coherent
IF demodulator
nominal input level –5 (+1 to –6 dB)
[dBm]
Post demodulation
filter Butterworth – 9 poles
STM–1 Fig. 173. on page 345
STM–0 Fig. 174. on page 345
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
table continues
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 326 / 514
514
EQUIPMENT 9640 9647 9662 9667 9674 9681 9611 9613
Demodulator
band–width $ 0.8
recovery [MHz]
Clock recovery time

after IF interruption < 100
[msec.]
Synchronism
recovery x 0.1
[msec.]
Signature
STM–1:
BER =1*10E–4 Kn gua. = 0.9 ; Kn typ.= 0.4 9 (6.3 nsec.) see also Fig. 179. pg.348
BER =1*10E–6 Kn gua. =1 ; Kn typ.= 0. 55 (6.3 nsec.) see also Fig. 180. pg.349
STM–0 :
BER =1*10E–4 Kn gua. = 1.3 ; Kn typ.= 0.55 (6.3 nsec.) see also Fig. 181. pg.350
BER =1*10E–6 Kn gua. = 1.5 ; Kn typ.= 0.65 (6.3 nsec.) see also Fig. 182. pg.351
C/N STM–1 [dB]
– BER =1*10E–3 24.5 Guar – 23.7 Typ
– BER =1*10E–4 25.2 Guar – 24.3 Typ
– BER =1*10E–6 26.5 Guar – 25.5 Typ
C/N STM–0 [dB]
– BER =1*10E–3 24.5 Guar – 23.7 Typ
– BER =1*10E–4 25.2 Guar – 24.3 Typ
– BER =1*10E–6 26.5 Guar – 25.5 Typ
Modem Transit time

t.b.d.
Absolute delay
Interleave block
120 symbols
length
Carrier recovery x 500 (STM–1)

(after RF
interruption) msec. t.b.d. (STM–0)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 327 / 514
514
6.4.2 XPIC & Combiner (XPIC STM–1 only)
EQUIPMENT 9640 9647 9662 9667 9674 9681 9611 9613


Intermediate
140 " 1
frequency [MHz]
IF Nominal input
–5 (+1 to –6 dB)
[dBm]
IF impedance 75 Ohm
IF input Return loss x – 25 dB in the band 140 MHz " 15 MHz
Post demodulation
Butterworth – 9 poles
filter
Adaptive equalizer T/2 – 19 taps
Base Band static

delay equalization 0 to 140 step T/2
[ns]
XPIF Guar [dB]

@ 1x10–6 ≥ 17 for symmetrical degradation
( 3 dB less for unbalanced degradation )
@ 1x10–3 TBD
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 328 / 514
514
6.4.3 Regenerator
EQUIPMENT 9640 9647 9662 9667 9674 9681 9611 9613


Input/output signal 155.520 Mb/s ± 4.6 p.p.m. (standard payload )

155.520 Mb/s ± 20 p.p.m. (AIS payload )
Line Scrambler/
27–1
Desc.
User interface Electrical – Optical
Impedance 75 Ohm
Level 1V pp
Cable equalizer ≥ 12.7 dB at 78 MHz as vf
Optical input NRZ+CK
Bit rate 155.520 Mb/s
– I/O signal
elect. Interf. ITU–T G.703 (Siemens 1.0/2.3 connector)
Code
CMI
– Impedance 75 ohm unbal.
– Signal level 1 Vpp
– Return loss ≤ –15 dB from 8 to 240 MHz
– Input cable ≥ 12.7 dB at 78 MHz as vf
equalizer
Max. input jitter ITU–T G.825
Max. output jitter ITU–T G.958
Jitter transfer
ITU–T G.958
function
– I/O signal ITU–T G.957 (S1.1 type FC–PC and SC connectors)

optical inter.
– Operating 1260–1360 nm
wavelength.
– Min. Sensitivity – 28
dBm
– Min. overload –8
dBm
– Output mean
launched –8 (max.) ; –15 (min.)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
power dBm
table continues
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 329 / 514
514
EQUIPMENT 9640 9647 9662 9667 9674 9681 9611 9613
Max. input jitter ITU–T G.825

Max. output jitter ITU–T G.958
Jitter transfer
ITU–T G.958
function
DCCr (D1 to D3)

– bit rate Kbit/s 192
– interface Managed internally by the System Controller
DCCm (D4 to D12) The entire MSOH is not managed and passed–through
– bit rate Kbit/s 576
– interface Not managed by pass condition
Unprotected 2Mbit/s From backpanel access area

– I/O access 1.0–2.3 Siemens connectors – 75 Ohm
– I/O signal bit rate 2048 Kb/s G 703
– I/O level 2.37 V p
– Signal Code HDB3
Protected 2Mbit/s From Service unit front panel

– I/O access 1.0–2.3 Siemens connectors – 75 Ohm
– I/O signal bit rate 2048 Kb/s G 703
– I/O level 2.37 V p
– Signal Code HDB3
AIS management:
– Regenerator
Tx and/or Rx MSAIS (Contains a valid RSOH and an all”1” pattern on MSOH and payload
side in case of LOS,LOF)
– 64 Kbit/s
channels All “1”
Tx/Rx
Alarms Loss Of Frame : 3/1 (24 frames/8 frames)

detection/removal
[msec]. Loss Of Signal : 0.625/0.250 (5 frames/2 frames)
Out Of Frame Detection : >1000 ones or zeros consecutively
ATPC channel
64 Kbit/s channel in RFCOH 1+1 protected
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 330 / 514
514
6.4.4 Power consumption (Regenerator only)
W " 10%
EQUIPMENT 9640 9647 9662 9667 9674 9681 9611 9613

1+1/2+0 Hetero 80
2+1/3+0 Hetero 100
3+1/4+0 Hetero 120
4+1/5+0 Hetero 140
5+1/6+0 Hetero 160
6+1/7+0 Hetero 180
7+1/8+0 Hetero 200

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 331 / 514
514
6.5 Branching interfaces
9640 9647 9662 9667 9674 9681 9611 9613


UDR UDR
RF feeder interface UDR 40 UDR 48 UDR 70 UDR 70 UDR 70 UDR 84
100 120
Tx/Rx Antenna
circulator common
x 26
port input return
loss [dB] (C, C’)
6.6 Protections
EQUIPMENT 9640 9647 9662 9667 9674 9681 9611 9613

Radio Protection
Switching (RPS) 1+1/N+1
type
Occasional traffic Optional, available only in N+1
RPS Switching Hitless revertive and not revertive in 1+1

Method Hitless revertive in N+1
RPS Criteria / RRA/MODEM Failure

Switching Time RRA/MODEM Missing unit
[ms] HBER ( detection TBD ; restore TBD )
LBER ( detection TBD ; restore TBD )
EW ( detection TBD ; restore TBD )
RPS Switching time

[msec.]
– 1+1 ≤ 1 (from alarm detection)
– N+1 ≤ 10 (from alarm detection)
Tx/Rx Static delay

0÷256 ( 1 bit step )
equalization bits
Max. dynamic
recoverable delay ± 10
bits
Regenerator user
Not available
interface protection
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 332 / 514
514
6.7 Environmental characteristics
6.7.1 General characteristics

EQUIPMENT 9640 9647 9662 9667 9674 9681 9611 9613

Environment:
– EMI–EMC Compliant with EN 55022 – ETSI EN 301–489–1 – ETSI EN 301–489–4
– Safety Compliant with IEC 60950 add. IV and IEC 215
– Temperature –5/+55°C ;
– Humidity 5 to 95 %
– Transportation compliant with ETS 300 019 class 2.3
– Storage compliant with ETS 300 019 class 1.2
6.7.2 Mechanically active substances
ETS 300 019 Class 3.1 recommends the following environmental parameters:
Environmental Parameter Value
a) Sand 30 mg/m3
b) Dust (suspension) 0.2 mg/m3
c) Dust (sedimentation) 1.5 mg/ (m2 h)
Overcoming these values could affect Fans Assembled Unit operation. For further information, see
para.7.6.2 on page 374.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 333 / 514
514
6.7.3 ETS 300019 Class 3.2: partly Temperature controlled locations
See climatogram on Fig. 166. herebelow

This applies to locations:

– where installed equipment may be exposed to solar radiation and heat radiation. They may also be

exposed to movements of the surrounding air due to draughts in buildings, e.g. through open
windows. They may be subjected to dew and to presence of water from sources other than rain and
icing. They are not subjected to precipitations;
– where mould growth or attacks by animals, except termites, may occur;
– with normal levels of contaminants experienced in urban areas with industrial activities scattered
over the whole area and/or with heavy traffic;
– In close proximity to sources of sand or dust;
– with vibration of low significance, e.g. for products fastened to light supporting structures subjected
to hardly perceptible vibrations.
The conditions of this class may be found in :

– entrances and staircases of buildings;
– garages;
– cellars;
– certain workshops;
– buildings in factories and industrial process plants;
– unattended equipment stations;
– certain telecommunication buildings;
– ordinary storage rooms for frost resistant products and farm buildings, etc.
Fig. 166. Climatogram for Class 3.2 : Partly temperature controlled locations
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 334 / 514
514
6.7.4 ETS 300019 Class 3.1: Temperature–controlled locations
This class is a combination of classes 3K3/3Z2/3Z4/3B1/3C2(3C1)/3S2/3M1 in IEC standard 721–3–3 [3].

This class applies to a permanently temperature controlled closed location. Humidity is usually not
controlled. The climatogram is shown in Fig. 167. herebelow:
60
50
45
ÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇÇ
40
35
30
25
ABSOLUTE AIR HUMIDITY g/m3

AIR TEMPERATURE 0C
20
20
10
5
0
–5
–10
1.5
1.0
–20
–30
–40
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
85
RELATIVE AIR HUMIDITY %
Exceptional climatic limits.
Normal climatic limits: Values outside these limits

have a probability of occurrence of less than 1%
ÇÇÇÇ
ÇÇÇÇ
Values outside this field have a probability of oc-
currence of less than 10%(see IEC standard
721–3–0 [2], Class 4)
NOTE: Exceptional conditions may occur following the failure of the temperature controlling system
Fig. 167. Climatogram for Class 3.1: Temperature–controlled locations
Heating, cooling, forced ventilation and humidification are used to necessarily maintain the required
conditions – especially where there is a great difference between room environment and external high or
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
low temperatures.
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 335 / 514
514
This class applies to locations:
– where installed equipment may be exposed to solar radiation and to heat radiation. It may also be
exposed to movements of the surrounding air due to draughts in buildings. They are not subjected

to dew, precipitation, water from source other than rain or icing;

– without particular risks of biological attacks. This includes protective measures, e.g. special product
design, or installations at locations of such construction that mould growth and attacks by animals,
etc. are not likely to occur;
over the whole area and/or with heavy traffic;
– without special precautions to minimize the presence of sand or dust, but which are not situated in
close proximity to sources of sand or dust;
– with insignificant vibration and shock.
The conditions of this class may be found in :
– normal living or working areas, e.g. living rooms, rooms for general use (theatres, restaurants);
– offices;
– shops;
– workshops for electronic assemblies and other electrotechnical products;
– telecommunication centers;
– storage rooms for valuable and sensitive products.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 336 / 514
514
6.7.5 Storage
The equipment meet the following requirements vs. storage:

ETS 300 019, class 1.2

Class 1.2 weatherproofed, not temperature–controlled storage location.
This class applies to weatherproofed storage having neither temperature nor humidity control. The
location may have openings directly to the open air, i.e., it may be only partly weatherproofed. The
climatogram is shown on Fig. 168. herebelow.
This class applies to storage locations:
– where equipment may be exposed to solar radiation and temporarily to heat radiation: They may also
be exposed to movements of the surrounding air due to draughts, e.g. through doors, windows or
other openings. They may be subjected to dew, dripping water and to icing. They may also be
subjected to limited wind–driven precipitation including snow;
– where mould growth or attacks by animals, except termites, may occur;
over the whole area, ad/or with heavy traffic;
– in areas with sources of sand or dust, including urban areas;
– with vibration of low significance and insignificant shock.
The conditions of this class may occur in:

– unattended buildings;
– some entrances of buildings;
– some garages and shacks.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 168. Climatogram for Class 1.2: not temperature controlled storage location
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 337 / 514
514
6.7.6 Transportation
Compliant with ETS 300 019 Class 2.3

The equipment meets the following requirements vs. transportation:

ETS 300 019–1–1 : 1992, class 2.2
Class 2.2 Careful transportation.
This class applies to transportation where special care has been taken e.g. with respect to low temperature
and handling.
Class 2.2 covers the condition of class 2.1. In addition class 2.2 includes transportation in all types of lorries
and trailers in areas with well–developed road system.
It also includes transportation by ship and by train with specially designed, shock–reducing buffers.
Manual loading and unloading of up to 20 Kg is included.
Extreme low temperature protection during transportation is permitted for equipment in its standard
packing:
At –40° C for 72 Hours maximum
without damaging the Optical interfaces.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 338 / 514
514
6.8 Optical Safety
N.B. This paragraph applies to LHR system only.

As far as OPTINEX Rack and 1650SM–C are concerned, please refer to relevant Technical
Documentation (para.18.2.2 on page 471).

6.8.1 Related Units
This description is relevant only to LHR regenerator system. As far as 1650SM–C equipment,
please refer to the relevant Technical Documentation (para.18.2.2 on page 471)
The Optical Safety characteristics and related precautions to avoid possible exposure to hazardous laser
radiation given herein, are relevant to the optical modules that can be housed on the equipment units with
STM–1 interfaces:
– in LHR system: RRA–CHANNEL and RRA–STANDBY units.
6.8.2 Hazard Level classification
The HAZARD LEVEL classification of the different optical interfaces of LHR system is given in Tab. 58.
on page 339.
The hazard level was assigned in accordance with the requirements of IEC 60825–1 (1993) and IEC
60825–2 (1993).
Tab. 58. Hazard level classification of different optical interfaces
UNIT/PORT OPTICAL INTERFACE HAZARD LEVEL
STM–1 S–1.1 (short haul) 1
6.8.3 Incorporated laser sources characteristics
Output optical interfaces data: the wavelength and the maximum optical power at the output connector
of incorporated laser sources is given in para.6.4.3 on page 329.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 339 / 514
514
6.8.4 Labelling
The labels reproduced below are affixed during factory settings, except those (explanatory) concerning
the STM–1 ports. In this case the labels are placed in a plastic bag and provided together with the optical

module. The customer shall affix the label on the fibre protection cover of the involved card, depending

on the particular interface of the module (STM–1 port). In the following description it is specified when the
label shall be affixed by the customer.
[1] Standard label for all modules
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
The label is put on the fibre protection cover of all the involved card (see para.6.8.1 on page 339).
[2] Multilanguage Label Kit
The multilanguage label kit, for STM–1 ports, is placed in the same plastic bag provided together with
the module where explanatory labels (in English language), above mentioned, are put.
The multilanguage label kit contains a set of label that reproduce the same (explanatory) above
depicted in the following languages:
• Italian
• Francaise
• Spanish
• German
The customer, to its own discretion, may stick the labels with appropriate language upon the
pre–existing ones or, in case of STM–1 ports, directly on the fibre protection cover of the involved
card (see para.6.8.1 on page 339)
6.8.5 Aperture and fiber connectors
The locations of apertures and fibre connectors are reported on topographical drawings of units front view
and access cards front view:
– in para.3.6.4 on page 147 (RRA–CHANNEL unit)
– in para.3.6.5 on page 149 (RRA–STANDBY unit)
6.8.6 Engineering design features
In normal operating conditions, unless intentional manumission, the laser radiation is never accessible.
The laser beam is launched in optical fibre through an appropriate connector that totally shuts up the laser
radiation. Moreover a plastic cover is fitted upon optical connectors by means of screws.
In case of cable fibre break, to minimize exposure times, ALS procedure according to ITU–T G.958 Rec.
is implemented either on STM–1 ports.
ALS timing are not longer than maximum specified in G.958.
6.8.7 Safety instruction
The safety instructions for proper assembly, maintenance, and safe use including clear warning
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
concerning precautions to avoid possible exposure to hazardous laser radiation, are reported in para.19.3
on page 484.
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 340 / 514
514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
Fig. 169. 9600 LSY BER curves (STM–1)
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
341 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
Fig. 170. 9600 LSY BER curves (STM–0)
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
342 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
Fig. 171. STM–1 128 QAM typical RF spectrum (measured at point C’)
343 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
Fig. 172. STM–1/STM–0 128 QAM IF RX Filter
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
344 / 514
TO BE DONE (future edition)
Fig. 173. Post demodulation filter STM–1
Fig. 174. Post demodulation filter STM–0
Fig. 175. STM–1 /STM–0 BER 1*10–3 and 1*10–6 threshold degradation for co–channel interference
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 345 / 514
514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
interference
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
Fig. 176. STM–1 BER 1*10–3 and1*10–6 threshold degradation for adjacent channel 40 MHz digital
346 / 514
Fig. 177. STM–1 BER 1*10–3 and 1*10–6 threshold degradation for adjacent channel 30 MHz digital
interference
Fig. 178. STM–0 BER 1*10–3 and 1*10–6 threshold degradation for adjacent channel 14 MHz digital
interference
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 347 / 514
514
STM1/128QAM BER = 1 x 10 –4

Mask for signature shape only
Fs=24.46 MHz ; T= 6.3 ns

Typical signature: DF = 25.4 MHz ; Bc = 22.7 dB (Kn = 0.49)
Guaranteed signature: Kn = 0.9
Fig. 179. Typical signature for STM–1 capacity @ BER=1 X 10 E–4

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 348 / 514
514
STM1/128QAM BER = 1 x 10 –6
Fs=24.46 MHz ; T= 6.3 ns

Typical signature: DF = 26 MHz ; Bc = 22 dB (Kn = 0.55)
Fig. 180. Typical signature for STM–1 capacity @ BER=1 X 10 E–6

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 349 / 514
514
STM0/128QAM BER = 1 x 10 –4

Fs=8.15 MHz ; T= 6.3 ns

Typical signature: DF = 8.2 MHz ; Bc = 31 dB (Kn = 0.55)
Fig. 181. Typical signature for STM–0 capacity @ BER=1x10e–4.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 350 / 514
514
STM0/128QAM BER = 1 x 10 –6
Fs=8.15 MHz ; T= 6.3 ns

Typical signature: DF = 8.2 MHz ; Bc = 29.3 dB (Kn = 0.65)
Fig. 182. Typical signature for STM–0 capacity @ BER=1x10e–6

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 351 / 514
514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
352 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
Chapter 7 – Maintenance
SECTION CONTENT
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
355
PAGE
MAINTENANCE
353 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
354 / 514
7 MAINTENANCE
7.1 Introduction
Maintenance consists of a set of operations which maintain or bring back the assembly to optimum
operating conditions in a very short time, with the aim of obtaining maximum operational availability.
Maintenance is classified as:
– ROUTINE (preventive)
– CORRECTIVE (troubleshooting and repair)
This chapter describes the routine and corrective maintenance of 9600LSY equipment in the LHR
configuration, and and is organized as follows:
– Warnings on page 356, including:

• EMC norms
• Safety rules
• Maintenance Personnel skill on page 357
– Instruments and accessories on page 357, including:

• Software tools on page 357
• System and Maintenance Tool Kits on page 358
– Alarm Description on page 361, including:

• Centralized Equipment Alarms on page 361
• Station Alarms (TRU) on page 363
• Unit alarms managed by System Controller (SYSCO) on page 363
• Alarm visual indications on units on page 363
• Summarizing / Housekeeping Alarms on page 364
– Set of spare parts on page 370, including:

• Suggested Spare Parts on page 370
• General rules on spare parts management on page 372
• Spare Flash Card management on page 372
– Routine Maintenance on page 373, including:

• Routine Maintenance every year on page 373
• Routine Maintenance for Fans Assembled Units on page 374
– Corrective Maintenance on page 375, including:

• General flow–chart on page 375
• Alarm acknowledgment and attending on page 376
• Trouble–Shooting on page 377
• Unit replacement on page 381
– Faulty unit repair and Repair Form on page 409

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 355 / 514
514
7.2 Warnings
7.2.1 EMC norms

ATTENTION EMC NORMS
WHEN CARRYING OUT THE GIVEN OPERATIONS OBSERVE THE NORMS STATED IN PARA.
19.4.3 ON PAGE 493
7.2.2 Safety rules
The Safety Rules stated in para.19.3 on page 484 thru 490 describe the operations and/or precautions
to observe to safeguard operating personnel during the working phases and to guarantee equipment
safety.
Please read them with accuracy before to start every action on the equipments.
SAFETY RULES
General
Carefully observe the front–panel warning labels prior to working on optical

connections while the equipment is in–service.
Should it be necessary to cut off power during the maintenance phase, proceed
to switch off the power supply units as well as cut off power station upstream
(rack or station distribution frame)
Electrical safety
DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Personal injury can be caused by

–48 V dc.
DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Short circuiting, low-voltage,

low-impedance, dc circuits can cause severe arcing that can result in burns
and/or eye damage. Remove rings, watches, and other metal jewelry before
working with primary circuits. Exercise caution to avoid shorting power input
terminals.
Optical safety
DANGER: Possibility of eyes damage: read carefully and strictly observe the
rules pointed out in para.19.3.4.2 on page 488.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 356 / 514
514
7.2.3 Maintenance Personnel skill
Maintenance Personnel must have been an adequate technical training on telecommunications.

Experience in maintenance activities is a must.
In particular, Maintenance Personnel must be familiar:
– with the equipment this handbook refers to
– and with the use of the Craft Terminal applications of the equipment this handbook refers to.
Without these prerequisites, reading this handbook and the associated handbooks indicated in para.18.2
on page 466 is usually not enough to properly maintain equipment.
7.3 Instruments and accessories
7.3.1 Software tools
There is a local terminal (PC–ECT) which permits to display all the alarms and manages the Equipment.
The relative processing is described in the relevant Craft Terminal Operator’s Handbook (see Tab. 79. on
page 468).
When a TMN is implemented, an Operation System will display alarms and manage all the connected
Equipment of the network. Refer to the relevant handbooks.
With reference to Fig. 67. on page 141:
– connection with the PC is achieved through connector (M3) available on the System Controller unit
– through connectors (J1) to (J3), the same unit can be connected to an Operations System associated
to the Transmission Management Network in order to execute operations similar to those carried out
by the PC.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 357 / 514
514
7.3.2 System and Maintenance Tool Kits
The following Tab. 59. lists the items contained in the LSY SYSTEM TOOL KIT (for P/N see REF.[40] in
Tab. 13. on page 122). Drawings and descriptions are given for special items.

Tab. 59. LSY System Tool Kit
ITEMS FACTORY P/N NOTES
BAGS
Tool bag 810.704.305 W
Maintenance Tool bag 870.704.306 X
STANDARD TOOLS & MISCELLANEOUS
Fixed spanner 8 x 10 870.952.110 J
Fixed spanner 6 x 1 870.952.106 K
Fixed spanner 12 x 13 870.952.119 P
Screwdriver 3 x 100 870.959.130 V
Screwdriver 3.5 x 100 870.959.140 F
Screwdriver 5.5 x 200 870.959.166 V
Crosshead Screwdriver 3 x 60 870.959.530 W
Crosshead Screwdriver 4.5 x 80 870.959.540 G
Crosshead Screwdriver 4.5 x 250 870.959.565 V
Socket wrench 870.952.800 X
Socket wrench 870.952.995 E
Special screwdriver 870.959.815 Q
Torque wrench 870.952.302 X
Insulating plug with pliers 041.720.010 B
COMPONENTS OF ANTISTATIC WRIST–BAND
Antistatic wrist–band 041.172.011 Y
Antistatic applications cord 041.911.001 U see Fig. 230.
Plug with crocodile pliers 041.172.010 B on page 494
Female button termination 248.501.099 Y
SPECIAL EXTRACTORS
Cables 1.0/2.3 extractor 245.701.842 S
see Fig. 184.
Electrical/Optical module extractor 241.901.305 V
on page 360
Extractors holder bracket 241.901.306 W
LABELS
Label for code–bar 268.001.431 K
Label for code–bar 268.001.702 G
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 358 / 514
514
The following Tab. 60. lists the items contained in the LSY MAINTENANCE TOOL KIT (for P/N see
REF.[41] in Tab. 13. on page 122). Drawings and descriptions are given for special items.
Tab. 60. LSY Maintenance Tool Kit

ITEMS FACTORY P/N NOTES

BAGS
Maintenance Tool bag 870.704.306 X
75ohm Transition 018.860.001 N

Coax. transition75 plug–plug 018.860.002 P
Coax. transition 50 female N–male SMA 040.198.018 M
Coax. transition 75 male BNC–female1.6/5.6 040.198.103 Q
Coax. cord 041.962.184 T
Coax. cord 041.962.264 J
Coax. cord 041.962.276 N
Cord 041.997.010 X
Bipolar cord fitted with male connectors 049.911.081 U
see Fig. 183.
Special cord for PRx measurement 041.992.608 K
on page 359
SPECIAL EXTRACTORS
Cables 1.0/2.3 extractor 245.701.842 S see Fig. 184.
Electrical/Optical module extractor 241.901.305 V on page 360
LABELS
Label for code–bar 268.001.431 K
Label for code–bar 268.001.702 G
plug M1 or M2
in Fig. 89. on page 167
Fig. 183. Special cord for PRx measurement

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 359 / 514
514
Extractor for Electrical/Optical module Cables 1.0/2.3 extractor
and Fans Assembled Unit
Extractions holder bracket
Fig. 184. Special extractors and holder bracket

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 360 / 514
514
7.4 Alarm Description
7.4.1 Centralized Equipment Alarms

All the alarms detected on the units are collected and processed by the System Controller unit in
Baseband shelf which gives centralized optical indications by means of LEDs on its front coverplate.
Specifically (see Fig. 185. herebelow):
– Red LED URG (1): detection of an URGENT alarm
– Red LED NURG (2): detection of a NOT URGENT alarm
– Yellow LED ATTD (3): alarm condition ATTENDED (see para.7.4.1.1 herebelow)
– Yellow LED ABN (4): detection of an ABNORMAL operative condition.
– Yellow LED IND (5): detection of an INDICATIVE alarm
(1) OR of all URGENT alarms (red)

(2) OR of all NOT URGENT alarms (red)
(3) ATTENDED alarm (yellow)
(4) OR of all ABNORMAL conditions (yellow)
(5) OR of all INDICATIVE alarms (yellow)
(7) Lamp Test Pushbutton
(8) Alarm storing Pushbutton

(Attended)
(6) bicolor led:
– red on: Card failure alarm
– green flashing: SW download in progress
(internal or toward other boards)
– off: normal condition
Fig. 185. System Controller front view (particular)
N.B. On the Craft Terminal (C.T.) and on the Operation System (O.S). application the URGENT
(URG), NOT URGENT (NURG) and INDICATIVE alarm are named in a different way; the
relationship between this two terminologies is explained in Tab. 61. herebelow.
Tab. 61. Relationship between Alarm severity terminology displayed on C.T./O.S. and alarm severity
terminology used for the System Controller unit remote alarm connector pins.
Alarm severity terminology Alarm severity terminology used for SYSTEM

on C.T. and O.S. CONTROLLER UNIT remote alarm connector pins
CRITICAL or MAJOR URG , T*URG, T*RURG,
MINOR NURG, T*NURG, T*RNURG
WARNING INDICATIVE
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
INDETERMINATE (not used) ––
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 361 / 514
514
7.4.1.1 Alarm Attending
See Fig. 185. on page 361:

– the detected alarm condition can be stored through push–button (8) on the System Controller unit.

This operation will turn OFF the LEDs URG/NURG (1) (2) and will light up the yellow LED ATTD (3)
on the System Controller unit (Attended).
– a possible new alarm condition (following the Attending) will turn on the LEDs URG (1) or NURG (2).
– when the fault has been repaired, the yellow lamp (if the alarm had been attended) or the red ones
(if the alarm had not been attended and no further alarms had occurred in the mean time) will turn
off.
7.4.1.2 Relationship between Alarms and their severity (Urgent / Not Urgent)
See Tab. 63. on page 368.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 362 / 514
514
7.4.2 Station Alarms (TRU)
Some equipment alarms processed by the System Controller unit are carried to Baseband shelf’s
connector M184 and then lead by a cable to TRU’s connector M8 in order to switch on/off the TRU alarm
lamps.
The four alarm lamps on TRU are depicted in Fig. 186. herebelow.
RED (1)
RED (2)
YELLOW
GREEN
Fig. 186. Station Alarms on TRU
Their management is as follows:
– The RED (1) lamp is activated in case of urgent (URG) alarm and a relevant tele–alarm is released
(this last function is excludible).
– The RED (2) lamp is activated in case of non urgent (minor) alarm and a relevant tele–alarm is
released (this last function is excludible).
– The YELLOW lamp is lighted up in case of manual storing of alarm events (see para.7.4.1.1 on page
362). In this case the RED lamps are switched off to be ready to other new alarm indications. This
YELLOW lamp is lighted up in case of ABNORMAL condition, together with led (4) of System
Controller unit (see para.7.4.1 on page 361).
– The GREEN lamp is activated by the buzzer input. By presetting, it is possible to change this alarm
criteria and to drive the activation with the presence of the service voltage.
The signals sent to TRU are also available for Customer applications on other TRU’s connectors (see
para.4.7.7 on page 208 for connectors, connector pinout and signal description).
7.4.3 Unit alarms managed by System Controller (SYSCO)
All details of the alarms for each card and relevant indications are included in the ”Alarm status” procedure
in the Operator’s Handbook .
7.4.4 Alarm visual indications on units
Besides the LEDs of Centralized Equipment Alarms described in para.7.4.1 on page 361, some other
equipment units are provided with specific alarm LED on their front coverplate, indicating the failure of
the unit.
Tab. 65. on page 377 lists such LEDs and indicate their normal status (alarm absence).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 363 / 514
514
7.4.5 Summarizing / Housekeeping Alarms
Summarizing and Housekeeping alarms, processed by the System Controller unit, are made available to
Customer by means of relay contacts whose interface access is described in para.4.7.8 on page 208.

The following Tab. 62. gives the relationship among remote alarms, housekeeping outputs and alarm
primitives.
Tab. 63. on page 368 gives the relationship between Remote and Station Alarms.
Tab. 62. Relationship among remote alarms, housekeeping outputs and alarm primitives
Remote alarm Refer. Remote Alarm primitives
TOR ANDOR VBATT1 failure or VBATT2 failure
TAND ANDOR VBATT1 failure and VBATT2 failure
TUP GA2 SYSCO card fail or missing
URG GA4 or of all urgent alarms (severity = Major or Critical)
NURG GA5 or of all not urgent alarms (severity= Minor)
IND GA6 or of all indicative alarms (severity = Warning or
Indeterminate)
ABN GA7 or of all the abnormal conditions
TORC GA8 PSF1 or PSF2 card fail
TANC GA9 PSF1 and PSF2 card fail
Opt STM–1 GA or of the following alarms:
module fail/missing STM–1 Opt. X (X = 0,..,9) module fail
STM–1 Opt. X (X = 0,..,9) module missing
INT GA10 or of all the internal alarms
card fail, card missing,
equipment mismatch, RC unreachable,
battery fail/missing,
LAN alarm,
transmitter Failure, transmitter Degraded
software mismatch, software processing error,
housekeeping alarm, unconfigured equipment
FANS card fail/ GA12 or of the following alarms:
missing FANSL X (X = 1,2) card fail (ADM cooling)
FANSL X (X = 1,2) card fail (LHR cooling)
SERV card fail/ GA13 or of the following alarms:
missing Service card fail
Service card missing
TPH–DEV card fail
TPH–DEV card missing

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 364 / 514
514
RRA GA16 N+0: or of the following alarms :
card fail/missing RRA X (X = 0,..,9) card fail

RRA X (X = 0,..,9) card missing
N+1: or of the following alarms :
RRA X (X = 1,..,9) card fail
RRA X (X = 1,..,9) card missing
RRASBY 0 card fail
RRASBY 0 card missing
MD card fail/missing GA15 or of the following alarms :
MD X (X = 0,..,9) card fail
MD X (X = 0,..,9) card missing
TRI card fail/missing GA11 or of the following alarms :
TRI X (X = 1,..,10) card fail
TRI X (X = 1,..,10) card missing
LO Y (Y = 1,..,20) card fail
LO Y (Y = 1,..,20) card missing
RX Y (Y = 1,..,20) card fail
RX Y (Y = 1,..,20) card missing
HBER GA17 or of highBER of all channel X (X = 0,..,9)
LBER GA18 or of lowBER of all channel X (X = 0,..,9)
PSF1 card fail/ GA 40 or of the following alarms:
missing PSF1 card fail
PSF1 card missing
PSF2 card fail/ GA 41 or of the following alarms:
missing PSF2 card fail
PSF2 card missing
PSU GA 30 or of the following alarms:
card fail/missing PSU X (X=0,..,9) card fail,
PSU X (X=0,..,9) card missing
Second IF unit GA 42 or of the following alarms:
card fail/missing Second IF X.1 (X=0,..,9) module fail,
Second IF X.1 (X=0,..,9) module missing
Third IF unit GA 43 or of the following alarms:
card fail/missing Third IF X.2 (X=0,..,9) module fail,
Third IF X.2 (X=0,..,9) module missing

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 365 / 514
514
CHX_affect CH0 = GA 20 or of all alarms related to channels X (from 0 to 9) and

(X = 0,..,9) CH1 = GA 21 affecting the traffic:
CH2 = GA 22 equipment alarms:
CH3 = GA 23 RRA X card fail
CH4 = GA 24 RRA X card missing
CH5 = GA 25 STM–1 Opt. X card fail
CH6 = GA 26 STM–1 Opt. X card missing
CH7 = GA 27 MD X card fail
CH8 = G A28 MD X card missing
CH9 = GA 29 Second IF (X.1) card fail
Second IF (X.1) card missing
Third IF (X.2) card fail
Third IF (X.2) card missing
TRI X card fail
TRI X card missing
LO X.Y (Y = 1, 2) card fail
LO X.Y (Y = 1, 2) card missing
RX X card fail
RX X card missing
PSU X card fail
PSU X card missing
sfwrEnvironmentProblem (RRA X, MD X, TRI X)
communication alarms:
LOS (STM–1 Opt. X)
LOF (STM–1 Opt. X)
transmitterFailure (STM–1 Opt. X)
transmitterDegraded (STM–1 Opt. X)
LOF (RRA X, rsCTPBid line/radio side)
modulationFail (MD X)
modLOS (MD X)
demodulationFail (MD X)
demLOS (MD X)
rxFail (RX X)
txLOS (TRI X)
txFail (TRI X)
incompatibleTxPower (TRI X)
LOF (RRA X, radioSPITTPBidR1)
HBER (MD X)
LBER (MD X)
TIM (RRA X)
RCIM (RRA X)
atpcLoop (RRA X)
atpcIdentifierMismatch (RRA X)
rxDivFail (RX Div. X)
demDivLOS (Second IF X.1)
demXpicLOS (Second or Third IF X.1 or X.2)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 366 / 514
514
CHX on protection CH1 = GA 31 for each channel, it will indicate if the switch is on protecting
(X = 1,..,9) CH2 = GA 32 channel (in the N+1 configuration only one channel can be on
CH3 = GA 33 protection)
CH4 = GA 34
CH5 = GA 35
CH6 = GA 36
CH7 = GA 37
CH8 = GA 38
CH9 = GA 39
end of Tab. 62.
N.B. Concerning the management of the remote alarms for 1+1 configuration, only the alarms raised
by the boards of the allowed channels have to be considered.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 367 / 514
514
Tab. 63. Relationship between Remote and Station Alarms
N.B. For the alarm meaning refer to Tab. 62. on page 364
Consequent Remote

Remote Alarm Station Alarm

Alarms
TOR
TOR HW NURG SW HW
RNURG
TAND HW URG HW RURG HW
URG
TUP HW HW RURG HW
INT
URG SW RURG SW
NURG SW RNURG SW
IND SW
ABN SW ABN SW
NURG
TORC SW SW RNURG SW
INT
URG
TANC HW HW RURG HW
INT
Opt. STM–1 URG/NURG/IND RURG/
SW SW SW
module fail/missing INT (note 1) RNURG
INT SW
FANS URG/NURG/IND RURG/
SW SW SW
card fail INT RNURG
SERV URG/NURG/IND RURG/
SW SW SW
card fail/missing INT RNURG
RRA URG/NURG/IND RURG/
SW SW SW
card fail/missing INT (note 1) RNURG
MD URG/NURG/IND RURG/
SW SW SW
Second IF unit URG/NURG/IND RURG/
SW SW SW
Third IF unit URG/NURG/IND RURG/
SW SW SW
TRI URG/NURG/IND RURG/
SW SW SW
PSF1 URG/NURG/IND RURG/
SW SW SW
PSF2 URG/NURG/IND RURG/
SW SW SW
RURG/
HBER SW URG/NURG/IND SW SW
RNURG
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 368 / 514
514
RURG/
LBER SW URG/NURG/IND SW SW
RNURG
CHX_affect
SW
(X=0..9)
CHX on protection
SW
(X=1..9)
end of Tab. 63.
(note 1) A CHX_affect consequent remote alarm is generated according to the channel affected by the
primary alarm.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 369 / 514
514
7.5 Set of spare parts
7.5.1 Suggested Spare Parts

The overall number of spares depends on Customer requirements, and should be based on the average

amount of transmission circuits available to be accounted for not only during MTBF but also during MTTR;
the latter depending on the amount of spare parts available.
The set of spare parts is inclusive of a minimum number of spares for each type of replaceable plug–in
unit, as detailed in following:
– para.7.5.1.1 herebelow (all units, with exception of Transceivers)
– para.7.5.1.2 on page 371 (Transceivers)
N.B. The unit replacement procedures described in paragraph Corrective Maintenance in this
chapter presume that the units present in the spare–part stock correspond exactly to the plug–in
replaceable units that are equipped in the system, i.e.:
– with the same Part Numbers
– and including the same baby–boards (with the same Part Numbers)1.
with the aim of speeding–up the corrective maintenance and to avoid complex unit manipulation
(baby board mounting/dismounting on/from the main board) which could result in unit and/or
baby–board damage.
7.5.1.1 All units, with exception of Transceivers
Tab. 64. Spare parts list

DETAILS FOR P/Ns
UNIT BABY BOARDS AND
EQUIPPING RULES
FANS ASSEMBLED Tab. 29. on page 169
SYSCO N.B.1
FLASH CARD (see para.7.5.3 page 372)
ADDITIONAL VOICE
SERVICE Tab. 18. on page 136
(optional)
RRA – CHANNEL
RRA – STAND–BY (if used) Tab. 19. on page 137
OPTICAL MODULE (if used)
1 or 2 CANC–COMB
MODEM (STM–0 or STM–1) Tab. 20. on page 138
(STM–0 or STM–1) (optional)
PSU Tab. 21. on page 138
PSF Tab. 23. on page 139
ADDITIONAL HOUSEKEEPING (if used) Tab. 17. on page 136
N.B.1 As spare part, SYSCO is shipped from factory always with its subunit ESCON already mounted.
Customer is never allowed to dismount it from the main board. Conversely, the SYSCO spare
part is usually shipped from factory without the Flash Card, that is available as individual item.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
1. a policy is under study to supply Customers with spare units already equipped with baby boards,
according to Customer’s System configuration.
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 370 / 514
514
7.5.1.2 Transceivers
Please refer to para.3.7.3 on page 157 for the detailed description of the Transceiver composition in the
various possible configurations.
a) Spare Transceiver subassembly

Fig. 194. on page 396 shows the Transceiver assembly supplied as spare part. The assembly is
shown with the cover plate removed (see Fig. 80. on page 158).
There are two possibilities:
1) Transceiver + Main Receiver
This assembly includes the following components:
– standard components:
• Transceiver box with covers (see Fig. 80. on page 158)
• RT control
• Amplifier
• Up Converter
• Delay Line
• DC/DC Converter
The P/N of this assembly is frequency dependent.
– Main Receiver
The P/N of this component is frequency dependent.
2) Transceiver only
This assembly includes the standard components cited above, but does not contain the Main
Receiver, whose spare must be provisioned as individual item (see point c ) herebelow).
This assembly (Transceiver + Main Receiver or Transceiver only does not include the following
subcomponents:
– RX Local Oscillator
see point b ) herebelow
– TX Local Oscillator
– Diversity Receiver see point c ) herebelow
– Frequency Reuse kit module see point d ) herebelow
b) Spare Local Oscillator subassembly

Fig. 191. on page 390 shows the Local Oscillator subassembly supplied as spare part.
c) Spare Main and Diversity Receiver subassembly
The Main Receiver subassembly is necessary as spare part in the case the spare Transceiver
subassembly is supplied without the Main Receiver already assembled inside.
The Diversity Receiver subassembly is necessary as spare part only in Diversity configurations.
Fig. 192. on page 392 shows the Receiver subassembly supplied as spare part.
d) Spare Frequency Reuse kit module subassembly
This spare is necessary only in Frequency Reuse configurations.
Fig. 193. on page 395 shows the Frequency Reuse kit module subassembly supplied as spare part.
The P/N of this component is frequency independent.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 371 / 514
514
7.5.2 General rules on spare parts management
Before storing the spare units make sure that they are working by inserting them in an operating equipment

It is suggested to periodically check those spare units that have not been utilized for over a year.

If the spare parts and the equipment are stored in the same environment, make sure that the spare parts
are placed in cabinets to safeguard them from dust and damp.
Moreover, they should also be well grounded to avoid electrostatic discharges.
If the spare parts are stored in another room, or have to be moved from another place, building or site,
make sure that the following is observed:
– the spare parts must be wrapped in anti–static and padded envelopes;
– the spare parts must not touch wet surfaces or chemical agents that might damage them (e.g. gas);
– if during transportation the temperature is lower than that of the room where they had been kept,
make sure that before using them they pass a certain period in a climatic chamber to prevent thermal
shocks and/or the possibility of steaming up.
When replacing a unit/sub–unit, make sure that the spare unit/sub–unit is set exactly as the
replaced one.
7.5.3 Spare Flash Card management
Please refer to para.5.2.7 on page 280 for the Flash Card description.
The Flash Card supplied as spare part is empty (i.e. without SW) and must be left ’as it is’ for its possible
use as spare part.
ATTENTION

Do not use a Flash Card already loaded with SW as spare part, unless you use the specific
instructions given in the Operator’s Handbook (that include the Flash Card reset and the SW
download through SIBDL application).
You must be aware that if a Flash Card with a SWP (different from that running in the system) is
inserted ’as it is’ in the System Controller (and the System Controller is inserted in its shelf’s slot),
the software download will be automatically carried out from the Flash Card toward the System’s EC,
RC and SUs, thus causing a complete system crash.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 372 / 514
514
7.6 Routine Maintenance
Routine maintenance is a periodic set of measurements and checks. This maintenance discovers those
devices whose function has deteriorated with time and therefore need adjustment or replacement.
Typically, digital equipment requires no routine maintenance.

The equipment allows to assess the quality of the connection links or counting the errored events and
obtaining performance data.
The Performance Monitoring Application, described in the Operator’s Handbook, allows this function.
7.6.1 Routine Maintenance every year
It is suggested to carry out the following operations yearly:
[1] Mechanical checks

Check that:
• the power supply units,
• the coaxial cables,
• the waveguides,
• the mounting fixtures
are connected correctly.
[2] Grounding check

Check that the racks, subracks, and modules are grounded.
[3] Power cables check
SAFETY RULES
DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Personal injury can be caused by

–48 V dc.
DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Short circuiting, low-voltage,

low-impedance, dc circuits can cause severe arcing that can result in burns
and/or eye damage. Remove rings, watches, and other metal jewelry before
working with primary circuits. Exercise caution to avoid shorting power input
terminals.
Make these operations:
• Check that the power cable is perfectly safety grounded.
• Make sure that the subrack has been tightly fastened to the rack with screws, to guarantee
grounding (the rack is connected to the station ground).
[4] Operative checks
• Visual check:
– During the normal operation, check the led normal condition, as specified in Tab. 65. on
page 377
• Check of the following functions:

– Automatic switches
– Alarms
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 373 / 514
514
[5] Software checks
Use the Craft Terminal to check the system status (see the Operator Handbook). Access the
reference Network Element, select HISTORY DISPLAY, read the alarm history memory, the statuses,
and forcings.

7.6.2 Routine Maintenance for Fans Assembled Units
The MTBF of the Fans Assembled Unit equipped below BaseBand shelf (and, if equipped, below
1650SM–C shelf) is about 20 years, provided that Environmental Conditions regarding sand and dust are
in the limits specified by Recc.ETS 300 019 Class 3.1 (see point 6.7.2 on page 333). Even though the
operating environment is compliant with these limits, it is suggested to carry out the following operation
every three years:
– pull out Fans Assembled Unit and clean fans removing dust and sand.
In the case of worse environmental conditions, perform this operation more frequently.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 374 / 514
514
7.7 Corrective Maintenance
If not yet done, please read N.B. on page 370.

7.7.1 General flow–chart

START
Alarm acknowledgment and attending

(para.7.7.2 page 376)
Trouble–Shooting starting with visual indications

(para.7.7.3.1 page 377)
Other measures
Trouble–Shooting starting via Craft Terminal

(para.7.7.3.2 page 379).
Identification of a unit to be replaced.
Unit replacement
(para.7.7.4 page 381).
System check via Craft Terminal
try again with N

Fault repaired ?
another unit
Y
If possible, restore replaced unit in the system
and perform system check via Craft Terminal,
to verify that is really faulty
possible intermittent N
fixed fault ?
failure
Y
Restore spare part in the system and perform
system check via Craft Terminal
Send back faulty unit to Repair Centre together

with Repair Form compiled (para.7.8 page 409)
END
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 187. Corrective Maintenance general flow–chart
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 375 / 514
514
7.7.2 Alarm acknowledgment and attending
The need for Operator intervention is notified:

– locally (in front of the equipment or in the station):

• when the URG/NURG/IND/ABN LED alarm on SYSCO unit lights up (see para.7.4.1 on page
361)
• or the same alarms, propagated through the Station Alarms cable, operate the TRU lamps (see
para.7.4.2 on page 363) or similar remote device
• and/or when the alarm LEDs listed in Tab. 65. on page 377 are not in normal status.
– remotely (in a TMN maintenance center) when the OS acknowledges the presence of problems in
the station.
When the local Operator decides to manage the problem, he should carry out the alarm attending
operation (see para.7.4.1.1 on page 362). This operation has the scope to notify locally in the station and
remotely to the TMN maintenance center that a local operator is attending the problem.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 376 / 514
514
7.7.3 Trouble–Shooting
7.7.3.1 Trouble–Shooting starting with visual indications

Some problems may be localized looking the LEDs indicated in following Tab. 65. In any case, the
inspection through the Craft Terminal (if possible) is recommended before doing any unit replacement.
Refer to Fig. 188. on page 378 to carry out this procedure.
Tab. 65. Normal condition (no alarms) of LEDs on equipment’s units
TRU SHELF
NORMAL
UNIT FIGURE LED
STATUS
TRU Fig. 186. on page 363 all OFF
BASE BAND SHELF board area

NORMAL
UNIT FIGURE LED
STATUS
System Controller Fig. 185. on page 361 (6) bicolor OFF
Service Fig. 69. on page 145 (10) red OFF
RRA–CHANNEL and
Fig. 71. on page 148 (1) red OFF
RRA–STANDBY (0–9)
Modem (0–9) Fig. 75. on page 152 (1) red OFF
PSU (0–9) Fig. 76. on page 153 (2) green ON
PSF (0–1) Fig. 76. on page 153 (4) green ON
BASE BAND SHELF access area

NORMAL
UNIT FIGURE LED
STATUS
Additional Housekeeping Fig. 77. on page 154 (1) red OFF
TRANSCEIVER SHELF
NORMAL
UNIT FIGURE LED
STATUS
(1) green ON
Transceiver (0–9) Fig. 89. on page 167
(2) red OFF
FAN SHELF (0–1)

NORMAL
UNIT FIGURE LED
STATUS
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
FANS Assembled (0–1) Fig. 93. on page 172 (1) red OFF
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 377 / 514
514
Before starting this inspection, perform lamp test (para 3.6.2.1 page 142).
START
N Y

one or both PSF

green led off ?
N
any PSU green
verify circuit breakers on TRU
led off ? Y (see para.3.4 on page 128)
Y Y
PSU switch on ? problem solved?
N
N
PSU probably faulty PSF probably faulty
why ?
solve problem
Y SYSCO card fail on

(led (6) red)?
perform lamp test

(para 3.6.2.1 page 142)
N
OK ?
carry out procedure in Y

para.7.7.3.4 page 380
try login NE by Craft Terminal
N Y
login successful ?
carry out procedure in carry out procedure in

para.7.7.3.3 page 379 para.7.7.3.2 page 379
Fig. 188. Trouble–Shooting starting with visual indications

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 378 / 514
514
7.7.3.2 Trouble–Shooting via Craft Terminal
The 9600LSY LHR equipment has been designed to dialog with a Personal Computer (PC) in order to
service, activate and trouble–shoot the equipment.
The troubleshooting operating instructions and details of the alarms for each card and relevant
indications are included in the ”Alarm status” procedure in the Operator Handbook (section
Maintenance).
The operating instructions make it possible to identify the faulty unit for all assemblies of the system.
Having located the suspected faulty unit/module, replace it with a spare one (see para.7.7.4 on page 381).
7.7.3.3 Problems with the Craft Terminal
Whenever the login with the Craft Terminal does not work, proceed with the following checks:
– Restart the Craft Terminal (logout and switch off/on).
– With the Craft Terminal connected to the equipment F–interface, open the ’Alcatel Lower Layer
Manager’ screen (by clicking with the mouse pointer on the Alcatel symbol in the MS–Windows
menu bar). The fields to be verified in this screen are:
Port Physical OSI or

Logical
COM1 ON ON
– Verify that the CT port is effectively that connected by cable to equipment’s F interface
– If ’Physical’ is OFF, the problem can be due to:
• CT physical port faulty
• SYSCO’s F–interface port faulty
• the cable
If possible, verify the correct working of the Craft Terminal and of the CT–F interface cable using them
with another Alcatel equipment. If the problem persists also with it, solve the problem.
Otherwise, proceed with the SYSCO unit replacement, or perform steps indicated in para.7.7.3.4 on
page 380.
– If ’OSI/Logical’ is OFF, the problem can be due to:
• FLASH CARD missing on SYSCO unit (verify) or FLASH CARD/SYSCO faulty
• SAM’s Radio Controller section faulty or in abnormal condition.
Proceed with the SYSCO unit replacement, or perform steps indicated in para.7.7.3.4 on page 380.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 379 / 514
514
7.7.3.4 CARD FAIL red led on SYSCO Unit turned on
If the bicolor LED CARD FAIL on SYSCO unit is red–on (led (6) in Fig. 185. on page 361), (or it is off, but
lamp test does not work) and the Craft Terminal application:

– responds (login successful), proceed investigating the problems through the Craft Terminal
application
– does not respond (login unsuccessful):
1) push the RESET button on SYSCO unit (button (9) in Fig. 67. on page 141) and wait 3 minutes;
2) if, within 3 minutes, the Craft Terminal application responds, open the ”Alarm status” procedure
and proceed investigating the system state;
3) if, after 3 minutes, the Craft Terminal application does not respond, replace the SYSCO unit,
as described in para.7.7.4.4 on page 384;
4) if the problem persists also after the SYSCO unit replacement, the failure or content corruption
of the FLASH CARD must be suspected (a very extraordinary event); proceed with its
replacement, as indicated in para.7.7.4.5 on page 384.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 380 / 514
514
7.7.4 Unit replacement
7.7.4.1 Introduction
The general procedure is described in para.7.7.4.2 on page 382.

This procedure is fully applicable, without additional instructions, to the following types of units:
– SERVICE
– RRA–CHANNEL
– RRA–STANDBY
– PSF
– ADDITIONAL HOUSEKEEPING (taking into account its different housing and fixing by bolts, as
depicted in Fig. 77. on page 154).
Additional instructions/cautions are given for the following types of units:
– PSU , in para.7.7.4.3 on page 383
– SYSCO , in para.7.7.4.4 on page 384
– FLASH CARD (housed on SYSCO unit), in para.7.7.4.5 on page 384
– MODEM , in para.7.7.4.6 on page 385
– TRANSCEIVER
Two cases must be distinguished:
• a spare Transceiver already assembled is available, fully equipped with internal parts exactly
equal (types and P/Ns) to those of the Transceiver unit to be replaced; in this case proceed as
specified in para.7.7.4.7 on page 386.
• Transceiver components are available as individual spare parts, as explained in para.7.5.1.2

on page 371; in this case proceed as specified in para.7.7.4.8 on page 387.
– OPTICAL MODULE, in para.7.7.4.9 on page 407
– FANS ASSEMBLED , in para.7.7.4.10 on page 408
For the operative instructions and physical view of each board refer to the relevant paragraph of chapter
3 (list on page 121).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 381 / 514
514
7.7.4.2 General procedure
The replacement of a suspected faulty unit/module with one taken from the spare part stock must
be done in the following way:

1) get the spare from the spare part stock verifying that its P/N is equal to that of the unit/module
to be replaced (see para.7.5.2 on page 372 for cautions); do not touch the electronic
components.
If the unit to be replaced houses one or more baby–boards, verify that the spare part does really
have the same baby–boards as far as quantity and P/Ns (see Tab. 64. on page 370).
N.B. In the case of SYSCO unit, the P/Ns matching of the ESCON sub–unit is not
important.
2) disconnect all cables (and, before, protection cap, if present on the Optical module of RRA unit)
from the front plate. Suggestion: before doing it, if no labels are present on the cables, put labels
with writings to be able to reconnect them correctly;
N.B. to extract Cables 1.0/2.3, use the special extractor (see Fig. 184. on page 360)
3) to extract a plug–in board:
– wear the antistatic protection device kit (see Fig. 230. on page 494) and connect its
termination to a grounded structure
ATTENTION

this avoids the possible damage of the electronic devices for electrostatic discharges
– turn off the screws present into the extraction/insertion levers of the board
ATTENTION

this avoids the breakage of levers
– operate the levers to extract the board
4) only for RRA units: if the unit is equipped with Optical module to be recovered and mounted on
the spare part, extract it and mount it on the spare part (refer to para.7.7.4.9 on page 407 for
details)
5) unit hardware presetting:
– accessing the section Hardware setting documentation in this handbook, check if the
board has hardware settings:
• if no hardware settings are envisaged, go to next step 6 )
• if hardware settings are envisaged:

– locate the position of setting switches using the appropriate MSZZQ document
– set these switches on the spare part exactly as they are set on the unit to be
replaced
6) insert the spare plug–in board in the system operating the levers
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
7) now you could wear off the antistatic protection device kit
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 382 / 514
514
8) turn on the screws present into the extraction/insertion levers of the board
ATTENTION

The screw tightening torque for fixing the units to the subrack must be:
2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) " 10 %

Exceeding this value may result in screw breaking.
9) re–connect all cables (and, after, the protection cap, if were present on the Optical module of
RRA unit) on the front plate exactly as they were connected before the unit extraction.
10 ) wait some minutes (software download is usually carried out toward Supervisory Units)
N.B. software download is carried out only if the SW version present in the spare unit’s SU
is different from that present in the FLASH CARD.
11 ) check the system status by LED visual inspection and through the Craft Terminal.
7.7.4.3 PSU replacement procedure
Instructions in addition to those given in para.7.7.4.2 on page 382:
1) as step 1 ) on page 382
2) turn off (position ’O’ ) the switch on the PSU unit front panel (see Fig. 76. on page 153):
– of the spare PSU unit

– and of the PSU unit to be replaced
ATTENTION

For the high current absorbed by the unit, its extraction/insertion with its switch in open position
could produce electrical arcs that would result in the damage of both the unit’s and backpanel’s
connectors.
3) as steps 2 ) to 3 ) and 6 ) to 9 ) on page 382–383
4) turn on (position ’I’ ) the switch on the new PSU unit front panel (see Fig. 76. on page 153)
5) as steps 10 ) to 11 ) on page 383.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 383 / 514
514
7.7.4.4 SYSCO replacement procedure

1) as steps 1 ) to 3 ) on page 382

2) extract the FLASH CARD from unit SYSCO (see Fig. 65. on page 140)
3) unit hardware presetting:
– accessing the section Hardware setting documentation in this handbook, get the
relevant MSZZQ documents
– get the spare unit SYSCO and, using the above said documents to locate switches:
a) set the dip–switches on ESCON subunit exactly as those of the replaced unit
ATTENTION

These dip–switches must be usually in OFF position. If unproperly set, these dip–switches
will reset the FLASH CARD content, and you will loose all the software herein contained
(programs and system configuration data)
b) set the dip–switches on SYSCO main board exactly as those of the replaced unit
ATTENTION

some of these dip–switches (that define the system configuration), if unproperly set, will
cause system malfunction even though hardware is not faulty. Care must also be taken
to switch defining service battery voltage
4) re–insert the FLASH CARD into the spare unit SYSCO (in case of doubts see Fig. 66. on page
140)
5) as steps 6 ) to 10 ) on page 382–383

6) check the system status by LED visual inspection
After the unit insertion, you should wait about 10 minutes for the completion of software
download from FLASH CARD toward SC, RC and SU (N.B.); this phase is notified by bicolor
LED red–flashing condition (led (6) in Fig. 67. on page 141). At the end, all red LEDs on SYSCO
unit should be off.
N.B. software download is carried out only if the SW version present in the spare unit’s SC,
RC and SU, is different from that present in the FLASH CARD.
7) connect Craft Terminal and check the system status by its Alarm application.
7.7.4.5 FLASH CARD replacement procedure
The need for this replacement is described in para.7.7.3.4 on page 380.
The FLASH CARD contains all system software.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Its replacement with an empty spare FLASH CARD (see para.7.5.3 on page 372) must be done
following the specific instructions given in the C.T. Operator’s Handbook.
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 384 / 514
514
7.7.4.6 MODEM replacement procedure


2) turn off (position ’O’ ) the switch on the PSU unit front panel (see Fig. 76. on page 153) of the
PSU corresponding to the MODEM unit to be replaced, i.e.:
– PSU–0 for MD–0
– ....
according to following Fig. 189.
ATTENTION

The successive insertion of the spare MODEM must be done without voltage at its connector
on the backplane. Only the powering on of the MODEM already plugged–in guarantees the
correct start–up powering timing. If you insert the MODEM with its PSU switched on, you run
the risk of having subsequent indeterminate (and in some case unrecoverable) unit states.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
S S R R R R R R M R M R M R M R M
M M M M M
Y E R R R R R R D R D R D R D R D
D D D D D
S R A A A A A A 5 A 6 A 7 A 8 A 9
0 1 2 3 4
C V 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
O
1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
Fig. 189. PSU to be switched off/on for MODEM replacement
4) turn on (position ’I’ ) the switch on the PSU unit previously switched off

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 385 / 514
514
7.7.4.7 TRANSCEIVER replacement procedure
N.B. This procedure can be followed if a spare Transceiver is available, fully equipped with
internal parts exactly equal (types and P/Ns) to those of the Transceiver unit to be

replaced.

2) turn off (position ’O’ ) the switch on the TRANSCEIVER unit front panel (pos. (I1) in Fig. 89. on
page 167):
– of the spare TRANSCEIVER unit

– and of the TRANSCEIVER unit to be replaced
ATTENTION

For the high current absorbed by the unit, its extraction/insertion with its switch in open position
could produce electrical arcs that would result in the damage of both the unit’s and backpanel’s
connectors.
N.B. It is suggested to verify the correspondence between the spare unit with that to be
replaced as follows:
a) put both Transceivers on a work bench
b) wear the antistatic protection device kit (see Fig. 230. on page 494) and connect its
termination to a grounded structure
ATTENTION

c) remove COVERPLATE “A” of both transceivers (see Fig. 80. on page 158). Store tidely
cover and screws for successive mounting
d) compare internal composition of transceivers (same types and same P/Ns)
e) verify that dip–switches of spare unit are set as those of the replaced unit (see Fig. 85. on
page 161); if different, correct setting of spare unit
f) restore COVERPLATE “A” of both transceivers
ATTENTION

The screw tightening torque for fixing the coverplate to the unit must be:
2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) " 10 %

Exceeding this value may result in screw breaking or unit damage.
4) turn on (position ’I’ ) the switch on the new TRANSCEIVER unit front panel (pos. (I1) in
Fig. 89. on page 167)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 386 / 514
514
7.7.4.8 TRANSCEIVER repair and replacement procedure
N.B. This procedure must be followed if Transceiver components are available as individual
spare parts, as explained in para.7.5.1.2 on page 371.
CONVENTIONS
In the following Fig. 194. thru’ Fig. 201. the following conventions have been applied:
• connectors and cables: each connector is denoted by a number and letter (e.g. 11A); the two
ends of a cable have the same number (e.g. 11A and 11B are the two connectors of the same
cable); all cables are two–connector cables, with the exception of connector depicted in
The instructions given in the following for the replacement of internal components require that
you consult the correct internal cabling diagram, that depends on the configuration:
Tab. 66. Transceiver internal cabling diagram according to configuration

FREQUENCY REUSE
DIVERSITY INTERNAL CABLING DIAGRAM
USAGE TR HOUSING
N –– Fig. 196. on page 403

N LO MASTER Fig. 198. on page 405
Y
LO SLAVE Fig. 200. on page 406
N –– Fig. 197. on page 404
Y LO MASTER Fig. 199. on page 405
Y
LO SLAVE Fig. 197. on page 404
• the letter ’T’ indicates a screw metallic tap on an unused SMA connector.
ATTENTION: CAUTIONS TO AVOID EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
The following rules must be strictly followed:

a) Operator skills
For the operations described hereafter, repair Operator must have deep knowledge
and experience of electronic repair through subcomponents replacement.
b) Protection against electrostatic discharges
During operations described hereafter, repair Operator must always wear the
antistatic protection device kit (see Fig. 230. on page 494) and connect its
termination to a grounded structure.
c) The screw tightening torque for fixing the subcomponents to the unit must be:
2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) " 10 %

Exceeding this value may result in screw breaking or unit damage.
d) The SMA connector tightening torque for fixing coaxial cables to the
subcomponents must be:
8–12 kg x cm (0.8 – 1.2 Newton x m)

Exceeding this value may result in subcomponent’s connector breaking.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
e) Coaxial cable handling

Coaxial cables should be handled carefully avoiding any excessive bending which
could compromise their functionality.
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 387 / 514
514
GENERAL FLOW CHART
a ) Start of procedure (page 389):

– Faulty Transceiver extraction from shelf

– Faulty Transceiver opening
Replacement of
b ) Rx or Tx Local Oscillator (page 390)
c ) Diversity Receiver (page 392)
d ) Main Receiver (page 394)
e ) Frequency Reuse kit module (page 395)
f ) Transceiver + Main Receiver (page 396)
g ) Transceiver (page 401)
h ) End of procedure (page 402):

– Repaired Transceiver preparing for insertion in shelf
– Repaired Transceiver insertion in shelf and functional checks
Fig. 190. General flow chart of Transceiver repair procedure

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 388 / 514
514
a) Start of procedure
Proceed as follows:
FAULTY TRANSCEIVER EXTRACTION FROM SHELF
1) on the TRANSCEIVER unit to be replaced, turn off (position ’O’ ) the switch on the
unit front panel (pos. (I1) in Fig. 89. on page 167)
ATTENTION

For the high current absorbed by the unit, its extraction with its switch in open position
could produce electrical arcs that would result in the damage of both the unit’s and
backpanel’s connectors.
2) as steps 2 ) and 3 ) on page 382
FAULTY TRANSCEIVER OPENING
3) put the Transceiver to be repaired on a work bench
4) remove COVERPLATE “A” (see Fig. 80. on page 158) of the Transceiver to be
repaired. Store tidely cover and screws for successive mounting.
NEXT STEP
5) the procedure proceeds according to the component to be replaced:
– Rx or Tx Local Oscillator go to step b ) on page 390
– Diversity Receiver go to step c ) on page 392
– Main Receiver go to step d ) on page 394
– Frequency Reuse kit module go to step e ) on page 395
– Transceiver + Main Receiver go to step f ) on page 396
– Transceiver go to step g ) on page 401

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 389 / 514
514
b) Replacement of Rx or Tx Local Oscillator
The spare subassembly is as in Fig. 191. herebelow.
CONNECTOR FOR FLAT CABLE (10B or 12B)

P/N and
Remote Inventory
SMA CONNECTORS
A1
A3
A2
MMCX CONNECTOR
Fig. 191. Spare Local Oscillator subassembly

N.B.
– A1, A2, A3 show the position of the three screws fixing the Local Oscillator to
the Transceiver.
– The SMA connectors are used differently according to the use as Rx or Tx LO
and according to the Transceiver configuration. SMA connectors are for
mounting coaxial cables by screwed connectors.
The unused SMA connectors must be closed by suitable metallic screw taps.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
– MMCX connector is used to house a cable connector that is inserted/extracted

simply pushing into or pulling out.
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 390 / 514
514
Proceed as follows:
REFERENCE INTERNAL CABLING DIAGRAM
1) according to Tab. 66. on page 387, get the correct transceiver internal cabling
diagram according to configuration and use it as reference for successive steps
CHOICE OF UNIT TO REPLACE
2) verify which LO must be replaced (Rx or Tx). Operate on that, in the following steps
FAULTY UNIT EXTRACTION
3) turn off cable’s connectors present on LO’s SMA connectors (but, do not dismount
metallic screw taps present on unconnected SMA connectors)
4) pull out cable from MMCX connector
5) pull out flat cable from suitable connector
6) turn off screws A1, A2, A3 and extract the LO; store tidely screws for successive
mounting
SPARE UNIT PREPARATION
7) get the spare LO from the spare part stock verifying that its P/N is equal to that of the
component to be replaced (see para.7.5.2 on page 372 for cautions); do not touch
the electronic components.
N.B. Rx and Tx Local Oscillators must have the same P/N
8) dismount the metallic screw taps present on SMA connectors of faulty LO and mount
them on the same SMA connectors of the spare LO
See point d ) on page 387 for tightening torque
SPARE UNIT INSERTION
9) position spare LO inside transceiver and fix it through screws A1, A2, A3
10 ) push flat cable into LO’s suitable connector
11 ) push cable into MMCX connector (there is a locked position)
12 ) turn on cable’s connectors on LO’s SMA connectors

NEXT STEP
13 ) go to step h ) on page 402

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 391 / 514
514
c) Replacement of Diversity Receiver
SMA CONNECTOR CONNECTOR FOR FLAT CABLE

A1 A2 A3
A4 A5 A6
A7 A8 A9
P/N and
Remote Inventory
Fig. 192. Spare Receiver subassembly
N.B.
– A1 to A9 show the position of the three screws fixing the Diversity Receiver
to the “PLATE COVERING MAIN RECEIVER”
– The SMA connector is for mounting coaxial cable by screwed connector.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 392 / 514
514
Proceed as follows:
2) turn off cable’s connector present on Diversity Receiver’s SMA connector (6A)
3) pull out flat cable from suitable connector (7A)
4) turn off screws A1 ... A9 and extract the Diversity Receiver; store tidely screws for
successive mounting
5) get the spare Receiver from the spare part stock verifying that its P/N is equal to that
of the component to be replaced (see para.7.5.2 on page 372 for cautions); do not
touch the electronic components.
6) position spare Receiver inside transceiver and fix it through screws A1 ... A9
7) push flat cable into Receiver’s suitable connector (7A)
8) turn on cable’s connectors on Receiver’s SMA connector (6A)

NEXT STEP
9) go to step h ) on page 402

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 393 / 514
514
d) Replacement of Main Receiver
The spare subassembly is as in Fig. 192. on page 392.
Proceed as follows:


EXTRACTION OF DIVERSITY RECEIVER (if equipped)
2) turn off cable’s connector present on Diversity Receiver’s SMA connector (6A)
3) pull out flat cable from suitable connector (7A)
4) turn off screws A1 ... A9 and extract the Diversity Receiver; store tidely the Diversity
Receiver and its screws for successive mounting
FAULTY MAIN RECEIVER EXTRACTION
5) remove the plate covering main receiver (8 screws); store tidely cover and screws
for successive mounting
6) turn off cable’s connector present on Main Receiver’s SMA connector (4B)
7) pull out flat cable from Main Receiver’s suitable connector (5A)
8) turn off screws A1 ... A9 and extract the Main Receiver; store tidely screws for
successive mounting
SPARE MAIN RECEIVER PREPARATION
9) get the spare Receiver from the spare part stock verifying that its P/N is equal to that
N.B. Main Receiver and Diversity Receiver must have the same P/N
SPARE MAIN RECEIVER INSERTION
10 ) position spare Main Receiver inside transceiver and fix it through screws A1 ... A9
11 ) push flat cable into Main Receiver’s suitable connector (5A)
12 ) turn on cable’s connectors on Main Receiver’s SMA connector (4B)
13 ) position and fix the plate covering main receiver (8 screws)
INSERTION OF DIVERSITY RECEIVER (if equipped)
With reference to transceiver internal cabling diagram of step 1 ) above:
14 ) position Diversity Receiver inside transceiver and fix it through screws A1 ... A9
15 ) push flat cable into Diversity Receiver’s suitable connector (7A)
16 ) turn on cable’s connectors on Diversity Receiver’s SMA connector (6A)
NEXT STEP
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 394 / 514
514
e) Replacement of Frequency Reuse kit module
A1
P/N
CONNECTOR FOR
FLAT CABLE (10C)
A3
A2
SMA CONNECTOR (8B)
SMA CONNECTOR (9A)

A4
Fig. 193. Spare Frequency Reuse kit module subassembly
N.B.
– A1 to A4 show the position of the three screws fixing the Frequency Reuse kit
module to to the Transceiver
– The SMA connectors are for mounting coaxial cables by screwed connector.
Proceed as follows:

2) turn off cable’s connectors present on Frequency Reuse kit module’s SMA
connectors (8B and 9A)
3) pull out flat cable from suitable connector (10C)
4) turn off screws A1 .. A4 and extract the module; store tidely screws for successive
mounting
5) get the spare module from the spare part stock verifying that its P/N is equal to that
6) position spare module inside transceiver and fix it through screws A1 ... A4
7) push flat cable into module’s suitable connector (10C)
8) turn on cable’s connectors on module’s SMA connectors (8B and 9A)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
NEXT STEP
9) go to step h ) on page 402
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 395 / 514
514
f) Replacement of Transceiver + Main Receiver
1A 2A 4A* 3A*

MAIN RECEIVER PLATE COVERING 10B 12A 12B
MAIN RECEIVER 5B* 1B
(inside)
10A 2B
* For 3B, 4B and 5A see Fig. 196. on page 403
Fig. 194. Spare “Transceiver + Main Receiver” subassembly
This subassembly includes just the internal cabling necessary for the basic configuration
(i.e. without diversity and without frequency reuse); this internal cabling corresponds to
that depicted in Fig. 196. on page 403.
In few words, the procedure (that is detailed in the following) consists of:
• remotion from the faulty transceiver of the standard components:

– Rx and Tx Local Oscillators
• remotion from the faulty transceiver of the optional components, if equipped:

– Diversity Receiver and associated cabling
– Frequency Reuse kit module and associated cabling
• insertion into the spare transceiver and cabling of:

– the standard components
– and the optional components, if were equipped in the faulty transceiver
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 396 / 514
514
Proceed as follows:
PREPARATION OF SPARE “TRANSCEIVER + MAIN RECEIVER”
2) get the spare spare Transceiver + Main Receiver (Fig. 194. on page 396) from the
spare part stock verifying that its P/N is equal to that of the component to be replaced
(N.B.); see para.7.5.2 on page 372 for cautions; do not touch the electronic
components.
N.B. the P/N label position is shown in Fig. 80. on page 158. This P/N is just
that of the Transceiver only. If you wish to verify also the Main Receiver
P/N, you should dismount it and then remount as indicated here, with
reference to Fig. 196. on page 403:
• remove the plate covering main receiver (8 screws); store tidely cover and
screws for successive mounting
• turn off cable’s connector present on Main Receiver’s SMA connector (4B)
• pull out flat cable from Main Receiver’s suitable connector (5A)
• turn off screws A1 ... A9 and extract the Main Receiver; store tidely screws
• now you can check the Main Receiver P/N (see Fig. 192. on page 392)
• position Main Receiver inside transceiver and fix it through screws A1 ...
A9
• push flat cable into Main Receiver’s suitable connector (5A)
• turn on cable’s connectors on Main Receiver’s SMA connector (4B)
• position and fix the plate covering main receiver (8 screws)
3) remove spare Transceiver’s COVERPLATE “A” (see Fig. 80. on page 158). Store
tidely cover and screws for successive mounting.
4) accessing the section Hardware setting documentation in this handbook, locate

the position of setting switches using the appropriate MSZZQ document (the
dip–switch position is shown also in Fig. 85. on page 161) and set these switches
on the spare Transceiver exactly as they are set on the faulty Transceiver
REMOTION OF LOCAL OSCILLATORS FROM FAULTY TRANCEIVER
With reference to Fig. 191. on page 390 (LO drawing) and Fig. 196. on page 403
(transceiver standard internal cabling) operate on both Rx and Tx Local Oscillators as
follows:
5) turn off cable’s connectors present on LO’s SMA connectors (but, do not dismount
metallic screw taps present on unconnected SMA connectors)
6) pull out cable from MMCX connector
7) pull out flat cable from suitable connector
8) turn off screws A1, A2, A3 and extract the LO
9) store tidely Rx and Tx Local Oscillators and their screws for successive mounting
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
N.B. Distinguish Rx from Tx LOs, because the use of SMA connectors is

different from each other
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 397 / 514
514
REMOTION OF DIVERSITY RECEIVER FROM FAULTY TRANCEIVER (if equipped)
With reference to Fig. 192. on page 392 (Receiver drawing) and transceiver internal
cabling diagram of step 1 ) on page 397, operate on faulty Transceiver as follows:

10 ) DO NOT remove cable’s connector present on Diversity Receiver’s SMA connector
6A
11 ) DO NOT remove flat cable from connector 7A
12 ) turn off screws A1 ... A9 and extract the Diversity Receiver together with the flat
cable 7A–7B and the cable 6A–6B connected to it; store tidely the assembly and
screws for successive mounting
INSERTION OF DIVERSITY RECEIVER INTO SPARE “TRANSCEIVER + MAIN

RECEIVER” (if equipped)
With reference to Fig. 192. on page 392 (Receiver drawing) and transceiver internal
cabling diagram of step 1 ) on page 397, operate on spare Transceiver + Main Receiver
as follows:
13 ) position the Diversity Receiver (together with the flat cable 7A–7B and the cable
6A–6B connected to it) inside transceiver and fix it through screws A1 ... A9
14 ) position the flat cable 7A–7B and insert its connector 7B according to cabling diagram
15 ) position the cable 6A–6B according to cabling diagram

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 398 / 514
514
REMOTION OF FR KIT FROM FAULTY TRANCEIVER (if equipped)
With reference to Fig. 193. on page 395 (FR module drawing) and transceiver internal
cabling diagram of step 1 ) on page 397, operate on faulty Transceiver as follows:
16 ) DO NOT remove cable’s connectors present on Frequency Reuse kit module’s SMA
connector (8B and 9A)
17 ) pull out flat cable from connector10C
18 ) disconnect connector 8A from Transceiver’s front plate
19 ) turn off screws A1 .. A4 and extract the module together with cables 8B–8A and
9A–9B connected to it
20 ) extract the 3–connector flat cable 10A–10B–10C shown in Fig. 195. :
ÊÊÊÊ
ÊÊÊÊ ÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊ
ÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊÊ
ÊÊÊÊ 10C
10B 10A
Fig. 195. Spare Frequency Reuse kit 3–connector flat cable subassembly
21 ) if present (see Fig. 200. and Fig. 201. on page 406) disconnect connector 11A from
Transceiver’s front plate
22 ) store tidely for successive mounting:

– the module together with cables 8B–8A and 9A–9B connected to it
– its screws
– the flat cable 10A–10B–10C
– the cable 11A–11B (if equipped)
INSERTION OF FR KIT INTO SPARE “TRANSCEIVER + MAIN RECEIVER” (if equipped)
Operate on spare Transceiver + Main Receiver as follows:
23 ) With reference to Fig. 196. on page 403, remove flat cable 10A–10B (it is no longer
necessary)
24 ) With reference to transceiver internal cabling diagram of step 1 ) on page 397:
a) insert flat cable 10A–10B–10C on Transceiver’s connectors 10A and 10B and
position cable end 10C according to cabling diagram
b) if cable 11A–11B was equipped, mount its connector 11A on Transceiver’s front
plate and position cable end 11B according to cabling diagram
c) position module (together with cables 8B–8A and 9A–9B connected to it) inside
transceiver and fix it through screws A1 ... A4
d) push flat cable into module’s connector 10C
e) mount connector 8A on Transceiver’s front plate

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
f) position cable end 9B according to cabling diagram
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 399 / 514
514
INSERTION OF LOCAL OSCILLATORS INTO SPARE “TRANSCEIVER + MAIN
RECEIVER”
With reference to Fig. 191. on page 390 (LO drawing) and transceiver internal cabling

diagram of step 1 ) on page 397, mount the Rx and Tx Local Oscillators (previously

removed from faulty Transceiver) on the spare Transceiver + Main Receiver as follows:
N.B. Distinguish Rx from Tx LOs, because the use of SMA connectors is different
from each other
25 ) position LO inside transceiver and fix it through screws A1, A2, A3
26 ) push flat cable into LO’s suitable connector
27 ) push cable into MMCX connector (there is a locked position)
28 ) turn on cable’s connectors on LO’s SMA connectors

NEXT STEP

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 400 / 514
514
g) Replacement of Transceiver
The spare subassembly is similar to that shown in Fig. 194. on page 396. With respect to
it, the missing items are:
• the Main Receiver

• and the cables 4A–4B and 5B–5A that belong to the Receiver own part list
Proceed as follows:
PREPARATION OF SPARE TRANSCEIVER
REMOTION OF LOCAL OSCILLATORS FROM FAULTY TRANCEIVER
REMOTION OF DIVERSITY RECEIVER FROM FAULTY TRANCEIVER (if equipped)
REMOTION OF MAIN RECEIVER FROM FAULTY TRANCEIVER
With reference to Fig. 192. on page 392 (Receiver drawing) and and Fig. 196. on page
403 (transceiver standard internal cabling) operate on faulty Transceiver as follows:
5) remove the plate covering Main Receiver (8 screws); store tidely cover and screws
6) DO NOT remove cable’s connector present on Main Receiver’s SMA connector 4B
7) DO NOT remove flat cable from connector 5A
8) turn off screws A1 ... A9 and extract the Main Receiver together with the flat cable
5A–5B and the cable 4B–4A connected to it; store tidely the assembly and screws
9) restore the plate covering Main Receiver (8 screws)
INSERTION OF MAIN RECEIVER INTO SPARE TRANSCEIVER
With reference to Fig. 192. on page 392 (Receiver drawing) and and Fig. 196. on page
403 (transceiver standard internal cabling) operate on spare Transceiver as follows:
10 ) remove the plate covering Main Receiver (8 screws); store tidely cover and screws
11 ) position the Main Receiver (together with the flat cable 5A–5B and the cable 4B–4A
connected to it) inside transceiver and fix it through screws A1 ... A9
12 ) position the flat cable 5A–5B and insert its connector 5B according to cabling diagram
13 ) position the cable 4B–4A according to cabling diagram
14 ) restore the plate covering Main Receiver (8 screws)
NEXT STEPS
15 ) as steps 13 ) (page 398) thru’ 29 ) (page 400)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 401 / 514
514
h) End of procedure
Proceed as follows:
REPAIRED TRANSCEIVER PREPARING FOR INSERTION IN SHELF

1) restore COVERPLATE “A” of repaired Transceiver (see Fig. 80. on page 158)
2) verify that, on the repaired Transceiver’s front panel, the switch pos. (I1) in Fig. 89. on
page 167 is turned off (position ’O’ )
ATTENTION

For the high current absorbed by the unit, its insertion with its switch in open position
could produce electrical arcs that would result in the damage of both the unit’s and
backpanel’s connectors.
REPAIRED TRANSCEIVER INSERTION IN SHELF AND FUNCTIONAL CHECKS
4) turn on (position ’I’ ) the switch on the new TRANSCEIVER unit front panel (pos. (I1)
in Fig. 89. on page 167)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 402 / 514
514
WITHOUT DIVERSITY AND WITHOUT FREQUENCY REUSE
main receiver
T1 4A T3 T4 3A T6 T7
1A 2A T8
Rx LO Tx LO
4B 5A 5B 1B 10A 10B 2B 12A 12B

plate covering
main receiver
3B
Fig. 196. Transceiver internal connectors for repair 1/6

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 403 / 514
514
WITH DIVERSITY AND WITHOUT FREQUENCY REUSE
WITH DIVERSITY AND WITH FREQUENCY REUSE, RX LO SLAVE

T3
6B 4A* T4 T6 T7 T8
1A 2A 3A*
6A
Rx LO Tx LO
diversity receiver 1B
7A 2B
7B 10B 12B
5B*
10A 12A

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 404 / 514
514
WITHOUT DIVERSITY AND WITH FREQUENCY REUSE, RX LO MASTER
9A 10C 4A* 9B 3A*

8A 1A 2A T6 T7 T8
T1 T3
8B
Rx LO Tx LO
5B* 1B 10A 10B 2B 12A 12B

WITH DIVERSITY AND WITH FREQUENCY REUSE, RX LO MASTER

(differences with Fig. 198. above)
6B instead of T1
6A
Rx LO Tx LO
diversity receiver 7A 7B
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 405 / 514
514
WITHOUT DIVERSITY AND WITH FREQUENCY REUSE, RX LO SLAVE
11B

T1 4A* T4 T6 T7 T8

3A*

11A 1A 2A
Rx LO Tx LO
5B* 1B 10A 10B 2B 12A 12B

WITH DIVERSITY AND WITH FREQUENCY REUSE, RX LO SLAVE

(differences with Fig. 200. above)
6B instead of T1
6A
Rx LO Tx LO
diversity receiver 7A 7B
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 406 / 514
514
7.7.4.9 OPTICAL MODULE replacement procedure

N.B. In order to replace an Optical module without replacing the RRA unit housing it, it is not
necessary to extract the unit from the shelf.

2) disconnect cables from the module (and, before, the protection cap, if present on the Optical
module). Suggestion: before doing it, if no labels are present on the cables, put labels with
writings to be able to reconnect them correctly;
N.B. to extract Cables 1.0/2.3, use the special extractor (see Fig. 184. on page 360)
3) turn off the two screws fixing the module
4) extract the module
5) insert the spare module and fix it turning on the two screws
ATTENTION

The screw tightening torque for fixing the modules to the unit must be:
2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) " 10 %

6) re–connect cables to the module (and, after, fix the protection cap, if it was present on the
Optical module).

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 407 / 514
514
7.7.4.10 Fans Assembled Unit replacement in case of alarm
[1] Considerations about MINOR and MAJOR alarms

Whenever the alarm regarding Fans Assembled Unit arises, you should be aware of the following:

• the alarm can be:
– MINOR for the failure of one fan only of the unit;
– MAJOR for the failure of two, three or of all the fours fans of the unit;
• this condition should be considered in conjunction with:

– the rack–housing–room effective environmental temperature, taking into consideration
that the loss of all fans can produce an overtemperature of about 20 0C inside the rack;
– and the temperature limits specified in para.6.7.1 on page 333.
because an excessive internal temperature could decrease the equipment overall MTBF.
In conclusion:
• the Fans Assembled Unit MINOR alarm usually does not require an immediate intervention;
nevertheless, in case of alarm, it is suggested to carry out the unit replacement without waiting
a very long time.
• the Fans Assembled Unit MAJOR alarm requires an immediate intervention.
[2] Replacement procedure
2) Remove FANS SHELF’s front plate (see Fig. 92. on page 171) turning off the six screws
3) wear the antistatic protection device kit (see Fig. 230. on page 494) and connect its termination
to a grounded structure
ATTENTION

4) Extract the faulty FANS ASSEMBLED UNIT operating the suitable extractor (see Fig. 184. on
page 360) inside the unit’s suitable hole (see Fig. 93. on page 172)
5) Insert the spare FANS ASSEMBLED UNIT
6) now you could wear off the antistatic protection device kit
7) Restore FANS SHELF’s front plate (see Fig. 92. on page 171) turning on the six screws
ATTENTION

The screw tightening torque must be:
2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) " 10 %

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
8) check the system status by LED visual inspection and through the Craft Terminal.
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 408 / 514
514
7.8 Faulty unit repair and Repair Form
7.8.1 Faulty unit sending back to repair center

Faulty unit repair must be done by authorized repair centers only.
According to the policy (under study) described in footnote <1.> on page 370, the units with baby–boards
(see Tab. 64. on page 370) must be sent back to the repair center together with their baby–boards, without
dismounting them from the assembly.
7.8.2 Repair Form filling
To facilitate repair operation, data on the faulty unit must be reported on the form shown in Fig. 202. on
page 410.
The repair form must be filled–in with as much data as possible and returned to Alcatel together with the
faulty unit.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 409 / 514
514
ALCATE L
REPAIR FORM
Fill in this form and affix it to the faulty unit to be returned to Alcatel

CUSTOMER NAME ORDER NUMBER/CONTRACT NUMBER
SITE BRANCH/UNIT/COUNTRY
SYSTEM/EQUIPMENT PRODUCT RELEASE EQUIPMENT SOFTWARE PART NUMBER
STATION/RACK SUBRACK SLOT

TO BE FILLED IN BY THE SENDER
MNEMONIC ALCATEL PART NUMBER
SERIAL NUMBER FAULTY UNIT SOFTWARE VERSION
FAULT PHASE REASON FOR REPAIR PRESUMED CAUSE
INSTALLATION / CLEAR FAULT DROP IN PERFORMANCE INTERNAL

TURN ON
LIGHTNING
OPERATION INTERMITTENT FAULT UPGRADE/QUALITY ALERT
EXTERNAL AIR COND.
MAINTENANCE TEMPERATURE FAULT OTHER
DATE NAME OF SENDER

FAULT STILL PRESENT
AFTER REPAIR
COMMENTS
PROCESSING FAULTS DETECTED

TO BE FILLED IN BY THE REPAIR OPERATOR
NO FAULTS FOUND UPGRADE SOLDERING / COMPONENT ADJUSTMENT

WIRING
A I C F–L P
STANDARD REPAIRING NOT REPAIRABLE MECHANICAL PRINTED DIRT

(REJECTED) CIRCUIT BOARD
B–D M V1 V1 V2
SUBSTITUTED
QUALITY ALERT CORROSION OTHER
I S–X V3
NOTE : LETTERS ARE FOR FACTORY USE
COMMENTS
DATE REPAIRING NUMBER REPAIRING CENTRE NAME OF REPAIR OPERATOR

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 202. Repair form
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 410 / 514
514
FREQUENCY PLANS & PART NUMBERS
SECTION CONTENT PAGE
Chapter 8 – Introduction to section ’Frequency Plans & Part Numbers’ 413
Chapter 9 – 9640LSY 415

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 411 / 514
514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
412 / 514
8 INTRODUCTION TO SECTION ’FREQUENCY PLANS & PART NUMBERS’
In this section, the Part Numbers and the Remote Inventory Labels of the frequency–dependent items
(transceiver components) are given.
The transceiver components are described in para.3.7.2 thru’ 3.7.4 on pages 156 thru’ 161.
N.B. : for frequency–independent items please refer to Tab. 13. on page 122.
Moreover, the channel plans utilized with 9600 LSY radios and criteria to be taken into account for the
use of each specific one are described, according to the following general notes:
The main parameters affecting the choice of radio–frequency channel arrangements, according to ITU–R
Rec. F.746, are :
CS Channel Separation between two consecutive centre frequencies for the related alternated
radio–frequency channel arrangement: it is also considered equal to the Channel Bandwidth.
XS defined as the radio–frequency separation between the centre frequencies of adjacent

radio–frequency channels on the same polarization and in the same direction of transmission: so
XS is equal to twice the CS for the alternated radio frequency channel arrangement and is equal
to the CS for the co–channel band re–use radio frequency channel arrangement (please consider
that an alternated frequency channel arrangement may be further implemented with co–channel
band re–use).
DS Tx/Rx Duplex Spacing, defined as the radio–frequency separation between corresponding go and
return channels, constant for each couple of ith and i’th frequencies, within a given channel
arrangement.
f defined as the frequency of the centre of the band of frequencies occupied.
fr reference frequency of the homogeneous pattern.
Main spectrum utilization characteristics for each frequency band of the 9600 LSY family are summarized
in Tab. 67. on page 414.
In general, the equipment of this family may work, in case of for STM–1 stream, in co–channel frequency
re–use operation (CCDP), utilizing the XPIC unit, allowing the transmission of 2 x STM–1 signals on a
single RF channel.
Reused configurations are not foreseen for STM–0 capacity.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 413 / 514
514
Tab. 67. Implemented radio–frequency channel arrangements and list of Chapters
CHANNEL
FREQUENCY ITU–R SDH CHAP-
SYSTEM SPACING
(GHz) FREQ. PLAN TRANSPORT TER

(MHz)

ITU–R F.635 ANNEX 1
3.6–4.2 40 STM–1
fig.3
ITU–R F.635 recommends
3.6–4.2 40 STM–1
1 (Finland)
3.8–4.2 ITU–R F.382 29 STM–1
9640 LSY 9 on page
(L4) 3.8–4.2 ITU–R F.382 extended 29 STM–1 415
3.6–4.2 DTI (United Kingdom) 28 STM–1
3.6–4.2 30 STM–1
fig.6
3.4–3.9 OIRT 28 STM–1
ITU–R F.1099635 ANNEX
4.4–5.0 40 STM–1
9647 LSY 1 fig.2 10 on
(U4) Spain Defence page 425
4.4–5.0 28 STM–1
Department
ITU–R F.383, CEPT T/R
9662 LSY 5.925–6.425 29.65 STM–1 11 on
14–01
(L6) page 429
5.675–6.179 OIRT 28 STM–1
9667 LSY ITU–R F.384, CEPT T/R 12 on
6.425–7.11 40 STM–1
(U6) 14–02 page 433
7.11–7.44 ITU–R F.385 ANNEX 3 L 28 STM–1
7.44–7.75 ITU–R F.385 ANNEX 3 H 28 STM–1
7.428–7.897 ITU–R F.385 ANNEX 4 14 – 28 STM–0 / STM–1
13 on
9674 LSY 7.425–7.725 ITU–R F.385 ANNEX 1 28 STM–1
page 435
7.11–7.44 ITU–R F.385 rec. 1L 14 – 28 STM–0 / STM–1
7.24–7.56 ITU–R F.385 rec. 1M 14 – 28 STM–0 / STM–1
7.41–7.74 ITU–R F.385 rec. 1H 14 – 28 STM–0 / STM–1
7.725–8.275 ITU–R F.386 ANNEX 1 29.65 STM–1
14 on
9681 LSY 8.275–8.5 ITU–R F.386 ANNEX 3 14 – 28 STM–0 / STM–1
page 447
7.9–8.4 ITU–R F.386 ANNEX 4 14 – 28 STM–0 / STM–1
15 on
9610 LSY 10.028–10.630 MEDIASET 28 STM–1
page 453
10.7–11.7 ITU–R F.387 rec. 1 40 STM–1 16 on
9611 LSY
10.7–11.7 ITU–R F.387 ANNEX 2 40 STM–1 page 455
17 on
9613 LSY 12.75 – 13.25 ITU–R F.497 rec. 1 14 – 28 STM–0 / STM–1
page 459
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 414 / 514
514
9 9640LSY
9.1 9640LSY part list

Tab. 68. 9640LSY Transceiver Part List
Label for
MAX
NAME ANV P/N Factory P/N Remote
Qty
Inventory
9640LSY TRANSCEIVER
N.B. Refer to para.para.3.7.2 thru’ 3.7.4 on pages 156 thru’ 161. for summary information on
transceiver composition and equipping notes
3,6–4,2 GHZ. TRANSCEIVER

3DB02524AA–– 411200543 4L128T 8
128QAM
3,4–4,2 GHZ RECEIVER 3DB02513AA–– 474210265 4L128R 16
9640LSY L.O. 3DB02668AA–– 474210292 4LLO 16
9640LSY OIRT L.O. 3DB02667AA–– 474210291 4LLOOIR 16
TR. FREQUENCY REUSE KIT 3DB03830AA–– 299702973 –– 4

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 415 / 514
514
9.2 9640LSY frequency plans
The possible channel plans to be used with 9640LSY equipment, for the exploitation of the 3.6 to 4.2 GHz
or 3.8 to 4.2 GHz bands, are shown in the figures from Fig. 203. to Fig. 209. :

– Channel plan A) is completely defined by the fig.3/Annex 1 of ITU–R Recommendation F.635.
– Channel plan B) is derived from the general formula defined in recommends 1 of the same
Recommendation.
– Channel plan C) ) is completely defined by the ITU–R Recommendation F.382.
– Channel plan D) is an extended plan derived from the same Recommendation
– Channel plan E) is used in UK, and is defined by DTI (Department of Trade and Industry).
– Channel plan F) is defined in ITU–R Recommendation F.635, Annex I, fig.6,
– Channel plan G) is a specific channel plan for the OIRT (Russia)
Warning: because of the third order intermodulation product caused by the antenna circulator, the
utilization of high power amplifiers is allowed only utilizing channel plans with alternate polarized channels.
It means that, in general, no reused channels can be used.
Channel plans A and B
See Fig. 203. on page 418 and Fig. 204. on page 419.
Both channels are based on a frequency channel spacing of 40 MHz. 9640LSY can work in frequency
re–use operation (CCDP) by utilization of XPIC unit, allowing the transmission of 14xSTM–1 signals,
the maximum system configuration being 2 x (6 + 1). In this case each RF channel is contemporary
used on H and V polarization, requiring double Polarises antennas. The minimum frequency distance
between two adjacent channels on the same branching is 40 MHz.
All the odd and even channels can be connected to the same antenna polarization.
In case of simple transmission of a single STM– 1 per RF frequency, channel plan A) and B) allow
the use of a single Polarises antenna up to a 6+1 system configurations .
Channel plan C
Channel plan in Fig. 205. on page 420 is completely defined, for the exploitation of the 3.8–4.2 GHz
band, by ITU–R Recommendation F.382, fig.3, with the center frequency by recommends 6 (or
recommends 5, for the interleaved channels).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 416 / 514
514
Channel plan D

This channel plan is used in certain countries, where the 3.6–3.8 GHz band is also available, to allows
the exploitation of the 3.6–4.2 band by the addition of three RF channels. This channel plan then
allows, theoretically, the use of a system with 9 go and return channels, but the actual limit of the
9600LSY system is of using separately channels from A to C with an up to 2+1 system or channels
from 1 to 6 with an up to 5+1 system.
Channel plans are based on a frequency channel spacing of 29 MHz and 9640LH may work in
frequency re–use operation (CCDP) up to 2x(5+1) system configuration.
In this case each RF channel is contemporary used on H and V polarizations always requiring double
polarized antennas .
In case of simple transmission of a single STM–I per RF frequency, channel plans allow the use of
a single Polarises antenna up to a 2+ 1 system configuration (using double Polarises antennas the
limit is 5+1).
These limits are derived from the minimum distance between adjacent channels on the same
branching, equal to 58 MHz in this case and from the maximum of 7+1 for the multichannel protection
system
Channel plan E
Channel plan in Fig. 207. on page 422 is used in UK, and is defined by DTI (Department of Trade
and Industry). This channel plan is based on 28 MHz channel spacing. Limit for a multichannel
system is 4+1, using single polarized antenna, and 7+1 using double polarized antenna. These limits
are derived from the minimum distance between adjacent channels on the same branching, equal
to 56 MHz in this case, and from the maximum of 7+ l of the multichannel protection system.
Channel plan F
Channel plan in Fig. 208. on page 423 has been recently defined (January ’97) in ITU–R
Recommendation F.635, Annex 1, fig.6, for the exploitation of the 3.6–4.2 GHz band and adopted
by Italian administration.
It allows 9 go and return channels spaced 30 MHz with a centre gap of 80 MHz.
9640LH can work in this plan with frequency re–use operation (CCDP), by means of the XPIC unit,
allowing the transmission of 2xSTM–1 signals per RF channel [up to 2x(7+1)]. In this case each RF
channel is contemporary used on H and V polarization always requiring double polarized antennas.
In case of simple transmission of a single STM– I per RF frequency, channel plans in Figure 15. at
page 53 allows the use of up to a 4+1 system configuration on a single polarized antenna . Using
double polarized antennas the limit is 7+1 (these limits are derived from the minimum distance
between adjacent channels on the same branching, equal to 60 MHz in this case, and from the
maximum of 7+1 for the multichannel protection system).
Channel plan G
Channel plan shown in Fig. 209. on page 424 is used in Russia and is defined by OIRT. It is based
on 28 MHz channel spacing and can be used also in CCDP operation.
Limits for a multichannel system are 3+1 using single polarized antenna and 7+1 using double
polarized antenna.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 417 / 514
514
9640 LSY Channel plan A: ITU–R Recommendation F.635. fig.3/Annex 1
STM–1
ITU–R F 635

CS=40 DS=320
fn=f0–320+40n
fn’=f0+40n,
f0=3900,
n : from 1 to 7
LOWER HALF UPPER HALF

OF THE BAND OF THE BAND
Channel Freq. [MHz] Channel Freq. [MHz]
1 3620 1’ 3940
2 3660 2’ 3980
3 3700 3’ 4020
4 3740 4’ 4060
5 3780 5’ 4100
6 3820 6’ 4140
7 3860 7’ 4180
3620 3700 3780 3860 3940 4020 4100 4180
H (V)
2 4 6 2’ 4’ 6’
V (H) 1 3 5 7 1’ 3’ 5’ 7’
3660 3740 3820 3980 4060 4140
f0 = 3900
Fig. 203. 9640 LSY Channel plan A: ITU–R Recommendation F.635. fig.3/Annex 1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 418 / 514
514
9640 LSY Channel plan B: – ITU–R F.635 recommends 1
ITU–R F 635
STM–1
CS=40 DS=320
fn=f0–320+40n
fn’=f0+40n,
f0=3890,
n : from 1 to 7

1 3610 1’ 3930
2 3650 2’ 3970
3 3690 3’ 4010
4 3730 4’ 4050
5 3770 5’ 4090
6 3810 6’ 4130
7 3850 7’ 4170
3610 3690 3770 3850 3970 4050 4130
H (V)
2 4 6 1’ 3’ 5’ 7’
1 3 5 7 2’ 4’ 6’
V (H)
3650 3730 3810 3930 4010 4090 4170
f0 = 3890
Fig. 204. 9640 LSY Channel plan B: – ITU–R F.635 recommends 1

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 419 / 514
514
9640 LSY Channel plan C: ITU–R Recommendation F.382
NORMAL CHANNELS INTERLEAVED CHANNELS

ITU–R F.382 ITU–R F.382
STM–1 STM–1
CS=29 ; DS=213 CS=29 ; DS=213
fn=f0–208+29n fn=f0–208+29n
fn’=f0+5+29n fn’=f0+5+29n
f0=4003.5 f0=3989
n : from 1 to 6 n : from 1 to 6
LOWER HALF UPPER HALF LOWER HALF UPPER HALF

OF THE BAND OF THE BAND OF THE BAND OF THE BAND
Freq. Freq. Freq. Freq.
Channel Channel Channel Channel
[MHz] [MHz] [MHz] [MHz]
1 3824,5 1’ 4037,5 1 3810 1’ 4023
2 3853,5 2’ 4066,5 2 3839 2’ 4052
3 3882,5 3’ 4095,5 3 3868 3’ 4081
4 3911,5 4’ 4124,5 4 3897 4’ 4110
5 3940,5 5’ 4153,5 5 3926 5’ 4139
6 3969,5 6’ 4182,5 6 3955 6’ 4168
H (V)
2 4 6 2’ 4’ 6’
1 3 5 1’ 3’ 5’
V (H)
f0 = 4003.5
N.B. Note: Dotted arrows indicate interleaved channels. Each channel is 14.5 MHz lower than the
correspondent main plan channel.
Fig. 205. 9640 LSY Channel plan C: ITU–R Recommendation F.382

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 420 / 514
514
9640 LSY Channel plan D: ITU–R F. 382 (Extended ) Recommendation
ITU–R F.382 EXTENDED ITU–R F.382 EXTENDED

STM–1 STM–1
CS=29 ; DS=213 CS=29 ; DS=213
fn=f0–208+29n fn=f0–208+29n
fn’=f0+5+29n fn’=f0+5+29n
f0=4003.5 f0=3989

1 3824,5 1’ 4037,5 1 3810,0 1’ 4023,0
2 3853,5 2’ 4066,5 2 3839,0 2’ 4052,0
3 3882,5 3’ 4095,5 3 3868,0 3’ 4081,0
4 3911,5 4’ 4124,5 4 3897,0 4’ 4110,0
5 3940,5 5’ 4153,5 5 3926,0 5’ 4139,0
6 3969,5 6’ 4182,5 6 3955,0 6’ 4168,0
f0=3703,5 MHz f0=3689 MHz;

fn=f0–121+29n fn=f0–121+29n
fn’=f0+5+29n fn’=f0+5+29n
A’ 3611,5 A 3737,5 A’ 3597,0 A 3723,0
B’ 3640,5 B 3766,5 B’ 3626,0 B 3752,0
C’ 3669,5 C 3795,5 C’ 3655,0 C 3781,0
f0 = 3689 f0 = 3989
3611.5 3669.5 3766.5 3824.5 3882.5 3940.5 4037.5 4095.5 4153.5
H (V)
B’ A C 2 4 6 2’ 4’ 6’
V (H) A’ C’ B 1 3 5 1’ 3’ 5’
f0 = 3703.5 f0 = 4003.5
N.B. Dotted arrows indicate interleaved channels. Each channel is 14.5 MHz lower than the
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
correspondent main plan channel.
Fig. 206. 9640 LSY Channel plan D: ITU–R F. 382 (Extended ) Recommendation
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 421 / 514
514
9640 LSY Channel plan E: DTI channel plan
DTI

STM–1

CS=28 DS=308
fn=f0–294+28n
fn’=f0+14+28n,
f0=3899
n : from 1 to 9

1 3633,0 1’ 3941,0
2 3661,0 2’ 3969,0
3 3689,0 3’ 3997,0
4 3717,0 4’ 4025,0
5 3745,0 5’ 4053,0
6 3773,0 6’ 4081,0
7 3801,0 7’ 4109,0
8 3829,0 8’ 4137,0
9 3857,0 9’ 4165,0
3633 3689 3745 3801 3857 3941 3997 4053 4109 4165
H (V)
2 4 6 8 2’ 4’ 6’ 8’
V (H) 1 3 5 7 9 1’ 3’ 5’ 7’ 9’
3661 3717 3773 3829 3969 4025 4081 4137
f0 = 3899
Fig. 207. 9640 LSY Channel plan E: DTI channel plan

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 422 / 514
514
9640 LSY Channel plan F: ITU–R Recommendation F.635, Annex 1, fig.6
ITU–R F 635 Annex1 fig.6.

STM–1
CS=30 DS=320
fn=f0–310+30n
fn’=f0+10+30n,
f0=3900
n : from 1 to 9

1 3620 1’ 3940
2 3650 2’ 3970
3 3680 3’ 4000
4 3710 4’ 4030
5 3740 5’ 4060
6 3770 6’ 4090
7 3800 7’ 4120
8 3830 8’ 4150
9 2860 9’ 4180
3620 3680 3740 3800 3860 3940 4000 4060 4120 4180
H (V)
2 4 6 8 2’ 4’ 6’ 8’
V (H) 1 3 5 7 9 1’ 3’ 5’ 7’ 9’
3650 3710 3770 3830 3970 4030 4090 4150
f0 = 3900
Fig. 208. 9640 LSY Channel plan F: ITU–R Recommendation F.635, Annex 1, fig.6
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 423 / 514
514
9640 LSY Channel plan G: O.I.R.T. (Russia)
O.I.R.T.

STM–1

CS=28 DS=266
fn=f0–310+30n
fn’=f0+7+28n,
f0=3653,5
n : from 1 to 8

1 3422,5 1’ 3688,5
2 3450,5 2’ 3716,5
3 3478,5 3’ 3744,5
4 3506,5 4’ 3772,5
5 3534,5 5’ 3800,5
6 3562,5 6’ 3828,5
7 3590,5 7’ 3856,5
8 3618,5 8’ 3884,5
3450.5 3506.5 3562.5 3618.5 3716.5 3772.5 3828.5 3884.5
H (V)
1 3 5 7 1’ 3’ 5’ 7’
V (H) 2 4 6 8 2’ 4’ 6’ 8’
3422.5 3478.5 3534.5 3590.5 3688.5 3744.5 3800.5 3856.5
f0 = 3653.5
Fig. 209. 9640 LSY Channel plan G: O.I.R.T. (Russia)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 424 / 514
514
10 9647LSY

Label for
MAX
Qty
Inventory
9647LSY TRANSCEIVER

3DB02526AA–– 411200545 4U128T 8
128QAM
4,3–5,0 GHZ RECEIVER 3DB02512AA–– 474210264 4U128R 16
9647LSY L.O. 3DB02669AA–– 474210292 4ULO 16
In Fig. 210. and Fig. 211. the channel plans for the 9647LSY equipment to be used for the exploitation
of the 4.4 to 5.0 GHz band are shown.
The channel plan shown in Fig. 210. on page 426 is completely defined by the fig.2/Annex 1 of ITU–R
Recommendation F.1099.
This channel plan is based on a frequency channel spacing of 40 MHz. 9647LSY can work with frequency
re–use operation (CCDP) allowing the transmission of 14xSTM–1 signals [max system configuration
being 2 x (6 + 1)].
In this case each RF channel is contemporary used on H and V polarization, requiring double polarized
antennas.
The minimum frequency gap between two adjacent channels on the same branching is 40 MHz and all
the odd and even channels can be connected to the same polarization of the antenna .
Note that, even in case of transmission of a single STM–1 per RF carrier, this channel plan requires always
the use of double polarized antenna due to the different polarization of the go and return channel.
The channel plan shown in Fig. 211. on page 427 is a specific channel plan used in Spain by the Spanish
defence department and it is based on a 28 MHz channel spacing.
utilization of high power amplifiers is allowed only utilizing channel plans alternate polarized channels. It
means that, in general, no reused channels can be used.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 425 / 514
514
9647 LSY Channel plan A: ITU–R Recommendation F.1099, Annex 1, fig. 2
STM–1

ITU–R F 1099

CS=40 DS=310
fn=f0–310+40n
fn’=f0–10+40n,
f0=4700,
n : from 1 to 7

1 4430 1’ 4730
2 4470 2’ 4770
3 4510 3’ 4810
4 4550 4’ 4850
5 4590 5’ 4890
6 4630 6’ 4930
7 4670 7’ 4970
4430 4510 4590 4670 4770 4850 4930
H (V)
2 4 6 1’ 3’ 5’ 7’
(MHz)
1 3 5 7 2’ 4’ 6’
V (H)
4470 4550 4630 4730 4810 4890 4970
f0 = 4700
Fig. 210. 9647 LSY Channel plan A: ITU–R Recommendation F.1099, Annex 1, fig. 2
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 426 / 514
514
9647 LSY Channel plan B: Spain Defence
STM–1 128 QAM

SPAIN DEFENCE
CS=28 DS=314
fn=f0–307+28n
fn’=f0+7+28n
f0=4700,
n : from 1 to 9

1 4421 1’ 4735
2 4449 2’ 4763
3 4477 3’ 4791
4 4505 4’ 4819
5 4533 5’ 4847
6 4561 6’ 4875
7 4589 7’ 4903
4421 4477 4533 4589 4645 4735 4791 4847 4903 4959
H (V)
2 4 6 8 2’ 4’ 6’ 8’
V (H) 1 3 5 7 9 1’ 3’ 5’ 7’ 9’
4449 4505 4561 4617 4763 4819 4875 4931
f0 = 4700
N.B. Channels 2, 8, 2’, 8’ are used for low capacity transmission only.
Fig. 211. 9647 LSY Channel plan B: Spain Defence

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 427 / 514
514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
428 / 514
11 9662LSY

Label for
MAX
Qty
Inventory
9662LSY TRANSCEIVER

3DB01264AA–– 411200518 6L128T 8
128QAM
5,9–7,1 GHZ RECEIVER 3DB01268AA–– 474210145 6+128R 16
9662LSY L.O. 3DB02670AA–– 474210294 6LLO 16
In Fig. 212. on page 430 the channel plan for the 9662LSY equipment to be used for the exploitation of
the 5.925 to 6.425 GHz band is shown.
This channel plan (based on 29.65 MHz channel spacing) is completely defined by the ITU–R
Recommendation F.383, using the alternate polarization arrangement defined in recommend 3, and by
the CEPT T/R 14–01.
Another feasible specific channel plan (based on 28 MHz channel spacing) for the OIRT (Russia) is shown
in Fig. 213. on page 431, allowing also the associated 14 MHz shifted pattern.
9662LSY may work in the above plans by co–channel frequency re–use operation (CCDP) with the XPIC
unit allowing the transmission of 2xSTM–1 signals per RF channel. In this case each RF channel is
contemporary used on H and V polarizations always requiring an external double polarized antenna.
In case of transmission of a single STM–1 per RF frequency, channel plans allow the use of a single
polarized antenna up to 3+1/4+0 system configuration and using a double polarized antenna up to
7+1/8+0 system configuration.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 429 / 514
514
9662 LSY Channel plan A: ITU–R F 383
ITU–R F 383

STM–1

fn=f0–259.45+29.65n
fn’=f0–7.41+29.65n
CS=29.65 DS=252.04
f0=6175
n: from 1 to 8

1 5945,20 1’ 6197,24
2 5974,85 2’ 6226,89
3 6004,50 3’ 6256,54
4 6034,15 4’ 6286,19
5 6063,80 5’ 6315,84
6 6093,45 6’ 6345,49
7 6123,10 7’ 6375,14
8 6152,75 8’ 6404,79
5945.20 6004.50 6063.80 6123.10 6197.24 6256.54 6315.84 6375.14
H (V)
2 4 6 8 2’ 4’ 6’ 8’
1 3 5 7 1’ 3’ 5’ 7’
V (H)
5974.85 6034.15 6093.45 6152.75 6226.89 6286.19 6345.49 6404.79
f0 = 6175
Fig. 212. 9662 LSY Channel plan A: ITU–R F 383

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 430 / 514
514
9662 LSY Channel plan B: O.I.R.T.

O.I.R.T. O.I.R.T.
STM–1 STM–1
fn=f0–259+28n fn=f0–259+28n
fn’=f0+7+28n fn’=f0+7+28n
036 CS=28 DS=266 CS=28 DS=266
f0=5920 f0=5934
n: from 1 to 8 n: from 1 to 8

1 5689 1’ 5955 1 5703 1’ 5969
2 5717 2’ 5983 2 5731 2’ 5997
3 5745 3’ 6011 3 5759 3’ 6025
4 5773 4’ 6039 4 5787 4’ 6053
5 5801 5’ 6067 5 5815 5’ 6081
6 5829 6’ 6095 6 5843 6’ 6109
7 5857 7’ 6123 7 5871 7’ 6137
8 5885 8’ 6151 8 5899 8’ 6165
H (V)
2 4 6 8 2’ 4’ 6’ 8’
(MHz)
1 3 5 7 1’ 3’ 5’ 7’
V (H)
f0 = 5920
N.B. Dotted arrows indicate interleaved channels. Each channel is 14 MHz higher than
correspondent main channel.
Fig. 213. 9662 LSY Channel plan B: O.I.R.T.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 431 / 514
514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
432 / 514
12 9667LSY

Label for
MAX
Qty
Inventory
9667LSY TRANSCEIVER

3DB01265AA–– 411200519 6U128T 8
128QAM
9667LSY L.O. 3DB02671AA–– 474210295 6ULO 16
In Fig. 214. on page 434 the channel plan for the 9667 LSY equipment to be used for the exploitation of
This channel plan (based on 40 MHz channel spacing) is completely defined by the ITU–R
Recommendation F.384 .
The only difference between the two plans is that in plan a) the go and return channels have different
polarization and in plan b) the polarization is the same.
In case of transmission of a single STM–1 per RF frequency, channel plan a) requires the use of a double
polarized antenna even in case of 1+0 system, due to the different polarization of the Go and return
channel.
On the contrary, channel plan b) allows the use of a single polarized antenna up to 3+1 system
configuration (in both cases max system configuration is 7+1 using double polarized antenna).
contemporary used on H and V polarization always requiring a double polarized antenna.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 433 / 514
514
9667 LSY Channel plan A: ITU–R F.384, CEPT T/R 14–02
ITU–R F.384
STM–1

CS=40 ; DS=340

fn=f0–350+40n
fn’=f0–10+40n
f0=6770
n : from 1 to 8

1 6460 1’ 6800
2 6500 2’ 6840
3 6540 3’ 6880
4 6580 4’ 6920
5 6620 5’ 6960
6 6660 6’ 7000
7 6700 7’ 7040
8 6740 8’ 7080
Channel plan a)
6460 6540 6620 6700 6840 6920 7000 7080
H (V)
2 4 6 8 1’ 3’ 5’ 7’
V (H) 1 3 5 7 2’ 4’ 6’ 8’
6500 6580 6660 6740 6800 6880 6960 7040
f0 = 6770
Channel plan b)
6460 6540 6620 6700 6800 6880 6960 7040
H (V)
2 4 6 8 2’ 4’ 6’ 8’
V (H) 1 3 5 7 1’ 3’ 5’ 7’
6500 6580 6660 6740 6840 6920 7000 7080

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
f0 = 6770
Fig. 214. 9667 LSY Channel plan A: ITU–R F.384, CEPT T/R 14–02
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 434 / 514
514
13 9674LSY

Label for
MAX
Qty
Inventory
9674LSY TRANSCEIVER
7,1–7,7 GHZ TRANSCEIVER

3DB02531AA–– 411200547 07128T 8
128QAM
9674LSY L.O. 3DB02672AA–– 474210296 07LO 16

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 435 / 514
514
In the figures from Fig. 215. to Fig. 220. the possible channel plans for the 9674 LSY equipment to be
used for the exploitation of the 7.1 to 7.9 GHz bands are shown. These channel plans are all based on

ITU–R Recommendation F.385, with the following details:

– Fig. 215. on page 437: ITU–R F.385 Annex 3 L&H : based on 28 MHz channel spacing, in case of
transmission of a single STM–1 per RF frequency, channel plans allow the use of a single polarized
antenna up to a 2+1/3+0 system configuration and of a double polarized antenna up to a 4+1/5+0
system configuration. Shifted pattern 14 MHz lower is available as well.
9674LSY may work in the above plan by co–channel frequency re–use operation (CCDP) utilizing
the XPIC unit allowing the transmission of 2xSTM–1 signals per RF channel. In this case each RF
channel is contemporary used on H and V polarization always requiring a double polarized antenna.
– Fig. 216. on page 438: ITU–R F.385 Annex 4 :It is used in UK and It is defined By DTI (Department
of Trade and Industry). Based on 28 MHz channel spacing, in case of simple transmission of a single
STM–1 per RF frequency, channel plans allow the use of a single polarized antenna up to a 3+1/4+0
system configuration and up to 7+1/8+0 using double polarized antennas.
14 MHz channel spacing is available as well to support the STM–0 signal.
– Fig. 217. on page 440: ITU–R F.385 Annex 1 :based on 28 MHz channel spacing, in case of simple
transmission of a single STM–1 per RF frequency, channel plans allow the use of a single polarized
antenna up to a 1+1/2+0 system configuration and up to 3+1 using double polarized antennas, due
to the narrow distance between the innermost channels (42 MHz).
Warning: because of the narrow distance between channels 8 and 1’, with F. 385 Annex 1 channel
plan, the utilization of these channels connected to the same branching is not allowed.
– Fig. 218. on page 441: ITU–R F.385 Rec. 1L

– Fig. 219. on page 443: ITU–R F.385 Rec. 1M
– Fig. 220. on page 445: ITU–R F.385 Rec. 1H
Based on 28 MHz channel spacing, in case of simple transmission of a single STM–1 per RF
frequency, channel plans allow the use of a single polarized antenna up to a 1+1/2+0 system and
of a double polarized antenna up to a 3+1/4+0 system configuration.
This limit is due to the narrow frequency distance between the innermost channels (49 MHz), not
sufficient being these channels on the same antenna polarization.
Three shifted patterns 7 MHz higher are available as well.
LSY may work in the above plan by co–channel frequency re–use operation (CCDP) utilizing the
XPIC unit allowing the transmission of 2xSTM–1 signals per RF channel. In this case each RF
MHz channel spacing is also available to support the STM–0 signal. Shifted pattern (7 MHz higher)
is available as well.
N.B. F385 Rec. 1M in particular supports the channel plan GPR–11 (OIRT–Russia) that utilizes
the channels 1–int3, 2–int3, 3–int3, 4–int3 and 5–int3 (and correspondent 1’–int3, 2’–int3,
3’–int3, 4’–int3 and 5’–int3 return channels) as main channels and 1–int1, 2–int1, 3–int1,
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
4–int1 and 5–int1 and (correspondent 1’–int1, 2’–int1, 3’–int1, 4’–int1 and 5’–int1 return
channels) as interleaved channels.
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 436 / 514
514
9674 LSY Channel plan A: ITU–R F.385 Annex 3 L&H
ITU–R F.385 ANNEX 3 L ITU–R F.385 ANNEX 3 H

STM–1 STM–1
CS=28 DS=196 CS=28 DS=196

fn=f0–182+28n fn=f0–168+28n
f’n=f0+14+28n f’n=f0+28n
f0=7275 f0=7597
n: from1 to 5 n: from1 to 5

1i 7107 1’ i 7303 1i 7443 1’ i 7611
1 7121 1’ 7317 1 7457 1’ 7625
2i 7135 2’ i 7331 2i 7471 2’ i 7639
2 7149 2’ 7345 2 7485 2’ 7653
3i 7163 3’ i 7359 3i 7499 3’ i 7667
3 7177 3’ 7373 3 7513 3’ 7681
4i 7191 4’ i 7387 4i 7527 4’ i 7695
4 7205 4’ 7401 4 7541 4’ 7709
5i 7219 5’ i 7415 5i 7555 5’ i 7723
5 7233 5’ 7429 5 7569 5’ 7737
ITU–R F.385 ANNEX 3L

7107 7163 7219 7303 7359 7415
7121 7177 7233 7317 7373 7429
H (V)
2 4 2’ 4’
V (H) 1 3 5 1’ 3’ 5’
7135 7191 7331 7387

7149 7205 7345 7401
f0 = 7275
ITU–R F.385 ANNEX 3H

7443 7499 7555 7611 7667 7723
7457 7513 7569 7625 7681 7737
H (V)
2 4 2’ 4’
V (H) 1 3 5 1’ 3’ 5’
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
7471 7527 7639 7695

7485 7541 7653 7709
f0 = 7597
Fig. 215. 9674 LSY Channel plan A: ITU–R F.385 Annex 3 L&H
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 437 / 514
514
9674 LSY Channel plan B: ITU–R F.385 Annex 4
ITU–R F.385 ANNEX 4 ITU–R F.385 ANNEX 4

STM–0 STM–1

fn=f0–241.5+14n fn=f0–248.5+28n
f’n=f0+3.5+14n f’n=f0–3.5+28n
CS=14 DS=245 CS=28 DS=245
f0=7662.5 f0=7662.5
n: from1 to 16 n: from1 to 8
1 7435 1’ 7680
1 7442 1’ 7687
2 7449 2’ 7694
3 7463 3’ 7708
2 7470 2’ 7715
4 7477 4’ 7722
5 7491 5’ 7736
3 7498 3’ 7743
6 7505 6’ 7750
7 7519 7’ 7764
4 7526 4’ 7771
8 7533 8’ 7778
9 7547 9’ 7792
5 7554 5’ 7799
10 7561 10’ 7806
11 7575 11’ 7820

6 7582 6’ 7827
12 7589 12’ 7834
13 7603 13’ 7848

7 7610 7’ 7855
14 7617 14’ 7862
15 7631 15’ 7876

8 7638 8’ 7883
16 7645 16’ 7890
Fig. 216. 9674 LSY Channel plan B: ITU–R F.385 Annex 4
Fig. 216. continues ...

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 438 / 514
514
... Fig. 216. continues
STM–0
7435 7463 7491 7519 7547 7575 7603 7631 7680 7708 7736 7764 7792 7820 7848 7876
H (V)
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 2’ 4’ 6’ 8’ 10’ 12’ 14’ 16’
V (H) 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 1’ 3’ 5’ 7’ 9’ 11’ 13’ 15’
7449 7477 7505 7533 7561 7589 7617 7645 7694 7722 7750 7778 7806 7834 7862 7890
f0 = 7662.5
STM–1
7442 7498 7554 7610 7687 7743 7799 7855
H (V)
2 4 6 8 2’ 4’ 6’ 8’
V (H) 1 3 5 7 1’ 3’ 5’ 7’
7470 7526 7582 7638 7715 7771 7827 7883
f0 = 7662.5
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 439 / 514
514
9674 LSY Channel plan C: ITU–R F.385 Annex 1

STM–1

fn=f0–161+28n
f’n=f0–7+28n
CS=28 DS=154
f0=7575
n: from1 to 5

1 7442 1’ 7596
1i 7456 1’ i 7610
2 7470 2’ 7624
2i 7484 2’ i 7638
3 7498 3’ 7652
3i 7512 3’ i 7666
4 7526 4’ 7680
4i 7540 4’ i 7694
5 7554 5’ 7708
5i 7568 5’ i 7722
7442 7498 7554 7596 7652 7708

7456 7512 7568 7610 7666 7722
H (V)
2 4 2’ 4’
V (H) 1 3 5 1’ 3’ 5’
7470 7526 7624 7680

7484 7540 7638 7694
f0 = 7575
Fig. 217. 9674 LSY Channel plan C: ITU–R F.385 Annex 1

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 440 / 514
514
9674 LSY Channel plan D: ITU–R F.385 Rec. 1L
ITU–R F.385 rec. 1 L ITU–R F.385 rec. 1 L

STM–0 STM–1
fn=f0–161+14n fn=f0–175+28n
fn’=f0+14n fn’=f0–14+28nn
CS=14 DS=161 CS=28 DS=161
f0=7275 f0=7275

1 7128 1’ 7289 1 7128 1’ 7289
1i 7135 1’ i 7296 1–int1 7135 1’–int1 7296
2 7142 2’ 7303 1–int2 7142 1’–int2 7303
2i 7149 2’ i 7310 1–int3 7149 1’–int3 7310
3 7156 3’ 7317 2 7156 2’ 7317
3i 7163 3’ i 7324 2–int1 7163 2’–int1 7324
4 7170 4’ 7331 2–int2 7170 2’–int2 7331
4i 7177 4’ i 7338 2–int3 7177 2’–int3 7338
5 7184 5’ 7345 3 7184 3’ 7345
5i 7191 5’ i 7352 4–int1 7191 3’–int1 7352
6 7198 6’ 7359 4–int2 7198 3’–int2 7359
6i 7205 6’ i 7366 4–int3 7205 3’–int3 7366
7 7212 7’ 7373 5 7212 4’ 7373
7i 7219 7’ i 7380 5–int1 7219 4’–int1 7380
8 7226 8’ 7387 5–int2 7226 4’–int2 7387
8i 7233 8’ i 7394 5–int3 7233 4’–int3 7394
9 7240 9’ 7401 6 7240 5’ 7401
9i 7247 9’ i 7408 6–int1 7247 5’–int1 7408
10 7254 10’ 7415 6–int2 7254 5’–int2 7415
10 i 7261 10’ i 7422 6–int3 7261 5’–int3 7422
Fig. 218. 9674 LSY Channel plan D: ITU–R F.385 Rec. 1L

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 441 / 514
514
STM–0

7128 7156 7184 7212 7240 7289 7317 7345 7373 7401
7135 7163 7191 7219 7247 7296 7324 7352 7380 7408
H (V)
V (H)
7142 7170 7198 7226 7254 7303 7331 7359 7387 7415
7149 7177 7205 7233 7261 7310 7338 7366 7394 7422
STM–1
7128 7184 7240 7289 7345 7401

7135 7191 7247 7296 7352 7408
7142 7198 7254 7303 7359 7415
7149 7205 7261 7310 7366 7422
H (V)
V (H)
7156 7212 7317 7373

7163 7219 7324 7380
7170 7226 7331 7387
7177 7233 7338 7394
f0 = 7275
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 442 / 514
514
9674 LSY Channel plan E: ITU–R F.385 Rec. 1M
ITU–R F 385 rec. 1 M ITU–R F 385 rec. 1 M

STM–0 STM–1
fn=f0–161+14n fn=f0–175+28n
fn’=f0+14n fn’=f0–14+28n
CS=14 DS=161 CS=28 DS=161
f0=7400 f0=7400

1 7253 1’ 7414 1 7253 1’ 7414
1i 7260 1’ i 7421 1–int1 7260 1’–int1 7421
2 7267 2’ 7428 1–int2 7267 1’–int2 7428
2i 7274 2’ i 7435 1–int3 7274 1’–int3 7435
3 7281 3’ 7442 2 7281 2’ 7442
3i 7288 3’ i 7449 2–int1 7288 2’–int1 7449
4 7295 4’ 7456 2–int2 7295 2’–int2 7456
4i 7302 4’ i 7463 2–int3 7302 2’–int3 7463
5 7309 5’ 7470 3 7309 3’ 7470
5i 7316 5’ i 7477 3–int1 7316 3’–int1 7477
6 7323 6’ 7484 3–int2 7323 3’–int2 7484
6i 7330 6’ i 7491 3–int3 7330 3’–int3 7491
7 7337 7’ 7498 4 7337 4’ 7498
7i 7344 7’ i 7505 4–int1 7244 4’–int1 7505
8 7351 8’ 7512 4–int2 7351 4’–int2 7512
8i 7358 8’ i 7519 4–int3 7358 4’–int3 7519
9 7365 9’ 7526 5 7365 5’ 7526
9i 7372 9’ i 7533 5–int1 7272 5’–int1 7533
10 7379 10’ 7540 5–int2 7379 5’–int2 7540
10 i 7386 10’ i 7547 5–int3 7386 5’–int3 7547
Fig. 219. 9674 LSY Channel plan E: ITU–R F.385 Rec. 1M

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 443 / 514
514
STM–0

7253 7281 7309 7337 7365 7414 7442 7470 7498 7526
7260 7288 7316 7344 7372 7421 7449 7477 7505 7533
H (V)
V (H)
7267 7295 7323 7351 7379 7428 7456 7484 7512 7540
7274 7302 7330 7358 7386 7435 7463 7491 7519 7547
STM–1
7253 7309 7365 7414 7470 7526
7260 7316 7372 7421 7477 7533
7267 7323 7379 7428 7484 7540
7274 7330 7386 7435 7491 7547
H (V)
V (H)
7281 7337 7442 7498

7288 7344 7449 7505
7295 7351 7456 7512
7302 7358 7463 7519
f0 = 7400
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 444 / 514
514
9674 LSY Channel plan F: ITU–R F.385 Rec. 1H
ITU–R F 385 rec. 1 H ITU–R F 385 rec. 1 H

STM–0 STM–1
fn=f0–161+14n fn=f0–175+28n
fn’=f0+14n fn’=f0–14+28n
CS=14 DS=161 CS=28 DS=161
f0=7575 f0=7575

1 7428 1’ 7589 1 7428 1’ 7589
1i 7435 1’ i 7596 1–int1 7435 1’–int1 7596
2 7442 2’ 7603 1–int2 7442 1’–int2 7603
2i 7449 2’ i 7610 1–int3 7449 1’–int3 7610
3 7456 3’ 7617 2 7456 2’ 7617
3i 7463 3’ i 7624 2–int1 7463 2’–int1 7624
4 7470 4’ 7631 2–int2 7470 2’–int2 7631
4i 7477 4’ i 7638 2–int3 7477 2’–int3 7638
5 7484 5’ 7645 3 7484 3’ 7645
5i 7491 5’ i 7652 3–int1 7491 3’–int1 7652
6 7498 6’ 7659 3–int2 7498 3’–int2 7659
6i 7505 6’ i 7666 3–int3 7505 3’–int3 7666
7 7512 7’ 7673 4 7512 4’ 7673
7i 7519 7’ i 7680 4–int1 7519 4’–int1 7680
8 7526 8’ 7687 4–int2 7526 4’–int2 7687
8i 7533 8’ i 7694 4–int3 7533 4’–int3 7694
9 7540 9’ 7701 5 7540 5’ 7701
9i 7547 9’ i 7708 5–int1 7547 5’–int1 7708
10 7554 10’ 7715 5–int2 7554 5’–int2 7715
10 i 7561 10’ i 7722 5–int3 7561 5’–int3 7722
Fig. 220. 9674 LSY Channel plan F: ITU–R F.385 Rec. 1H

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 445 / 514
514
STM–0

7428 7456 7484 7512 7540 7589 7617 7645 7673 7701
7435 7463 7491 7519 7547 7596 7624 7652 7680 7708
H (V)
V (H)
7442 7470 7498 7526 7554 7603 7631 7659 7687 7715
7449 7477 7505 7533 7561 7610 7638 7666 7694 7722
STM–1
7428 7484 7540 7589 7645 7701
7435 7491 7547 7596 7652 7708
7442 7498 7554 7603 7659 7715
7449 7505 7561 7610 7666 7722
H (V)
V (H)
7456 7512 7617 7673

7463 7519 7624 7680
7470 7526 7631 7687
7477 7533 7638 7694
f0 = 7575
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 446 / 514
514
14 9681LSY

Label for
MAX
Qty
Inventory
9681LSY TRANSCEIVER

3DB02532AA–– 411200548 08128T 8
128QAM (N.B.1)

3DB04243AA–– 411200589 08128T 8
128QAM (N.B.2)
9681LSY L.O. 3DB02673AA–– 474210297 08LO 16
N.B.1 For 7.7–8.3 GHz band both STM–0 and STM–1 capacity (F386 annex 1) all channels, and
for OIRT (F386 annex 4) only lower halfband channels.
N.B.2 For 8.2–8.5 GHz band both STM–0 and STM–1 capacity (F386 annex 3) all channels, and
for OIRT (F386 annex 4) only upper halfband channels.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 447 / 514
514
In Fig. 221. thru’ Fig. 223. the possible channel plans for the 9681LSY equipment to be used for the
exploitation of the 7.7 to 8.5 GHz are shown. All these channel plans are based on ITU–R

Recommendation F.386 with the following details:

– Fig. 221. on page 449: ITU–R F.386 ANNEX 1 based on 29.65 MHz channel spacing, in case of
simple transmission of a single STM–1 per RF frequency, channel plan allows the use of a single
polarized antenna up to a 3+1/4+0 system configuration for odd or even channels and of a double
polarized antenna up to a 7+1/8+0 system configuration for alternated channels .
9681LSY may work in the above plan by co–channel frequency re–use operation (CCDP) with the
– Fig. 222. on page 450: ITU–R F.386 ANNEX 3 based on 28 MHz channel spacing, in case of simple
transmission of a single STM–1 per RF frequency, channel plan allows the use of a single polarized
antenna up to a 2+1/3+0 system configuration for odd or even channels and of a double polarized
antenna up to a 5+1/6+0 system configuration for alternated channels . Shifted pattern 14 MHz higher
is available too, loosing the upper channel.
14 MHz channel spacing is available too to support the STM–0 capacity.
– Fig. 223. on page 451: ITU–R F.386 ANNEX 4 based on 28 MHz channel spacing, in case of simple
transmission of a single STM–1 per RF frequency, channel plan allows the use of a single polarized
antenna up to a 3+1/4+0 system configuration and of a double polarized antenna up to a 7+1/8+0
system configuration for alternated channels.
This channel plan is in particular, utilized by OIRT (Russia).
14 MHz channel spacing is also available to support the STM–0 capacity.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 448 / 514
514
9681 LSY Channel plan A: ITU–R F.386 ANNEX 1

STM–1
fn=f0–281.95+29.65n
fn’=f0+29.37+29.65n
CS=29.65 DS=311.32
f0=8000
n : from 1 to 8

1 7747,70 1’ 8059,02
2 7777,35 2’ 8088,67
3 7807,00 3’ 8118,32
4 7836,65 4’ 8147,97
5 7866,30 5’ 8177,62
6 7895,95 6’ 8207,27
7 7925,60 7’ 8236,92
8 7955,25 8’ 8266,57
7747.70 7807.00 7866.30 7925.60 8059.02 8118.32 8177.62 8236.92
H (V)
2 4 6 8 2’ 4’ 6’ 8’
1 3 5 7 1’ 3’ 5’ 7’
V (H)
7777.35 7836.65 7895.95 7955.25 8088.67 8147.97 8207.27 8266.57
f0 = 8000
Fig. 221. 9681 LSY Channel plan A: ITU–R F.386 ANNEX 1

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 449 / 514
514
9681 LSY Channel plan B: ITU–R F.386 ANNEX 3

STM–0 STM–1

fn=f0–108.5+14n fn=f0–122.5+28n
fn’=f0+10.5+14n fn’=f0–3,5+28n
CS=14 DS=119 CS=28 DS=119
f0=8387.5 f0=8387.5

1 8293 1’ 8412 1 8293 1’ 8412
2 8307 2’ 8426 1i 8307 1’ i 8426
3 8321 3’ 8440 2 8321 2 8440
4 8335 4’ 8454 2i 8335 2’ i 8454
5 8349 5’ 8468
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
3
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
8349 3’ 8468
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
6 8363 6’ 8482
STM–0
8293 8321 8349 8412 8440 8468
H (V)
2 4 6 2’ 4’ 6’
1 3 5 1’ 3’ 5’
V (H)
8307 8335 8363 8426 8454 8482

f0 = 8387.5
STM–1
8293 8307 8349 8412 8426 8468
H (V)
2 2i 2’ 2’i
1 1i 3 1’ 1’i 3’
V (H)
8321 8335 8426 8454

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
f0 = 8387.5
Fig. 222. 9681 LSY Channel plan B: ITU–R F.386 ANNEX 3
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 450 / 514
514
9681 LSY Channel plan C: ITU–R F.386 ANNEX 4

STM–0 STM–1
fn=f0–259+14n fn=f0–259+28n
fn’=f0+7+14n fn’=f0+7+28n
CS=14 DS=266 CS=28 DS=266
f0=8157 f0=8157

1 7912 1’ 8178
1 7926 1’ 8192
2 7926 2’ 8192
3 7940 3’ 8206
2 7954 2’ 8220
4 7954 4’ 8220
5 7968 5’ 8234
3 7982 3’ 8248
6 7982 6’ 8248
7 7996 7’ 8262
4 8010 4’ 8276
8 8010 8’ 8276
9 8024 9’ 8290
5 8038 5’ 8304
10 8038 10’ 8304
11 8052 11’ 8318

6 8066 6’ 8332
12 8066 12’ 8332
13 8080 13’ 8346

7 8094 7’ 8360
14 8094 14’ 8360
15 8108 15’ 8374

8 8122 8’ 8388
16 8122 16’ 8388
Fig. 223. 9681 LSY Channel plan C: ITU–R F.386 ANNEX 4

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 451 / 514
514
STM–0

7912 77940 7968 7996 8024 8052 8080 8108 8178 8206 8234 8262 8290 8318 8346 8374
H (V)
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 2’ 4’ 6’ 8’ 10’ 12’ 14’ 16’
V (H) 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 1’ 3’ 5’ 7’ 9’ 11’ 13’ 15’
7926 7954 7982 8010 8038 8066 8094 8122 8192 8220 8248 8276 8304 8332 8360 8388
f0 = 8157
STM–1
7996 7982 8038 8094 8192 8248 8304 8360
H (V)
2 4 6 8 2’ 4’ 6’ 8’
V (H) 1 3 5 7 1’ 3’ 5’ 7’
7954 8010 8066 8122 8220 8276 8332 8388
f0 = 8157
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 452 / 514
514
15 9610LSY

Label for
MAX
Qty
Inventory
9610LSY TRANSCEIVER

3DB04131AA–– 411200588 10128T 8
128QAM
10,0–10,7 GHZ RECEIVER 3DB04126AA–– 474210183 10128R 16
9610LSY L.O. 3DB03971AA–– 474210449 10LO 16
This channel plan is completely defined by the CEPT–ERC 12–05 Recommendation and is based on a
frequency channel spacing of 28 MHz.
In case of simple transmission of a single STM–1 per RF frequency, the above channel plan allows the
use of a single or double polarized antenna up to a 7+1/8+0 system configuration.
9610LSY may work in the above plan by co–channel frequency re–use operation (CCDP) with the XPIC
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 453 / 514
514
9610 LSY Channel plan A: MEDIASET
CEPT–ERC 12–05

STM–1

CS=28; DS=350
fn=f0–329+28n
fn’=f0+21+28n
f0=10329
n : from 1 to 10

1 10028 1’ 10378
2 10056 2’ 10406
3 10084 3’ 10434
4 10112 4’ 10462
5 10140 5’ 10490
6 10168 6’ 10518
7 10196 7’ 10546
8 10224 8’ 10574
9 10252 9’ 10602
10 10280 10’ 10630
10028 10084 10140 10196 10252 10378 10434 10490 10546 10602
H (V)
2 4 6 8 10 2’ 4’ 6’ 8’ 10’
V (H) 1 3 5 7 9 1’ 3’ 5’ 7’ 9’
10056 10112 10168 10224 10280 10406 10462 10518 10574 10630
f0 = 10329
Fig. 224. 9610 LSY Channel plan A: MEDIASET

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 454 / 514
514
16 9611LSY

Label for
MAX
Qty
Inventory
9611LSY TRANSCEIVER

3DB02900AA–– 411200555 11128T 8
128QAM
9611LSY L.O. 3DB02674AA–– 474210298 11LO 16
In Fig. 225. on page 456 ( ITU–R F.387 rec. 1 ) and Fig. 226. on page 457 ( ITU–R F.387 ANNEX 2 ) the
two possible channel plans for the 9611LSY equipment to be used for the exploitation of the 10.7 to 11.7
GHz band are shown.
These channel plans are completely defined by the ITU–R Recommendation F.387 and are based on a
frequency channel spacing of 40 MHz.
In case of simple transmission of a single STM–1 per RF frequency, the above channel plans allow the
use of a single polarized antenna up to a 5+1/6+0 system configuration and of a double polarized antenna
up to a 7+1/8+0 system configuration for alternated channels.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 455 / 514
514
9611 LSY Channel plan A: ITU–R F.387 rec. 1
ITU–R F.387 recomm.1

STM–1

CS=40; DS=530
fn=f0–525+40n
fn’=f0+5+40n
f0=11200
n : from 1 to 12

1 10715 1’ 11245
2 10755 2’ 11285
3 10795 3’ 11325
4 10835 4’ 11365
5 10875 5’ 11405
6 10915 6’ 11445
7 10955 7’ 11485
8 10995 8’ 11525
9 11035 9’ 11565
10 11075 10’ 11605
11 11115 11’ 11645
12 11155 12’ 11685
10715 10795 10875 10955 11035 11115 11245 11325 11405 11485 11565 11645
H (V)
2 4 6 8 10 12 2’ 4’ 6’ 8’ 10’ 12’
V (H) 1 3 5 7 9 11 1’ 3’ 5’ 7’ 9’ 11’
10755 10835 10915 10995 11075 11155 11285 11365 11445 11525 11606 11685
f0 = 11200
Fig. 225. 9611 LSY Channel plan A: ITU–R F.387 rec. 1

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 456 / 514
514
9611 LSY Channel plan B: ITU–R F.387 ANNEX 2

STM–1
CS=40; DS=490
fn=f0–505+40n
fn’=f0–15+40n
f0=11200
n : from 1 to 12

1 10735 1’
2 10775 2’ 11265
3 10815 3’ 11305
4 10855 4’ 11345
5 10895 5’ 11385
6 10935 6’ 11425
7 10975 7’ 11465
8 11015 8’ 11505
9 11055 9’ 11545
10 11095 10’ 11585
11 11135 11’ 11625
12 11175 12’ 11665
10735 10815 10895 10975 11055 11135 11225 11305 11385 11465 11545 11625
H (V)
2 4 6 8 10 12 2’ 4’ 6’ 8’ 10’ 12’
V (H) 1 3 5 7 9 11 1’ 3’ 5’ 7’ 9’ 11’
10775 10855 10935 11015 11095 11175 11265 11345 11425 11505 11585 11665
f0 = 11200
Fig. 226. 9611 LSY Channel plan B: ITU–R F.387 ANNEX 2

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 457 / 514
514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
458 / 514
17 9613LSY

Label for
MAX
Qty
Inventory
9613LSY TRANSCEIVER

3DB02890AA–– 411200554 13128T 8
128QAM
9613LSY L.O. 3DB02675AA–– 474210299 13LO 16
the 13 GHz band is shown.
Channel plan is completely defined by the ITU–R Recommendation F.497.
9613LSY may work in the above plan by co–channel frequency re–use operation (CCDP) with the XPIC
14 MHz channel spacing is also available to support the STM–0 capacity.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 459 / 514
514
9613 LSY Channel plan A: ITU–R F.497 Rec.1
ITU–R F.497 rec.1 ITU–R F.497 rec.1

STM–0 STM–1

CS=14; DS=268 CS=28; DS=268
fn=f0–252+14n fn=f0–259+28n
fn’=f0+14+14n fn’=f0+7+28n
f0=12996 f0=12996

1 12758 1’
1 12765 1’ 13031
2 12772 2’ 13038
3 12786 3’ 13052
2 12793 2’ 13059
4 12800 4’ 13066
5 12814 5’ 13080
3 12821 3’ 13087
6 12828 6’ 13094
7 12842 7’ 13108
4 12849 4’ 13115
8 12856 8’ 13122
9 12870 9’ 13136
5 12877 5’ 13143
10 12884 10’ 13150
11 12898 11’ 13164

6 12905 6’ 13171
12 12912 12’ 13178
13 12926 13’ 13192

7 12933 7’ 13199
14 12940 14’ 13206
15 12954 15’ 13220

8 12961 8’ 13227
16 12968 16’ 13234
Fig. 227. 9613 LSY Channel plan A: ITU–R F.497 Rec.1

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 460 / 514
514
STM–0
12758 12786 12814 1284212870 12898 12926 12954 13024 13082 13080 1310813136 13164 13192 13220
H (V)
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 2’ 4’ 6’ 8’ 10’ 12’ 14’ 16’
V (H) 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 1’ 3’ 5’ 7’ 9’ 11’ 13’ 15’
12772 12800 12828 1285612884 12912 12940 12968 13038 13066 13094 1312213150 13178 13206 13234
f0 = 12996
STM–1
12765 12821 12877 12933 13031 13087 13143 13199
H (V)
2 4 6 8 2’ 4’ 6’ 8’
V (H) 1 3 5 7 1’ 3’ 5’ 7’
12793 12849 12905 12961 13059 13115 13171 13227
f0 = 12996
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 461 / 514
514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
462 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
Chapter 18 – Documentation Guide
SECTION CONTENT
Chapter 19 – Safety–EMC–ESD norms and equipment labelling
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
483
465
PAGE
APPENDICES
463 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
464 / 514
18 DOCUMENTATION GUIDE
18.1 Introduction
This chapter contains all information regarding the Customer Documentation and is organized as follows:
INFORMATION REGARDING 9600LSY REL.1.0 & 2.0 CUSTOMER DOCUMENTATION
– Product–release–version handbooks on page 466

gives the list and description of the Customer Documentation set this handbook belongs to.
INFORMATION REGARDING CUSTOMER DOCUMENTATION IN GENERAL
– General on Alcatel Customer Documentation on page 472

including:
• Customer–Independent Standard Customer Documentation on page 472
• Product levels and associated Customer Documentation on page 473
• Typical contents of Technical & Craft Terminal Operator’s Handbooks on page 475
• Documentation on paper on page 477
• Documentation on CD–ROM on page 479
• Handbook and CD–ROM supply to Customers on page 481

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 465 / 514
514
18.2 Product–release–version handbook
This paragraph:

– lists and briefly describes the handbooks making up the documentation set envisaged for 9600LSY

Rel.1.0 & Rel.2.0 product releases
– and points out those the Operators should have, in order to carry out the required operations on the
9600LSY/LHR equipment configuration.
Please refer to following para.18.3 on page 472 for a general description of Alcatel Customer
Documentation system.
The list of handbooks given here below is valid as at the issue date of this Handbook and
can be changed without any obligation for ALCATEL to update it in this Handbook.
Some of the handbooks listed here below may not be available as at the issue date of this
Handbook.
The 9600LSY system can be supplied in the basic configurations (LHR, LHRC and WMSN) introduced
In para.18.2.1, starting herebelow, the documentation set specific for 9600LSY subsystem types (LHR and
LHRC) is described.
In para.18.2.2 on page 471, the documentation sets specific for associated subsystems types (OPTINEX
rack and 1650SM–C) are described.
18.2.1 9600LSY specific equipment handbooks and CD–ROMs
The standard Customer Documentation in the English language for the 9600LSY Rel.1.0 & Rel.2.0
system is modularly composed by different handbooks, each of which can be applied to a specific
version/configuration or to various versions/configurations.
Tab. 77. on page 467 lists the handbooks and indicates their use according to the versions/configurations
stated above.
The [REF] indication in Tab. 77. is relevant to the handbook brief description given in tables Tab. 78. thru’
Tab. 83. in the following.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 466 / 514
514
Tab. 77. Handbooks usage according to System configuration
USAGE
HANDBOOK REF Rel.1.0 Rel.2.0

LHR LHR LHRC

TECHNICAL HANDBOOKS
9600LSY/LHR Technical Handbook [A] X
9600LSY/LHRC Technical Handbook [B] X
OPERATOR’S HANDBOOKS
9600LSY CT Operator’s Handbook SWP 1.0 [C] X
9600LSY CT Operator’s Handbook SWP 2.0 [D] X X
1320CT Basic Operator’s Handbook [J] X
1330AS Operator’s Handbook [K] X
ELM Operator’s Handbook [L] X
INSTALLATION AND LINE–UP HANDBOOKS
9600LSY/LHR Installation Handbook [E] X
9600LSY/LHR Line–up Guide [F] X
9600LSY/LHRC Installation Handbook [G] X
9600LSY/LHRC Line–up Guide [H] X
Interference investigation procedure [I] X
DOCUMENTATION CD–ROM
DCP 9600LSY CD_ROM [M] X
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 467 / 514
514
The standard Customer Documentation in the English language for the equipment whose
product-release-version is stated in para.1.2 on page 21 consists of the following handbooks:
Tab. 78. Technical Handbooks related to the specific configuration

THIS
FACTORY
REF HANDBOOK ANV Part No. HDBK
Part No.
or NOTE
9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0

3DB 02839 AAAA 955.203.292 Q
Technical Handbook
[A] To be used in the 9600LSY/LHR Regenerator configuration.

Provides information regarding Equipment description and composition,
Hardware setting documentation, and Maintenance (together with handbook
REF.[C] or REF.[D])
9600LSY/LHRC Rel.2.0
3DB 02839 BAAA 955.203.293 R
Technical Handbook
[B] To be used in the 9600LSY/LHRC Regenerator configuration.

Provides information regarding Equipment description and composition,
Hardware setting documentation, and Maintenance (together with handbook
REF.[D])
Tab. 79. Handbooks related to the specific product SWP management and local product control
THIS
FACTORY
Part No.
or NOTE
9600LSY Rel.1.0
3DB 02838 AAAA 957.207.022 A
CT Operator’s Handbook SWP 1.0
To be used with:
[C] – SWP REG.9600LSY R.1.0
in association with LHR configuration only.
Provides 9600LSY/LHR screens and operational procedures for Equipment SW
management and maintenance.
9600LSY Rel.2.0
3DB 02838 BAAA 957.207.023 B
CT Operator’s Handbook SWP 2.0
To be used with:
[D] – SWP REG.9600LSY R.2.0
in association with both LHR and LHRC configurations.
Provides 9600LSY/LHR/LHRC screens and operational procedures for Equipment
SW management and maintenance.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 468 / 514
514
Tab. 80. Installation and Line–Up Handbooks related to the specific configuration
• The Installation Handbook provides information regarding Equipment installation, according to
Alcatel Installation Engineering Dept. rules.
• The Line–up Guide provides information regarding equipment line up, according to Alcatel
Installation Engineering Dept. rules.

THIS
FACTORY
Part No.
or NOTE
9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0

3DB 02840 AAAA 955.203.302 S
Installation Handbook
[E]
To be used in the 9600LSY LHR Regenerator configurations.
9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0

3DB 02841 AAAA 955.203.312 K
Line Up guide
[F]
To be used in the 9600LSY LHR Regenerator configurations.
3DB 02840 BAAA 955.203.303
Installation Handbook
[G]
To be used in the 9600LSY LHRC Regenerator configurations.
3DB 02841 BAAA 955.203.313
Line Up guide
[H]
To be used in the 9600LSY LHRC Regenerator configurations.
Tab. 81. Handbooks common to all Alcatel Radio Transmission products
THIS
FACTORY
Part No.
or NOTE
Interference investigation procedure 3DB 04165 EAAA 955.203.374 Z
[I] Describes the measurement procedure for the interference searching in the various
RF bands used by Alcatel Radio Transmission products.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 469 / 514
514
Tab. 82. Handbooks common to Alcatel Network Elements using 1320CT platform
N.B. 1320CT and Q3CT–P are equivalent terms

THIS

FACTORY
Part No.
or NOTE
1320CT
3AL 79186 AAAA 957.130.542 E
Basic Operator’s Handbook
[J]
Provides general information and operational procedures common to all 1320CT
(Craft terminal) of Alcatel InfoModel Network Elements.
1330AS Rel.5.0
3AL 71079 AAAA 957.130.442 A
Operator’s Handbook
[K]
Provides detailed information and operational procedures regarding the alarm
Surveillance software embedded in the 1320CT software package.
ELM Rel.5.0 Operator’s Handbook 3AL 71081 AAAA 957.130.462 E
[L] Provides detailed information and operational procedures regarding the Event Log
Management software embedded in the 1320CT software package.
Tab. 83. Documentation on CD–ROM
REF CD–ROM TITLE ANV Part No. FACTORY Part No.
DCP 9600LSY 1.0/2.0 CD–ROM 3DB 02831 AAAA 417.200.017 D
[M] Contains, in electronic format, all handbooks: REF.[A] to [L]

Envisaged after the release of all handbooks (of a Network Element type)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 470 / 514
514
18.2.2 Related equipment handbooks and CD–ROMs
18.2.2.1 Handbooks and CD–ROMs of OPTINEX Rack

Tab. 84. Handbooks related to the product’s hardware
FACTORY
REF HANDBOOK ANV Part No.
Part No.
[N] Optinex Racks Rel.3.0.0 Technical Handbook 3AL 37953 AAAA 955.100.922 C
Tab. 85. Documentation on CD–ROM
REF CD–ROM TITLE ANV Part No. FACTORY Part No.
Optinex Racks Rel.3.0 CD–ROM–DOC EN 3AL 37954 AAAA 417.100.026

[O]
Contains, in electronic format, the following handbooks: REF.[N]
18.2.2.2 Handbooks and CD–ROMs of 1650SM–C
1650SM–C has its own:
– Technical Handbook
– Installation Handbook
– Commissioning Handbook
– CT Operator’s Handbook
– CD–ROM containing the above cited handbooks.
Their P/Ns are not indicated here, as they depend on the Product release and Software Package version.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 471 / 514
514
18.3 General on Alcatel Customer Documentation
This paragraph describes in general the Alcatel Customer Documentation system, details the association
between the product levels and the associated documentation, and explains Customer Documentation

characteristics as well as the policies for its delivery and updating.

This paragraph is fully applicable to the 2nd generation Radio Product families of Alcatel WTD (Wireless
Transmission Division) only.
The documentation typical contents described in para.18.3.3 on page 475, apply to handbooks issued
after February 2002.
18.3.1 Customer–Independent Standard Customer Documentation
a) Definition
Standard Customer Documentation, referred to hereafter, must be always meant as

plant–independent and is always independent of any Customization.
Plant–dependent and/or Customized documentation, if envisaged by the contract, is subjected to

commercial criteria as far as contents, formats and supply conditions are concerned
N.B. Plant–dependent and Customized documentation is not described here.
b) Aims of standard Customer Documentation
Standard system, hardware and software documentation is meant to give the Customer personnel
the possibility and the information necessary for installing, commissioning, operating, and
maintaining the equipment according to Alcatel Laboratory design and Installation Dept. choices. In
particular:
• the contents of the handbooks associated to the software applications focus on the explanation
of the man–machine interface and of the operating procedures allowed by it;
• maintenance is described down to faulty PCB location and replacement.
N.B. No supply to Customers of design documentation (like PCB hardware design and
production documents and files, software source programs, programming tools, etc.) is
envisaged.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 472 / 514
514
18.3.2 Product levels and associated Customer Documentation

a) Products
A ”product” is defined by the network hierarchical level where it can be inserted and by the whole
of performances and services that it is meant for.
E.g. 9600USY is a product (STM–1/0 Urban Digital Radio Link).
b) Product-releases
A ”product” evolves through successive ”product-releases”, which are the real products marketed
for their delivery at a certain ”product-release” availability date. A certain ”product-release” performs
more functionalities than the previous one.
E.g. 9600USY Rel.1.0 and 9600USY Rel.2.0 are two successive ”product-releases” of the same
”product”.
A ”product–release” comprehends a set of hardware components and at least one “Software
Package” (SWP); as a whole, they identify the possible network applications and the equipment
performances that the specific ”product-release” has been designed, engineered, and marketed for.
c) Configurations and Network Elements

In some cases, a ”product-release” includes different possible “configurations” which are
distinguished from one another by different “Network Element” (NE) types and, from the
management point of view, by different SWPs.
E.g. 9600USY Rel.1.0 includes various configurations with various NE types (Regenerator
1+0/1+1/2+0 with NE types UHR/UHRC; Regenerator 3+1/4+0 with NE type UHRN; WMSN with
NE types UHR/UHRC/UHM/UHMC) each of which has its own specific SWP.
d) SWP Releases and Versions
See Fig. 228. herebelow.

A SWP is identified by the “configuration” name and by the “version” number (tree digits).
The version’s first digit corresponds to the “product–release” number first digit; the second digit
identifies, together with the first, the SWP “release”.
The third digit of the SWP version identifies the Patch Level of the SWP Release.
SWP version
SWP Release
Product Patch Level

Release’s
first digit
1. 0. 7
SWP evolution for bug fixing purposes
(same SWP Release within same Product–Release) 1. 0. 9
SWP evolution for additional features 1. 0. 7

(new SWP Release within same Product–Release)
(N.B. see next page) 1. 1. 2
1. 0. 7
SWP evolution for additional features
(new SWP Release of a new Product–Release) 2. 0. 2
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 228. Example of SWP Release and Version numbering
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 473 / 514
514
N.B. Sometimes, different SWP Releases (within the same Product–Release) are commercially
distinguished by different names, e.g. :
SWP version SWP–Release commercial name

1.0.x 1.0
1.1.x 1.0B
1.2.x 1.0C
e) Customer Documentation
A ”product-release–(configuration)” has its own set of standard Customer Documentation, usually

formed of several handbooks, i.e., in general:
• System and Hardware documentation:

– one (or more) Technical Handbook(s) (see page 475 for details)
– an Installation Handbook
– a Commissioning Handbook or Line–Up Guide
• Software documentation:
– a Craft Terminal Operator’s Handbook, associated to the specific SWP–Release (see
page 476 for details)
– other Operator’s Handbooks (typically those associated to the SW platform embedded
in the SWP)
PRODUCT
evolution
PRODUCT–RELEASE 1.0 PRODUCT–RELEASE 2.0
ALTERNATIVE CONFIGURATIONS
CONFIG.A CONFIG.B
evolution
PRODUCT SWP REL.1.0 SWP REL.1.1
LEVELS
DOCUMENTATION
CONFIG.A SWP REL.1.0 SWP REL.1.1

System & HW SW SW
Documentation Documentation Documentation
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 229. Example of Product levels and associated Customer Documentation
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 474 / 514
514
18.3.3 Typical contents of Technical & Craft Terminal Operator’s Handbooks
a) Technical Handbook
It is usually composed by a ’main handbook’ and ’enclosed documents’. Information is divided into
the following levels (not necessarily in this sequence):

MAIN HANDBOOK:
• GENERAL INFORMATION
– Documentation Guide : contains general information on the Customer Documentation

set envisaged for the equipment and detailed information regarding the specific
handbook, like handbook structure/history and abbreviation list.
– Safety–EMC–ESD norms and equipment labelling : describes the equipment labelling

and the norms mandatory or suggested that must be considered to avoid injuries on
persons and/or damage to the equipment.
• INFORMATIVE LEVEL
– System Description : gives the first–level description of equipment in the specific

configuration the handbook is meant for. The information given is enough to understand
the equipment composition and operation and to read the operative level chapters.
– Functional Description : gives the second–level description of equipment in the specific

configuration the handbook is meant for. Reading this chapter is not necessary to carry
out standard installation commissioning and maintenance activities.
– Technical Specifications : it supplies in detail the equipment technical characteristics.
• OPERATIVE LEVEL
– Physical Configuration : gives detailed operative information regarding:

• the equipment’s items (P/Ns, equipping rules, labels for remote inventory)
• their physical and logical position in the system
• the unit assembly/subassembly and front panel drawings, with the usage description
of the access points (connectors, visual indicators, buttons)
• hardware setting description
• pinout description of connectors for Customer usage
• summary and operative information on characteristics of external interfaces
– Station Layouts : lists and describes the most common of all the available system
configurations envisaged for the specific configuration the handbook is meant for. For
each configuration a station layout (with cable interconnection diagram) and a simple
system block diagram are present.
– Maintenance : describes the equipment routine and corrective maintenance procedures

as well as those for the unit replacement with spare parts.
– Hardware Setting Documentation & Annexes : lists the enclosed documents having
P/N different from that of the handbook (they can be used also as annexes to other
handbooks) and describes how to use the Hardware Setting Documents enclosed.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ENCLOSED DOCUMENTS : Hardware Setting Documents and other documents for specific
purposes (typical examples: ODU repair procedures, branching detailed configurations and
drawings, etc.)
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 475 / 514
514
b) Craft Terminal Operator’s Handbook
It is usually composed by various sections. Each section is an independent document that can evolve
independently from the others. The sections always present are:

• SECTION 1: INTRODUCTION containing the following main parts (not necessarily in this

sequence):
– Documentation Guide and Safety–EMC–ESD norms and equipment labelling, as

Technical Handbook
– SWP description : lists and describes the Software Packages the Handbook refers to.
– Installation : describes in detail the operations necessary for the SWP installation and
upgrading (ECT parts and equipment parts).
– ECT–equipment remote connections : gives instructions to allow the remote connection

between ECT and the equipment.
• SECTION 2: NE MANAGEMENT : gives the description of the menu structure and of all the NE
functionalities available in the Craft Terminal. This section is organized in several chapters
grouped according to the following general scheme:
– General information
– Equipment configuration management
– Setting of parameters for maintenance
– Events Log and Performance Monitoring management
– Software management
• SECTION 3: NE MAINTENANCE : gives the description of the NE troubleshooting based on

the use of the Craft Terminal.
Depending on the SWP contents, other sections can be present in the handbook, to describe other
specific applications or features.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 476 / 514
514
18.3.4 Documentation on paper
a) Handbook format
Handbooks are supplied on A4–sized papers for text and general drawings, and, when necessary,
A3–sized papers for detailed drawings, in four ring solid/plastic–covered binders.
b) Handbook languages
Handbook standard language is English. As far as handbooks supplied in other languages,

translation is relevant to the text and the drawings within the text.
With regard to Operator’s Handbooks containing screen prints of the software applications, the
screens included are in the language envisaged by the applicative software supplied to the Customer
(e.g. an Operator’s Handbook translated in Russian has the screens in English if the user interface
is not in Russian).
Engineering documentation (like selected sheets of unit schematics and component lay–out given
only as hardware presetting documentation) is bilingual Italian–English.
c) Handbook identification
Each handbook is identified by:
• the name of the ”product-release”,
• the name of the ”configuration”, if more than one is envisaged within the ”product-release”,
• the first two digits of the ”SWP–version” as far as Operator’s Handbook is concerned,
• the handbook name,
• the handbook part number,
• the handbook edition:

– first draft edition=01A
– second draft edition=01B
– .....
– first validated edition=01
– second validated edition=02
– nnth validated edition=nn
• the handbook issue date. The date on the handbook does not refer to the date of printing, but
to the date on which the handbook source file has been completed and released for production.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 477 / 514
514
d) Handbook updating
The documentation is maintained updated according to the technical changes of the product it refers
to, provided that these technical changes does really impact Customer Documentation (e.g.:

generally, bug–fixing releases do not impact the Operator’s Handbook). Updating of handbooks,

when necessary, is done synchronously with the product’s industrial technical change, in due time
for having the new product version and the handbook’s associated new edition available at the same
time.
1) Changes introduced in the same product-release (same handbook P/N)
In case of handbook updating for its technical contents:
– the edition, hence the date, is increased;
– the sections/chapters modified with respect to the previous edition are listed in a suitable
Handbook History Table in the Handbook Guide section;
– a specific note in the same section sums–up the reasons for the change;
– in the affected chapters, revision bars on the left of the page indicate modifications in text
and drawings (this is done after the first officially released and validated version).
NOTES FOR HANDBOOKS RELEVANT TO SOFTWARE APPLICATIONS
Handbooks relevant to software applications (typically the Operator’s Handbooks)

are not modified unless the new SWP version distributed to Customers implies
man–machine interface changes or in case of slight modifications not affecting the
understanding of the explained procedures.
Moreover, should the screen prints included in the handbook contain the “SWP
version” marking, they are not replaced in the handbooks related to a subsequent
version if the screen contents are unchanged.
2) Changes due to a new product-release
A new product-release changes the handbook P/N and the edition starts from 01. In this case,
the modified parts of the handbook are not listed.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 478 / 514
514
18.3.5 Documentation on CD–ROM
a) Contents
A Customer–Documentation CD–ROM is conceived to contain in read–only electronic format the

handbooks of all the product-release–(configurations) of one product–release.

The first edition of a CD–ROM is created only when all the handbooks of the first released
product-release–configuration of one product–release have been issued as first validated editions.
If envisaged, the handbooks relevant to other product-release–configurations of the same
product–release are added in a further CD–ROM edition, when they are all completed and validated.
No additional information is added to each handbook, so that the documentation present in the
CD–ROM is exactly the same the Customer would receive on paper (with the same handbook
editions).
b) Standards
CD–ROMs are generated according to ISO 9660 norms.

A master CD–ROM is obtained as follows:
• each source document is converted into .pdf format by Adobe Acrobat Distiller 4.0;
• bookmarks are generated for complex documents in order to make the navigation inside the
documents easier;
• some hyperlinks, which make the navigation through the various handbooks easier, are
manually added. The following hyperlinks are standard:
– from the INDEX document toward each individual file contained in the CD–ROM
– from section “Hardware Setting Documentation & Annexes” of each Technical Handbook,
toward each specific document listed in the section itself (these documents could be
collected in a separate file).
The files processed in this way are then transferred on a PC where a master CD–ROM is recorded.
Suitable checks are made in order to have a virus–free product.
The CD–ROM can be used both in PC and Unix WS environments or any other environment for which
a suitable Reader has been envisaged by Adobe.
In order to open correctly the pdf files contained in the CD–ROM, the use of Acrobat Reader Version
4.0 at least is mandatory.
The CD–ROM does not contain the Acrobat Reader program. Getting it and installing it on the
Customer specific platform is on Customer’s charge.
c) CD–ROM identification
Each CD–ROM is identified:
1) by the following external identifiers, that are printed both on the booklet and the CD–ROM upper
surface:
– the name of the ”product–release”,
– a writing indicating the language(s),
– the CD–ROM P/N (Factory P/N and ANV P/N),
– the CD–ROM edition (first edition=01)
2) and, internally, by the list of the source handbooks and documents (P/Ns and editions) by whose
collection and processing the CD–ROM itself has been created.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 479 / 514
514
d) CD–ROM updating
The list of source handbook/document P/Ns–editions indicated in previous para.c ) point 2 ), in

association with the CD–ROM’s own P/N–edition, is also loaded in the Alcatel–Information–System

as a structured list.

Whenever a new edition of any of such handbooks/documents is released in the Alcatel archive
system, the Alcatel–Information–System automatically rises a warning toward the Customer
Documentation department, indicating the list of CD–ROMs that must be updated to include the new
editions of these handbooks/documents.
This causes the planning and creation of a new edition of the CD–ROM.
Updating of CD–ROMs always follows, with a certain delay, the updating of the single handbooks
composing the collection.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 480 / 514
514
18.3.6 Handbook and CD–ROM supply to Customers
a) Standard supply
Handbooks and CD–ROMs are standard commercial items and are ordered and delivered as any
other Alcatel commercial item.

Handbooks and CD–ROMs are not automatically delivered together with the equipment they refer
to.
The number of handbooks or CD–ROMs per type to be supplied must be decided at contract level.
b) Product–documentation consistency
Equipment description and lay–out are always general, i.e. they never describe the actual
composition of the equipment supplied to Customer (this task is entrusted to plant–dependent
documentation).
Detailed hardware documentation concerns actually supplied units and is coherent with the
production issue of such units.
Software–associated handbooks are coherent with the supplied SWP release.
Copies of the handbooks regarding a specific product–release previously delivered can be required
specifying P/N and edition.
c) In–advance supply
Whenever handbooks or CD–ROMs are delivered before the relevant equipment delivery, there is
the risk that their contents might not agree with the characteristics of the equipment which will be
delivered: the more they are in advance the less are they likely to agree.
d) Supplying updated handbooks and CD–ROMs to Customers
Supplying updated handbooks or CD–ROMs to Customers who have already received previous
issues is subject to commercial criteria.
By updated handbook delivery, we mean the supply of a complete copy of a new issue of the
handbook (supplying errata–corrige sheets is not envisaged).
e) Copyright notification
The technical information of the handbooks and CD–ROMs supplied to Customers is the property
of ALCATEL and must not be copied, reproduced or disclosed to a third party without written consent.
f) Supply to Customers of Customer Documentation source files
Presently not envisaged.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 481 / 514
514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
482 / 514
19 SAFETY–EMC–ESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING
19.1 Introduction
This chapter describes the equipment labelling and the norms mandatory or suggested (see also point
3 ) on page 16) that must be considered to avoid injuries on persons and/or damage to the equipment.
The stated norms apply both to the operations described in this manual and to those described in the
related manuals listed in para.18.2 on page 466.
– Compliance with European Norms herebelow
– Safety Rules on page 484

including:
• General Rules on page 484

• Labels Indicating Danger, Forbiddance, Command on page 485
• Dangerous Electrical Voltages on page 486
• Harmful Optical Signals on page 487
• Risks of Explosions on page 489
• Moving Mechanical Parts on page 489
• Heat–radiating Mechanical Parts on page 490
• Microwave radiations on page 491
• Specific safety rules in this handbook on page 491
– Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC norms) on page 492

including:
• EMC General Norms – Installation on page 492

• EMC General Norms – Turn–on, Tests & Operation on page 493
• EMC General Norms – Maintenance on page 493
– Equipment protection against electrostatic discharges on page 494
– Suggestions, notes and cautions on page 494
– Labels affixed to the Equipment on page 495

including:
• Labels specific for 9600LSY Equipment on page 495

• General use labels on page 496
19.2 Compliance with European Norms
Refer to chapter 6 on page 315.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 483 / 514
514
19.3 Safety Rules
19.3.1 General Rules

• Before carrying out any installation, turn–on, tests & operation and maintenance operations
carefully read the related Handbooks, in particular:
– Installation
– Line–Up or Commissioning
– Maintenance chapter of the Technical Handbook
• Observe safety rules
– When equipment is operating nobody is allowed to have access inside on the equipment
parts which are protected with Cover Plate Shields removable with tools
– In case of absolute need to have access inside, on the equipment parts when it is operating
this is allowed exclusively to service personnel, where for Service Personnel or Technical
assistance is meant :
”personnel which has adequate Technical Knowledge and experience necessary to be

aware of the danger that he might find in carrying out an operation and of the necessary
measurements to reduce danger to minimum for him and for others”.
The Service Personnel can only replace the faulty units with spare parts.
The Service Personnel is not allowed to repair: hence the access to the parts no specified
is not permitted.
The keys and/or the tools used to open doors, hinged covers to remove parts which give
access to compartments in which are present high dangerous voltages must belong
exclusively to the service personnel.
– For the eventual cleaning of the external parts of the equipment, absolutely do not use any
inflammable substance or substances which in some way may alter the markings,
inscriptions etc.
– It is recommended to use a slightly wet cleaning cloth.
• The Safety Rules stated in the handbook describe the operations and/or precautions to observe
to safeguard service personnel during the working phases and to guarantee equipment safety,
i.e., not exposing persons, animals, things to the risk of being injured/damaged.
• Whenever the safety protection features have been impaired, REMOVE POWER.
To cut off power proceed to switch off the power supply units as well as cut off power station
upstream (rack or station distribution frame).
• The safety rules described in this handbook are distinguished by the following symbol and
statement:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
SAFETY RULES
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 484 / 514
514
19.3.2 Labels Indicating Danger, Forbiddance, Command
It is of utmost importance to follow the instructions printed on the labels affixed to the units and assemblies.
The labels are fully compliant with International Norms ISO 3846–1984. The symbols or statements are
enclosed in geometric shapes: ISO 3864–1984.
CONTAINS A SYMBOL STATEMENT

INDICATES FORBIDDANCE (WHITE BACKGROUND
WHIT RED RIM–BLACK SYMBOL OR STATEMENT)
IT IS A COMMAND (BLUE BACKGROUND–WHITE
SYMBOL OR STATEMENT).
CONTAINS A SYMBOL
INDICATES WARNING OR DANGER (YELLOW
BACKGROUND–BLACK SYMBOL AND RIM)
CONTAINS A STATEMENT PROVIDING INFORMATION

OR INSTRUCTION.
(YELLOW BACKGROUND–BLACK STATEMENT AND RIM)
The labels have been affixed to indicate a dangerous condition. They may contain any standard–known
symbol or any statement necessary to safeguard users and service personnel against the most common
ones, specifically:
• dangerous electrical voltages
• harmful optical signals
• risk of explosion
• moving mechanical parts
• heat–radiating Mechanical Parts
• microwave radiations
Pay attention to the information stated in the following, and proceed as instructed
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 485 / 514
514
The symbols presented in para.19.3.3 through 19.3.8 are all the possible symbols that
could be present on Alcatel equipment, but are not all necessarily present on the
equipment this handbook refers to.

19.3.3 Dangerous Electrical Voltages
19.3.3.1 Electrical safety: Labelling
The following warning label is affixed next to dangerous voltages (>42.4 Vp; >60 Vdc).
If it is a Class 1 equipment connected to mains, then the label associated to it will state that the equipment
will have to be grounded before connecting it to the power supply voltage, e.g.:
WARNING !
Ground protect the equipment before
connecting it to manins
Make sure that power has been cut off
before disconnecting ground protection.
19.3.3.2 Electrical safety: general rules
DANGER! Possibility of personal injury: carefully observe the specific

procedures for installation / turn–up and commissioning / maintenance of equipment parts where a.c. or
d.c. power is present, described in the relevant installation / turn–up and commissioning / maintenance
documents and the following general rules:
a) Personal injury can be caused by –48 V dc (or by 220 V ac if envisaged in the equipment). Avoid
touching powered terminals with any exposed part of your body.
b) Short circuiting, low-voltage, low-impedance, dc circuits can cause severe arcing that can result in
burns and/or eye damage. Remove rings, watches, and other metal jewelry before working with
primary circuits. Exercise caution to avoid shorting power input terminals.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 486 / 514
514
19.3.4 Harmful Optical Signals
19.3.4.1 Optical safety: Labelling

If the assembly or unit is fitted with a LASER, the labels must comply with the IEC 60825–1 and –2
International Norms.
If the assembly or unit is fitted with a LASER, the labels must comply with the IEC 825–1–1993
International Norms.
The symbol indicates the presence of a LASER beam. Danger level is stated within a rectangular label:
If the LASER is a class 1 product, the label depicting the symbol within a triangle is not compulsory.
The rectangular shaped label bears all the information needed, i.e.:
• LASER class
• Power emitted
• Wave length
• Ref. Norm
• Precautionary measures taken depend on LASER class
• Indications given on openings, panels and safety interlockers
LASER RADIATION
CAUTION DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM OR VIEW
LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM OR VIEW CLASS 3A LASER PRODUCT
DIRECTLY WITH OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS P.MAX=31m...... =1300mm. IEC 825 1993
exemple of power and lenght values
See para.6.8.4 on page 340 for further information.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 487 / 514
514
19.3.4.2 Optical safety: general rules
On handling optical equipments or units or cables always check that laser labels are properly affixed and
that the system complies with applicable optical standards.

DANGER! Possibility of eyes damage: invisible infrared radiations emitted by
the fiber optic transmitters can cause eyes damages. Carefully observe the specific procedures for
installation / turn–up and commissioning / maintenance of units containing laser devices or cables
transporting optical signals, described in the relevant installation / turn–up and commissioning /
maintenance documents and the following general rules:
a) Laser radiation is not visible by the naked eye or with laser safety glasses. Although it cannot be seen,
laser radiation may be present.
b) Never look directly into an unterminated fiber optic connector or into a broken optical fiber cable,
unless it is absolutely known that no laser radiation is present.
c) Never look at an optical fiber splice, cable or connector, unless it is absolutely known that no laser
radiation is present.
d) All optical connectors, terminating either fibers and transmitters/receivers, are provided with
protective covers that must always be used, as soon as possible, when any optical link is
disconnected for installation/test/maintenance purposes or whatever operation.
e) Never look directly into an unterminated fiber optic connector or into a broken optical fiber cable by
means of magnifiers/microscopes, unless it is absolutely known that no laser radiation is present. A
magnifier/microscope greatly increases the damage hazard to the eyes.
f) Never point an unterminated optical fiber splice, cable or connector to other persons, unless it is
absolutely known that no laser radiation is present.
g) Always remove electrical power from near and far optical transmitters before disconnecting optical
links between the transmitter and the receiver.
h) Wearing of laser safety goggles or eyes shields is recommended for every person working on optical
devices, whenever the above listed rules cannot be followed.
19.3.4.3 Optical safety: equipment specific data
Refer to para.6.8 on page 339.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 488 / 514
514
19.3.5 Risks of Explosions
19.3.5.1 Labelling and safety instructions

This risk is present when batteries are used, and it is signalled by the following label:
Therefore, slits or apertures are made to let air circulate freely and allow dangerous gasses to down flow
(battery–emitted hydrogen). A 417–IEC–5641 Norm. compliant label is affixed next to it indicating that the
openings must not be covered up.
19.3.6 Moving Mechanical Parts
The following warning label is affixed next to fans or other moving mechanical parts:
Before carrying out any maintenance operation see that all the moving mechanical parts have been
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
stopped.
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 489 / 514
514
19.3.7 Heat–radiating Mechanical Parts

The presence of heat–radiating mechanical parts is indicated by the following warning label in compliancy

with IEC 417 Norm, Fig.5041:
As stated by IEC 950 Norm., para.1.4.7 the touchable mechanical parts are those whose temperature T
exceeds the limits established by the following formula (temperatures in °C ):
(T–Tamb) (DTmax + 25° – Tmra)

where:
T Temperature of the mechanical part measured at ambient temperature Tamb.

Tamb Ambient temperature during the test.
DTmax Value defined by IEC 950 Norm, Table 16 part 2a, para.5.1, and specified in the
table below.
Tmra The maximum room ambient temperature permitted by the equipment
specification or 25°C, whichever is greater.
Tab. 86. IEC 950 –Table 16: Overtemperature limits, Part 2
Maximum overtemperature (°C )

Operator–accessible parts
Glass, Plastic,
Metal
porcelain rubber
Handle knob, etc., held or touched

35 45 60
for short periods
Handles, knobs, etc., regularly held 30 40 50
Outer surface of the equipment that

45 55 70
can be touched
Inner surface of the equipment that

45 55 70
can be touched
DANGER! Possibility of personal injury: carefully observe the specific

procedures for installation / turn–up and commissioning / maintenance of equipment parts where
heat–radiating mechanical parts are present, described in the relevant installation / turn–up and
commissioning / maintenance documents and the following general rule:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
a) Personal injury can be caused by heat. Avoid touching powered terminals with any exposed part of
your body.
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 490 / 514
514
19.3.8 Microwave radiations
Microwave radiations can endanger your health. Ensure the transmitters are switched OFF before
working close to and in front of the antennas.
No dangerous level of microwave radiations exists outside the antenna feeder. Nevertheless, body should
not be exposed to the radiation in front of the antenna ( < 0.5 m ) for a long time ( > 6 minutes ).
19.3.9 Specific safety rules in this handbook
Specific safety rules are specified in the following chapters:
– chapter 7, para.7.2.2 on page 356
– chapter 7, para.7.6.1 on page 373

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 491 / 514
514
19.4 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC norms)
The equipment’s EMC norms depend on the type of installation being carried out (cable termination,
grounding etc.,) and on the operating conditions (equipment, setting options of the electrical/electronic

units, presence of dummy covers, etc.).

• Before starting any installation, turn–on, tests & operation and maintenance work refer to the
Technical Handbook, specifically to Handbooks:
– Installation,
– Line–Up or Commissioning
– Maintenance chapter in this Handbook
• The norms set down to guarantee EMC compatibility, are distinguished inside this handbook
by the symbol and term:
ATTENTION EMC NORMS
19.4.1 EMC General Norms – Installation
• All connections (towards the external source of the equipment) made with shielded cables use
only cables and connectors suggested in this technical handbook or in the relevant Plant
Documentation, or those specified in the Customer’s”Installation Norms.” (or similar
documents)
• Shielded cables must be suitably terminated
• Install filters outside the equipment as required
• Ground connect the equipment utilizing a conductor with proper dia. and impedance
• Mount shields (if utilized), previously positioned during the installation phase, but not before
having cleaned and decrease it.
• Before inserting the shielded unit proceed to clean and decrease all peripheral surfaces
(contact springs and connection points, etc.)
• Screw fasten the units to the subrack.
• To correctly install EMC compatible equipment follow the instructions given.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 492 / 514
514
19.4.2 EMC General Norms – Turn–on, Tests & Operation
• Preset the electrical units as required to guarantee EMC compatibility

• Check that the equipment is operating with all the shields properly positioned (dummy covers,
ESD connector protections, etc.)
• To properly use EMC compatible equipment observe the information given
19.4.3 EMC General Norms – Maintenance
• Before inserting the shielded unit, which will replace the faulty or modified unit, proceed to clean
and decrease all peripheral surfaces (contact springs and connection points, etc.)
• Clean the dummy covers of the spare units as well.
• Screw fasten the units to the subrack.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 493 / 514
514
19.5 Equipment protection against electrostatic discharges
Before removing the ESD protections from the monitors, connectors etc., observe the precautionary
measures stated. Make sure that the ESD protections have been replaced and after having terminated

the maintenance and monitoring operations.

Most electronic devices are sensitive to electrostatic discharges, to this concern the following warning
labels have been affixed:
Observe the precautionary measures stated when having to touch the electronic parts during the
installation/maintenance phases.
Workers are supplied with antistatic protection devices consisting of:
• an elasticized band worn around the wrist
• a coiled cord connected to the elasticized band and to the stud on the subrack.
ELASTICIZED BAND
COILED CORD
Fig. 230. Antistatic protection device kit
19.6 Suggestions, notes and cautions
Suggestions and special notes are marked by the following symbol:
Suggestion or note....
Cautions to avoid possible equipment damage are marked by the following symbol:
TITLE...
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

statement....
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 494 / 514
514
19.7 Labels affixed to the Equipment
This paragraph indicates the positions and the information contained on the identification and serial
labels affixed to the equipment, with the exception of those already mentioned in para.19.3.2 (page 485)
thru’ 19.5 (page 494).

The label description is grouped as follows:
– Label specific for 9600LSY Equipment, herebelow
– General Use Labels, starting on page 496.
19.7.1 Label specific for 9600LSY Equipment
LABEL POSITION
ALCATEL
9662 LSY 12345 !
1111111 Certificato Omologazione ITALIA

ISCTI/2/1/01/044000
A
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
SYMBOL OR WRITING MEANING
Alcatel Logo
ALCATEL
9662 LSY (example) Equipment Acronym

CE European Community Logo
12345 (example) Notified body
! Not harmonized frequency logo
Electrostatic Device Logo
1111111 (example) Factory identification

A Factory identification bar code 128
ISCTI/2/1/01/044000 (example) Omologation certificate number (optional)
xxxxxxxxxxxxxx (example) Omologation certificate number (optional)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 231. LSY equipment identification label
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 495 / 514
514
19.7.2 General use labels
Fig. 232. thru’ Fig. 237. illustrate the most common positions of the labels on the units, modules and
subracks.

Fig. 238. thru’ Fig. 239. illustrate the information (e.g., identification and serial No.) printed on the
labels.
The table below relates the ref. numbers stated on the figures to the labels used.
Labelling depicted hereafter is for indicative purposes and could be changed without any notice.
Tab. 87. Label references
Ref. No. Name of Label
1 Label specifying item not on catalogue (P/N. and serial number)
2 Label specifying item on catalogue (P/N. and serial number)
3 Item identification label – item on catalog
4 Label identifying the equipment
5 Label specifying item on catalogue (P/N.) + CE mark
6 Serial number of item specified on catalogue + Subrack ESD mark
7 Omologation certificate number (optional)
On contract basis, customized labels can be affixed to the equipment.
Standard labels can be affixed to any position on the equipment, as required by the Customer.
However, for each of the above are applied the rules defined by each individual Customer.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 496 / 514
514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
4
03
955.203.292 Q
Fig. 232. Large–subrack labels
2
ABCD
NOTE : The above reference numbers are detailed on Tab. 87. on page 496
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
497 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
7
Fig. 233. Small–subrack labels
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
6
NOTE : The above reference numbers are detailed on on Tab. 87. on page 496.
498 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
ABC
xxxxxx
xxxxxx
xxxxxxxxx
2
Fig. 234. Labels on units with standard cover plate
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
3
499 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
ABC
Fig. 235. Modules label
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
NOTE : The above reference numbers are detailed on on Tab. 87. on page 496.
2
500 / 514
NB.1
1
ABC
NB.1 = The label is present on the p.c.s. component side
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 236. Internal label for Printed Board Assembly
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 501 / 514
514
NB.1
ABC
NB. 1 = The label is present on p.c.s. components side or rear side on the empty spaces.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 237. Back panels internal label
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 502 / 514
514
FACTORY P/N + CS
FACTORY SERIAL NUMBER
SERIAL NUMBER BAR CODE

(format 128; Module = 0,166; EN 799; Subset B/C)
Fig. 238. Label specifying item not on catalogue (P/N. and serial number)
ANV ITEM PART NUMBER + space + ICS

ALCATEL FACTORY PART
ANV ITEM PART NUMBER + ICS BAR CODE NUMBER + SPACE + CS
(format ALFA 39 (+ * start, stop); Module = 0,166; Ratio = 2)
ACRONYM
SERIAL NUMBER BAR CODE

SERIAL NUMBER (format ALFA 39 (+ * start, stop); Module = 0,166; Ratio = 2)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Fig. 239. Label specifying item on catalogue (P/N. and serial number)
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 503 / 514
514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
504 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
SECTION CONTENT
Chapter 20 – Hardware Setting Documentation & Annexes
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
507
PAGE
HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION & ANNEXES
505 / 514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
506 / 514
20 HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION & ANNEXES
20.1 Introduction
This chapter contains the documents sheets to refer to for unit/sub–unit hardware setting options.
The list of the enclosed documents is given in Tab. 90. on page 511, according to the ANV part number.
Other enclosed documents are listed in Tab. 91. on page 513.
20.2 Hardware setting documents explanation
– UNIT IDENTIFICATION P/Ns AND CHANGE STATUS
Each unit or sub-unit is distinguished by:
• a dual Part No.:
– Factory P/N (4xx.xxx.xxx x)
– ANV P/N (xxx.xxxxx xx) (NOTE)
NOTE The last two ANV-P/N letters (in the following stated as ’suffix’) stand for a ”feasible
alternative”, they might differentiate two units even though still functionally
compatible. For this reason the indicated ANV P/N does not include the last two
letters.
For example : the units having P/Ns ”3AL–34065–AAAA” and ”3AL–34065–AABA”
are functionally compatible and, as regards to hardware settings, the MSxxx
document (described hereafter) 3AL–34065–AAAA-MSxxx is applicable for both.
• and by a pair of design & production series (change status):
– CS, associated to the Factory P/N (4xx.xxx.xxx x)
– ICS, associated to ANV P/N (xxx.xxxxx xx)
The following table shows an example of correspondence between ”FACTORY P/N + CS” and
”ANV P/N + ICS”
Tab. 88. Example of correspondence between CS and ’suffix + ICS’
FACTORY CODE ANV CODE
P/N CS P/N ICS
487.156.612 01 3AL 34422 AA AA 01
487.156.612 02 3AL 34422 AA AB 01
487.156.612 03 3AL 34422 AA AC 01
N.B. The P/Ns used in this example have no correspondence with those of the actual equipment part
list!
In this example you can see that the production series is identified only by the CS as far as the
Factory code is concerned, and by the ’suffix + ICS’ if the ANV code is referred to.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
Some of the possible positions of the label indicating the unit’s P/Ns and CS–ICS are illustrated
in section HANDBOOK GUIDE.
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 507 / 514
514
– CROSS–REFERENCE
• Tab. 89. on page 510 lists the units having HW setting options and, for each of them, indicates
the documents to be used, that are listed in Tab. 90. on page 511.

The HARDWARE SETTINGS can be executed after having checked all the sub–units belonging to
a unit, by considering the above cited cross–reference, and by using the presetting documents
indicated in Tab. 90. on page 511 and presented in the following point.
– ENCLOSED DOCUMENTS
For each type of unit or sub-unit having customizable setting options, the document
”ANV P/N”–MSxxx
is annexed to this handbook.
The MSxxx documents are enclosed in the ANV P/N order. The Edition of the enclosed MSxxx
document is the highest available at the date on which the Technical Handbook is assembled, or the
CD–ROM containing it is burned.
Use of the document MSxxx:

• MSxxx means ”document for hardware presetting options” (the MSxxx document’s Part No.
is as that of the unit or sub-unit and its MS acronym defines type).
The xxx part of MSxxx is relevant to ANV internal identification codes.
• As the Customer may have to manage many units of the same type (same P/N) but with different
CS–ICS, the document MSxxx describes with possible different chapters the different setting
options, according to all the possible CSs–ICSs. For this purpose, a table at the beginning of
document (PREFACE) indicates the chapter to be used according to the CS or the
corresponding ’suffix + ICS’, taking into account that:
– a change of the production series does not necessarily imply a change in the setting
options;
– a change of the ANV P/N suffix does not imply a new MSxxx document;
– the CS, SUFFIX and ICS must be meant as:
• from specified CS, SUFFIX or ICS (included)
• to next CS, SUFFIX or ICS (excluded) if listed
– the sequence of CSs is increasing from alphanumeric to numeric (e.g. CS=A0 is lower
than CS=01).
Each chapter contains:
– one or more tables defining the relationship between the functions achievable and the
setting options to make;
– the unit layout drawing which shows the exact location of all the setting options.
N.B. IDENTIFIES PIN 1 OF COMPONENT
N.B. To make ”TC” Hardware Settings (when necessary) remove the protective
cover plate present on the rear side of the board and replace it at the end of the
operation
The setting options described in the documents MSxxx must be used according to
3AL377470001 (962.000.022 F) MSxxx document, inserted in Tab. 90. on page 511, which
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
shows the ’ON’ (closed) position of microswitches.

Those setting options that on the table are indicated by the caption For factory use only should
never be modified.
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 508 / 514
514
EXAMPLE
N.B. The P/Ns used in this example have no correspondence with those of the actual equipment part
list!
Taking into account the same unit of Tab. 88. on page 507:
P/N CS P/N ICS
487.156.612 01 3AL 34422 AAAA 01
487.156.612 02 3AL 34422 AAAB 01
487.156.612 03 3AL 34422 AAAC 01
and supposing that the setting options valid for CS=01 are equal to those for CS=02, but change
for CS=03, the table at the beginning of the document 3AL 34422 AAAA MSZZQ will be:
FACTORY P/N ANV P/N

CODICE DI FABBRICA CODICE ANV
CHAPTER
CAPITOLO FROM CS FROM SUFFIX FROM ICS
DA CS DA SUFFISSO DA ICS
1 01 ––AA 01
2 03 ––AC 01
If you have the unit identified by one of this identification data:
P/N CS P/N ICS
487.156.612 01 3AL 34422 AAAA 01
487.156.612 02 3AL 34422 AAAB 01
you will use Chapter 1 of document 3AL 34422 AAAA MSZZQ
If you have the unit identified by one of this identification data:
P/N CS P/N ICS
487.156.612 03 3AL 34422 AAAC 01

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
487.156.612 04 3AL 34422 AAAD 01
you will use Chapter 2 of document 3AL 34422 AAAA MSZZQ
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 509 / 514
514
20.3 List of enclosed documents
20.3.1 Documentation for hardware settings

• Tab. 89. on this page gives the association between a unit and the documents enclosed to be
used for the unit hardware setting.
• Tab. 90. on page 511 lists the documents enclosed to the handbook, sorted according to ANV
P/N.
Information for the use of HW setting documents is given in para.20.2 on page 507.
Tab. 89. Hardware setting documentation cross references
WARNING ABOUT MODEM AND TRANSCEIVER UNITS

Different types of Modem and Transceiver units are listed in this table. Be sure to use
the correct document MSZZQ, according to the unit P/N.
UNIT ANV P/N Documents to use

UNIT NAME (column Id in Tab. 90. on
(Factory P/N) page 511)
COMMON UNITS (listed by P/N)
3DB 02136 AA––

MODEM LH STM1–1WST
(411.200.535 )
[f] + [a]
3DB 02140 AA––

(411.200.536 )
[g] + [a]
3DB 02155 AA–– [h] or [r]

SERVICE
(411.200.539 ) + [a]
[b] or [c]
3DB 02162 AA–– + [i] or [q]+ [a]
SYSTEM CONTROLLER
(411.200.540 )
See also para.3.6.2.2 on
page 142.
3DB 03238 AA––

FANS ASSEMBLED See point c ) on page 173
(411.200.559)
TRANSCEIVERS (listed by frequency)
3,6–4,2 GHZ. TRANSCEIVER 3DB 02524 AA––

128QAM (N.B.: 9640LSY) (411.200.543)
[p] + [j] + [a]

128QAM (N.B.: 9647LSY) (411.200.545)
[p] + [k] + [a]

128QAM (N.B.: 9662LSY) (411.200.518)
[p] + [d] + [a]
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 510 / 514
514
UNIT ANV P/N Documents to use
UNIT NAME (column Id in Tab. 90. on
(Factory P/N) page 511)

[p] + [e] + [a]

128QAM (N.B.: 9667LSY) (411.200.519 )
7,1–7,7 GHZ TRANSCEIVER 3DB 02531 AA––

128QAM (N.B.: 9674LSY) (411.200.547)
[p] + [l] + [a]

128QAM (N.B.: 9681LSY) (411.200.548)
[p] + [m] + [a]

128QAM (N.B.: 9681LSY) (411.200.589)
[p] + [t] + [a]
10.0–10.7 GHZ TRANSCEIVER 3DB 04131 AA––

128QAM (N.B.: 9610LSY) (411.200.588)
[p] + [s] + [a]

128QAM (N.B.: 9611LSY) (411.200.555)
[p] + [o] + [a]

128QAM (N.B.: 9613LSY) (411.200.554)
[p] + [n] + [a]
Tab. 90. List of enclosed hardware setting documents
The edition of the documents (listed in this table) that are physically enclosed in the
handbook is the highest available when this handbook is assembled. The edition of
enclosed documents is not specified in this table.
UNIT ANV P/N

Id UNIT NAME Enclosed Document
(Factory P/N)
Documents listed and enclosed by P/N order
MICROSWITCHES’ ON 3AL 37747 0001

[a] POSITIONS
––
MSZZQ
ESCONX 3AL 79208 AA–– 3AL 79208 AAAA

[b] N.B. older with respect to [c] (487.156.807) MSZZQ
ESCON–WTD 3AL 79208 AB–– 3AL 79208 ABAA

[c] N.B. newer with respect to [b] (487.156.992) MSZZQ
5,9–6,4 GHZ. TRANSCEIVER 3DB 01264 AA–– 3DB 01264 AAAA

[d] 128QAM (N.B.: 9662LSY) (411.200.518) MSZZQ

[e] 128QAM (N.B.: 9667LSY) (411.200.519 ) MSZZQ
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3DB 02134 AA–– 3DB 02134 AAAA

[f] MODEM LH STM1–1WST
(487.210.560 ) MSZZQ
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 511 / 514
514
UNIT ANV P/N
Id UNIT NAME Enclosed Document
(Factory P/N)
3DB 02138 AA–– 3DB 02138 AAAA

[g]

(487.210.561 ) MSZZQ

SMA 3DB 02153 AA–– 3DB 02153 AAAA
[h] N.B. older with respect to [r] (487.210.564 ) MSZZQ
ESC 3DB 02160 AA–– 3DB 02160 AAAA

[i] N.B. older with respect to [q] (487.210.566 ) MSZZQ

[j] 128QAM (N.B.: 9640LSY) (411.200.543) MSZZQ

[k] 128QAM (N.B.: 9647LSY) (411.200.545) MSZZQ
7,1–7,7 GHZ TRANSCEIVER 3DB 02531 AA–– 3DB 02531 AAAA

[l] 128QAM (N.B.: 9674LSY) (411.200.547) MSZZQ

[m] 128QAM (N.B.: 9681LSY) (411.200.548) MSZZQ

[n] 128QAM (N.B.: 9613LSY) (411.200.554) MSZZQ

[o] 128QAM (N.B.: 9611LSY) (411.200.555) MSZZQ
3DB 03329 AA–– 3DB 03329 AAAA

[p] RT CONTROL
(487.210.804 ) MSZZQ
ESC 3DB 03341 AA–– 3DB 03341 AAAA

[q] N.B. newer with respect to [i] (487.210.816 ) MSZZQ
SMA 3DB 03345 AA–– 3DB 03345 AAAA

[r] N.B. newer with respect to [h] (487.210.820 ) MSZZQ

[s] 128QAM (N.B.: 9610LSY) (411.200.588) MSZZQ

[t] 128QAM (N.B.: 9681LSY) (411.200.589) MSZZQ
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 512 / 514
514
20.3.2 Other documents (Annexes)
Tab. 91. herebelow lists other documents enclosed to this handbook. Their use is explained in other parts
of the handbook.
Tab. 91. List of enclosed Annexes
The edition of the documents (listed in this table) that are physically enclosed in the handbook is
the highest available when this handbook is assembled. The edition of enclosed documents is
not specified in this table.
Documents listed and enclosed by System order
REF DOCUMENT P/N CONTENT
[1] 8BW 04007 0003 MSZZQ Branching 9640/47 LSY
[2] 8BW 04007 0004 MSZZQ Branching 9640/47 LSY XPOL
[3] 8BW 04007 0001 MSZZQ Branching 9662/67/74/81 LSY
[4] 8BW 04007 0002 MSZZQ Branching 9662/67/74/81 LSY XPOL
[5] 8BW 04007 0005 MSZZQ Branching 9611/13 LSY (N.B.)
[6] 8BW 04007 0006 MSZZQ Branching 9611/13 LSY XPOL (N.B.)
N.B. These drawings apply also to 9610 LSY.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03
955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 513 / 514
514
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
955.203.292 Q
END OF DOCUMENT
514
3DB 02839 AA AA
514 / 514
UNIT HW PRESETTING – PREDISP.HW UNITA
TABLE OF CONTENTS
HISTORY-LISTA DELLE EDIZIONI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
PREFACE - PREFAZIONE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1 FROM - DA CS= UNMEANINGFUL – NON SIGNIFICATIVO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

1.1 Unit presetting positions-Posizione delle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
01 990126 E.Monzani ITAVE E.Maisano ITAVE

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
MICROSWITCHES
ON POSITION
ED 01
962.000.022 MSZZQ 3AL 37747 0001 MSZZQ 1/ 3
3
HISTORY-LISTA DELLE EDIZIONI
The table present in the ”Table of contents” indicates the first and the two most recent
editions.
La tabella presente nell’indice (”Table of contents”) indica la prima e le due più recenti
edizioni del documento.
PREFACE - PREFAZIONE
See the Technical Handbook for the use of this document and the meaning of CS,
SUFFIX and ICS.
Si rimanda al Manuale Tecnico per l’utilizzo di questo documento ed il significato

di CS, SUFFISSO e ICS.
FACTORY P/N ANV P/N

CHAPTER
1 ––01
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
962.000.022 MSZZQ 3AL 37747 0001 MSZZQ 2/ 3
3
1 FROM - DA CS= UNMEANINGFUL – NON SIGNIFICATIVO
1.1 Unit presetting positions-Posizione delle predisposizioni

FOR INTERNAL USE ONLY-SOLO PER USO INTERNO:

DOCUMENTO REFERENZIATO: ’P/N’ HDZZQ ED.02
FRONT VIEW - VISTA FRONTALE
END OF DOCUMENT-FINE DEL DOCUMENTO

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
962.000.022 MSZZQ 3AL 37747 0001 MSZZQ 3/ 3
3
UNIT HW PRESETTING – PREDISP.HW UNITA
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 FROM - DA CS=01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
01 011016 SC01092804 E.MONZANI ITAVE A.PIROVANO ITAVE

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ESCONX
ED 01
487.156.807 MSZZQ 3AL 79208 AAAA MSZZQ 1/ 4
4
editions.
SUFFIX and ICS.

FACTORY P/N ANV P/N

CHAPTER
1 03 ––AA 03
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
4
1 FROM - DA CS=01



1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
4
1.2 Presetting tables - Tabelle predisposizioni
Vedere Manuale di Operatore della corretta SW Release

Refer to correct SW Release of the operator’s handbook


1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
4
UNIT HW PRESETTING – PREDISP.HW UNITA’
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 FROM - DA CS=01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
01 020404 SC02040401 E.Monzani ITAVE A.Pirovano ITAVE

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ESCON–WTD
ED 01
487.156.992 MSZZQ 3AL 79208 ABAA MSZZQ 1/ 4
4
editions.
SUFFIX and ICS.

FACTORY P/N ANV P/N

CHAPTER
1 01 ––AA 01
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
4
1 FROM - DA CS=01



1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
4

DOCUMENTO REFERENZIATO: vedere Manuale di Operatore della corretta SW Release

Refer to correct SW Release of the operator’s handbook

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
4
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 FROM - DA CS=03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
02 020910 S402090901 E.CORRADINI ITAVE G.MAISTO ITAVE
01 011114 E.CORRADINI ITACO G.MAISTO ITACO

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
5.9–6.4 GHZ
TRANSCEIVER
128 QAM
ED 02
411.200.518 MSZZQ 3DB 01264 AAAA MSZZQ 1/ 6
6
editions.
SUFFIX and ICS.

FACTORY P/N ANV P/N

CHAPTER
1 03 ––AA 03
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
6
1 FROM - DA CS=03

Utilizzare il documento :
Use the document :
3DB 03329 AAAA MSZZQ

(487.210.804)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
6
DOCUMENTO REFERENZIATO: ’P/N’ ECZZQ ED.01
*= FACTORY PRESETTING - Predisposizioni di fabbrica

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
6
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
411.200.518 MSZZQ
6
5/ 6
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
411.200.518 MSZZQ
6

6/ 6
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 FROM - DA CS=03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
6.4–7.1 GHZ
TRANSCEIVER
128 QAM
ED 02
6
editions.
SUFFIX and ICS.

FACTORY P/N ANV P/N

CHAPTER
1 03 ––AA 03
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
6
1 FROM - DA CS=03

Use the document :

(487.210.804)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
6

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
6
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
411.200.519 MSZZQ
6
5/ 6
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
411.200.519 MSZZQ
6

6/ 6
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 FROM - DA CS=03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
7
editions.
SUFFIX and ICS.

FACTORY P/N ANV P/N

CHAPTER
1 03 ––AA 03
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
7
1 FROM - DA CS=03


TC : Ponticelli a goccia di stagno (Ove non specificato, di solo uso interno)

TC : Straps with solder drop (where not stated, factory use only)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
7
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
487.210.560 MSZZQ
REAR SIDE VIEW – VISTA LATO RETRO
7
4/ 7
DOCUMENTO REFERENZIATO: ’P/N’ EJZZQ ED.03
R. S. PONTIC.–SWITCH
Strap–Switch
FUNZIONAMENTO – Operation Schm.
Ref CHIUSI APERTI
Closed Open
SELEZIONE CANC–COMB (CON IF2 PRESENTE) I1–1

CANC–COMB selection ( with IF2 present )
CANC I1–1 X
COMB I1–1 X
COMANDO PORTANTE NON MODULATA I1–2

Unmodulated carrier command
DISABILITAZIONE PORTANTE NON MODULATA * I1–2 X

Unmodulated carrier disable
ABILITAZIONE PORTANTE NON MODULATA I1–2 X

Unmodulated carrier enable
DI USO INTERNO * I1–3 X

Factory use only

Factory use only
POLARIZZAZIONE V O H MODULATORE I2–1

V or H modulator polarization
POLARIZZAZIONE V MODULATORE I2–1 X

V modulator polarization
POLARIZZAZIONE H MODULATORE I2–1 X

H modulator polarization
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
7
Strap–Switch
CHIUSI APERTI
Ref Closed Open

POLARIZZAZIONE V O H DEMODULATORE I2–2

V or H demodulator polarization
POLARIZZAZIONE V DEMODULATORE I2–2 X

V demodulator polarization
POLARIZZAZIONE H DEMODULATORE I2–2 X

H demodulator polarization
DI USO INTERNO
* I2–3 X
Factory use only

Factory use only
DI USO INTERNO * I3 X
Factory use only
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
7
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
487.210.560 MSZZQ
7

7/ 7
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 FROM - DA CS=01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
6
editions.
SUFFIX and ICS.

FACTORY P/N ANV P/N

CHAPTER
1 01 ––AA 01
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
6
1 FROM - DA CS=01



1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
6
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
487.210.561 MSZZQ
6
4/ 6

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
6
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
487.210.561 MSZZQ
6

6/ 6
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 FROM - DA CS=02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
SMA
ED 01
4
editions.
SUFFIX and ICS.

FACTORY P/N ANV P/N

CHAPTER
1 02 ––AA 02
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
4
1 FROM - DA CS=02



1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
4
Strap–Switch
Ref CHIUSI APERTI
Closed Open
DI USO INTERNO I1–1 X
Factory use only
DI USO INTERNO
I1–2 X
Factory use only

Factory use only
DI USO INTERNO
I1–4 X
Factory use only

Factory use only

Factory use only
DI USO INTERNO
I1–7 X
Factory use only

Factory use only
DI USO INTERNO I2
Factory use only
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
4
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 FROM - DA CS=02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ESC
ED 01
7
editions.
SUFFIX and ICS.

FACTORY P/N ANV P/N

CHAPTER
1 02 ––AA 02
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
7
1 FROM - DA CS=02



1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
FRONT SIDE VIEW – VISTA FRONTALE
ED 01
7
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
487.210.566 MSZZQ
7
4/ 7
Strap–Switch
Ref CHIUSI APERTI
Closed Open
PER CONFIGURAZIONI SOFTWARE I1

For Software configuration
DI USO INTERNO I2
Factory use only
DI USO INTERNO I3
Factory use only
PER CONFIGURAZIONI SOFTWARE I4

For Software configuration
I1 / I4 : Per eseguire queste predisposizioni fare riferimento al Manuale d’Operatore.

In order to do these settings, please refer to Operator’s Handbook.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
7
Strap–Switch
CHIUSI APERTI
Ref Closed Open

DI USO INTERNO * TC1 1–2

Factory use only

Factory use only
MEMORIZZAZIONE ALLARMI LOCALE * TC3 1–2

Loca attending of alarms
MEMORIZZAZIONE ALLARMI ESTESO ALLA TESTATA TC3 1–2

DI TELAIO
Alarm attending extended to rack TRU
INTERFACCIA ACCESSO UNITA’ 10 BASE 2
Interface 10 base 2 access unit
FUNZIONE ”HEARTBEAT” INSERITA * TC4 1–2

HEARTBEAT function enabled
FUNZIONE ”HEARTBEAT” DISINSERITA TC4 1–2

HEARTBEAT function disabled
BATTERIA DI SERVIZIO 48V/60V * TC5 1–2

Service battery 48V/60V
BATTERIA DI SERVIZIO 24V TC5 1–2

Service battery 24V
ALLARME TOR ABILITATO * TC6 1–2

TOR Alarm enabled
ALLARME TOR INIBITO TC6 1–2

TOR Alarm disabled
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
7
Strap–Switch
CHIUSI APERTI
Ref Closed Open


Factory use only

Factory use only

Factory use only

Factory use only

Factory use only

Factory use only

Factory use only

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
7
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 FROM - DA CS=01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
3.6–4.2 GHZ
TRANSCEIVER
128 QAM
ED 02
6
editions.
SUFFIX and ICS.

FACTORY P/N ANV P/N

CHAPTER
1 01 ––AA 01
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
6
1 FROM - DA CS=01

Use the document :

(487.210.804)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
6

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
6
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
411.200.543 MSZZQ
6
5/ 6
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
411.200.543 MSZZQ
6

6/ 6
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 FROM - DA CS=01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
4,4–5,0 GHZ
TRANSCEIVER
128 QAM
ED 01
6
editions.
SUFFIX and ICS.

FACTORY P/N ANV P/N

CHAPTER
1 01 ––AA 01
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
6
1 FROM - DA CS=01

Use the document :

(487.210.804)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
6

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
6
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
411.200.545 MSZZQ
6
5/ 6
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
411.200.545 MSZZQ
6

6/ 6
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 FROM - DA CS=01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
7.1–7.7 GHZ
TRANSCEIVER
128 QAM
ED 02
6
editions.
SUFFIX and ICS.

FACTORY P/N ANV P/N

CHAPTER
1 01 ––AA 01
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
6
1 FROM - DA CS=01

Use the document :

(487.210.804)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
6

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
6
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
411.200.547 MSZZQ
6
5/ 6
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
411.200.547 MSZZQ
6

6/ 6
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 FROM - DA CS=02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
7.7–8.3 GHZ
TRANSCEIVER
128 QAM
ED 02
6
editions.
SUFFIX and ICS.

FACTORY P/N ANV P/N

CHAPTER
1 02 ––AA 02
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
6
1 FROM - DA CS=02

Use the document :

(487.210.804)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
6

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 02
6
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
411.200.548 MSZZQ
6
5/ 6
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
02
411.200.548 MSZZQ
6

6/ 6
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 FROM - DA CS=02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
12,7–13,2 GHZ
TRANSCEIVER
128 QAM
ED 01
6
editions.
SUFFIX and ICS.

FACTORY P/N ANV P/N

CHAPTER
1 02 ––AA 02
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
6
1 FROM - DA CS=02

Use the document :

(487.210.804)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
6

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
6
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
411.200.554 MSZZQ
6
5/ 6
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
411.200.554 MSZZQ
6

6/ 6
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 FROM - DA CS=02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
10,7–11,7 GHZ
TRANSCEIVER
128 QAM
ED 01
6
editions.
SUFFIX and ICS.

FACTORY P/N ANV P/N

CHAPTER
1 02 ––AA 02
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
6
1 FROM - DA CS=02

Use the document :

(487.210.804)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
6

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
6
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
411.200.555 MSZZQ
6
5/ 6
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
411.200.555 MSZZQ
6

6/ 6
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 FROM - DA CS=03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
RT CONTROL
ED 01
4
editions.
SUFFIX and ICS.

FACTORY P/N ANV P/N

CHAPTER
1 03 ––AA 03
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
4
1 FROM - DA CS=03



1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
4
For the dip–switch “I2–I3–I5” meaning, use the specific Tranceiver’s MSZZQ document.
Per il significato dei dip–switch “I2–I3–I5” utilizzare il documento MSZZQ dello specifico
Ricetrasmettitore.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
4
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 FROM - DA CS=01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ESC
ED 01
6
editions.
SUFFIX and ICS.

FACTORY P/N ANV P/N

CHAPTER
1 01 ––AA 01
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
6
1 FROM - DA CS=01



1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
FRONT SIDE VIEW – VISTA FRONTALE
ED 01
6
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
487.210.816 MSZZQ
6
4/ 6
I1 / I4 : Per eseguire queste predisposizioni fare riferimento al Manuale d’Operatore.

In order to do these settings, please refer to Operator’s Handbook.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
6
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
487.210.816 MSZZQ
6

6/ 6
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 FROM - DA CS=01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
01 020708 S402070901 E.CORRADINI ITACO G.MAISTO ITACO

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
SMA
ED 01
4
editions.
SUFFIX and ICS.

FACTORY P/N ANV P/N

CHAPTER
1 01 ––AA 01
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
4
1 FROM - DA CS=01



1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
4
Strap–Switch
Ref CHIUSI APERTI
Closed Open
Factory use only
DI USO INTERNO
I1–2 X
Factory use only

Factory use only
DI USO INTERNO
I1–4 X
Factory use only

Factory use only

Factory use only
DI USO INTERNO
I1–7 X
Factory use only

Factory use only
DI USO INTERNO I2
Factory use only
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
4
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 FROM - DA CS=01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
10,0–10,7 GHZ
TRANSCEIVER
128 QAM
ED 01
6
editions.
SUFFIX and ICS.

FACTORY P/N ANV P/N

CHAPTER
1 01 ––AA 01
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
6
1 FROM - DA CS=01

Use the document :

(487.210.804)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
6

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
6
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
411.200.588 MSZZQ
6
5/ 6
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
411.200.588 MSZZQ
6

6/ 6
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 FROM - DA CS=01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
8,2–8,5 GHZ
TRANSCEIVER
128 QAM
ED 01
6
editions.
SUFFIX and ICS.

FACTORY P/N ANV P/N

CHAPTER
1 01 ––AA 01
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
6
1 FROM - DA CS=01

Use the document :

(487.210.804)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
6

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 01
6
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
411.200.589 MSZZQ
6
5/ 6
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
01
411.200.589 MSZZQ
6

6/ 6
Technical Handbook
Alcatel 9600LSY
STM–1/0 Long Haul Digital Radio Relay System
9600LSY Rel.1.0 & 2.0
LHR version
955.203.292 Q Ed.03 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.03

Documentation set for 9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0
ANV P/N
Handbook
Factory P/N
3DB 02839 AAAA this
9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0 Technical Handbook
955.203.292 Q Handbook
3DB 02840 AAAA
9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0 Installation Handbook
955.203.302 S
3DB 02841 AAAA
9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0 Line–up Guide
955.203.312 K
3DB 04165 EAAA
Interference investigation procedure
955.203.374 Z
3DB 02838 AAAA
9600LSY Rel.1.0 CT Operator’s Handbook SWP 1.0 in alternative
957.207.022 A
(according to
3DB 02838 BAAA
9600LSY Rel.2.0 CT Operator’s Handbook SWP 2.0 used SWP)
957.207.023 B
3AL 79186 AAAA
1320CT Version 1.3.x Basic Operator’s Handbook
957.130.542 E
3AL 71079 AAAA
1330AS Rel.5.0 Operator’s Handbook
957.130.442 A
3AL 71081 AAAA
ELM Rel.5.0 Operator’s Handbook
957.130.462 E
When supplied on paper, this handbook and the annexed documents are divided by registers, for an easier
access to the information herein contained:
CONTENTS REGISTER
TABLE OF CONTENTS
HANDBOOK GUIDE 1
DESCRIPTIONS 2
HANDBOOK MAINTENANCE 3
FREQUENCY PLANS & PART NUMBERS 4
APPENDICES 5
HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION & ANNEXES 6
HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTS (MSZZQ) 7
Branching 9640/47 LSY 8
Branching 9640/47 LSY XPOL 9
ENCLOSED
DOCUMENTS
Branching 9662/67/74/81 LSY 10
Branching 9662/67/74/81 LSY XPOL 11
Branching 9610/11/13 LSY 12
Branching 9610/11/13 LSY XPOL 13
955.203.292 Q Ed.03 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.03

QUESTA PAGINA NON VA INSERITA NEL MANUALE
THIS PAGE MUST NOT BE INCLUDED IN THE HANDBOOK
COD.MANUALE HDBK P/N: 955.203.292 Q Ed.03 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.03

9600LSY Rel.1.0 & 2.0
LHR version
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
ORIGINALE INTERLEAF: FILE ARCHIVIAZIONE: cod ANV (PD1-PD2)
– No PAGINE TOTALI PER ARCHIVIAZIONE: 516+6
– DIMENSIONE BINDER SORGENTE (du –ks): 164.634 kbyte
INFORMAZIONI PER IL CENTRO STAMPA - ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

– COMPOSIZIONE ED ASSIEMAGGIO DEL MANUALE:
HANDBOOK COMPOSITION AND ASSEMBLY:
SERVONO 13 SEPARATORI NUMERATI DA 1 A 13

13 REGISTERS NUMBERED FROM 1 TO 13 ARE NECESSARY
– STAMPARE FRONTE/RETRO RECTO-VERSO PRINTING
No pagine numerate
fase
(facciate) numbered
step
No pages da from a to
1 TARGHETTE - LABELS
2 FRONTESPIZIO - FRONT 2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
3 1/514 14/514
4 INSERIRE SEPARATORE ’1’ - INSERT REGISTER ’1’
5 HANDBOOK GUIDE 15/514 36/514
7 DESCRIPTIONS 37/514 352/514
9 MAINTENANCE 353/514 410/514
11 FREQUENCY PLANS & PART NUMBERS 411/514 462/514

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
13 APPENDICES 463/514 504/514
CONTINUA – CONTINUES
ED 03 RELEASED
955.203.292 TQZZA 3DB 02839 AAAA TQZZA Y 1/ 6
6

No pagine numerate
fase
(facciate) numbered
step
No pages da from a to
HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION &

15 505/514 514/514
ANNEXES
TOTALE PAGINE A4 (FACCIATE) TOTAL A4 PAGES: 516
TOTALE FOGLI A4 TOTAL A4 SHEETS: 258
– STAMPARE SOLO FRONTE RECTO PRINTING
fase COD. DOCUMENTO

step document code

17 INSERIRE DOCUMENTO – INSERT DOCUMENT 3AL 37747 0001 MSZZQ
18 INSERIRE DOCUMENTO – INSERT DOCUMENT 3AL 79208 AAAA MSZZQ
19 INSERIRE DOCUMENTO – INSERT DOCUMENT 3AL 79208 ABAA MSZZQ
20 INSERIRE DOCUMENTO – INSERT DOCUMENT 3DB 01264 AAAA MSZZQ
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10

ED 03 RELEASED
6
fase COD. DOCUMENTO

step document code
INSERIRE DOCUMENTO – INSERT DOCUMENT

38 8BW 04007 0003 MSZZQ
Branching 9640/47 LSY

40 8BW 04007 0004 MSZZQ
Branching 9640/47 LSY XPOL

42 8BW 04007 0001 MSZZQ
Branching 9662/67/74/81 LSY

44 8BW 04007 0002 MSZZQ
Branching 9662/67/74/81 LSY XPOL

46 8BW 04007 0005 MSZZQ
Branching 9611/13 LSY

48 8BW 04007 0006 MSZZQ
Branching 9611/13 LSY XPOL
FINE ISTRUZIONI ASSEMBLAGGIO – END OF ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING FOR A-UNITS OTHER THAN A-ITALY
• Labels are done according to A-Italy binder format.
• Handbook source file: ALICE 6.10 ARCHIVED BY GAPI 3.9.1 + PDF
• The documents MSZZQ are archived in PDAS individually (ALICE 6.10 ARCHIVED BY GAPI
3.9.1 + PDF); get the highest edition. The pdf files can be directly retrieved from intranet WTD
web site.
• PDF file retrieved from PD1 must be opened with ACROBAT Reader Version 4.0 at least.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03 RELEASED
6

Site
VIMERCATE WTD
Originators 9600LSY REL.1.0/2.0

E.CORRADINI
F.BUTORI LHR
G.MAISTO
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
Domain :
Division :
Rubric :
Type : 9600LSY/LHR REL.1.0/2.0 TECHNICAL HDBK
Distribution Codes Internal : External :
Approvals
Name G.CONSONNI A.PANZERI R.DIAZZI, A.BESTETTI

App.
Name M.IDI, E.PARISI R.PELLIZZONI

App.
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AAAA
Ed.03
9600LSY Rel.1.0 & 2.0
STM 1/0 Long Haul Digital Radio Relay System
LHR version
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03 RELEASED
6
9600LSY Rel.1.0 & 2.0
LHR version
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
955.203.292 Q Ed.03 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.03
VOL.1/1
9600LSY Rel.1.0 & 2.0

LHR version
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
955.203.292 Q Ed.03 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.03
VOL.1/1
9600LSY Rel.1.0 & 2.0
LHR version
955.203.292 Q Ed.03 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.03 TECHNICAL HANDBOOK VOL.1/1
9600LSY Rel.1.0 & 2.0

STM 1/0 Long Haul Digital Radio Relay System LHR version
9600LSY Rel.1.0 & 2.0

LHR version

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED 03 RELEASED
6
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 – ALICE 04.10
ED
03
RELEASED
955.203.292 TQZZA
6
3DB 02839 AAAA TQZZA
Y
FINE DEL DOCUMENTO INTERNO – END OF INTERNAL DOCUMENT
6/ 6
NOTES ON NAVIGATION AND PRINTING
NAVIGATION
THIS FILE CONTAINS SEVERAL DOCUMENTS (THE HANDBOOK AND THE UNIT PRESETTING
DOCUMENTS)
PAGE NUMBERING RESTARTS FROM 1 AT THE BEGINNING OF EACH DOCUMENT.
CROSS REFERENCES (ex. “see Figure 3 on page 45”) ARE ALWAYS INSIDE THE DOCUMENT
WHERE YOU ARE, AND ARE REFERRED TO THE DOCUMENT PAGES (NOT TO THE PDF FILE
PAGE NUMBERING).
PRINTING
BESIDES TAKING INTO ACCOUNT THE STATEMENTS GIVEN IN “NAVIGATION”, TAKE INTO
ACCOUNT THAT:
– PDF FILE PAGES 1 TO 514 ARE FORMATTED FOR RECTO/VERSO PRINTING.
– PDF FILE PAGES 515 TO 624 ARE FORMATTED FOR RECTO PRINTING
– PDF FILE PAGES 625 TO 634 ARE FORMATTED FOR RECTO/VERSO PRINTING (PAGE
633/634 IS THIS PAGE).
– IN ORDER TO PRINT A SELECTED PART OF THE HANDBOOK:
• GO ON THE FIRST PAGE TO PRINT AND TAKE NOTICE OF THE PDF FILE PAGE
NUMBER
• GO ON THE LAST PAGE TO PRINT AND TAKE NOTICE OF THE PDF FILE PAGE
NUMBER
• THESE TWO NUMBERS ARE THE “RANGE” TO BE SPECIFIED FOR PRINTING.
BRANCHING DRAWINGS
THE DOCUMENTS CONTAINING BRANCHING DRAWINGS (REFERRED TO IN THE
’HANDBOOK ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS’ ) ARE NOT INCLUDED IN THIS PDF FILE (FOR
THEIR SIZE). THEY ARE INDIVIDUALLY PRESENT AS PDF FILES IN THE SAME DIRECTORY
OF THIS WEB SITE.
END OF FILE
Click on ’HANDBOOK FILE’ in the Bookmarks area

to open the handbook

Technical PDF

Cargado por

Información del documento

Título original

Derechos de autor

Formatos disponibles

Compartir este documento

Compartir o incrustar documentos

Opciones para compartir

¿Le pareció útil este documento?

¿Este contenido es inapropiado?

Copyright:

Formatos disponibles

Technical PDF

Cargado por

Copyright:

Formatos disponibles

9600LSY/LHR REL.1.0/2.

LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

SAFETY–EMC–ESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

03 020927 S402092301 G.CONSONNI ITAVE E.CORRADINI ITAVE

01 011115 validated G.CONSONNI ITACO E.CORRADINI ITACO

955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 1 / 514

2.4.3 Transceiver subrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

2.4.4 Baseband subrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

3 PHYSICAL CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

3.6.3 SERVICE and ADDITIONAL VOICE unit operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 2 / 514

3.7 Transceiver shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

3.7.1 Transceiver shelf unit layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

4 SYSTEM CABLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

5 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

5.4.1 Interconnection general block diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 3 / 514

5.5.1 Interconnection general block diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302

5.5.2 DC/DC converter module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

6 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

7.3.2 System and Maintenance Tool Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 4 / 514

7.5 Set of spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370

7.5.1 Suggested Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370

FREQUENCY PLANS & PART NUMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411

955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 5 / 514

18 DOCUMENTATION GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465

19 SAFETY–EMC–ESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483

HARDWARE SETTING DOCUMENTATION & ANNEXES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505

955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 6 / 514

Fig. 2. Ring clousure and radio spurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

Fig. 45. General Multiplexing Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 7 / 514

Fig. 52. SSM Algorithm Flow Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Fig. 53. DCC management: Regenerator case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Fig. 94. Top Rack Unit connector numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 8 / 514

Fig. 102. System cabling: types of used cables (Q, R) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Fig. 103. System cabling: types of used cables (S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 9 / 514

Fig. 155. Input/output command signals of the Switch logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Fig. 156. Functional block diagram of Transceiver without Rx Diversity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

Fig. 197. Transceiver internal connectors for repair 2/6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404

955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 10 / 514

Tab. 11. RFCOH byte structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 11 / 514

Tab. 18. Service card equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Tab. 19. RRA–CHANNEL and RRA–STANDBY cards equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Tab. 60. LSY Maintenance Tool Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 12 / 514

Tab. 68. 9640LSY Transceiver Part List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415

955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 13 / 514

SAFETY–EMC–ESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING

not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

2) Access to the Equipment

e) Service Personnel skill

955.203.292 Q 3DB 02839 AA AA 16 / 514

Tab. 1. Quick guide

– BaseBand and Transceiver shelves as a whole, read

– units in OPTINEX rack and ADM shelf, refer to

in this handbook, for:

– common parts (frequency independent), read para.3.2